JP7395966B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, a jackpot lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, and if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed. There is something. Further, in some jackpot drawings, a drawing is held not only to determine whether it is a big hit or a miss, but also to determine whether or not it is a small win. Here, a small win is a win different from a jackpot, and if the lottery result is a small win, a small win game is executed, and after the execution of a small win game, the game state (probability change) before the small win game is executed. The gaming state and time-saving gaming state) are maintained. In a game where the lottery result of a jackpot lottery includes small wins in addition to jackpots, there is a gaming machine that increases the number of balls put out by a series of small wins in a game state where the probability changes between jackpot games.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-038790

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the attention to the game and the interest in the game to increase the player's desire to play.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase attention to the game and interest in the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a first channel (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first profit;
a second channel (78) through which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second profit;
a third channel (76) through which a game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
A game ball is allowed to flow down the third channel (76) in a non-operating state, and a game ball is allowed to flow down the first channel (77) or the second channel (78) based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. an actuating member (84) that is in an actuated state to cause the
Equipped with
The first flow path (77) is set to be the highest, the second flow path (78) is set to be lower than the first flow path (77), and the third flow path (76) is set to have the highest profit for the player. ) is set lower than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78).

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening/closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, the clown device, and a game ball retention part. A perspective view of the Cloon device. 7 is a sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6. FIG. A 7-segment display section displays specific information indicating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball opening of the croon device, and a non-set value. A diagram for explaining a prescribed period. 10(A) is a sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C) are sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section, and FIG. 11(C) 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of how alphabets are displayed on a 7-segment display section. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of the main controller. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a performance information display device of a main controller. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a performance display monitor of a performance information display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a setting value display section of the performance information display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start-up winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 21. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variable game control process of FIG. 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed in the fluctuation game control process of FIG. 24. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for setting value changing processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28; 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table and variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of controlling a segment display section and an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of a 7-segment display section. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ending added image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40; A diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending performance of a jackpot game. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ending added image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51; FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation status. The figure which shows the screen transition example in the pattern display part in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62; FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of turning on and off a lamp display section. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device. The figure which shows the screen transition example in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen in the ending production of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing main parts of the game board shown in FIG. 72. FIG. 73 is a perspective view showing the clone device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 72; 74 is a sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 72 taken along a portion corresponding to the X4-X4 cutting line in FIG. 74. 73 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 72. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of sensor detection processing in main timer interrupt processing executed by the main controller. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 78. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the condition device activation process executed in the main process of FIG. 78; 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 81; 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game explanation production process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 81. The figure which shows the example of a display screen in the symbol display part in game explanation performance. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game explanation production process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 81. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 81; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a game type determination table and an initial point determination table used by the audio lamp control device. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 81; 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion production process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 90(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion production process according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 90(B) shows an example of the compensation point determination table used by the audio lamp control device. figure. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 92(A) is a diagram showing essential parts of the game board shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92(B) is a perspective view of a rotating body provided on the game board. A diagram for explaining the function of a rotating body. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 94; 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the rotating body operation control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 94; FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing main parts of the game board shown in FIG. 97 for explaining the function of the distribution member. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 99; 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 99; 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 99. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 99. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 99. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board for explaining a modification of the game board of the game machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a clone device provided on the game board shown in FIG. 106. 108(A) is a sectional view taken along the line X5-X5 in FIG. 107, and FIG. 108(B) is a sectional view taken along the line X6-X6 in FIG. 107. FIG. 109(A) is a partially cutaway view for explaining the second variable winning opening, and FIG. 109(B) is a sectional view taken along the X7-X7 cutting line in FIG. 109(A). FIG. 110(A) is a partially cutaway view for explaining the second variable winning opening, and FIG. 110(B) is a sectional view taken along the X8-X8 cutting line in FIG. 110(A). FIG. 111(A) is a diagram showing the number of balls paid out from each winning opening, and FIG. 111(B) is a diagram showing the maximum open time and maximum number of balls entered for each variable winning opening. A diagram for explaining the game flow. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 115. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 115. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. 123 is an enlarged view of main parts of the game board shown in FIG. 122. 124(A) is an enlarged view of the main part of the game board shown in FIG. 122, and FIGS. 124(B) and 124(C) are sectional views of the sorting device provided in the game board shown in FIG. 122. FIG. 123 is an enlarged view of the main parts of the game board shown in FIG. 122. 123 is an enlarged view of main parts of the game board shown in FIG. 122. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in the main process of FIG. 127. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of flow path defining member control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 127. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of flow path defining member control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 127. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of flow path defining member control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 127.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but other games such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball game machine, and a play ball game machine can also be used. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having its left end rotatably supported by the outer frame 14 . Moreover, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined operation reception period in a variable game performance that is executed in a variable game that clearly shows the lottery result of a jackpot lottery to the player. These buttons are operated to perform operations such as presentations.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more.

Furthermore, instead of the operation button 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player. Further, the operation button 20 may include a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 in the variable game presentation will be reflected in the operation button presentation and the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is played by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls put out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball to the game ball firing mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls in the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs audio. Note that the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp or an LED, and performs a lamp effect depending on the lighting color and blinking mode such as lighting or turning off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having its left end rotatably supported by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball firing mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Note that, in FIG. 2, the description on the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a clone device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, or the variable winning hole 316 are discharged from the out hole 318. be done.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front and back direction. ing. And, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls corresponding to the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the gaming board 31, so that the out ball sensor 318a (described later) (See FIG. 12). Further, the variable prize opening 316 is provided at the center right side of the game board 31, and a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter therein. The game ball that has passed through the penetration part 316b of the variable prize opening 316 is guided to the croon device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has an entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gate 317. On the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 will pass through the through gate 317, and when the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317 is detected, the second winning hole is opened. A normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to release 315.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331. The detection results of the ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command to make the payout control device 7 pay out game balls according to the detection results from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the ball entering the game ball by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. Moreover, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result by the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here matches the number of fired game balls fired onto the game board 31 by the game ball firing mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) recognizes that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, which will be described later. The special out ball detection command shown in FIG. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls using other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

Further, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electric role) 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the electric accessory 315b opens, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315, and when the electric accessory 315b closes, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315. Balls are limited.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened/closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening/closing door 319 opens, the game ball can enter the variable winning hole 316, and when the opening/closing door 319 closes, the game ball entering the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. Ru. In addition, the opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable prize opening 316 is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is kept on standby at a position where the variable winning opening 316 is closed at other times. As a result, the game ball 99 that has been launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the round game of the jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 includes a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment parts 319d for rotatably attaching the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. . Thereby, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a, and prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling off the left and right sides of the base 319a. Further, the pair of guides 319c guide the game balls 99 received by the base 319a to the variable prize opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable prize opening 316, and form a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. Further, the variable prize opening 316 has a penetration part 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. This penetrating portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enters the variable prize opening 316 and is guided to the croon device 37 via the penetration part 316b and the guide path 316c. Note that the guideway 316c is provided with a ball entry sensor 316a. Thereby, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning a prize opening 316 is detected when it passes through the penetration part 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning hole 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display section 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery results from the main control unit 331 are transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display on the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery results.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, if the ball enters the general winning hole 313, the number of prize balls is 10, if the ball enters the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315, the number of prize balls is three, and if the ball enters the variable prize hole 316, the number of prize balls is 3. In this case, the number of prize balls is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game enters a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable prize opening 316 is opened for round gaming (unit gaming). ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning hole 316. This is a gaming state including an opening/closing execution mode. The 16R guaranteed variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an opening/closing execution mode in which round games (unit games) are played 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as a liquid crystal display, arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. The symbol display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the symbol display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable display of decorative symbols according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315. , and various image effects such as a variable game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display effect. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display, and an organic EL display.

For example, the fluctuating display effect of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc. It will be done. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the variable display of decorative symbols is executed so that the variation of all decorative symbols stops after a preset variable display time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341. be done. More specifically, in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, all the decorative symbols first fluctuate along a preset fluctuation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and then the fluctuations of the plural decorative symbols stop in sequence. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative symbols ends.

When the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative pattern clearly indicates or suggests the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "16R sure strange jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot", decorative symbols of the same type will be displayed lined up on the active line, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. Further, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the active line, but it is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed variable jackpot", the symbol combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot among the decorative symbols, is lined up on the active line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than "777" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", a state in which the symbol combinations such as "333", which have been set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot among the decorative symbols, are lined up on the active line is displayed. Or, a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than symbol combinations indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", among the decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols that are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating normal jackpots, such as "222" and "444", indicating variable probability jackpots are selected. A state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols are lined up on the active line is displayed. Further, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the active line (for example, "323" or "723", etc.) is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable display of decorative symbols in the variable game, as well as a variable game performance that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In addition, if the lottery result is "16R sure-change jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative pattern combination indicating a 16R probability-change jackpot is displayed lined up on the active line, a 5R probability-change jackpot will be issued as a variable game effect. Or, a suggestive effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the combination of decorative symbols indicating a probability jackpot is displayed on the active line, a 5R regular jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestive effect suggesting that is the case is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance etc. that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

Further, in the symbol display section 341, when the gaming state shifts to a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot game performance including an opening performance, an opening/closing execution mode performance, and an ending performance is displayed.

It is also conceivable that the game board 31 is provided with a magnetic sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 and the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, if an attempt is made to fraudulently guide game balls to the first prize opening 314 or the variable prize opening 316 using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act in the event that an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the ball entering sensors 314a, 315a causes false detection of the entering of a game ball. Note that the radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the clone device 37 sends the game ball entered into the variable winning hole 316 to either a normal out ball hole 378 or a special out ball hole 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8), which will be described later. It is something to be sorted out. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening/closing door 319, the clown device 37, and the game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the clown device 37, and FIG. 8 is a diagram of FIG. FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the croon device 37 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. As shown in FIGS. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view, and includes a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-down inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined downward to the right. A special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball opening 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. This special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the center of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed into a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Further, a first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guiding member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 of the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention part 38.

Note that the first guiding member 375 may have a function of retaining game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining portion 38. By the way, in this embodiment, the number (specific information) corresponding to the non-setting value, which is the gaming setting value other than the setting value, which is the gaming setting value set in the gaming machine 10, is changed in a predetermined period (see FIG. 9). Based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period), it is presented on the 7-segment display section 39. In this embodiment, since the number of segments in the 7-segment display section 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-setting value can be reliably identified using 7 pieces of information. Furthermore, since the game setting values are in six levels from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-setting values, and therefore all the non-setting values can be identified using 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (a specified number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured to be able to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99 during a specific period (see FIG. 9), which will be described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various components of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99. In this case, by providing the first guiding member 375 with a function of storing game balls 99, the first guiding member 375 can be used to retain a number of game balls 99 that would be difficult to use with the game ball retaining section 38 alone. be able to. This makes it possible to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99 in a specific period, and information necessary to identify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game balls 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, due to the arrangement of various members, it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 not only in the game ball retention section 38 but also by providing the first guide member 375 with the function of retaining game balls 99. In such a case, by using the special out ball passage 374, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99. As a result, it becomes possible to have more than a specified number of game balls 99 stay in a specific period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all non-set values may be presented.

On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that are allowed to stay in a specific period. For example, it is possible to set the limit number to the specified number (make the limit number match the specified number). In this case, for example, if the number of information (individual information of specific information) corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is presented, all non-set values are displayed in one specific period. Information to identify the person may be presented. In addition, when information is presented about the number of game balls 99 that meet a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball opening 373, for example, the number corresponding to the number of winnings in the lottery, Since the expected number of information is presented according to the probability, and this expected number of information is basically smaller than the specified number, there is a possibility that not all of the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the jackpot probability is low) Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 in progress.

In addition, as a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention part 38, the first guiding member 375, and the special out ball passage 374 is adopted. However, when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, by positioning the game balls 99 near the special out ball opening 373 (by causing a ball jam), a special It is conceivable to restrict the entry of game balls 99 into out ball passage 374. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period with a simple mechanical configuration without requiring any complicated configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that slopes downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right side (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 is no longer expected to enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (special The ball is handled as an out ball at the time when it is detected by the out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out ball opening 378 is provided in the lower bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that entered through the normal out ball opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373. is formed. Further, a second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. This second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31, as well as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out balls.

The game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above is guided to such a clown device 37 by a guide path 316c. The game ball 99 guided by the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 in the clone device 37 is delayed. Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 are usually out of the ball mouth due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy or colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the croon device 37 or other game balls 99. Enter the pitch at 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball opening 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, a part of the game ball moving on the bottom wall 371 changes its moving direction due to collision with the periphery of the normal out ball opening 378 or with another game ball, and enters the special out ball opening 373. do. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is released toward the game ball retention section 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. . In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 per 10R round game is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of ball landing or the expected number of balls hitting in such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the set value early, but it is also possible to realistically specify the set value. It becomes possible. This prevents the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the setting value is specified early, such as when the setting value is low, and prevents the gaming machine from feeling bored due to the inability to specify the setting value. It becomes possible to prevent the game at No. 10 from being ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special out ball opening 373 is provided at the high bottom part 371a of the bottom wall 371, and since the normal out ball opening 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373, the special out ball opening 373 The game ball 99 is made much more difficult to enter than the normal out ball opening 378, but instead of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball 99 can be inserted into the special out ball opening 373 by other means. It is also possible to make it difficult for 99 to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibiting means around the special out ball opening 373 to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the special out ball opening 373. Examples of the obstructing means include obstacles that prevent the ball from entering the special out ball opening 373, such as a wall surrounding the special out ball opening 373, magnetic force or electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the periphery of the special out ball opening 373, etc. Possible means include means for generating force, and means for forming an air curtain by jetting air around the special out ball opening 373.

Further, an opening/closing part for opening and closing the special out ball opening 373 may be provided, and this opening/closing part may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out ball opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball opening 378, and the normal out ball opening 378 may be formed to have the same or approximately the same opening area as the special out ball opening 373. Good too.

In addition, the distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 entered into the variable winning hole 316 into the normal out ball hole 378 and the special out ball hole 373 is not limited to the croon device 37, but may be other means. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve or a rotating member, or a nail driven into the game board 31, the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 may be distributed. .

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention section 38 receives the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and retains the game balls 99 until a specific period has elapsed. It is. Then, after a specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and 7 segments are displayed according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 until the predetermined period has elapsed. A number is displayed on the segment display section 39. Here, FIG. 9 shows a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball opening of the Cloon device, and specific information indicating a non-set value. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a prescribed period displayed on a 7-segment display section.

In the following, with reference to FIG. 9, the specific period is assumed to be the period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the predetermined period is defined as the period in which the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 are stored. As a period for cumulatively counting the number, the "specified period" is defined as all or all of the numbers (specific information) indicating a non-set value based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a specific period. Although a part will be explained as a period for displaying on the 7-segment display section 39, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "predetermined period" is referred to as the period for which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38. It is not limited to the period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the 37 special out ball openings 373 is cumulatively counted. That is, the "specific period", "predetermined period", and "regular period" include at least the period described below.

As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), during the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining section 38, the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game starts after the jackpot game (opening) is started. This is the period until the end (the ending starts), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period. That is, the beginning of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends (the ending starts). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), if you win a regular jackpot in the low probability mode (if your first win is a regular jackpot or a one-shot jackpot), during a specific period, when the jackpot game has started, This is the period from when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends. In addition, as shown in Figure 9 (B), if you win a regular jackpot in low probability mode (when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot and a series of jackpots starts), if you win a normal jackpot in high probability mode. For all jackpot games that are executed until the jackpot series ends due to the normal jackpot game, the period from the start of each jackpot game until the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends is specified. Set as a period. That is, in a jackpot series, a plurality of specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games to be executed during the jackpot series.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or winning timing, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Cloon device 37 during the specific period of one jackpot game, as described below, is 7. Segments A to G of the segment display section 39 are subject to lighting/extinguishing control during the ending of the jackpot game, which is a specified period. In other words, the prescribed period is based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during the specified period, and the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. This is set as the period during which the 7-segment display section 39 displays a number indicating a game setting value (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the game setting value (setting value).

If the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, the jackpot lottery set for the gaming machine 10 will be The display order in which the numbers specifying the game setting values (multiple non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability that the lottery result will be a jackpot is set in the display order setting process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. Accordingly, one segment is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending (regular period) after a specific period has elapsed in the jackpot game. In addition, at the ending after a specific period (regular period) in a jackpot game, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 on the 7-segment display section 39. If the number is 21 or more and less than 20, two numbers identifying multiple non-setting values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and if the number is 21 or more and less than 28, identifying multiple non-setting values. three numbers are displayed in an order according to the display order, and if the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying a plurality of non-setting values are displayed in an order according to the display order, If the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-setting values are displayed in an order according to the display order. In addition, if the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 during the specified period of one jackpot game is less than 7, then 7 at the ending (specified period) after the specified period in the jackpot game. The segment display section 39 does not display any numbers identifying the plurality of non-setting values.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is executed, the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, 1 to 5 numbers specifying a plurality of non-setting values may be displayed, and the setting value can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the five non-setting values. For example, when the number 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 1 is a non-set value, and when the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 1 is a non-set value. It can be specified that 2 is a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so it can be specified that the game setting value 3 is a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. When the number 4 is displayed, it can be specified that the game setting value 4 is a non-setting value, and when the number 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 5 is a non-setting value. By displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 6 is a non-setting value. In addition, since five numbers 2 to 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be identified that the non-set value is the game setting value 2 to 6, so it is understood that the set value is the game setting value 1. can. Similarly, by displaying five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7 segment display section 39, it can be understood that the setting value is game setting value 2, and 1, 2, 4 to 6 are displayed on the 7 segment display section 39. You can understand that the setting value is game setting value 3 by displaying the five numbers , and when five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the setting value is game setting value 3. It can be understood that the setting value is 4, and five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so it can be understood that the setting value is the game setting value 5, and the 7-segment display section 39 shows 1. By displaying five numbers from 5 to 5, it can be understood that the setting value is game setting value 6.

Furthermore, it is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become the control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, segment A, which is the first target to be controlled, is turned off. The number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. Furthermore, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." Then, when segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is "5" or "3". 6". Further, when the third control target, segment C, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. Further, when the fifth control target, segment E, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off. It can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G on the 7-segment display section 39 become control targets, all segments A to G are controlled. Control for displaying the next priority number will not start unless it becomes a target. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, it is easier to identify all non-set values than when control to display the next priority number is started at the stage when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values can be grasped. A number of specific conditions must be met. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty until all non-set values are identified, and by extension, the difficulty in recognizing the set values, thereby preventing the set values from being recognized in a short gaming time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped by the player in a short time, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the playing time on the gaming machine 10, It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating rate.

In addition, if a number indicating a non-set value is recognized before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 become control targets, control for displaying the next priority number is started. You can also do this. For example, when the priority order of numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" →..., segment F, which is the sixth in the control order for the number "1", is set as the control target. When it is recognized that the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is "1", the number "1", which is the next priority, is not set as the control target for segment G, which is the seventh in the control order. 2" may be started. By the way, when segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G become control targets, before all segments A to G become control targets, Even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized, the control of segments A to G to display the next number to be displayed is only possible after all segments A to G have become control targets. is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become control targets, the display of the next number to be displayed will start. Information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 to identify the numbers already recognized by the player. In other words, when segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven segment display section 39. There is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during a period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. On the other hand, if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 become control targets, control for displaying the next priority number is not possible. If this is started, segments A to G, which do not contribute to estimation of one non-set value, will not become control targets after one non-set value has been made specifiable. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to unnecessary control of segments A to G.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 starts from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode and the opening/closing execution mode for the normal jackpot. This is until the end. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode starts, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends (the ending of the normal jackpot game starts). (the point in time). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first win is a normal jackpot and a single jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. This is the period from when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends. That is, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period corresponds to the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(B), if you win a variable jackpot in the low probability mode (when the first win is a variable jackpot and the jackpot series starts), the jackpot series will start for a predetermined period. This is the period from the start of the probability-variable jackpot game for the first win, which is the trigger, to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot, which is the trigger for ending the series of jackpots. That is, in the case of consecutive jackpot games, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38, but is set in plurality according to the number of jackpot games to be started within the predetermined period.

By the way, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended in the middle of the jackpot game or in the middle of a jackpot series. Therefore, by setting a specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38 for each jackpot game, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the specific period. In addition, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for a normal jackpot. By setting up to 100, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (specified period) after a specific period has passed, the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball retention section 38 during the specific period (the number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37) By controlling the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99, information that allows the non-set value to be specified or estimated (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed, and normally At the ending after the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the jackpot has elapsed, a non-set value can be specified or estimated corresponding to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a predetermined period. Information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to non-set values) is displayed. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing when a non-set value other than the set value can be specified or guessed plays the game, the player will end the game before the timing when the non-set value can be specified or guessed. It is prevented from doing so. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which a non-set value can be identified or estimated can identify or guess a non-set value, and by identifying all non-set values, the set value can be specified. It also becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games at a timing when a non-set value can be specified or estimated.

Further, by setting the specific period for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period, in consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the jackpot series. Therefore, in a consecutive game jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than in a single shot win, and the more times the jackpot game is executed, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, it is more likely that the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 will be greater in a consecutive jackpot than in a single hit, and in a consecutive jackpot, the greater the number of consecutive hits. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 will increase. As a result, the player not only has a higher expected value of the gaming value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive jackpot hits increases, but also obtains more information for identifying or estimating the non-set value, and the non-set value and even the set value. The benefit is that the value is easier to guess or identify.

The start of the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38 may be set during the jackpot game, and is not limited to the start of the jackpot game, when the opening/closing execution mode starts (the opening of the first win ends). It may be the point in time when the Further, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally occurs after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening/closing execution mode for one jackpot game. As a result, based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied when a game ball 99 enters the variable prize opening 316 in the opening/closing execution mode (game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 (based on the number of non-set values), information for identifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after a specific period has elapsed. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, you can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, that is, after a specific period has passed. It is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 and specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the displayed content.

In addition, the start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 is limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) is started. All you have to do is set it as a jackpot game. Preferably, at the time when the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a first win (a jackpot in a low probability mode), for example, a jackpot game for a first win (a jackpot in a low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first win ends). You can. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first win, the predetermined period is always set for one first win, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, so one At least one opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value is guaranteed for the first hit.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the point at which the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. It is possible that Further, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending with the jackpot ends), or the time when the time saving mode that is normally transitioned to after the jackpot ends. In addition, although this embodiment is explained on the premise of a loop variable machine, other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and mixed machines can be used for a predetermined period depending on the mode. It is also possible to set For example, with a V-ST machine, if there is no V prize on the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as in the case of a regular jackpot on a loop variable machine, and if there is a V prize on the first win (probable variable jackpot) ), the start of the first jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode is the start of a predetermined period, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot with no V winnings, or the end of a specified number of jackpot drawings in the high probability mode, etc. It is conceivable to set it as the end of a predetermined period.

Further, the predetermined period may be set to a period during which a variable game is executed (a period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the jackpot game), regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set depending on the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, (low frequency support mode) (period from the end of the time saving mode until the next jackpot starts), period of staying in the time saving mode (from the end of the normal jackpot until the transition to the normal gaming state) period), the period of staying in the low probability mode (the period from the end of the normal jackpot until the start of the next jackpot game), until a predetermined number of jackpot draws are received in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode. A predetermined number of game balls 99 are placed in the general prize opening 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode until a predetermined number of normal winning drawings are received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first prize opening 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode, one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second prize opening 315 in both, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode. , a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Further, the predetermined period may be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set to a period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols). In this case, the entire period of one variable game may be the predetermined period, or a part of the period of one variable game may be the predetermined period. When a part of one fluctuating game is set as a predetermined period, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols until the decorative symbols reach the reach state, and the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols. The period until a development effect such as a special reach effect starts, the period after the decorative symbol becomes a reach state until the development effect starts, the period from the time the decorative symbol becomes a reach state until the end of the development effect. The period during which the development performance is executed, etc. can be considered.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to identify or infer the non-set value and recognize or infer the set value even outside the period in which the jackpot game is executed. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

When the predetermined period is set as a period in which a variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the croon device 37 determines whether the game ball 99 hit to the left side area of the game board 31 is normally hit to the left or not. The position where 99 is allocated to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 (for example, the left side area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning opening 314) ) may also be provided. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special launch (right-handed strike of the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board 31). As a result, you can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without reducing the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314. I can do it.

Furthermore, depending on the type of specific conditions, the start of the predetermined period may be set when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Furthermore, depending on the type of specific conditions, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, as a specific condition, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by the distribution means such as the croon device 37 entering the special out ball opening 373 during a predetermined period, it is placed in a specific area other than the special out ball opening 373. For example, the game ball 99 may pass through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 may enter the various prize openings 313 to 316.

In addition, the game ball 99 that enters the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314 or passes through the through gate 317 is guided to a sorting means such as a croon device 37, and the game that is sorted by the sorting means A specific condition may be that the ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373. In this case as well, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without making any special moves.

Further, the specific condition may be the occurrence of a specific event that may occur during the progress of the game. The specific event in this case may be either an advantageous situation or a disadvantageous event for the player. If a specific event is advantageous to the player, in addition to the benefits obtained by the occurrence of the specific event, the player may receive all or part of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value). You can get more. On the other hand, if the specific event is disadvantageous to the player, the player may take all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. You can get more. Specific events include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more (a jackpot game being executed a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more), winning a guaranteed variable or normal jackpot a predetermined number of times (one time or more) (including 1) or more (including a guaranteed variable or normal jackpot game being played more than a predetermined number of times (including once)), the number of successive jackpots reaching a predetermined number or more (usually a guaranteed variable or normal jackpot game by the time you win the jackpot) winning a jackpot consecutively for a predetermined number of times or more), reaching a predetermined number of jackpot drawings before winning a jackpot, or winning a game ball 99 that exceeds the upper limit in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. (Over-winning) may occur.

Further, the specific event may be the execution of a specific performance set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game. The specific performance in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to either a non-reach performance or a reach performance, or may be set to any of an opening performance, a round game performance, and an ending performance. Typically, a specific performance is a premium performance in which a jackpot or a variable jackpot is confirmed in a variable game performance, or a held consecutive game is executed after the end of the jackpot game in a jackpot game (at the start of the jackpot game, At a specific point in the jackpot game, such as at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or at the end of the jackpot game, there is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result that is a jackpot is included among the pending lottery results. . Further, as a specific event, it is also conceivable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a specific combination in the symbol display section 341 in a stopped state or a temporary stopped state (intermediate stopped state). For example, when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" in the symbol display section 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "767", when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "367" In addition to cases where the display is stopped at the (break-up) mark, when a development performance such as a super reach performance or special reach performance is executed as a reach performance, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development performance will be executed. ) may be considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed, for example, "7 development 7", the left and right decorative symbols are displayed temporarily in a reach state (intermediate stop display), It is conceivable that a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, the specific condition may be that a plurality of specific events of a specific combination occur.

Further, the specific condition may be established in relation to a set value. In other words, the specific condition may include a set value, and for example, the specific condition may be satisfied when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of numbers indicating non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is defined by the set value, as will be described later. Therefore, numbers indicating non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in different orders depending on the type of specific condition. With this, it is possible to set the display order for each set value based on, for example, whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of numbers that indicate multiple non-set values for each set value. become.

In addition, the specified period for displaying specific information or a part of it (special information) that indicates a non-set value when specific conditions are met is not limited to the case where it is set for each ending of a jackpot game, and other It may be the timing, and it is conceivable to set it according to the relationship with a predetermined period, the relationship with a specific period, or the relationship with a specific condition. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is typically set after a predetermined period has elapsed, as will be explained in the second embodiment below. For example, it may be after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, when the predetermined period is set as the execution period of a variable game, for example, when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in a variable game, the temporary stop display timing when the decorative pattern is in the reach state, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. Possible timings include the timing at which the development performance is started, the development performance being executed, etc. In other words, the prescribed period may be set to a period in which a variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period in which the variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating a non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed on the symbol display section 341 by changing the decorative symbols, it is also possible to display specific information on the symbol display section 341 at the same time. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the variable game by displaying specific information.

Here, FIG. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position. The cross-sectional view, FIG. 10(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention section 38 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG. 10.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains the game balls 99, which are entered into the special out ball opening 373, for a specific period. , a discharge lane 382 and a stopper part 383.

The retention lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and allows the game ball 99 to stay there. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a portion of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to visually confirm that the game balls 99 have been retained in the retention lane 381, and also to determine the number of retained game balls 99, that is, the number of balls that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within a specific period. The number of game balls 99 can be visually recognized. Further, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently from resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381. In addition, instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps, or by displaying an image on the symbol display section 341.

The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end of the retention lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, such as a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Further, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382. This special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves in the ejection lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within a specific period. used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384. It is determined whether the game ball 99 has moved on the discharge lane 382. In addition, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out ball detection command to the outside in step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. In the process, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and displays the number on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value. The content is controlled (see the command determination process in FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40).

Although an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the special out ball sensor 384, for example, the game ball 99 may be detected by other detection methods (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the number of special out balls is counted in the audio lamp control device 5 based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper part 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. . The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward, and with the stopper portion 383 at the upper limit position, it becomes possible to retain the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip part does not protrude upward, and when the stopper part 383 is at the lower limit position, the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 can be ejected via the ejection lane 382 (Fig. 10(C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the ejection lane 382 is guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Note that the means for allowing the game balls 99 to stay in the retention lane 381 and allowing the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, but may also be a stopper that can move back and forth, for example. Other means such as a stopper part that can be rotated between a standing state and a prone state may also be used. Alternatively, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of magnetic force or electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be ejected by canceling the action of the magnetic force or electromagnetic force. . Furthermore, by making the retention lane 381 movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game balls 99 are retained and a state in which they are discharged. For example, by making the retention lane 381 wait at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are retained, and by moving the retention lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are stored in the discharge lane 382. It may be configured to shift to . In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening through which the game balls 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game balls 99 can be stored in the retention lane 381, and a position where the game balls 99 can be discharged from the opening to the game board 31. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position where it can be discharged to the rear side of the storage lane 381. Furthermore, by moving a box-shaped movable body instead of the retention lane 381, the game balls 99 can be retained in the movable body and the game balls 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display section 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section. FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of displaying alphabets on the 7-segment display section.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), the 7-segment display section 39 consists of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually, and as shown in FIG. 11(B), at least the numbers 1 to 6, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the alphabet of F. In the present embodiment, the 7-segment display section 39 includes a plurality of (six) game settings corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B)) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. From the value (numeric information), multiple (5) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 The numbers (specific information) indicating each of the (specific numerical information)) are displayed as numbers by lighting or extinguishing each segment A to G. Specifically, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the non-set value is the game setting value 1, segments B and C are lit to display the number 1, and the non-set value is the game setting value. 2, segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, and if the non-set value is game setting value 3, segments A to D and G are lit. When the non-setting value is the game setting value 4, the number 4 is displayed by lighting up segments B, C, F, and G, and the non-setting value is the gaming setting value. If the value is 5, segments A, C, D, F, and G will be lit to display the number 5, and if the non-set value is game setting value 6, segments A, C to G will be displayed. When lit, the number 6 is displayed. Further, in this embodiment, the dot point DP is lit at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, clearly indicating that the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed.

Further, in the 7-segment display section 39, the numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as will be described later (Figs. 36). Furthermore, as will be described later, the control order for turning on or off each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is set to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G ( fixed).

Then, in the 7-segment display section 39, as described later, a segment corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period) is controlled to turn on and off, and a number or a part of the number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 indicate non-set values other than the set values after the game set values. Therefore, some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 do not indicate game setting values, but indicate a part of specific information indicating non-setting values, and fall under the category of special information. . In other words, the special information is displayed using a portion of the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39. In this way, not only the numbers indicating non-set values but also part of the numbers (special information) are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so that the player can understand that the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Not only can the non-set value be specified in the case of the 7-segment display section 39, but also the non-set value can be estimated based on a portion of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the player can enjoy guessing the non-set value based on part of the numbers, thereby improving the interest of the game.

It should be noted that whether or not each of the segments A to G is a control target on the 7-segment display section 39 may or may not be clearly shown to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, it is easier to estimate the set value than when it is not clearly indicated. In this embodiment, since the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, it is not clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a method is adopted that makes it difficult to estimate the set value. has been done. In addition, when making it clear to the player that each segment A to G is the control target, for example, by blinking the segment to be controlled, it is made clear to the player that the segment is the control target, and It is conceivable to make it clear to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting it in a different color from the case where the segment is lit.

Further, in the 7-segment display section 39, information for specifying non-setting values may be displayed in alphabetical order corresponding to the non-setting values. For example, the letter A is displayed when the non-setting value is game setting value 1, the letter B is displayed when the non-setting value is game setting value 2, and the letter B is displayed when the non-setting value is game setting value 3. The alphabet C is displayed when the non-setting value is the game setting value 4, the alphabet D is displayed when the non-setting value is the gaming setting value 5, and the alphabet E is displayed when the non-setting value is the gaming setting value 5. It is conceivable that the alphabet F is displayed when the game setting value is 6 (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361, a first special symbol display section 362, a second special symbol display section 363, a first reserved number display section 364, and a second reserved number display section 361, which are arranged at the upper right of the game board 31. A display section 365 is provided.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs as a normal symbol (common symbol), and is used to draw a lottery for a common symbol to determine whether or not to release the electric accessory 315b triggered by winning the through gate 317. The results are displayed by a combination of LED pairs turning on and off. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) triggers the winning of the through gate 317 by blinking the LED pair (variably displaying the normal symbols), and after the variable display time has elapsed, turns each LED on or off, thereby drawing a lottery for the common symbol. Display the results.

The first special symbol display section 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning in the first prize opening 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (displays the first special symbol in a variable manner) when a prize is won in the first winning hole 314, and displays each segment after the variable display time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by lighting or extinguishing the light.

The second special symbol display section 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning the second prize opening 315. The lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (displays the second special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a winning in the second winning hole 315, and displays each segment after the variable display time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by lighting or extinguishing the light.

The first reservation number display section 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the number of reservations N of the first special symbol of the variable display caused by winning in the first winning hole 314 based on the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

The second reservation number display section 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reservation number M of the second special symbol of the variable display caused by winning the second prize opening 315 according to the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. Note that when the game balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage level to a control device and a driving means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs main control of games in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Furthermore, part or all of the processing executed by the main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, out ball sensor 318a, special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a ball has entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through. Furthermore, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42.

Then, the MPU 41 sends a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game start command, to the audio lamp control device 5. Outputs commands such as end command, special out ball detection command, and setting value change command.

The variable pattern command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of the variable display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The fluctuation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later, based on information stored in the pending storage area 412b, which will be described later, when starting the symbol fluctuation display on the main display unit 36. Ru. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 only of the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M stored in the reservation storage area 412b (described later) increases, the first reservation command and the second reservation command are used to generate a lottery result in a jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, a fluctuation pattern, and a change pattern. This is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of reservations N or M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in the hold storage area 412b (described later in FIG. 22) when the hold count N or the hold count M increases. Step S1207 or Step S1209 of the first pending command setting process).

The shift command indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 when the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases. This is a command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process in FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, that is, the gaming state will shift to the jackpot gaming state. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, the audio lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also that the opening will begin. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the opening start command may cause the audio lamp control device 5 to recognize that the opening has started.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Note that the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp that the opening ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started by the round game start command, but apart from the round game start command, an opening end command is set at the end of the opening, Alternatively, an opening/closing execution mode start command may be set when opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the time of starting the round game, and the command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to end the corresponding round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Ru.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command shown in FIG. 20 described later. It is set in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. Note that the audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content on the 7-segment display section 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the setting value has been changed and the setting value after the change, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. .

Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the changed clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs the main timer assignment described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Assume that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operation clock for the control main body in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the power hold area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute the jackpot lottery and setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used when determining the type of loss. included. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 36 and the symbol display section 341. It will be done. Furthermore, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal winning random number counter C4 used for drawing whether or not to make the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 into an electric winning state, and an initial value setting of the normal winning random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for this purpose is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reservation storage area 412b includes a first reservation storage area REA, a second reservation storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a reservation number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the first special symbol display section 362 displays a variable display and a static display will be referred to as a first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a reservation number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the second special symbol display section 363 displays a variable display and a static display will be referred to as a second special symbol game. Sometimes.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is the jackpot. This information is acquired as win/fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is This information is acquired as the winning/failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the validity information is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determining means of the present invention, by executing the process according to the control program. Note that the lottery counters 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, etc.) are individually set for each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB. may be provided.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

Therefore, for the variable game executed based on the win/fail information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the win/fail information is empty in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, second holding area REA2, third holding area REA3, and fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where the data is stored. In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 for which validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the win/fail information shows that the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4 are vacant in priority order. stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 are used to store the first prize opening 314. It is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning/failure information as winning history in the second winning opening 315 and second winning opening 315, respectively.

In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment that the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 are provided with a holding area where the maximum number of holdings is 8, and even in this case, the total number of holding areas is up to 8. It is possible to hold the winning/failure information as the winning history. The storage process of the validity information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 and the symbol display section 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the validity information stored in the . Specifically, the validity information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is prioritized and moved to the execution area AE, and the validity information does not exist in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, the validity information of the first pending area REA1 in the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

Note that the difference between the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first reservation storage area REA and the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB of the second reservation storage area REB is 2 or more. In this case, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the reservation area with a larger number is given priority and moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB may be alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information stored as win/fail information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the The validity information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1 and the third reservation area REB1 is moved to the execution area AE. The validity information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and stored in the pending storage area 412b at the timing when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Two types of random number values for winning a jackpot are set according to a win/fail table stored in a win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411, corresponding to a low probability mode and a high probability mode which is a variable probability gaming state. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode validity table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode validity table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B), the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) is set to the game setting value as a low probability mode win/fail table and a high probability mode win/fail table, respectively. A plurality of different validity tables are provided depending on the situation. The low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high jackpot probability that is advantageous to the player. becomes.

With game setting value 1, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79.1, which is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 9 (820/65536).

With game setting value 2, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/77.1, which is about four times that of the low probability mode. 6 (845/65536).

With game setting value 3, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode validity tables. In other words, at game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

With game setting value 4, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

With game setting value 5, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode validity tables. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

With game setting value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

It should be noted that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot are common in jackpot drawings between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that become a jackpot are not common. It will be done. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot win may not be continuous values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Further, although six low probability mode success/failure tables and six high probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to six levels of game setting values, it is sufficient that there is at least one success/failure table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game setting values of multiple stages, while providing one high probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of levels of game setting values for the low probability mode, and to make the jackpot probability uniform without providing any level of game setting values for the high probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of levels of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the pending storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set according to the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14(C) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning in the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9. The number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of variable game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning in the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and it will be a 16R variable jackpot. The number of fourth random numbers that result in a jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that normally result in a jackpot in 5R is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of a variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. That is, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b), the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and electric accessory 315b). Compared to the low frequency support mode (in which the probability of opening the object 315b is low), the expected value of acquiring game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, individual winnings are made for each of the first winning hole 314, which becomes an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning hole 315, which becomes an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game upon winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for games. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-probability machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixed machine, and the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot". It is determined whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss".

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R definite variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of 5R normal jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is low and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 50 or 100 times. The game continues until the specified number of times passes, or ends when the player is informed that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, after the end of the jackpot game at the time of the probability variable jackpot, the jackpot is won a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times). If the lottery is executed in a variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not become a jackpot by the time the specified number of times has elapsed, the lottery is executed in a normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). mode), and high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that in a variable game, a falling lottery is performed from a variable probability game state to a time-saving game state or a normal game state. In addition, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the transition to the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state is not made. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, and a 5R normal jackpot. It is also possible to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-to-reach symbol, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 14(D) is a diagram showing an example of a deviation type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(D), the value of the random number that results in a reach that is out of the order is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that results in a reach other than the end or end is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that causes a reach that is completely out of the order is 39. ~238. The MPU 41 determines that in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in a variable game that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, reach refers to a state in which a pattern combination of decorative patterns that indicates winning the jackpot is likely to occur between the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the stop display of the symbols. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a state of fluctuation. In addition, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operations on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory release counter C4 is between 0 and 199, it is possible that you have won, and when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is between 200 and 250, you are considered to have lost.

The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the variation pattern type in this way, the audio lamp control device 5 can perform rough variation game productions such as high-speed variation production (basic production, non-reach production), normal reach production, super reach production, special reach production, etc. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the MPU 41 executes a main process to be described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating a variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or a miss variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided separately for each low probability mode and high probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIG. 15(A), FIG. 15(B), and FIG. 15(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, and a loss variation table. As shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variable jackpot variation table, and the loss variation table, the variation pattern is set in advance according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. are associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R regular jackpot", the normal jackpot fluctuation table, and when the lottery result is "5R definite strange jackpot" or "16R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 uses the regular jackpot fluctuation table, lottery If the result is "missing", refer to each missing variation table and identify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variable jackpot variation table, the variation patterns "01" to "03" are set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. One of them is selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 selects the normal reach performance pattern. is executed. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the normal reach performance. In addition, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 displays the super reach effect. The pattern is executed. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the super reach performance. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern), and the special reach effect pattern is displayed in the symbol display section 341. The production pattern is executed. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the special reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the deviation variation table, a variation type counter CS1 is set for each stop type at the time of deviation (front/back deviation reach, reach other than front/back deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence relationship between and the fluctuation pattern is determined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front/back off reach or front/back off reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of failure is complete failure, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, when the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type), and displays the symbol. In section 341, a non-reach performance pattern is executed. In addition, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type), and displays the symbol. In section 341, a non-reach performance pattern is executed.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variable display at the time of a miss corresponding to the variation pattern "04", a variable display of a miss pattern in which the fluctuating display stops at the missed symbol without accompanying a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as a fluctuating display at the time of a miss corresponding to the fluctuating pattern "05", a fluctuating display of a miss pattern in which the fluctuating display stops at the missed symbol is accompanied by a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. executed. Furthermore, when the fluctuation display is displayed when the game is out corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", a player participation type operation performance that reflects the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a preview performance.

Note that the type of variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). Moreover, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach performance executed in the normal reach performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and any one selected from among them is prepared. The normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach performance executed in the super reach performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and the player can select from among them. One of the Super Reach effects performed will be executed. The super reach performance is a reach performance with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and the probability (expectation level) of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance, and the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the special reach performance. This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the special reach performance executed in the special reach performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern "03", and it is possible to select from among them. One of the specified special reach effects will be executed. The special reach performance is a reach performance that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and is, for example, a performance that develops from the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. The special reach performance is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance or the special reach performance.

Note that the performance patterns corresponding to the fluctuation patterns include an operation performance in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance, for example, a single-shot operation performance in which a single operation is reflected in the performance, and a performance in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance. It may include operation performances in which the player participates, such as a continuous-hit operation performance in which a repeated-hit operation is reflected in the performance, and a long-press operation performance in which a long-press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern indicating a variation display time by the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 and symbol display section 341 of the main display section 36, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern and the variation pattern in the jackpot lottery. A variable pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 issues a variable pattern command "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot before the variable patterns "01" to "03". Outputs one of "A01" to "A03". In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 generates a fluctuation pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R definite strange jackpot in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~Output one of "B03". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 generates a variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot in front of the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~Output one of "C03". In addition, if the lottery result is a "loser", the MPU 41 sends variable pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" added to the front of the variation patterns "01" to "05" to indicate a "loser". Output one of the following. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display section 341 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Determine the details of the variation mode, such as the variation type and performance type displayed in . Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, plays audio from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights up or blinks the illumination section 27. Or turn off the lights.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table regarding the variation display on the symbol display section 341. will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display section 341 are determined by the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information regarding game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d includes "Number of out balls", "Number of balls paid out from the general winning hole", "Number of balls paid out from the first winning hole", and "Number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" as the game information. ”, “Variable winning slot payout number of balls”, “Setting value”, “Base information”, “Continuous accessory ratio information”, “Role ratio information”, “Cumulative number of jackpot drawings”, “Number of unit jackpot drawings”, The "number of jackpot hits" and "number of consecutive losses" are stored. Among these game information, "set value", "base information", "continuous accessory ratio information", "accessory ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number" are game information (performance information) related to ball payout performance. Applies to.

“Number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired onto the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is the cumulative value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the general winning hole 313 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is set by the prize ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winnings to the general winning opening 313 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. .

“Number of balls paid out from the first winning hole” is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the first winning hole 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the first winning hole" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning into the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process, the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to.

"Number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command to make the payout control device 7 pay out the number of prize balls according to the winnings to the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process, the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to.

“Variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings in the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout ball number" is the prize ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the variable winning opening 316 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of paid balls due to the current winning. .

The "setting value" is for selecting the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/fail determination). In other words, the "setting value" defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as described later, there are six levels of setting values (six types of low probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see Figure 14(A)) and high probability mode success/failure tables (see Figure 14(B))). is being prepared. The "setting value" is updated in the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 27, which will be described later.

"Base information" is information about the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "number of out balls" in the normal gaming state. ” is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out of the “general winning hole number of paid out balls” and “first winning hole number of paid out balls”. When the "base" is expressed in a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning hole") / "number of out balls". The "base information" includes information regarding the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is The 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous game is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412, respectively. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. In addition, if the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" includes the "number of balls paid out from the general winning opening" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening." Apart from the "Number of balls paid out" and "Number of out balls", "Number of balls paid out from the general winning opening", "Number of balls paid out from the first winning opening", and "Number of out balls" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are included in the history. However, the past three or more 60,000-ball bases may be kept as a history. Furthermore, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

"Continuous role ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning in all winning holes (general winning hole 313, 1st winning hole 314, 2nd winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) from which prize balls are paid out. This is information regarding the "continuous role ratio" which is the ratio occupied by the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening. When the "continuous accessory ratio" is expressed in a mathematical formula, "continuous accessory ratio" = 100 x "number of variable winning holes paid out balls" / "total number of paid balls". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "continuous accessory ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous accessory ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. The "continuous role ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or for a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state. It may be a continuous accessory ratio for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Accessory ratio information" is based on the total number of balls paid out by winning in all winning holes (general winning hole 313, 1st winning hole 314, 2nd winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) from which prize balls are paid out. , is information regarding the "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the second winning hole and the variable number of balls paid out from the variable winning hole. When the "accessory ratio" is expressed in a mathematical formula, it is "accessory ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning opening" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "accessory object ratio information" is stored as the cumulative accessory ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may also be a ratio of accessories to a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative accessory ratio and the accessory ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative number of jackpot drawings" is the number of jackpot drawings held in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the game hall opened for business until now. It is the number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is the cumulative fluctuation display in which the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 is executed in response to a winning in the first winning hole 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the number of times. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of unit jackpot drawings" is the number of jackpot drawings triggered by a winning of a certain number of minus difference balls in the first prize opening 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main (number of times the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display section of the display section 36 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting "the number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole" from the "number of out balls". In other words, when receiving 250 balls for 1,000 yen at a game hall, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 for an average of 1,000 yen (jackpot lottery number). number of times received). Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" may be the number of jackpot drawings for a certain number of "out balls" in the normal gaming state. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot drawings" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall until the present. Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" refers to a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings and the number of unit jackpot drawings in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information as the "number of unit jackpot drawings."

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the jackpot lottery result was a jackpot after the game machine 10 was activated before the gaming hall started operating until now. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Furthermore, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of consecutive losses" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively unsuccessful in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and if the lottery result is a jackpot, it is 0 times. cleared. The "number of consecutive misses" indicates the result of the validity determination based on the low probability mode validity table in step S1603 when starting the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. If it is a miss, it is added by 1, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive losses" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive losses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as gaming information (performance information) in a gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46, and a ROM47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where it can be viewed when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-seg display. Although the performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, it may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and may be provided in other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. may be provided. It is also possible to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display numbers "0" to "9" and alphabets "A" to "F". In addition, in the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet "B", a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Furthermore, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is also possible to light up dots to clearly indicate the alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, among the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation. Displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which base values (%) calculated by the MPU 41 are displayed. For example, in a case where the current base BL is 31%, "BL", which is an abbreviation for the current base BL, is "8." and "L" on the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432, which are identification segments. The base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 is used to collectively turn on and off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) when pressed, and is located in an easily operable position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. (See Figure 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, allowing the performance display monitor 43 to display base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the power to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in a location other than the main controller 4.

Here, FIG. 18(A) is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 yen is displayed as "base information". The process loops in the order of ball base B1 -> previous 60,000 ball base B2 -> current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) shows that the current base BL is 28%, and the example shown in FIG. 18(C) shows that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%. In the example shown in , it is shown that the base B2 of 60,000 balls from the time before last was 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

In addition, programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program that calculates the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base information on the performance display monitor 43. A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4.

In addition, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of or in addition to the "base information", "continuous accessory ratio information" and "accessory ratio information" are stored in the game information storage area 412d. Other performance information may also be displayed.

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, the setting value display section 45 is used to select the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned setting values, and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display section 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display, and may be configured using the performance display monitor 43. The setting value may also be displayed.

The setting value change operation unit 46 turns on and off the power of the 7-segment display by pressing the unit, and allows changing the setting value by rotating the 7-segment display when the power is turned on. The set value change operation section 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, for example, and a function as a rotary switch whose contacts are switched by a rotation operation (rotation by a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section 45 of the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the set value display section 45 is in the off state and a press operation is performed on the set value change operation section 46, the 7 segment display is energized and the set value display section A number is displayed at 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current setting values. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, if the set value change operation section 46 is pressed while the set value display section 45 is lit, the power to the 7-segment display is cut off, causing the set value display section 45 to turn off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 19(B), when the set value display section 45 is in a lit state and a rotation operation is performed on the set value change operation section 46, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, when the set value display section 45 is rotated clockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 increases, and when the set value display section 45 is rotated counterclockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 becomes larger. The number displayed will be smaller. When the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a setting value. Therefore, if the power to the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation part 46 while the number corresponding to the desired set value is displayed on the set value display part 45, the power will not be turned off. The number that was displayed immediately before is determined as the setting value. Thereby, the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(A)) or a high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) selected according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A jackpot lottery can be held based on the following.

Note that the method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value changing operation section 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. For example, the setting value can be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see Figure 1), or by repeatedly pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see Figure 1). A method of changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. A method of displaying the set value by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4, etc. and rotating the key. Alternatively, the key may be removed after changing the number displayed on the section 45.

Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display section 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. Further, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display section 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, the setting value display section 45 can be set to the outside of the game machine 10 (on the front side of the front frame 11). ), it is possible to select a visible state or an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the setting value display section 45 cannot be visually recognized, while opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11. The setting value display section 45 can be visually recognized. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display section 45 is not visible unless the game board 31 is opened. The value is prevented from being grasped by the player. Then, when the setting value display section 45 is in the lit state, the setting value changing operation section 46 is turned off by pressing the setting value changing operation section 46 . Therefore, by keeping the set value display section 45 in an off state during business hours of the game hall, the set value display section 45 can be visually recognized when the game board 31 is opened due to balls jamming in the game machine 10, etc. Even if the player is in the state, the setting value display section 45 can prevent the player from grasping the setting value.

On the other hand, when the set value display section 45 is in the off state, when the set value change operation section 46 is pressed, the set value display section 45 is turned on, and the numbers corresponding to the set values are hidden. Therefore, when the game board 31 is opened to the front frame 11 and the set value change operation section 46 is pressed during non-business hours of the game hall, the set value display section 45 is turned on. The set value can be checked based on the numbers displayed on the set value display section 45, and furthermore, the set value can be changed by rotating the set value changing operation section 46. This makes it possible to change the setting value outside of business hours with a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol fluctuation display and the Execute the performance display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 sends commands to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by having the MPU 51 execute processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511. (control signal) to control the display on the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 in accordance with the display on the symbol display section 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display section 341, playback audio output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game performance and a jackpot game performance that will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs display variation pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may include a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5. Moreover, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the audio output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, and the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 based on the command input from the main control device 4. It is possible to control the vertical movement of the 7-segment display section 39, etc. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball (special out A state in which the game balls (balls) are retained and a state in which the game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged via the discharge lane 382 are selected. Further, each segment A to G of the seven segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output I/F 52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game performance is executed on the symbol display section 341 and the sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control audio output effects, lamp effects based on the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands input from the main controller 4 such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 creates a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols (see FIG. 38(A)), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38(A)) based on the variation pattern command. (B))) and the production pattern type (see FIGS. 39(A) to 37(C)), and sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 37(A) to 37(C)). (see step S2105 in the command determination process), the symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variable pattern command indicates a miss, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the miss is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command etc. inputted from the audio lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input/output I/F 62, etc., and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display section 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a 1-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of variable symbols such as decorative symbols used in the variable symbol display of the symbol display section 341, advance notice effects images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and miss effect images. ing. Note that the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variable display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches whether or not to pay out game balls. It also includes a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, when a dispensing error such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 132 occurs to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

The ball rental device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 stores data in a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set in advance and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, but may be a coin-shaped or stick-shaped storage medium containing an IC chip, for example. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash by inserting cash.

[Launching control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the launch rail 321 by driving the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated. Let it feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and directs the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31 by driving the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation. and fire it. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81 determines, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, that the greater the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the higher the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the firing handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily operate to stop the firing of the game ball. is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball firing mechanism 32 stops firing the game balls. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and gaming in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 is prevented. Furthermore, the player can stop the firing of the game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his/her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasure switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is in the ON state.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging means that is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge that. In addition, when the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 performs a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Executes NMI interrupt processing, etc. Note that in this embodiment, descriptions of startup processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described. Furthermore, in the start-up process, it is checked whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. As shown in FIG. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be explained below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing to determine the detection state of a sensor connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, out ball sensor 318a, special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, if the entry of a game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores this information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. Further, when an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of out balls in the gaming information storage area 412d. do. Further, when a special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores this special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, and when these counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the corresponding counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start-up winning process associated with a winning to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

On the other hand, the firing control process is performed on the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process to enable the firing of . In addition, the firing control process disables the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 in an electric role open state based on the ordinary winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. Execute through-gate processing to be performed. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the current gaming mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. When the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 29, and it is determined that it is a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 30 and 249. I judge that there is. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and it is determined that it is a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 200 and 249. I judge that there is. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win in the through gate process, the electric accessory 315b is kept open for a predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to win a prize in the second prize opening 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessories 315b are arranged side by side.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the starting prize winning process will be explained with reference to FIG. 21.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the first winning hole 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process moves to step S1102, and if it determines that there is no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the content of the validity information before the validity information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determination of the validity of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26), which will be described later. This is confirmed, and a first pending command setting process is executed to set the first pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Note that details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the second winning hole 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process moves to step S1107, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), the start winning process is ended, and the process moves to step S1005 in FIG. 20.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in FIG. 20. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the validity information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is applicable to the determination of the validity of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26), which will be described later. The contents are confirmed, and a second pending command setting process is executed to set the second pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second pending command setting process is similar to the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that the second pending command setting process can be performed by replacing "first pending command" with "second pending command" and "number of pending commands N" with "number of pending commands M" in the first pending command setting process of FIG. good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. The first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, and information such as the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or loss), fluctuation pattern, and number of pending commands N. . The first pending command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is high probability mode or not. If it is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process moves to step S1203, and if it is not the high probability mode (step S1202 :No), the process moves to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the gaming state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process (described later), and the jackpot game is changed from the high probability mode to the high probability mode. The judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag that is set to off when transitioning to another gaming state such as a game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. Based on this, a determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(A)) saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, and selects the low probability mode. Based on the win/fail table, a win/fail determination is performed to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

Note that in steps S1203 and S1204, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. , in step S1203 or S1204, after reading out the setting values saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. It is also possible to make a selection and judge whether it is correct or not.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process moves to step S1206, and the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process moves to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the win/fail information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process in FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type included in the win/fail information stored in the third holding area REA3 The counter value of counter CS1 is read. It should be noted that among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, the holding area in which the win/fail information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process in FIG. 21 is based on the value of the holding number N stored in the holding number storage area NA. It can be determined by

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the validity information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 the first reservation command corresponds to.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the pending number N to the first pending command (step S1209).

Note that the first pending command that is set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 23, which will be described later. It is deleted after being sent to the audio lamp control device 5 along with the command. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and the contents are not limited to those described here as long as the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of variable games and jackpot games are executed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a periodic processing at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, and a unit jackpot drawing number update command are set in the RAM 412. If so, the command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning hole 313, the variable winning hole 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a winning occurs in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314, the MPU 41 stores the winning information in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The number of balls paid out from the general winning hole or the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. In addition, in the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when a winning occurs in the second winning hole 315, the MPU 41 stores the RAM 412 The number of balls paid out from the second winning hole stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, when a winning occurs in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to the added value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command necessary for the symbol display unit 341 to display a variable pattern is set. be done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 20, and the fluctuations updated in step S1302 and step S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, control processing for a jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 in a round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened, thereby determining the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type) that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. ) is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting an ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed, a variable gaming state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. A transition is made to a short-time gaming state, which is a frequent support mode, and a normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the variable game that informs the lottery result ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Furthermore, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R regular jackpot. In some cases, the state is shifted to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game. Furthermore, when the notification of lottery results for the specified number of jackpot lots is finished in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the variable game ends.

Moreover, when the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state, it sets the flag for the gaming state before the shift to OFF, while setting the flag for the gaming state after the shift to ON. For example, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to OFF while setting the high probability mode flag to ON. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the variable probability gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

Furthermore, when shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. In this setting value changing process, a process is executed that controls displaying or non-displaying of setting values or changing setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with the operation on the setting value changing operation section 46. Note that details of the setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value changing process is executed in the main process, but it is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or during the start-up process after the start-up process until the launching of the game ball starts. It is also possible that it is executed by As a result, after the player starts playing the game, the set values cannot be changed until the next time the power is turned on, so it is possible to prevent the set values from being changed during business hours of the game hall. .

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing of the game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are updated as specific performance information. Note that details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Note that details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether the execution timing for the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the timing to execute the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process moves to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process arrives. During the remaining time, steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the variation type counter CS1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game, and if it is playing a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process. If the game ends and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process moves to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is set to ON at the time of transition to the jackpot game state, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, and turned off at the time of transition from the jackpot game state to another game state. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set in .

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process moves to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of the fluctuation display in step S1606 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later, and when the fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), This is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display, and if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process moves to step S1404. However, if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. The corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1404), and the fluctuating display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 stores the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the reservation storage area 412b and the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the validity information data stored in the pending storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process moves to step S1408. Note that details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the win/fail information, and ends the variable game control process. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

[Data setting processing]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and if the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). , the process moves to step S1502. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations N stored in the reservation number storage area NAA (step S1502), and transfers the data from the first reservation area REA1 to the execution area AE. The validity information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The validity information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves on when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 moves on when both or one of the number of reservations M and the number of reservations N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the validity information from the first pending area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The validity information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of pending symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed. When the process in step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to step S1408 in FIG. 24.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 24. The fluctuation start process will be described below with reference to FIG. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to on in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, is set to on, for example. . If the gaming state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1602, and if the gaming state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low probability mode. If there is, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 selects the pending storage area 412b based on the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. It is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the jackpot information stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending storage area It is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as numerical information in the jackpot information stored in the execution area AE of 412b, is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. , in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading out the setting values saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. It is also possible to make a selection and judge whether it is correct or not.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variable pattern of the variable game in the variable display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 creates a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(A)). Identify. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). . Furthermore, when the result of the validity determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a failure, the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the failure fluctuation table (see FIG. 15(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a variation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5, and the audio lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The unit 341 executes symbol variation display and the like.

As mentioned above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 selects variable patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" indicating a 5R normal jackpot, "A01" to "A01" to "03". A03'' is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R certain strange jackpot", the MPU 41 selects one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with "B" attached to indicate a 5R certain strange jackpot, "B01" to "B03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 selects one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with a "C" indicating a 16R sure strange jackpot, "C01" to "C03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 selects one of "D01" to "D08" as a variation pattern with "D" attached to the variation patterns "01" to "08" to indicate a "lost" lottery result. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. In addition, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out-of-reach", "out-of-reach", or "out-of-reach" in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display section 36, and ends the variation start process. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the fluctuating symbol display on the main display section 36, it sets the fluctuating display flag to ON. This fluctuating display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the fluctuating game control process in FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbols on the main display section 36 are being fluctuated. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 36, it adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the win/fail determination based on the low probability mode win/fail table in step S1603 is a win, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive wins" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and determines whether the win/fail result is a jackpot. Clear the "number of consecutive misses" to 0 in certain cases.

[Setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process moves to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process in FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol fluctuation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game state is in effect (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot play state (step S1702: Yes), the corresponding set value If the changing process is finished and the jackpot game state is not in effect (step S1702: No), the process moves to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot gaming state flag that is set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If the symbol fluctuation display is not in progress or the jackpot game state is not in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display section 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, the setting It is determined whether or not the value change operation section 46 is operated to turn on the power of the set value display section 45. That is, in this embodiment, when the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot game is in the state (step S1702: Yes), the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the set value display section 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1704, and the power of the set value display section 45 is switched from off to on. If not (step S1703: No), the process moves to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the setting value display section 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (described later) (step S1704). , a number indicating the read setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45 (step S1705). This allows you to check the current settings. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value displaying flag indicating that the setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45 (step S1706), and ends the setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value displaying flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value displaying flag indicates that the setting value is being displayed on the setting value display section 45 as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value displaying flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1708, and if the setting value displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). In other words, if the set value display section 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the set value changing process is ended.

<Step S1708>
If the set value displaying flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value change operation section 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation to change the set value has been performed. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1709 when the set value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), and when the set value change operation section 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation, and vice versa. When the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is displayed.

Note that if the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 will not be displayed. If the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 before rotation is "1" and the setting value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the setting value is changed to "1". The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". In addition, when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "6", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "1" In addition, it may be possible to prevent further rotation to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 as a setting value over the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation section 46 is switched from on to off, the setting values stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off are finally stored in the gaming information of the RAM 412 as valid setting values. It is saved in the storage area 412d. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 by rotating the setting value change operation section 46, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, the set value can be determined by turning off the power of the set value display section 45 while the number corresponding to the desired set value is displayed on the set value display section 45.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether or not the set value has been changed. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation unit 46 to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45. If the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1712, and determines that the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off. If so (step S1711: No), the setting value change process is ended. Note that when the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the set value display unit 45 displays a number indicating the set value by cutting off power to the 7-segment display. is turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 generates a low probability mode propriety table according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value displaying flag to OFF, and ends the setting value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is selected. In other words, since the low probability mode validity table and the high probability mode validity table have the same set values, it is easy to change the set values. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, the setting values at different stages (numerical values) for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, the setting value for the low probability mode is "1" and the setting value for the high probability mode is "6". It becomes possible to do so.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and the read out number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). When the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S1805, and when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the process moves to step S1805. The process moves to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads the general winning hole payout ball number and the first winning hole payout ball number for base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read out in step S1801, the number of general winning hole payout balls and the number of first winning hole payout balls for the base calculation of the base information read out in step S1803. Based on this, the current base BL is calculated, and the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1804) (see FIG. 29(A)). Note that the current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general winning hole + number of balls paid out from the first winning hole)/number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29(A) and 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the two-previous 60,000-ball base in the base information (step S1805), and changes the current base The BL is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the general winning hole payout ball number, the first winning hole payout ball number, and the out ball number for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls (step S1808 ).

<Step S1809>
When the processing in step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809 ), the specific performance information update process ends. In this case, the specific performance is, for example, the number of unit jackpot drawings, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, etc.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process in FIG. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL displaying flag is set to on. Here, the BL displaying flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to on in step S1906 or step S1930 in FIG. 33, which will be described later. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in FIG. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No). ), the process moves to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31, which will be described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 in FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No). ), the process moves to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32, which will be described later. If the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and if the B2 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No). ), the process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 displaying flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process moves to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the corresponding End display control processing.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), the current base BL is 0%. ``8.'', ``L'', ``0'', and ``0'' are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, indicating that the performance is present. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. end.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
If the BL displaying flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. S1908), it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909). If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1910, and if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1910. ), the process moves to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to OFF (step S1910), and saves the base value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), the previous 60,000 balls are displayed. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and End display control processing.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process moves to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby displaying the alphabet indicating the current base BL. and the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to off (step S1915), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1915). S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
If the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. S1917), it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1919, and if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1919. ), the process moves to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to OFF (step S1919), and displays the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B2 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and if the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the fixed time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 the day before last (step S1922). , the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process moves to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabets and numbers indicating the are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1923: Yes). S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. S1926), it is determined whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1928. ), the process moves to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), the current base BL is 0%. ``8.'', ``L'', ``0'', and ``0'' are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, indicating that the performance is present. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. end.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process moves to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous time The alphabets and numbers indicating the are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47.

Note that in another embodiment, part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27, startup processing at the time of startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power outage, etc. Descriptions of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs display order setting process (step S2000), counter update process (step S2001), command determination process (step S2002), and variable game presentation process (step S2003). , a jackpot game presentation process (step S2004), and a setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game setting value (set value) that is set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10, and displays the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period. The order of numbers to be displayed is determined and stored (set). In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the setting value suggestion process in a jackpot game for a predetermined period, five numbers are used to specify multiple (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value. are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display section 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example. Details of the display order setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether the display order setting flag is set to on (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that setting of the display order of numbers that specify non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. . Further, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by being permitted by the start-up process of the audio lamp control device, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed in a predetermined period. The order of the numbers is set (steps S2014 to S2016, which will be described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the seven segment display section 39 during a predetermined period is set.

By the way, the power to the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, by setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, thereby preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and preventing the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being displayed repeatedly. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming monotonous.

Here, when the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2012, and when the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the process moves to step S2014. to move to.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is set on (step S2012). The setting value change flag is a flag indicating that the game setting value (setting value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is used in the command determination process of FIG. 37, which will be described later. It is set to on in step S2121. If the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value change flag off (step S2013), and then moves the process to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when a set value is changed, the order of numbers to be displayed is set by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. By setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 when a setting value is changed in this way, it becomes possible to determine the display order of numbers according to the setting value. It is possible to prevent the presentation of information on the display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512, and further sets the order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 by referring to the set value and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36). Step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A) and the 7-segment display section 39. It is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship with the display order of numbers in .

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the number display order determination table, the lottery The display order of numbers is determined by random values. There are 120 random lottery numbers from 0 to 119, each random number is associated with one display order, and each display order has the same selection probability. The display order is A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display order B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display order C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, and setting. The display order D1 to D120 is selected when the value is 4, the display order E1 to E120 is selected when the setting value is 5, and the display order F1 to F120 is selected when the setting value is 6. 6, 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

The display order A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1 is the five digits ``2'' that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the digit ``1'' that specifies the setting value 1. - Specify the order in which "6" is displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, if the setting value is 1 and one of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number, the number "1" that specifies that the setting value is 1 will be displayed in 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display section 39.

The display order B1 to B120 selected when setting value 2 is set is the setting values ``1'' and ``3'' to ``6'' other than the number ``2'' that specifies setting value 2. Specifying setting values 2 to 6. The order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, if the setting value is 2 and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number, the number "2" that specifies that the setting value is 2 will be displayed in 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display section 39.

The display order C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3 is the five digits ``1'', ``, which specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6, except the digit ``3'' which specifies the setting value 1. The order in which ``2'' and ``4'' to ``6'' are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number "3" specifying that the setting value is 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

The display order D1 to D120 that is selected when the setting value is 4 is the five digits “1” to “1” that specify the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 other than the number “4” that specifies the setting value 4. The order in which ``3'', ``5'', and ``6'' are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the set value is 4, the number "4" that specifies that the set value is 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

The display order E1 to E120 selected when the setting value is 5 is the five digits “1” to “4” that specify the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number “5” that specifies the setting value 5. , "6" is displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" that specifies that the set value is 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value is 6 displays the five numbers “1” to “5” that specify the setting values 1 to 5, other than the number “6” that specifies the setting value 6. (See FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the set value is 6, the number "6" that specifies that the set value is 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

When the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to OFF (step S2016), and ends the display order setting process. That is, the MPU 51 is set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the set value is changed (step S2013: Yes). The order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set according to game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6).

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table, and after the power is turned on, the number display order determination table is determined by changing the setting value. Based on this, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) in a predetermined order on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period when a predetermined condition (for example, turning on the power or changing settings) is satisfied. In gaming halls, since the gaming machines 10 are often powered on before opening, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set when the gaming machines 10 are powered on. The display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, thereby preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and preventing the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being displayed repeatedly. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming monotonous.

Note that in the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on and when setting values are changed. , the display order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are satisfied. The predetermined conditions in this case will be explained in the third embodiment below, but the predetermined conditions include, for example, the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the start of the Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set due to the establishment of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is prevented from being fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39 and from making the display of information on the 7-segment display section 39 monotonous.

In addition, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), for the same setting value, the probability that all number display orders are selected is the same, but the probability that a number display order is selected is not necessarily the same. It doesn't have to be. For example, the number display order determination table may be set such that the probability that at least some number display orders are selected is different from other number display orders for the same setting value. That is, it is conceivable to make it easier to select a specific display order and, conversely, to make it harder to select a specific display order. In this way, if the probability of at least some number display orders being selected according to the setting value is set to be different from other number display orders, it becomes easier for a particular number display order to be selected according to the setting value. However, it is also possible to make it difficult for a particular number display order to be selected. That is, unlike the case where the display order of all numbers has the same probability of being selected, it is easy to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-set value. It will also be possible to do so. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value. Specifically, for example, when the setting value is a low setting value (for example, setting value 2 or less), the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to high setting values (for example, setting value 5 or more) is delayed. You may also do so. In this case, by leaving until the end the possibility that the setting value is high when the setting value is low, the player is given a sense of expectation that the setting value is high, while at the same time it is possible that the setting value is low. Early identification by the player is prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending prematurely while suppressing a decline in interest in the game, and to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, when the setting value is a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-setting value corresponding to a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less) is delayed. You can. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high setting value and the numbers corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until immediately before it is determined that the setting value is the high setting value, and the player The possibility that the set value is low remains until just before it is known that the set value is high. This allows players to focus on whether the set value is high, which is advantageous to the player, or low, which is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrill of the moment right before realizing that the set value is high. . Furthermore, regardless of the set value, it is also possible to make the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game setting value among the non-set values not late, for example, the display order that is the slowest, is more likely to be selected. In this case, the number that indicates the non-set value that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last number is displayed, the number that indicates the non-set value that is the most disadvantageous to the player, and the non-set value that is more disadvantageous to the player There remains the possibility of a non-set value that is advantageous to . This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the game setting value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous for the player, so it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and It is possible to suppress the decline in machine operating rate.

Further, it is conceivable to set a number display order in which a number indicating a non-set value corresponding to a high setting value and a number indicating a non-setting value corresponding to a low setting value are displayed in a later order to facilitate selection. For example, a numerical display order is selected in which at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to a low setting value and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to a high setting value are displayed in a later display order. It is also possible to make it easier to In this case as well, until just before the player grasps the setting value, the setting value includes the possibility of a high setting value that is advantageous to the player and the possibility of a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player. You can enjoy the excitement of knowing whether the high setting value is the low setting value or not until just before you realize it.

Also, except when the set value is the highest set value (set value is 6), the number display order is set so that it is easy to select a number display order in which numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value are displayed later. It is possible that For example, setting a high selection rate for a display order in which the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a higher probability of favorable judgment than the set value is lower than the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. is possible. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values that are higher than the set value, players are made to expect that the set value may be higher than the actual set value immediately before they grasp the set value. I can do it. This allows the user to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting a high possibility of the set value until just before the set value is known. On the contrary, unless the setting value is the lowest setting value (setting value is 1), it is easy to select a number display order in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values lower than the setting value are displayed later. It is possible to set it as follows. For example, setting a higher selection rate for a display order in which the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a lower probability of favorable determination than the set value is lower than the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with higher probability of favorable determination than the set value. is possible. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set value, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game setting values lower than the set value will be displayed immediately before the set value is grasped. It is left as a displayed number. As a result, the final candidates for the set value are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, in the end, the game setting value that is more advantageous to the player is grasped as the set value, so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

Further, regardless of the setting value, it may be possible to set a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) is delayed so that it is easy to select. On the contrary, it may be possible to set a number display order in which numbers corresponding to a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less) are displayed earlier in the display order so that it is easier to select the number display order. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low setting values are displayed earlier and the numbers corresponding to the higher setting values are displayed later, so that the higher setting values are displayed later. As a result, until just before the player grasps the setting value, it is possible to make the player expect that the setting value may be high, which is advantageous to the player, so that the player can expect the setting value to be high while expecting the setting value to be high. You can have fun guessing (setting value).

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, production pattern type counter, variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the production type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display of the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from the main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2101: Yes), the process moves to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and becomes the target of processing, and is stored, for example, in the processing work storage area. be remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable pattern command. Here, if the command is a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2103, and if the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols and performance type (performance pattern)) based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38(A)), the fluctuation type table (see FIG. 38(B)), and the effect type table (see FIG. 38(B)), which are stored in the ROM 511 in advance. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C)) and the value of the performance type counter stored in the RAM 512, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Moreover, when the variable pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets on the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability odd jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot. When is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The performance type table includes a normal reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see Figure 39 (A)), a super reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see Figure 39 (B)), and a table corresponding to special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 38(A), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", and the symbol combination "777" indicates that "333" is a probability-variable jackpot (either a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot). ” is a symbol combination that indicates a 16R fixed-variable jackpot, and that a double number other than “333” and “777” is a symbol combination that indicates either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, or a 16R fixed-variable jackpot. It is a premise.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is selected from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is not displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, when the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "7" is not distributed as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from decorative symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot will not be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is a "5R probability-variable jackpot", the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R probability-variable jackpot, may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", the result of the stop display of the decorative symbols may be a zero number symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333" which suggests a 5R normal jackpot. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot" and a decorative pattern other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 recognizes that it is a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the clearly indicated 5R definite change promotion performance.

In addition, when the lottery result is "16-probable jackpot", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop is determined by a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R probability-variable jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot," the stop-display result of the decorative pattern is a zero-number symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination that suggests a 5R probability-change jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. can be done. Then, when the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R probability-variable promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability-variable jackpot in the jackpot game. .

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stopped symbol combination that will be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the relevant game round is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "lost", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 51 selects the miss type selected based on the miss type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the miss type is front and back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, if the miss type is reach other than front and back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined in the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbol is determined in the audio lamp control device 5, and the second and final stop symbols are determined in the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command is defined. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern is "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30s" and a variation type of "normal reach performance pattern". In addition, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern is "02" is associated with the fluctuation display time "60s" and the fluctuation type "super reach effect pattern". The variation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R Probable Variable Jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "Special reach effect pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" where the lottery result is "lost" and the variation pattern is "04" is associated with the variation display time "7s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern". The variation pattern command "D05" whose result is "miss" and whose variation pattern is "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10s" and a variation type of "non-reach effect pattern".

Furthermore, FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing examples of effect pattern type selection tables. The performance pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (performance pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a normal reach performance pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual performance type in a variable game performance is a normal reach performance, and FIG. 39(B) is a normal reach performance pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual performance type in a variable game performance is a normal reach performance. This is a super reach performance pattern type selection table that is referred to when the individual performance type is a super reach performance, and FIG. 39(C) is referred to when the final individual performance type in a variable game performance is a special reach performance. This is a special reach performance pattern type selection table.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the number of production types corresponding to each variation type is five types will be described as an example, the number of production types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 39, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). ``Rendering pattern X1'' to ``Rendering pattern X5'' are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation performance in which the decorative symbol changes at high speed is executed. , the final individual performance type is a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, for performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table, for example, a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed fluctuation performance, and furthermore, as the final individual performance type, the expected level of jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a super reach performance with a higher performance and longer execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance without going through the normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a special reach performance pattern type from the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal reach performance and super reach performance are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance, and furthermore, as the final individual performance type, normal reach performance and super reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a special reach performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than a reach performance, and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the special reach performance pattern type selection table includes special reach performance patterns that develop into special reach performance after the end of high-speed fluctuation performance or normal reach performance without going through at least one of normal reach performance and super reach performance. You can stay there.

Then, the MPU 51 sends to the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the production type table, and the production type counter, and the variation type (production pattern type). Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining display time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the fluctuation display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type), and determines the command. Finish the process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (performance pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and performance images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and The changes in the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. .

Furthermore, when outputting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable game production in progress flag to ON. This variable game presentation flag is a flag indicating that a variable game presentation is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set on by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2107, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process The process moves to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
If the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes jackpot game performance determination processing (step S2107). The jackpot game performance determination process is a process for determining the performance to be executed on the symbol display section 341 and the like when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening performance, ending performance, and opening/closing execution mode performance to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance start flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game performance start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game performance (opening performance), and determines whether or not to execute the opening performance start process in the jackpot game performance process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when making decisions.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when starting the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2110, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the process The process moves to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation start flag to ON (step S2310), and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the round game performance in the jackpot game performance in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2112, and when the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the process The process moves to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether to end the round game performance in the jackpot game performance in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. It is set in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No). , the process moves to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2116, and when the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the process moves to step S2116. The process moves to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Furthermore, the ending performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to move the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. Ru.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2118 when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process The process moves to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game performance (ending performance), and determines whether or not to execute the ending performance end process in the jackpot game performance process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. referenced when making decisions. Further, the jackpot game production end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 41 when determining whether to turn off the lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a setting value change command. The setting value change command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process in FIG. . Here, when the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2120, and when the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the process The process moves to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores it, and ends the command determination process. Note that the setting values stored in the RAM 512 are read out in step S2014 in the display order setting process in FIG.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game performance processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, in the variable game presentation process (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, when a variable pattern command is received in the variable game that notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the command determination process of FIG. A variable game performance according to the performance pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc.

[Jackpot game performance processing]
In the jackpot game performance process (step S2004) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the opening performance, ending performance, and opening/closing execution mode performance determined in the jackpot game performance determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process in FIG. 37 are executed. In this embodiment, in the ending performance, an ending additional image indicating the display result on the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display part 39 is controlled. be done. Further, in the setting value suggestion process, as an ending effect of the jackpot game, a process of displaying an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7 segment display section 39 in the jackpot game on the symbol display section 341 is executed. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 37.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set on. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206. to move to.

<Step S2202>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending performance start timing. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the game ball 99 moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper downward movement flag indicating that the stopper section 383 is moving downward to ON. (Step S2203). The flag during stopper movement is referred to in step S2206 in order to determine whether the timing is such that the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time required to return the stopper section 383 to the upper limit position (step S2204), further sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S2205), and Ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the stopper lowering flag, which is set on in step S2203, is set on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the timing is such that the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, if the stopper is moving down (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2207, and if the stopper is moving down (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2207. The process moves to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
If the stopper is moving down (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2208, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2208. The process moves to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off. (Step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this manner is referred to in order to control lighting or extinguishing of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process shown in FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to return the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38, which is at the lower limit position, to the upper limit position.

Note that whether or not it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is determined by whether or not a special out ball is not detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether the special out ball detection flag is continuously off for a predetermined number of times or more. It may be determined by If the condition for returning the stopper part 383 to the upper limit position is that no special out balls are detected for a certain period of time, even if there are many special out balls, those special out balls can be accurately counted. .

Here, if the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2212, and if the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2212. Ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns it on in step S2203. The set stopper-moving-down flag is set to OFF (step S2213). Thereby, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display section control process that controls the on/off state of the 7-segment display section 39. In other words, for each jackpot game, at the ending of the jackpot game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 responds to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device during the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Then, a 7-segment display section control process for controlling the turning on and off of the 7-segment display section 39 is executed. The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process to display an additional image corresponding to the on/off state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. This ending addition image control process makes it possible to check the on/off state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 as well. The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper lowering flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game production end flag is set on (step S2216). The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game performance, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the jackpot game performance (ending performance) based on the jackpot game performance end flag. Here, if the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2217, and if the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S2216: No), the MPU 51 sets the relevant setting. Ends value suggestion processing.

<Step S2217>
When the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 turns off all segments A to G on the 7-segment display section 39 when the jackpot game effect is ended. In other words, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 can be lit only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 display game setting values (non-standard values) other than game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. All or part of the number corresponding to the set value) is displayed. Therefore, each time a jackpot game is executed, the player can obtain information for specifying or estimating the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game. Thereby, the player can specify or guess the non-set value every time a jackpot game is executed, and therefore can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information that allows you to identify or infer non-set values for each jackpot game, if the number of jackpot games increases, for example, the number of consecutive jackpots, all (5) non-set values can be grasped. In that case, it becomes possible to understand the setting value. In other words, since the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, it becomes possible to guess the set value in a jackpot game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game production end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion performance.

[7-segment display control processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first acquires the value of the special out ball counter that is added and stored in the RAM 512 in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. (Step S2301), and it is determined whether the value of this special out ball counter is 1 or more (Step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that entered the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the croon device 37 in the jackpot opening/closing execution mode. Then, if the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 ( Step S2302: No), since there is no need to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, the 7-segment display section control process ends.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads segment display unit control information from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display unit control information is information necessary to control the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37). . Then, the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S2303. is determined (step S2304), and control of the 7-segment display section 39 is executed based on this control content (step S2305). Note that details of the determination of control contents and control for the 7-segment display section 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) of the 7-segment display control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), and clears the value of the special out ball counter. (Step S2307), the 7-segment display unit control process ends.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG. 42(B) is a diagram showing an example of a control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing an example of the initial state (not updated) of the displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and an already displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control order storage area is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37). This area stores the order of numbers to be displayed and the order of control objects for segments A to G when displaying each number. This control order storage area includes a numeric display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

The number display order storage area is stored in the 7-segment display unit 39 and 7-segment display area until the end of a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The order of numbers to be displayed (number display order) is memorized. The number display order is determined by the display order setting process of FIG. 35 described above based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) that is set for the setting value that defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Determined in. In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. As the display order of numbers on the segment display section 39, "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" is stored. In other words, unless the settings are changed while the gaming hall is open, a fixed number display order is determined for each business day, and the number display order is fixed for a predetermined period during the same business day. . In this way, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period of the business day, the numbers are displayed in the same order on the 7-segment display section 39 every time the predetermined period starts. Numbers that are early in the numerical display order are likely to be displayed, and numbers that are late in the numerical display order are difficult to be displayed. For example, if the number display order is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so "2" and "3" are likely to be displayed. On the other hand, "5" and "6" are difficult to display. This makes it possible to estimate and specify the setting value, while preventing the setting value from being easily specified, and allows the user to enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. In addition, because the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers that are early in the display order are likely to be displayed, and numbers that are late in the display order are difficult to display.For example, when the setting value is set to low, (When the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting is low due to a small number of initial hits. This prevents a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 in progress, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

Further, it is expected that the 7-segment display section 39 will display a larger number as the number of specific periods in the predetermined period increases (the larger the number of successive jackpots). Therefore, as the number of successive jackpots increases, the number of non-set values that can be identified among a plurality of non-set values other than the set value also increases. As a result, since the number of successive jackpots increases, it is possible to obtain a lot of information for identifying non-set values, and therefore it is possible to narrow down candidates for set values. Then, by letting 35 or more game balls 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a predetermined period, the player can identify all non-set values, and as a result, recognize the set values. becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the goal of identifying all non-set values, that is, recognizing the set values, and whether the jackpot series will continue (if the jackpot type is Players can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether it is a big hit or a normal jackpot, and the interest in the game is improved.

Note that the number display order is not limited to the case where it is fixed to the one set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the settings are changed, but also when a jackpot game is started for a jackpot (first win) in low probability mode, etc. may be determined. In this way, when a jackpot game such as a first win is started, the number display order is determined, so that the number display order is determined every predetermined period, for example. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the order in which the numbers are displayed, so that variations in the order of numbers corresponding to non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and it becomes possible to recognize the set values at an early stage. As a result, the player can check the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past in order to identify all non-set values and recognize the set values. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to see numbers that are not available.

On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A to G when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section 39. The segment control order is fixed as segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, changing settings, winning a jackpot, etc., but is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. In this way, by fixing the segment control order as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, the player can control the segments A to G when a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. It becomes possible to grasp the order. Thereby, the player can grasp the numbers scheduled to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 even before the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the control order of segments A to G, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, like the numerical display order, the segment control order is fixed within the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when setting values are changed, but it is determined for each business day. It is also possible to make it so that In this case, compared to a case where the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. This increases the difficulty until all non-set values are identified and the set value is recognized, so for example when the set value is a low setting (when the jackpot probability is low in low probability mode) , it is possible to prevent the player from early recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from prematurely ending the game he is playing on the gaming machine 10.

In addition, the segment control order is determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started), etc., as explained in the third embodiment below. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already displayed information storage area stores information regarding numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period, numbers in the middle of display, and segments A to G that have already been controlled. area. This already displayed information storage area stores already displayed number flag information, currently displayed number flag information, and already displayed segment flag information.

The already displayed number flag information is information regarding a flag indicating whether or not the number has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period. This displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already displayed flag, a number 2 already displayed flag, a number 3 already displayed flag, a number 4 already displayed flag, a number 5 already displayed flag, and a number 6 already displayed flag. The numeral 1 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 1 already displayed flag indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 1 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 2 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 2 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 2 is not displayed in section 39. The number 3 display flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. This number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 3 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 3 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 4 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 4 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 has been displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 5 already displayed flag indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 5 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 5 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 6 already displayed flag indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7 segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 6 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 6 is not displayed in section 39.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 1 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 2 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 3 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 4 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 5 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 6 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39.

The already targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This target segment flag information includes the segment A target flag, the segment B target flag, the segment C target flag, the segment D target flag, the segment E target flag, the segment F target flag, and the segment G target flag. including. The segment A target flag is a flag indicating whether or not segment A of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. This Segment A Already Target Flag indicates that Segment A has become a control target in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that Segment A has become a control target when set to OFF. Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment B target flag is a flag indicating whether or not segment B of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This Segment B Already Target Flag indicates that Segment B has become the control target in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that Segment B has become a control target when set to OFF. Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment C target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment C already targeted flag indicates that segment C has become a control target in the display control of display target numbers in a predetermined period when set to on, and when set to off, segment C Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment D target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This Segment D Already Target Flag indicates that segment D has become a control target in display control of display target numbers in a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that segment D has become a control target when set to off. Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment E target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment E already target flag indicates that segment E has become a control target in the display control of display target numbers in a predetermined period when set to on, and when set to off, segment E Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment F already targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment F of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment F already targeted flag indicates that segment F has become a control target in the display control of display target numbers in a predetermined period when set to on, and when set to off, segment F Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment G already targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display section 39 has become a lighting/extinguishing control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment G already targeted flag indicates that segment G has become a control target in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to on, and when set to off, segment G Indicates that the control target is not controlled.

In the already displayed information storage area, all flags included in already displayed number flag information, display target number flag information, and already target segment flag information are set to OFF. Here, the initial state is a state outside the predetermined period, that is, at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (first jackpot) in a low probability mode (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37). indicates the state at the beginning of the predetermined period in which the data is accumulated. In this embodiment, all the flags included in the already displayed information storage area are set when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes) in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process of FIG. 46, which will be described later. , that is, it is set off (cleared) when it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

Here, FIGS. 43 to 45 are diagrams showing a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 of the 7-segment display section control information storage area and an example of updating the already displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 and an example of updating the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area will be described.

As described above, in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content. (Step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 373 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the ball). For example, when the displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, the 7 segments A to G on the 7 segment display section 39 Some of the segments are subject to lighting/extinguishing control. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a specific period is 5), then the value of the control order storage area is When the contents are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (all flags are set to off), the 7-segment display section 39 The five segments A to E are to be controlled for turning on and off. When the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B), the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is lit, segment B is lit, Segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, from the all-out state (uncontrolled state) in which all segments A to G shown in FIG. 43(A) are turned off, to the segment A, segment B, and segment shown in FIG. D and segment E are changed to a partially controlled state where they are lit.

Note that the change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be performed all at once, or the segments A to E may be sequentially controlled. This may be done in stages by turning on or off. Further, when segments A to E are sequentially turned on or off as control targets, the segments A to E that are control targets may be made to blink to clearly indicate that they are control targets. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily need to be clearly specified.

On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display section 39 is finished, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display section 39 is changed from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already displayed information storage area is changed as shown in FIG. 42(C). The initial state in which all flags are set to OFF is updated to the content shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, five segments A to E of segments A to G are targeted for control. Therefore, segments F and G are not subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed in the displayed number flag information, the number 1 already displayed flag, the number 2 already displayed flag, and the number 3 already displayed flag are flagged. , the number 4 already displayed flag, the number 5 already displayed flag, and the number 6 already displayed flag are maintained off. In addition, in the currently displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number 2 flag for the number 2 whose five segments A to E are controlled is set to ON. In addition, in the already displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are the control targets, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, and segment D already targeted flag for segments A to E , and the segment E target flag is set on.

In addition, when the already displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), the value of the special out ball counter (set in the jackpot game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display control process in FIG. When the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during the specified period exceeds 7, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a specific period is 10), the 7-segment display section 39 A total of 10 segments A to G are to be controlled. In other words, in the 7-segment display section 39, seven (all) segments A to G are subject to lighting/extinguishing control, so that the number in the first display order is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and then the number in the second display order is displayed. Three segments A to C in terms of order numbers are to be controlled for the second lighting/extinguishing. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (all flags are set to off), 2), the first number in the display order is 2, so the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, from the uncontrolled state in which all segments A to G shown in FIG. 44(A) are turned off, segments A, B, D, E, and is turned on, and segments C and F are turned off, changing to an all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. ) is changed from the all segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed to a partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled as shown in FIG. 44(C). In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), the second displayed number is 3, so segments A to C are lit.

Note that the change from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), and the change from the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial state shown in FIG. 44(C) The change to the segment control state may be performed all at once, or may be performed in stages by sequentially turning on or off segments A to G or segments A to C. Furthermore, when segments A to G or segments A to C are turned on or off in sequence, the segment being controlled may be made to blink to clearly indicate that it is being controlled. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily need to be clearly specified.

Further, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the 7-segment display section 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44(A), through the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), to the partial segment control state shown in FIG. 44(C). In this case, the displayed information storage area changes from the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) in which all flags are set to OFF, through the contents shown in FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B), and finally to the state shown in FIG. 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), for the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, all segments A to E of segments A to G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the displayed segment flag information, all the displayed target flags for segments A to G are set to ON. Then, when all the target flags for segments A to G are set to ON, the control for displaying the number 2 has ended, so as shown in FIG. 45(B), the number 2 already displayed flag is set to ON, and in the currently displayed number flag information, while the currently displayed number 2 flag is set to OFF, the currently displayed number 3 flag is set to ON. Thereafter, in the displayed segment flag information, all the displayed target flags for segments A to G are set to OFF. Further, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the displayed segment flag information, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, and segment C already targeted flag for segments A to C are set to ON. In other words, every time all the target flags in the displayed segment flag information are set to ON (every time seven segments A to G are set as control targets), they become the display target in the displayed number flag information. The already displayed flag for the number is set to on, and the display target flag for the number that was to be displayed in the displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the next number to be displayed is turned on. Set.

As described above, by controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 is All or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a jackpot are displayed. This allows the player to specify or infer the non-set value based on the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and as a result, it becomes possible to recognize the set value.

By the way, some gaming machines, like the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, have a plurality of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the gaming hall side can select the setting value. In this case, the game hall desires to set the set value low in order to lower the expected ball payout value. When the setting value is set low, the setting value is not known to the player because it is desired to avoid the player from quitting the game due to the player recognizing that the setting value is low. There is a tendency to want it to be a gaming machine.

On the other hand, in order to play a game on a gaming machine 10 with a higher expected ball payout value, the player can guess (narrow down to multiple setting values) or recognize the setting value for a gaming machine that has a setting value. I would like to have good gameplay. As described above, gaming halls and players tend to have conflicting wishes regarding gaming machines that suggest or specify gaming setting values.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in a specific period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, among the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 316, the special The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball opening 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38. Then, after a specific period has elapsed, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 is counted, and segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are set as control targets according to the counted number. do. That is, at least unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the game is transferred to a jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor lit up. Therefore, unless the game is shifted to a jackpot game, the set value will not be estimated or recognized.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and for example, 1 to 2 balls (approximately 1 ball per 10R round game) per 16R jackpot game. It is expected that 99 game balls will land. Therefore, in one jackpot, it is difficult to specify or guess the non-set value using the 7-segment display section 39. On the other hand, the 7-segment display section 39 shows that after the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot starts, the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game ends (ending). During the predetermined period until the start of the game, control is performed according to the cumulative total of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. In other words, if the first hit is a variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the series of jackpots in the high probability mode continues, and the opening/closing of the normal jackpot game when winning the normal jackpot will not end. Continues until the mode ends. That is, in this embodiment, although it has a game feature in which it is not easy to recognize the non-set value or even the set value, the longer the series of jackpots in the high probability mode continues, the more the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 When many game balls 99 are expected to enter the ball, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately, and 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 in a predetermined period. Non-set values (set values) can be reliably identified. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has information that allows the setting value to be inferred according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period. Since the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is low in a single jackpot, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive jackpots, if the number of consecutive hits is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value), but as the number of consecutive hits increases, the game ball to the special out ball opening 373 Since the expected value of the number of balls entering 99 becomes high, the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (set value) is reduced, providing a gaming experience. That is, in this embodiment, the setting value can be estimated by specifying or estimating some or all of the plurality of non-setting values by stacking all or some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. be. In this way, in the gaming machine 10, by suppressing the setting value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), the non-setting value (setting value) can be set more accurately according to the store's wishes by winning consecutive jackpots. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the player's wishes. As a result, a gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store side and the player side is provided.

By the way, in conventional slot machines, an image suggesting or clarifying a setting value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed. Images that suggest or clarify the setting value are displayed, for example, on the jackpot confirmation screen, jackpot start screen, jackpot end screen, start screen, continuation screen, and end screen of ART and AT, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. be done. Specifically, on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate a set value, such as a jackpot game end screen, a certain probability that the value is greater than or equal to a specific set value (for example, an intermediate setting value (setting value 4 to 6) or higher), high setting value (e.g. setting value 5 or 6), odd number setting value (e.g. setting value 1, 3 or 5), even number setting value ( For example, a screen is presented that suggests or clearly indicates that the setting value is 2, 4, or 6), that it is not a specific setting value (for example, the negation of setting value 1), that it is the highest setting value (for example, setting value 6), etc. .

However, in conventional slot machines, when suggesting or clarifying the setting value, there is a high probability that a default screen that does not suggest or clarify the setting value will be presented so that the setting value cannot be easily identified or guessed. The probability that a suggestion or explicit screen will be presented is set low. In particular, the probability that a setting value will be suggested or specified as being advantageous to the player or that a specific setting value will be specified is set to be low. Furthermore, suggestions that the setting value is an odd number or an even number tend to have low reliability, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Furthermore, although a slot machine may suggest or explicitly indicate a high setting value, it does not suggest or explicitly deny that it is a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or 6), and especially the highest setting value. No suggestion or explicit statement to deny that it is the set value (for example, set value 6) is executed. That is, in the slot machine, information disadvantageous to the player, such as denying a high setting value, is not presented.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the setting is made according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period as described above, that is, the number of game balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period. Information whose value can be estimated (non-set value) is displayed as a number on the 7-segment display section 39. In other words, by displaying the numbers of the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to identify or infer some of the non-set values, so the set value can be estimated, and all non-set values Since all non-set values can be recognized by displaying the numbers, it becomes possible to identify the set values.

In this way, in this embodiment, the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is fundamentally different from the suggestion or explicit setting value in a fixed ratio, which is adopted in gaming machines such as slot machines. The setting value can be recognized by identifying multiple non-setting values based on the following. In addition, in this embodiment, the non-set value (set value) is specified depending on the number of specific conditions (entering of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373) during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. This point also differs from conventional gaming machines in which setting values are suggested or specified at a fixed rate. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the number of successive jackpots increases, the difficulty of identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values decreases compared to conventional gaming machines such as slot machines. It is different from the suggestion or explicit setting value of

In the present embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values depending on the number of specific conditions (entering of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373) during a jackpot game in a predetermined period of time is provided. Since the information used to specify the setting value is presented, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency of presentation of information for specifying the setting value does not decrease, and as long as the predetermined period continues (a series of jackpots continues). Since the presentation of information for specifying non-set values (set values) is continued, it is possible to enjoy guessing the set values even more, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-setting values in a predetermined period, all the non-setting values can be specified. In other words, all non-set values are presented to the player, including information that is disadvantageous to the player, regardless of the level of the non-set value. In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where setting values are suggested or specified in conventional slot machines, even information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as denying the highest setting value, is presented. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for specifying or estimating the set value, and therefore continues playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. It can be determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) is delayed so that it is easier to select. On the contrary, it may be possible to set a number display order in which numbers corresponding to a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less) are displayed earlier in the display order so that it is easier to select the number display order. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low setting values are displayed earlier and the numbers corresponding to the higher setting values are displayed later, so that the higher setting values are displayed later. As a result, until just before the player grasps the setting value, it is possible to make the player expect that the setting value may be high, which is advantageous to the player, so that the player can expect the setting value to be high while expecting the setting value to be high. You can have fun guessing (setting value).

[Ending added image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending added image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, the MPU 51, in step S2401, updates various information in the already displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. The already displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number flag information, and the already displayed segment flag information are read out, and based on these information, an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game is determined (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that shows the display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, and is an image that allows the non-setting value to be specified or estimated (Fig. 47 (B1), Fig. 47 (B2), and Fig. 47 (C )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 an additional image display command that causes the symbol display section 341 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 in the ending effect. As a result, the additional image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending performance of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in a probability variable jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in a normal jackpot game. This is an example. Moreover, FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C) are screen examples (setting value suggestion screen examples) of the symbol display section 341 in the latter half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of the variable probability jackpot game, as the first half of the ending effect, it is clearly indicated on the symbol display section 341 that the transition to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will occur after the end of the variable probability jackpot game. The image will be displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of the normal jackpot game, as the first half of the ending performance, the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (time saving mode) are displayed on the symbol display section 341 after the end of the normal jackpot game. An image will be displayed to clearly indicate the transition to . In addition, in the first half of the ending effect, in addition to an image that clearly shows the game mode to which the game mode will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game, an image that clearly shows the number of successive jackpots and the number of balls put out is displayed.

On the other hand, in the second half of the ending performance of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process in FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, It includes five setting value suggestion images imitating a seven-segment display section 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), the 7-segment display section 39 changes as shown in FIG. 47(B1). An additional image including an image simulating the display state in is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. Further, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) via FIG. 44(B), the display state shown in FIG. 47(B2) An additional image including a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. Is displayed. Furthermore, if all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before the predetermined period ends, each number will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C). An additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the displayed state is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. In this case, it can be specified that the non-set value is "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period is added including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display section 39 as the second half part. Displayed as an image. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check the information regarding the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 up to the jackpot game. As a result, if you do not know that information related to non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, when you miss the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, or when the past 7-segment display section in the predetermined period Even if the user forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the user can recognize the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 again. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player can identify or guess the non-set value in the ending based on the additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display section 39, and can recognize or guess the set value.

It should be noted that whether or not to display an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period on the symbol display section 341 as an ending effect for a jackpot game is a design matter; It is also conceivable that the additional image is not displayed on the symbol display section 341. In this way, when the additional image is not displayed in the ending effect, if there are numbers displayed in the past during a predetermined period, those numbers will not be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 first unless they are memorized or recorded. It becomes difficult to identify or infer non-set values based on the numbers given, and it becomes difficult to infer or recognize set values. In other words, by not displaying the additional image in the ending performance, it becomes more difficult to identify or guess non-set values (set values), so the set values of the gaming machine 10 can be recognized early, and at least they are not high set values. It is possible to prevent this from being recognized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending prematurely, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37, is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2305, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the MPU 51 performs the ending additional image control process. end.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area (sets all flags off) and ends the ending added image control process. That is, if the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, the non-set value (set value) can be identified or estimated, but in order to increase the accuracy of identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), it is necessary to It is necessary to allow more game balls 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the clone device 37, and the hurdle is high until a non-set value (set value) is specified. Therefore, there is an advantage for game halls that players cannot easily know the set values. On the other hand, the player has the advantage of being able to specify or estimate the set value. In addition, it is possible to specify or infer the set value by winning a jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of guessing the set value increases with the continuation of certain jackpots (jackpot success), and in some cases, the set value may increase. It is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a playability that allows it to be recognized. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the players.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game, and if the game is in a high probability mode, the game is not ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first win to the end of the opening/closing execution mode for the normal jackpot, the player is prevented from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even if a player plays a game who does not know the timing (the end of a predetermined period) when a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. This prevents the game from ending just before it becomes possible to guess. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games at a timing when a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start of a jackpot game triggered by a jackpot win in the first low probability mode, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated at least once. Not only is it a condition to win the jackpot, but even if the predetermined period has started, the hurdle to identifying the non-set value (set value) is high as described above, so the non-set value (set value) A considerable number of game balls 99 are fired onto the game board 31 until the player guesses or specifies the number to a certain extent, and receives a considerable number of jackpot drawings. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the stage has been reached where the unit jackpot lottery number (easiness of receiving the jackpot lottery) can also be sufficiently determined. As a result, if the player can guess or specify the non-set value (set value) with high accuracy, the player can check the gaming machine 10 while playing, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot drawings. Since it is possible to judge the ball output performance of the game, it is possible to judge whether to continue playing the game. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is large, it is possible to make a comprehensive consideration and decide to continue the game. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot lottery is small, it is possible to make a comprehensive consideration and decide to give up on continuing the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for specifying or estimating the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 indicates the symbol at the ending of the jackpot game. It is displayed on the display section 341. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check the information regarding the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 up to the jackpot game. As a result, if you do not know that information related to non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, when you miss the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, or when the past 7-segment display section in the predetermined period Even if the user forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the user can recognize the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 again. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player identifies or guesses the non-set value at the ending based on the additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display section 39, recognizes or guesses the set value, and proceeds with the game. You can enjoy it.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the display history for the predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 is It may be displayed on a display section such as the symbol display section 341 after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be displayed in a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state where neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is being executed, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed on a display section such as the symbol display section 341. It is conceivable to display the following. In this way, by displaying the display history for a predetermined period in the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 etc. after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the past 7-segment display This makes it possible to check the contents displayed in the section 39 in case you have forgotten them. This makes it possible to specify or estimate the non-setting value based on the past display content on the 7-segment display section 39. Note that displaying the display history on the symbol display section 341 or the like in the standby state will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment described later.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 etc. in a standby state, it becomes possible to check the past display contents on the 7-segment display section 39 in case you forget. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 or the like in a standby state, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on an empty gaming machine 10. I can do it. In other words, it becomes possible to specify or infer a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, allowing so-called hyena behavior. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is not allowed to check the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 after the end of the jackpot game where the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, specific information indicating a non-set value including display history in a predetermined period is restricted from being displayed outside the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena act of identifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode. One predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this case, the predetermined period starts when the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode starts, and ends when the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, instead of or in addition to displaying numbers corresponding to non-setting values, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed as a jackpot. In this case, the non-set value is clearly displayed in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 by displaying numbers or alphabets corresponding to the non-set value, and in the symbol display section 341 to clearly indicate the non-set value. A reach effect may also be executed. As a non-set value explicit reach effect, when the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is conceivable to stop displaying a decorative pattern with a zero number corresponding to the non-set value, for example. In this way, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, and the non-set value is displayed on the symbol display section 341. By executing the non-set value explicit reach performance that clearly indicates the set value, the player can not only check whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game is a jackpot, but also the first special symbol display section 362 in the variable game. Alternatively, it is possible to enjoy a variable game by paying attention to the numbers etc. that are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display section 363 and paying attention to the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, when a non-set value explicit reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, in the reach of the decorative pattern of the number corresponding to the set value, the number will not be aligned as a zero and will be stopped and displayed as a miss. It is also possible. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative pattern can be stopped and displayed at "222", "333", "444", "555", and "666", but it cannot be stopped and displayed at "111", and the decorative pattern If is 1, the reach will always be off. In this way, it is usually desirable that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number zero by not stopping and displaying the number corresponding to the set value, but for example, if the number 5 or 6 is negated by the high setting value, Since it is desirable that the display not be stopped at the double mark, it becomes possible to enjoy the reach effect from a different perspective than before.

In addition, the display of numbers corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, or the non-set value clear reach effect can be executed only at a specific timing. can also be considered. In this way, by displaying numbers corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, or by performing the non-set value explicit reach effect, limited to a specific timing, It is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the variable game executed at a specific timing.

As a specific timing, for example, in a variable game executed in a variable probability game state or a time-saving game state, the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, and the symbol display section 341 display the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The timing to notify that the player has won the jackpot can be considered. In this way, by specifying or suggesting a non-set value in a variable game in a fixed variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the high-frequency support mode allows the reservation to be used at a high speed, and the fixed variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state that tends to become monotonous can be avoided. You can enjoy variable games. Further, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games to be executed after shifting to the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state is within a predetermined number of times range. For example, the predetermined number of times range is set when the number of variable games to be executed after transitioning to the fixed variable gaming state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 or more, 150 or more, 200 or more, etc.). ). That is, the non-set value may be specified or suggested when a jackpot occurs early after the transition to the variable probability gaming state, or when the player is addicted to the game with a large number of variable games played until the jackpot occurs. In this case, the non-set value is specified or suggested as a benefit for a big hit early after the end of the jackpot game, or as a relief for getting hooked. In addition, the predetermined number of times range is set when the number of variable games to be executed after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving gaming state (for example, 90 to 100 times). It is possible to set it. In this case, a non-set value is specified or suggested as a benefit for a jackpot early after the end of the jackpot game or a jackpot just before the end of the time saving.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Furthermore, in other embodiments described below, descriptions of the same configuration and steps similar to the processing procedure as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the above-described first embodiment will be omitted. Note that it is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot) A specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set, and the number of game balls 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within the specific period when a specific condition is satisfied In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. We have explained the case presented in

By the way, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set for each jackpot game. Set within the period. Therefore, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of the jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts. However, if all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, if all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts, the If the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game that is executed first is not memorized or recorded, it is not possible to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game that is executed first. It becomes difficult. That is, if the specific information presented in the past on the 7-segment display section 39 is not accurately stored or recorded, it is difficult to effectively specify or estimate the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or estimate the non-set value (set value), it is a hassle to accurately memorize or record the specific information presented on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past. It is also assumed that the player may give up specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). In this case, the significance of improving the interest of the game by being able to specify or estimate the non-set value (set value) is lost.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific period is not set in the predetermined period as in the first embodiment, and one predetermined period is set based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period. Specific information for specifying or estimating the non-setting value (setting value) is presented only once. In this way, in this embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is provided only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period. is presented. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inconvenience caused when specific information is presented multiple times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is resolved. That is, in this embodiment, specific information is presented only once after the end of one predetermined period, so there is no specific information that has been presented in the past during the predetermined period, and the player There is no specific information to remember or record. This allows the player to identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by focusing on specific information that is presented only once per predetermined period. This eliminates the hassle of having to accurately memorize or record specified information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), so that the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interest will be improved.

In an example of the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot. A specific condition is that the game ball enters the special out ball opening of the Kroon device. Further, in an example of the present embodiment, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as in the first embodiment described above, but the display timing (regular period) of the specific information is one predetermined period. On the other hand, this is only the ending (after the end of the predetermined period) in the 5R normal jackpot game where the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 only once after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending added image control process are different from the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process performed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (FIG. ), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the game ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 Controlling the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 that accepts the game ball 99, and counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention section 38 in a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). . As a result, in this embodiment, in the 5R normal jackpot where the end of the predetermined period is set when the predetermined period ends, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during the predetermined period are counted in one go.

In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 is controlled, and the game ball retention for a predetermined period of time. By executing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the section 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display section control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also performed. , based on the stopper lowering flag that is set on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2203), and executed on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203). S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control processing]
The 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is executed when the ending starts in the 5R normal jackpot game (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above. When the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading out the control order and already displayed information (see FIG. 42) of the 7-segment display control information, the 7-segment display control is performed. Only the control order of information is read out (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display unit control process of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit is activated only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period. 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information), there is no need to read the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display section 39.

[Ending added image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending-added image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending-added image control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 46); Step S2404, which performs the ending additional image control process in the embodiment, is omitted. That is, since the ending addition image control process of this embodiment is executed in response to the 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 48), the process is executed until it is determined that the 5R normal jackpot is the case. In step S2405, the already displayed information storage area is initialized.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information (numerical ) may be presented in whole or in part. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information that the player should memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by focusing on specific information that is presented only once per predetermined period. This eliminates the trouble of having to accurately memorize or record specified information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), so that the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interest will be improved.

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first embodiment described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or estimated after a specific period has elapsed (ending of a jackpot game) based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period. A case has been described in which all or part of the specific information (numbers) for the 7-segment display section 39 is presented. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, in the 7-segment display section 39, the numbers corresponding to non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set value is changed. (See FIG. 36). Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the order in which numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is fixed.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set value is changed (see FIG. ), the numbers will be displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the settings are changed. The control order of segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information can be obtained than the specific information already presented, Unable to obtain new specific information. As a result, if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific conditions will be met in a specific period, and the specific conditions to be met. There is concern that interest in specific information presented after a specific period of time may decline.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order in which specific information is presented (number display order and segment display order) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is met, the number of specific conditions that are met in the predetermined period is greater than the number of specific conditions that are met in the preceding predetermined period. Even if there is little information, new specific information may be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is difficult to determine whether or not the specific conditions are met in a specific period. It is possible to make the user interested in the number of specific conditions, and it is also possible to make the user interested in specific information that is presented after a specific period of time has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively improve the interest of gaming by presenting specific information that allows you to specify or infer non-set values (set values) depending on the number of times a specific condition is met. Become.

Predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which specific information is presented include, for example, winning a jackpot, starting the opening of a jackpot game, opening/closing execution mode, or ending of a jackpot game. is possible. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, since the presentation order of specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time a jackpot game is executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of specific information in a jackpot game, so it is possible to increase interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, the predetermined conditions include winning a specific jackpot (for example, a certain variable jackpot, normal jackpot, or jackpot in a low probability mode), and winning a specific jackpot game (for example, a certain variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode). It is conceivable that the opening of a jackpot game for a jackpot, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of a jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the number of times the specific information presentation order is determined (changed) is reduced compared to the case where the predetermined conditions are not limited to a specific jackpot or jackpot game. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information will be presented in comparison to the specific information presented previously, the difficulty in identifying all non-setting values (identifying setting values) will increase. , it is possible to prevent all non-setting values from being identified (setting values being identified) at an early stage. This can prevent a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 when the set value is low, for example.

Furthermore, the predetermined condition may include the start or end of a predetermined period or a specific period. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information can be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is also conceivable that a specific performance is determined or executed as a variable game performance. The specific performance in this case may be set to either a non-reach performance or a reach performance, for example. Typically, the specific performance is a premium performance in which a jackpot or a variable jackpot among variable game performances is determined. Furthermore, as a specific performance, it is also possible that decorative symbols are displayed in a specific combination in the symbol display section 341 in a stopped state or a temporary stopped state (intermediate stopped state). For example, when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" in the symbol display section 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "767", when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "367" In addition to cases where the display is stopped at the (break-up) mark, when a development performance such as a super reach performance or special reach performance is executed as a reach performance, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development performance will be executed. ) may be considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed, for example, "7 development 7", the left and right decorative symbols are displayed temporarily in a reach state (intermediate stop display), It is conceivable that a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Even when predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information can be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions may include a single jackpot occurring multiple times in a row, or the same specific information being presented in the same order multiple times in a row. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new information as specific information. Therefore, it becomes easier to obtain new information as specific information, so it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom when new specific information cannot be obtained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, if a predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the presentation order of specific information determined (changed) may be given priority to the predetermined condition that is satisfied first, or Priority may be given to the presentation order of specific information that is determined (changed) based on a predetermined condition that is satisfied.

In an example of the present embodiment, multiple non-settings are set as specific information on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (a predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started). The display order of the numbers corresponding to each value and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined, and the end of the predetermined period is set according to these display orders. (after the elapse of time), all or part of the numbers for specifying the plurality of non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in FIG. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is the difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game performance start flag is set to on (step S2601). The jackpot game performance start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game performance is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in FIG. 37. Then, when the jackpot game performance start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2602, and when the jackpot game performance start flag is off (step S2601: No), the display order Finish the setting process.

<Step S2602>
If the jackpot game performance start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game performance is a low probability mode jackpot (step S2602 ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot is the first win and the predetermined period is started. Whether or not it is a low probability mode jackpot is determined by whether, for example, when a jackpot game is started, the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is a low probability mode jackpot or a high probability mode jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot game start command includes the probability mode information indicating the jackpot game start command, and the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, the probability mode information indicating the probability mode information is included in the command determination process of FIG. This can be determined by setting a flag indicating a jackpot in the low probability mode on or off, and checking the flag with the MPU 51. Note that the probability mode information may be set as a separate command from the jackpot game start command.

Then, when the jackpot is in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the jackpot is the first jackpot (jackpot at the beginning of a predetermined period), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2603. On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, if it is a jackpot in the high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If it is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-setting values on the 7-segment display section 39. is determined (step S2604), and the control order of segments A to G for each number is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process ends.

Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is as shown in FIG. It is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in . Further, the determined display order of numbers is stored in the RAM 512.

Furthermore, the control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders for segments A to G are defined according to the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. The probabilities are set to be the same. Then, the control order of segments A to G is determined from a plurality of control orders to the same order for each number, depending on the value of the control order type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each number is set. Ru. Further, the determined control order of segments A to G is stored in the RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order of each number is may be different. That is, the control order of segments A to G may be determined individually for each of a plurality of numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display section 39 is determined every predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is met, so that the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is greater than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Even if the amount is small, new specific information may be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is difficult to determine whether or not the specific conditions are met in a specific period. It is possible to make the user interested in the number of specific conditions, and it is also possible to make the user interested in specific information that is presented after a specific period of time has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of times when a specific condition that allows the non-set value (set value) to be specified or inferred is met. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first and second embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to third embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed after the specific period has elapsed (ending of the jackpot game). The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the first embodiment described above, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined period (after a specific period has elapsed).

By the way, if a player misses or forgets to present specific information during a specified period, he or she may use specific It is assumed that the applicant wishes to reconfirm the information. Further, when a player is replaced, it is assumed that the replaced player wishes to confirm specific information that was displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the specified period, the specific information cannot be reconfirmed because it is not presented outside the specified period.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, all or part of the specific information presented in the past can be presented during a special period other than the specified period. In this way, by being able to present specific information that was presented in the past during a special period other than the specified period, the player can confirm specific information that was presented in the past during the special period. In other words, if a player misses or forgets to present specific information during a specified period, the player can reconfirm the specific information that was displayed in the past, and if the player is replaced, the player can check the specific information displayed after the player is replaced. The player can confirm specific information presented to past players. This allows players to specify or infer multiple non-setting values (setting values) by taking into account specific information presented to past players. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

Here, the special period includes, for example, a period of a standby state (customer waiting state) in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is executed. Since the special period is a standby period in this way, it becomes possible to check specific information presented in the past while no game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of various performances executed on the symbol display section 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable game performances and jackpot game performances, from being obstructed.

In addition, if it is possible to present all or part of the specific information that was presented in the past during the standby state, predetermined input operations such as password input operations and command input operations may be performed on specific display screens that can be moved to during the standby state. It is also conceivable to make it a condition that the operation be performed. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the symbol display section 341 at the end of a jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, passwords and commands can be entered externally by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code on the symbol display section 341 in the jackpot game, and reading this matrix type two-dimensional code using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone. It may also be possible to obtain the information through so-called mobile linkage, which is transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information that was presented in the past during the standby state, on the condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, Only players who can enter passwords, commands, etc., that is, only players who have been presented with all or part of the specific information, can confirm all or part of the specific information that has been presented in the past during the standby period. becomes possible. This makes it possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior and free riding in which all or part of past specific information is confirmed by other players.

In addition, by using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be moved to in the standby state, all or part of the specific information previously presented on the mobile terminal can be read. It is also conceivable to have the information presented.

Further, the special period may be set during the jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the opening/closing execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented in a state where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not clearly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display or suggestion of the result of the jackpot lottery from being obstructed by the presentation of specific information. Additionally, since jackpot games are executed after the variable game clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, player interest tends to decline; By presenting the specific information, interest in the jackpot game is increased.

Moreover, it is also possible to set the special period during a variable game. Here, in the total time during which the game is executed (the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on minus the standby time), as a theoretical value, compared to the execution time of the jackpot variable game, the variable game has a longer execution time. Therefore, by making it possible to present past specific information during a variable game, it becomes possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when setting a special period during a variable game, for a certain period before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state where a reach effect is not being executed as a variable game effect, or when the variable time is short, It is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the display of the decorative symbols from being obstructed from clearly indicating or suggesting the lottery results in the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, presentation of past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's will.

If the past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to have the past specific information presented at a timing that the player does not expect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with unexpected gameplay. Furthermore, since past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player performing any operations on the gaming machine 10, even if the player has little knowledge about the gaming machine 10, , it becomes possible to know specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among players.

Examples of cases in which past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include, for example, presenting specific information that has been presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state; When a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in a certain percentage (including 100%), specific information that was presented in the past before the said reach effect is executed, variable games, etc. For example, it may be decided to present specific information that has been presented in the past through a lottery executed at a specific timing of a jackpot game. When specific information that has been presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in the standby state, the player takes into account the past specific information that is presented on the demonstration screen and selects the game machine to play from an empty machine. 10 can be selected, the degree of freedom and convenience when selecting the gaming machine 10 on which to play the game are improved. In addition, if a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in a variable game and specific information that was presented in the past before the said reach effect is presented, the presentation of the past specific information is Since this plays a role as a advance notification performance that a specific reach performance will be executed, the interest in variable games is improved. In addition, the presentation of past specific information in variable games may be used to suggest expectations (reliability) in the event that the lottery result is a jackpot (including a confirmation presentation that indicates a jackpot) or It is also possible to perform this as a chance-up effect to improve expectations (trust). In this case as well, the interest in the variable game is improved. Further, when specific information presented in the past is presented by a lottery executed at a specific timing of a variable game or a jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at a random specific timing determined by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to particularly add surprise to the game. In addition, if the player can know the specific timing at which specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, which increases the interest of the game. is improved.

On the other hand, if the presentation of past specific information in a special period is executed by the player's will, the special If it is a period, the player can actively check past specific information at a timing of his/her own preference. Therefore, when specifying or estimating multiple non-setting values (setting values) in consideration of past specific information, the timing of presenting the past specific information is not limited by the gaming machine 10 and reflects one's own intention. This improves convenience.

Here, as an example of presentation of past specific information in a special period according to the player's will, the player presses the operation button 2 during a special period set during a standby state, during a variable game, or during a jackpot game. For example, specific information presented in the past may be presented when a predetermined operation is performed.

In an example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-setting values displayed by the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending (regular period) of the jackpot game is displayed, and the waiting state is During the period (special period), by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or selection deciding section 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the ending of the last three jackpot games can be changed. It is displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, in an example of this embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 on the pattern display section 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or a command. It is.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes a selection determining section 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determining section 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts a push operation by the player in a standby state, which will be described later, and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display section 341. The selection determining section 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from the options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen in the standby state screen transition process shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, which will be described later. (see FIG. 60), and includes an upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means a state in which the provisionally selected content is determined (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the determination button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch, which switch the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, as shown in FIG. 211d. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated based on the input signals of each of the switches 211a to 211d.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been started, it is determined that each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated. Of course, it may be determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 continues or has been completed. .

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated, based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and receives operations by the player on the touch keys may be provided as the operation means. Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, it is also possible to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the symbol display section 341 to receive operations from the player. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Further, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches, but may also be piezoelectric elements, for example, as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player. .

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to the same processing (steps S2000 to S2005) as the sub-timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above, operation detection processing ( Step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process of detecting whether or not the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B have been operated. Here, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2802), selection button operation detection processing (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be determined whether or not there is. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Furthermore, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, the operation status of the most recent three times at an interval of 1 msec is set as the operation history of the operation button 20 in the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 is determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined based on the combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is being continued (see FIG. 38(A)). Furthermore, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38(A)). Furthermore, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38(A)). If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated (see FIG. 38(A)). Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Further, FIG. 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations for the operation buttons 20. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to on. Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3003. The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operating state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and send this operation button operation continuation command to the audio lamp control device 5. . As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation button 20 is being continuously operated, and therefore the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of the time. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time period during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Step S3005>
If the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. A judgment is made (step S3005). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)), and the operation detection pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times will be reflected, so the radio wave Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the MPU 41 determines that the second operation detection flag is not on in step S3002 (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 59(A)). Note that when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation process>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Right selection button operation process>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an upward selection operation detection pattern determination process, a downward selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects an upper selection operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upward selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. If this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). used.

Furthermore, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the down selection button from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. A down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the down selection button 212 for three times. If this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). used.

In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc. occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects a left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the left selection button 213 for three times. If this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, so detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the three operation states of the right selection button 214. If this occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operated state.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the decision button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the decision button 21B, which is determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the decision button 21B. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" have occurred as the operation states of the determination button 21B three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has started). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON, and the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has ended). .

In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc. occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 controls all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags. Set to off. Note that, when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operated state.

[Standby state screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed in 2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the standby state in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is being executed, the operation button 20, the selection button 21A, or the In response to the operation on the button 21B, the screen of the symbol display section 341 is moved, and a process is executed that allows the player to make various selections and settings. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition on the symbol display section 341 in a standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is stopped, the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are "0", and the state does not shift to the jackpot game state, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols is stopped. State fluctuation stop screen is maintained. If the player operates the operation button 20 after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and a cursor image.

The multiple screen transition images are images for selecting a transition destination display screen, and include a plurality of selectable items (transition destination display screens). The multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen that displays "7-segment display history", and a character selection screen that displays "character selection". A character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the character selection screen, a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen that displays "Character customization," and a transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen that displays "Back" Contains variable stop screen transition images.

The cursor image is an image that indicates which item is currently temporarily selected among multiple selectable items, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images is an image that indicates which item is currently temporarily selected among multiple selectable items. This item is temporarily selected. The example shown in FIG. 60 shows that "7 segment display section history" is temporarily selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the multiple screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from other screen transition images in order to emphasize that it has been temporarily selected. . Note that the temporary selection items can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, by operating the enter button 21B, the temporarily selected item (transfer destination display screen) is determined, and the display screen corresponding to the item is selected. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for "7-segment display history" and operates the enter button 21B, the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. will be moved to

The 7-segment display section history selection screen is a screen that can be shifted to a history screen on which the contents of specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period are displayed. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display section 39 for any of the most recent three predetermined periods, and is the previous history screen on which the contents of specific information for the previous predetermined period are displayed. , a 2nd previous history screen where the content of specific information for the 2nd previous predetermined period is displayed, and a 3rd previous history screen where the content of the specific information for the 3rd previous predetermined period is displayed. Each history screen is a history image in the same form as the additional image displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the second half of the ending of the jackpot game (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C)). including. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and shows five settings imitating the 7-segment display section 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Contains value-suggesting images. In the example shown in FIG. 60, after the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in the previous predetermined period, segments A to This indicates that C has a history of being lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display history selection screen includes a cursor image indicating that it has been temporarily selected, and a previous history screen for transitioning to the previous history screen, which displays "History 1 (1st previous)". Transition image, 2nd previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the 2nd previous history screen that is displayed as "History 2 (2nd time ago)", 3rd previous history screen that is displayed as "History 3 (3rd time ago)" It includes a 3rd previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the history screen, and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen where "end" is displayed. Then, on the 7-segment display section history selection screen, by operating the enter button 21B, the temporarily selected item (transfer destination display screen) is determined, and the display screen corresponding to the item is selected. For example, if the player operates the enter button 21B when the previous history screen transition image of "History 1 (1st previous)" is temporarily selected, the display screen changes from the 7-segment display history selection screen to 1. You will be moved to the previous history screen. Also, when "History 2 (2nd time ago)" is selected, the 7-segment display section history selection screen is moved to the 2nd previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3rd time ago)" is selected, is transferred from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen. Further, when "End" is selected, the screen is transferred from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to shift from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any of the 1st previous history screen, 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen according to the player's selection. That is, the player can check the desired history information by moving to the desired history screen. This makes it possible to effectively check the history while avoiding checking history information such as previously checked information or information with a small amount of information, so it is possible to efficiently check the history.

Further, in this embodiment, information for specifying a non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on a 7-segment display section 39 different from the symbol display section 341 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when displaying information for specifying non-set values, visual recognition of the image effect executed on the symbol display section 341 is not obstructed. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending is displayed on a symbol display section 341 different from the 7-segment display section 39. Here, since the symbol display section 341 generally has a large display area, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the symbol display section 341. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be used to perform various settings such as effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display section 341, it becomes possible to check the history information through operations similar to those for making various settings. Therefore, the convenience of checking history information is improved.

Note that in this embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also possible to display a plurality of pieces of history information on one screen at the same time. In this case, since many histories can be checked at once, the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

In addition, on the top menu screen, if the character screen transition image of "Character selection" is selected, the display screen will be transitioned to the character selection screen, and if the character customization screen transition image of "Character customization" is selected, the display screen will be displayed. The screen will shift to the character customization screen. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in a variable game production, etc., and it is possible to customize the costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc. of the character.

In addition, in the top menu screen, when the "return" variation stop screen transition image is selected, the display screen is shifted to the variation stop screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 for the most recent three predetermined periods can be checked by operating the selection decision section 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B) in the standby state. I can do it. Therefore, if the player misses or forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a jackpot game, the player can reconfirm the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past. When the player is replaced, the player after the replacement can check the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. This allows the player to specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) by taking into consideration the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the standby state screen transition process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. The procedure of the standby state screen transition process executed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 55 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen transition process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuating game performance flag set to on in step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 to OFF (step S3101: No), and executes the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. If the jackpot game performance flag, which is set to ON when transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game performance process in step S2004, is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the standby state I judge that there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in a standby state if the variable game performance flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or if the jackpot game performance flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes). I judge that.

Then, if the MPU 51 is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the process moves to step S3103, and if it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), it ends the standby state screen transition process. .

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether the fluctuation stop screen flag is set on (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display section 341 is a fluctuation stop screen. This fluctuation stop screen flag is used when transitioning from the fluctuation gaming state or the jackpot gaming state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the fluctuation stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state, as shown in FIG. 62 described below. is set to on in step S3120. Further, the fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when a display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen is transitioned to the fluctuation stop screen. Specifically, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109 in FIG. 62, which will be described later, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to is transferred from the previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen, when the display screen is transferred from the second previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3115, and when the display screen is transferred from the second previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3117. It is also set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 3rd previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen in the 3rd previous history screen process. The variable stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when variable display of decorative symbols is started.

Then, if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3104, and if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No). , the process moves to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the operation button 20 has started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, if the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3105, and if the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
If the second operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen where various selections and settings are made (step S3105) (FIG. 60 reference). That is, when the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is a variable display screen, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen to ON (step S3106), and sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to OFF (step S3106). S3107), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON. (Step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is to be transitioned from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3109. The process moves to S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, the temporarily selected item is changed in accordance with the operation on the selection button 21A. In addition, in the top menu screen processing, when the operation on the enter button 21B is performed, a screen corresponding to the temporarily selected item, specifically a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character selection screen, is displayed. Shift the display screen to the customization screen. Further, when the display screen is transferred from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transfer destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen is set to ON. (Step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process moves to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), The process moves to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process that is executed when the 7-segment display section history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, if the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3113. S3112: No), the process moves to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the 1st previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 2nd previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 2nd previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3114). The 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 2nd previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7 segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, if the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3115, and if the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3115. S3114: No), the process moves to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 2nd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the second previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the second previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 2nd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 3rd previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3rd previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3116). The 6th previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7 segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3117 if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), and if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3117. S3116: No), the process moves to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7 segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the three previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON. (Step S3118). The other screen flags are set to on when the display screen is transitioned from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to on (step S3118: Yes), other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition processing ends. On the other hand, if the other screen flags are set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120), and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, if all the screen flags are off, the change is made from the variable gaming state or the jackpot gaming state to the waiting state, and the display screen can be determined to be the variable stop screen. Set the stop screen flag on.

[7 segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, the display screen is changed to the 7-segment history selection screen according to the player's operation on the selection decision unit 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B). A process of moving from the selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the previous history screen, the history screen 2nd time, or the history screen 3rd time is executed (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second upper selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and is used to detect the upper selection operation performed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to on in pattern determination processing. If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3202, and if the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the process moves to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. Execute. For example, if "History 2 (2nd time ago)" is temporarily selected before the 2nd upper selection pattern flag is set to on, the temporary selection display changes to "History 1 (1st time ago)". (See Figure 60). Note that if the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (1st previous)" displayed at the top of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display is not changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, if the operation on the upper selection button 211 has not been started, the MPU 51 determines that the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the lower selection button 212 has started, and is used to detect the lower selection operation performed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process in FIG. Set to on in pattern determination processing. If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3204, and if the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the process moves to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. Execute. For example, if "History 2 (previously 2 times)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to on, the temporary selection display changes to "History 3 (previously 3 times)". (See Figure 60). Note that if the lower selection button 212 is operated while "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the option The temporary selection display may be changed to "history 1 (previous time)" displayed at the top of the image (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the decision button 21B has started, and is set to on in the decision button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process in FIG. Ru. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated when the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen. Then, if the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3206, and if the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and if the determination button 21B is operated, provisional selection is performed. It is determined whether the item that has been displayed is "end" (step S3207). If the item that was tentatively selected when the enter button 21B was operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3208, and selects the provisionally selected item when the enter button 21B is operated. If the selected item is not "end" (step S3207: No), the process moves to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the tentatively selected item is "End" when the decision button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is a fluctuation stop screen (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
If the temporarily selected item is not "End" when the enter button 21B is operated (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily selected item is "History 1 (1st Previous)". It is determined whether or not (step S3210). If the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (previously)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3211, and the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (previously)" (step S3210: Yes). )" (step S3210: No), the process moves to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the temporarily selected item is "History 1 (1st previous)" (Step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 1st previous history screen (Step S3210: Yes). S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to ON (step S3212), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen process.

<Step S3213>
If the item that was temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “History 1 (1st time)” (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 changes the item that was temporarily selected to “History 2 (2nd time)”. (step S3213). If the temporarily selected item is "History 2 (2 times ago)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3214, and the temporarily selected item is "History 2 (2 times ago)". )" (step S3213: No), the process moves to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the temporarily selected item is "history 2 (2nd time ago)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the display screen from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 2nd time previous history screen (step S3213: Yes). S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2nd previous history screen flag to ON (step S3215), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen process.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “History 2 (2nd time)” (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 changes the item provisionally selected to “History 3 (3rd time)”. Therefore, the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen (step S3216) (see Figure 60), and the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to on. (Step S3217), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

In this way, on the 7-segment history screen that is executed in the standby state, the display screen changes from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any of the 1st previous history screen, 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen. and corresponds to each of the plurality of non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 for the past three predetermined periods. All or part of the specific information can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, if the player misses or forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a jackpot game, the player can reconfirm the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past. When the player is replaced, the player after the replacement can check the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. This allows the player to specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) by taking into consideration the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99, and unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation, the display screen is the history screen (previous history screen). , 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen) to other screens such as the change stop screen. Therefore, the player stops launching the game ball 99 and maintains the standby state without being subject to time constraints such as when specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of a jackpot game. This allows the user to carefully and carefully take their time and check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past at their own pace. This allows players to think carefully at their own pace when specifying or estimating multiple non-setting values (setting values) based on past specific information. The convenience of specifying or estimating the set value is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 that can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state is displayed for a predetermined period of three times in the past. However, there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. That is, it may be possible to confirm specific information for a predetermined period of one, two, or four or more past times.

Further, past specific information may be displayed not only by the symbol display section 341 but also by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, or a display section different from the symbol display section 341 and the 7-segment display section 39, for example, a separate display section provided for displaying the past specific information. It may be a display section. In addition, if there is a display section provided to execute a part of a performance such as a variable game performance, apart from the symbol display section 341, past information may be displayed on the display section. Conceivable.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to third embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to fourth embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after the specific period has elapsed (the ending of the jackpot game), each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is set. A case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is ended with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set as a predetermined period passes, specific information is displayed in a prescribed period set after the specific period has elapsed.

By the way, when displaying numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39, all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, so that the numbers (non-set values) to be displayed are setting value) can be specified. Furthermore, it is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become the control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, segment A, which is the first target to be controlled, is turned off. The number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. Furthermore, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." Then, when segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is "5" or "3". 6". Further, when the third control target, segment C, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. Further, when the fifth control target, segment E, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off. It can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled. Therefore, even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become control targets, the next display will be displayed only after all segments A to G become control targets. Control of segments A to G for displaying the target numbers is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become control targets, the display of the next number to be displayed will start. Until now, information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 to identify the numbers that the player has already recognized. In other words, when segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven segment display section 39. There is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during a period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game every time the specific period set for the jackpot game passes, so it corresponds to each of the plurality of non-set values. All or part of the numbers (specific information) to be used are dispensed every time a specific period passes. Therefore, if a number corresponding to any non-set value is displayed in the specific period that has elapsed earlier, it is possible that the user may forget the number. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or estimate the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display section) having a plurality of information display sections (six individual lamp sections) greater than or equal to the number of non-set values (five), each information display section Information (numbers) identifying non-set values is displayed. Each information display section has two modes: a display state (lit state) in which specific information is presented, and a non-display state (unlit state) in which specific information is not presented. Non-setting values can be specified by specific information displayed on the information display section. By setting the information display section in either of the two modes, the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display section in the display state. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-setting values is displayed as specific information, and information that allows estimation of non-setting values is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

There are no particular restrictions on the non-set value display means, but for example, a display device having a plurality of lamp groups that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display sections, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc. Examples include matrix displays and plasma displays. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is also possible to use a display means in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of information display sections corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is displayed, and until the end of the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set, at least for a specific period The information display section that was previously set to the display state is set to the display state. For example, the information display unit that was in the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display section that was in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that the But you can check it. Therefore, you will not forget the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, and it will be convenient when specifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and even when specifying or estimating the setting value. performance is improved.

In addition, the information display section that is in the display state during the specific period may be kept in the display state at all times until the end of the jackpot game for which the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set, and only during the jackpot game. The display state may be maintained, or the display state may be maintained only for a specific period.

In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display section having six individual lamp sections labeled with any number from 1 to 6, a game ball is entered into a special out ball opening of a croon device during a specific period. By winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is triggered by It is turned on. Then, during the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set ends.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment. Note that FIGS. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modified examples of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of turning on and off the lamp display section 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A in place of the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A. A lamp display section 35 is provided on the game board 31 in place of the seven segment display section 39 in the embodiment.

The special out ball discharging section 38A is for discharging the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge section 38A has a configuration in which the stopper section 383 is omitted in the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and the game ball retention section 38A has a structure in which the stopper section 383 is omitted. It has a similar configuration. In such a special out ball discharging section 38A, the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 are discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharging section 38A. be done. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after a specific period has elapsed as in the first embodiment described above, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 during the specific period. However, each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

The lamp display section 35 presents specific information for specifying non-set values, and includes a plurality of (six) individual lamp sections (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. including. The first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (linear) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display section 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. As a result, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 can be turned on and off individually.

The number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp section 351, and when the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 1, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 1 is denied. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp section 352, and when the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 2, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 2 is denied. The number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp section 353, and when the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 3, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 3 is denied. The number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp section 354, and when the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 4, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 4 is denied. The number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp section 355, and when the fifth individual lamp section 355 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 5, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 5 is denied. The number 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp section 356, and when the sixth individual lamp section 356 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 6, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 6 is denied.

That is, in the lamp display section 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are turned on correspond to a plurality of non-setting values, and the game setting value corresponding to the number is denied as a setting value. Ru. When the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp section 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. The number corresponding to one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that is the state corresponds to the setting value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp sections 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp section 351 is turned off, the non-set value is 2 to 356. 6, and the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp section 352 is turned off, the non-set value is 1, 3 to 6, and it is specified that the set value is 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 352, 354 to 356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp section 353 is turned off, It is specified that the set values are 1, 2, 4 to 6, and that the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp section 354 is turned off, the It is specified that the set values are 1 to 3, 5, and 6, and that the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 354, 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp section 355 is turned off, the non-set value is 1 to 356. 4 and 6, and it is specified that the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp sections 351 to 355 are lit and only the sixth individual lamp section 356 is turned off, the non-set value is 1 to 5, and the set It is specified that the value is 6. The first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 are controlled in the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display section 35 (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356), and the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value based on the lighting state or the off state of the light. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display section 35 (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356), and the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value based on the lighting state or the off state of the light. The procedure for setting value suggestion processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set on. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3302 when the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), and moves the process to step S3311 when the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No). to move to.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3303, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 sets the relevant setting. Ends value suggestion processing.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are activated. A lamp lighting lottery will be held to decide whether to turn on the lamp or not. That is, each time a game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp sections 351 to 356.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends. This allows the setting values to be recognized. In the 7-segment display section 39, in order to display 5 numbers, it is necessary to control each of the 7 segments A to G 5 times. ) or more must hold true. That is, it is necessary to enter 35 game balls 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 display information corresponding to non-set values, and the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are in the lighting state. It is controlled in only two modes: and the light-off state. Therefore, in order to display five non-set values on the lamp display section 35 so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition only needs to be satisfied five or more times. Further, in this embodiment, a croon device 37 similar to that of the first embodiment described above is employed. Therefore, if specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display non-set values will be It is obvious that the light will be turned on with a small number of jackpots.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. , the condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by employing the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty in identifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the difficulty level of lighting up the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display section 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily identified. That is, the set value is prevented from being easily recognized.

The probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is determined by indicating the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 by displaying five numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. The level of difficulty is set to be the same or approximately the same as the level of difficulty. Further, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probability for five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or the winning probability for at least one individual lamp section 351 to 356. The winning probability may be different from that of the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356, a game feature is provided in which the probability that the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value are lit is stabilized. Ru. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100×(1/7)% (=14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). be done. This is because in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when seven game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. Also in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball opening 373, about one individual lamp section 351 to 356 is lit on average. Note that when the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and may be set as appropriate. Can be changed.

In addition, the lottery condition that triggers the execution of a lamp lighting lottery for lighting one of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is a special lottery condition of the clone device 37. If it is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the out ball opening 373, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the degree of difficulty of establishing this lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty of meeting the lottery conditions is low, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be set low, and as the difficulty of meeting the lottery conditions increases, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be set to be high. It will be done. By setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery in accordance with the degree of difficulty in establishing the lottery conditions, it is possible to specify the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition necessary for lighting one individual lamp section 351 to 356. can be made uniform regardless of the type of conditions. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (more precisely, as lottery triggers).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp section 351 to 356 is made different from that for the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, a game in which the probability of individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values being lit varies. gender is given. If the probability of winning for at least one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 is set to be different from that of the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, it is conceivable to set the winning probability to be lower for the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are controlled later in the control order, for example. As an example, the winning probability is set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are controlled earlier.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process moves to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the set value processing. .

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads the lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the lit lamp information is information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit, and includes lit lamp flag information as shown in FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C). The lit lamp flag information includes a first lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, and a second lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. , a third lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth individual lamp section. It consists of a fifth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is lit, and a sixth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp section 356 is lit. Each lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned off. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second lit lamp flag is set to on, the first, third to sixth lit lamp flags are set to off, and the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are turned off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether all lit lamp flags are set to on in the lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether all five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that specify non-set values are lit. Then, when all the lit lamp flags are set to on in the lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, if all five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that specify non-set values are lit, there are no other individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that should be lit, so the set value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, if there is a lit lamp flag set to OFF in the lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process moves to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is a lit lamp flag set to OFF in the lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads out the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by a procedure similar to the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the setting values stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or when the setting values are changed. This lamp control order determination table is similar to the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment described above, and if the numbers in the number display order determination table are considered as numbers attached to individual lamps, good. The number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp section 351, and similarly, the number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp section 351. Numbers 2 to 6 correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the display order A1 is determined when the set value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is: second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit The order is as follows: lamp part 353 → fourth individual lamp part 354 → fifth individual lamp part 355 → sixth individual lamp part 356. Furthermore, in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above, each display order has the same probability of being selected, and in the lamp control order determination table in this embodiment, each lamp control order is selected. The probabilities are the same.

Note that the lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when a set value is changed, but it may also be set when a predetermined period is started. Also, the lamp control orders do not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read out in step S3305 and the lit lamp information read out in step S3307 (step S3308), and The lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on (step S3309). That is, each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is executed, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit. Specific information indicating the non-set value is presented. Then, the MPU 51 updates the lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the setting value suggestion process. For example, when the second individual lamp section 352 is turned on when all the lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG. 68(B), the lit lamp information is as shown in FIG. As shown in 68(C), the second lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp section 352 is set to ON.

As described above, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to The non-set value can be specified by lighting up 356. That is, in this embodiment, the non-set value can be specified by lighting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 even before the specific period has elapsed. Since the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are in either of the two states, the lit state and the unlit state, non-set values can be identified by the numbers attached to the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are in the lit state. be. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-set values by lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and information that allows estimation of non-set values is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

<Step S3311>
When the ending performance start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S3311). The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game performance (ending performance), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process in FIG. 37. Then, when the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S3311: No), the corresponding set value End suggestion processing.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game production end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type to be ended is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37, is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 executes the setting value suggestion process. finish.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit among the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35. The individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned off (step S3313), the lit lamp information is cleared (initialized), and the setting value suggestion process is ended. That is, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 are turned off when the end of the predetermined period is set as a 5R normal jackpot. As a result, the lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit at any time, that is, the specific information that specifies the non-set value. . Therefore, you will not forget the specific information that was previously presented in the same predetermined period, and it will be more convenient when identifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or estimating the setting value. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 and the player wins the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed as a trigger, the non-set value on the lamp display section 35 corresponds to the non-setting value. The individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned on, but it is optional to perform a lamp lighting lottery, and instead of performing a lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment, a game is placed on the special out ball opening 373. When the ball 99 enters, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values may be turned on. If the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of putting the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the clown device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is sent to the special out ball sensor 384. It is conceivable to adjust the probability that the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 will be lit by sorting the routes into routes detected by and routes not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 that present a non-set value are in one of two states, the lit state and the unlit state, and the individual lamp section 351 in the lit state Information specifying non-setting values is presented according to the type (number) of 356 to 356. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-set values by lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and information that allows estimation of non-set values is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

In addition, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit are immediately lit by winning a lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. The lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 remain lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information that identifies the non-set value is checked at any time based on whether or not the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit. be able to. Therefore, you will not forget the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, and it will be convenient when specifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and even when specifying or estimating the setting value. performance is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. , the condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. As a result, the degree of difficulty in satisfying a specific condition is adjusted based on the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty in identifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the difficulty level of lighting up each of the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display section 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily identified. , that is, the set value is prevented from being easily recognized.

It should be noted that the light is immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery which is triggered by the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, but the lamp lighting lottery is executed ( The fact that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be displayed to the player on a display means other than the lamp display section 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), it is clearly shown to the player that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clown device 37), and The results of the lamp lighting lottery are clearly shown to the player as shown in (B1) or FIG. 69 (B2), and the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit as shown in FIG. 69 (C1) or FIG. 69 (C2). Information regarding the symbol is clearly displayed on the symbol display section 341. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 are lit. An image is displayed to draw attention to the possibility, that is, the lamp display section 35 (roulette). In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) by the symbol display section 341, the game ball 99 will be displayed in the special out ball opening 373. Even if you miss that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, the image displayed on the symbol display section 341 will show that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, that is, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 It is possible to know that there is a possibility that the light may be turned on.

If the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are to be turned on is clearly displayed. In the illustrated example, it is clearly shown that the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. In this way, by clearly displaying the result of the lamp lighting lottery on the symbol display section 341, it is possible to grasp whether or not the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit not only on the lamp display section 35 but also on the symbol display section 341. This makes it possible to improve convenience.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), the symbol display section 341 continuously displays information regarding the lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the opening/closing execution mode). be done. That is, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the individual lamp section 35 that are lit are displayed on the symbol display section 341. Note that until the end of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit may be displayed, for example, in the jackpot game (at least in the opening/closing execution mode). .

On the other hand, if the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-winning result, an image clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery result is a non-winning is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit is continuously displayed by the symbol display section 341 during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode), so that the lamp display section 35 is Convenience is improved because the lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 can be confirmed on the symbol display section 341 without needing confirmation.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only on the symbol display section 341 instead of on the lamp display section 35 provided separately from the symbol display section 341. That is, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect on the symbol display section 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, an ending additional image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending performance of the jackpot game. . For example, as shown in FIG. 70, at the ending of a jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display section 35 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as an additional ending image. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), the lamp display section 35 clearly shows that only the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and in the example shown in FIG. It is clearly shown that the sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp section 351 is turned off. In this way, by displaying the on/off state of the lamp display section 35 by the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, it is possible to confirm the on/off state of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that have been lit up to the jackpot game. Therefore, convenience is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp display section 35 has the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 arranged in a row (line shape); It is not limited to those arranged in a row, but other shapes can also be adopted. For example, a lamp display section 35 in which individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in an annular manner as shown in FIG. 71(A), and a lamp display section 35 in which individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71(B) may be adopted. You can also do that. Further, the lamp display section 35 may be one in which individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a staggered manner.

Further, instead of the lamp display section 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, a staggered pattern, etc. may be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible within an applicable range.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the setting value that defines the jackpot probability at the ending of the jackpot game is set according to the number of special out balls that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. A case has been described in which at least a part of non-set values other than the above are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

By the way, in the gaming machine, the accessory continuous activation device is activated under the condition that the condition device is activated when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination in the variable game, and the special electric reward is activated by the activation of the accessory continuous activation device. There are some games that allow you to acquire a large amount of game balls by operating the objects in succession.

Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a specific combination of symbols is displayed (a combination corresponding to a jackpot (for example, double). It is activated when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. "Accessory object continuous operation device" refers to a special device that can continuously operate special electric accessory objects. The "condition device" and the "accessory continuous operation device" are comprehensive conceptual devices, and in this embodiment, for example, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 (executes control to realize the device), the ROM 411 (executes control to realize the device), A RAM 412 (used for control to realize the device), various devices driven by the control program, etc.

Furthermore, the term "special electric accessory" refers to an electric accessory that opens or enlarges the entrance to the grand prize opening. In this embodiment, the "special electric accessory" includes, for example, an opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable prize opening 316.

As a game machine, the time from the activation of the condition device when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination in a variable game to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device (the start of the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode) Some models have a relatively long time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "preparation time").

However, if the preparation time is long, that is, if the time from the stop display of the decorative pattern to the start of the opening/closing execution mode is long, the player's time will be wasted, and in such a gaming machine, it will be difficult to play the game. It is expected that interest will decrease. In particular, if the closing time of the game hall is approaching or if there is a limit on the playing time due to personal circumstances, if the opening/closing execution mode is delayed, the impression of the game machine will be poor due to feelings such as irritation and discomfort. It is also expected that this will happen.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a first movement path and a second movement path are provided in which the time from when the game ball is launched to when the accessory continuous operation device is activated (difficulty in operating the accessory continuous operation device) is different. There is. Further, the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball. The selection of the first moving route and the second moving route can be made by the player, and can be done, for example, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. When the first moving route is selected, the accessory continuous actuating device can be activated in a short time after the game ball is launched. On the other hand, when the second movement path is selected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game balls launched on the second movement path is delayed, for example, by a delay means that limits or delays the falling of the game balls on the game board. . Further, between the first movement route and the second movement route, a significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the activation of the conditional device to the activation of the accessory continuous activation device. In this way, the preparation time can be shortened by allowing the player to select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball, which can make a significant difference in preparation time ( By allowing the player to select a movement route (which can immediately activate the accessory continuous actuation device), the time from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed until the opening/closing execution mode is started can be shortened at the player's will. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the opening/closing execution mode is started, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, if the player's playing time is limited, by allowing the player to select a movement route that reduces preparation time, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening/closing execution mode. can. This prevents the player from having a bad impression of the gaming machine. Further, the delay means for restricting or delaying the falling of game balls on the game board can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effects of providing the delay means can be easily and reliably enjoyed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a predetermined gaming state, a first predetermined area (first ball entry area) provided on the first movement path or a second predetermined area (second ball entry area) provided on the second movement path is used for the game. When the ball passes (enters the ball), a jackpot game is generated after a predetermined determination process is performed.

Here, the predetermined game state includes a state in which a jackpot game can be generated, such as a state in which a conditional device is operating, a state in which a game ball passes through a first predetermined area (first ball entry area) (a ball enters the ball) ), the detection of the passing of the game ball (ball entry) in the first predetermined area (first ball entry area) is not restricted, and the game ball passes through the second predetermined area (second ball entry area). A state in which the detection of the passing (entering ball) of the game ball in the second predetermined area (second ball entering area) is not restricted when the game ball enters the first movement path or the second movement path. The state after the jackpot is detected, the state after the jackpot is announced in the presentation means such as the symbol display section (for example, the state after the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display section, and the rainbow lamp is displayed in the illumination section) The state after the performance is executed, the state after the jackpot confirmation sound or confirmation voice is output from the speaker), the state where the variable game and the jackpot game are not being executed, etc. are determined.

Furthermore, the predetermined determination process includes, for example, a process of determining whether or not a jackpot game can be generated. Specifically, the predetermined determination process includes whether or not the condition device is activated, and when the game ball passes through (enters into) the first predetermined area (first ball entry area), the first predetermined judgment is made. Whether or not the occurrence of a jackpot is restricted by the passage of the game ball in the area (first ball entry area), and if the game ball passes (enters) the second predetermined area (second ball entry area). Whether the occurrence of a jackpot game due to the passing of a game ball in a second predetermined area (second ball entry area) is restricted, and whether the falling of a game ball is delayed for more than a predetermined time by a delay means such as a croon device. It is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display section, whether a variable game is not being executed, whether a jackpot game is not being executed, etc.

In this way, the predetermined determination process is a determination process of whether or not a jackpot game can be generated, so that the first predetermined area (first ball entry area) or the second predetermined area (second ball entry area) is determined. ), a jackpot game is generated when a jackpot game can be generated, and unnecessary occurrence of a jackpot game is restricted when a jackpot game cannot be generated. .

In particular, when a game ball passes through (enters into) a first predetermined area (first ball entry area), the predetermined determination process Whether the occurrence of a jackpot is restricted or not, if the game ball passes (enters) the second predetermined area (second ball entry area), the game in the second predetermined area (second ball entry area) In the case of determining whether or not the occurrence of a jackpot game due to the passing of a ball is restricted, if the movement of a game ball in one movement route is detected in a state in which a jackpot game can be generated, the movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected. By restricting the occurrence of special games using game balls that are fired at different times, a jackpot game can be created by passing a game ball into a predetermined area (ball entry area) provided on one of the movement paths after one movement path is selected. A jackpot game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball moving on the other moving path until the game ball is generated. As a result, after a movement path that generates a special game is selected, a special game can be generated by a game ball on a movement path that is contrary to the player's will, that is, a special game can be caused by the passage of time (timing) that is contrary to the player's will. This will be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player selects a movement route in which the operation of the accessory continuous activation device is delayed, it becomes possible to generate various events using the preparation time. In this way, when a player selects a travel route that requires a long preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, which reduces the preparation time for events, which tends to be boring due to the player's lack of interest. You can enjoy it as it happens. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, while it is possible to operate the accessory continuous actuation device by launching a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) on the second movement path in which the movement of the game ball is delayed, the first movement On the route, the accessory continuous operating device is activated by launching more game balls (for example, 4 to 5 balls) than on the second movement route. In this way, in the second movement route, it is possible to activate the accessory continuous actuation device by launching a small number of game balls (for example, one ball), so that The "base", which is the payout rate (ball payout rate), is prevented from decreasing, and as a result, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by selecting the second movement route R2. On the other hand, in the first movement path, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by launching more game balls (for example, 4 to 5 balls) than in the second movement path, so that the accessory continuous actuation device is activated within a few seconds from the start of launching the game balls. A continuous operating device can be operated. As a result, it is possible to activate the accessory continuous actuation device in a short time after it is launched onto the first movement path, which eliminates the frustration and stress caused by the long time it takes to activate the accessory continuous activation device. Ru. Further, in order to suppress the occurrence of wasted balls, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of wasted balls by stopping the launch of the game ball every time one ball is launched, ie, so-called stop hitting.

Further, in this embodiment, the player can select either the first movement route or the second movement route by adjusting the launch strength (emission strength) of the game ball. In this way, since the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path the game ball should be moved to, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated after the condition device is activated. The player can select the length of preparation time. Further, since the player can select either the first movement route or the second movement route depending on the firing strength of the game ball, it becomes possible to easily select the length of the preparation time.

It is also conceivable to make it impossible for the player to select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball should be moved to, and to allow the gaming machine 10 to select it. In this way, by selecting which of the first movement path and the second movement path the game ball is to be moved by the gaming machine 10, the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device, That is, the time until the jackpot game starts is determined by the gaming machine 10. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing at which the jackpot game starts, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the events executed during the preparation time include, for example, the granting of a benefit, the granting of the right to be granted this benefit, the execution of a predetermined performance such as a special performance, and the activation of game settings. Benefits granted include, for example, the presentation of performance information that is an indicator of the above-mentioned ball output performance (e.g., setting value, base information, continuous character ratio information, character ratio information, and specification or suggestion of the number of unit jackpot drawings) ( Presentation of information that allows game information to be recognized or inferred). Since the bonus provided is the presentation of performance information that is an index of ball output performance, such as information that allows game information to be recognized or inferred, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the ball output performance such as the set value. This improves the interest of the game. In addition, special performances (predetermined performances) include, for example, replays of jackpot performances performed in the variable game that triggered the activation of the conditional device, the appearance of premier characters, the display of images that can recognize or infer game information, and preparations. Examples include game explanation performance regarding the progress of the game over time. The game settings that are enabled include, for example, selection of music output from the speaker 26 in a jackpot game, adjustment of its volume, selection settings for various effects performed in a jackpot game, such as selection of characters that appear in a jackpot game, etc. can be mentioned. In this way, by activating the settings for various performances performed in the jackpot game, it is possible to reduce the need to perform various game settings in the jackpot game, so it becomes possible to enjoy the jackpot game performance.

Additionally, an event that is executed during the preparation time is caused to occur when a specific condition is met at a specific time (event occurrence right granting period) set during the preparation time, or when a specific condition is met during the specific time. It is conceivable to generate events with levels and contents depending on the number of events. In this way, by making it a condition for an event to occur that a specific condition is met during the preparation time, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the specific condition is met during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Ru. In particular, by generating events whose level and content correspond to the number of specific conditions that are met during the preparation time, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific condition is met, but also to the number of specific conditions that are met. This makes the game even more interesting. Further, when an event is generated with a level and content depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preparation time, the event content etc. can be diversified, making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

As a specific condition, for example, in a specific area (for example, general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, through gate 317, a predetermined area set for a special device such as a croon device or a rotating body). Examples include the acquisition of rights that can be acquired through passage of the game ball 99, rights acquisition performance (predetermined performance) performed on the symbol display section 341, and the like. The number of fulfillment of specific conditions includes the number of game balls 99 passing through a specific area, the number of balls played, the number of points that can be earned through rights acquisition effects, the number of coins, money, power, game level, distance, number of characters, etc. Examples include numerical indicators that can be correlated with numbers. As the right acquisition performance, for example, a numerical index acquisition performance (predetermined performance) such as a point acquisition game performance executed on a symbol display section or the like can be considered. Examples of point acquisition game performances include performances in which a coin acquisition game, a mission achievement game, a battle game, a quiz game, a prediction game, etc. are executed. It is sufficient that there is a correlation between the numerical index and the number of fulfillment of a specific condition; for example, one point may correspond to one specific condition being met, or it may be specified for each specific point other than 1 point. It may be possible to correspond to the case where one of the conditions is satisfied. By correlating the number of specific conditions with a numerical index in this way, the contents of the event can be diversified, and for example, the event can be executed as a point-earning performance such as a game performance. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, an event (for example, a predetermined performance such as a special performance or a rights acquisition performance) executed during the preparation time is a predetermined area (for example, a predetermined performance such as a special performance or a rights acquisition performance) in which a jackpot game can be generated by the passage of a game ball (entering the ball). The game is forcibly terminated based on the passing of a game ball (ball entry) in the ball entry area). Specifically, the game effect as a predetermined effect is such that the role object continuous actuation device is activated by the passage of the game ball (ball entry) at the second role linked operation gate as the second predetermined area (second ball entry area). (a jackpot game occurs), the game is forcibly terminated. In this way, the event such as the predetermined performance is terminated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, so that the jackpot game performance can be executed appropriately without being disturbed by the execution of the event such as the predetermined performance. In addition, the player can end an event such as a predetermined performance according to the player's will by passing (entering) the game ball into a predetermined area (ball entry area) and activating the accessory continuous actuation device. It becomes possible. As a result, the player can end the event early and activate the accessory continuous activation device (generate a jackpot game) at various timings, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Note that even if an event such as a predetermined performance is forcibly terminated due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (occurrence of a jackpot game), the event may be re-executed if a predetermined condition is satisfied. . In this case, the re-execution of an event such as a predetermined effect may be re-executed from the continuation of the forcibly terminated portion, and the re-execution of the event may be executed until the end of the scheduled event. In this way, an event such as a predetermined effect is re-executed to the end from the continuation of the part that was forcibly terminated, so that even if an event such as a predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, the event will be executed to the end. The profits that players should receive are guaranteed. Of course, if the event is forcibly terminated, the event may be re-run from the beginning and run to its scheduled end. In this case, it becomes possible to execute a series of events without interruption. Thereby, it becomes possible to further increase interest in the game through the predetermined effect.

In addition, events such as predetermined performances are held from the end of notification that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot due to the variable game (the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in combination with jackpot symbols) until the game ball passes through a predetermined area. It may be executed during a specific period set in the period, and may be executed again when a jackpot game occurs. In this way, an event such as a predetermined performance is executed in a specific period and the event is re-executed when a jackpot game is executed, thereby making it possible to execute an event such as a predetermined performance in a jackpot game. That is, when an event such as a predetermined performance is interrupted midway due to the passage of a game ball to a predetermined area, it becomes possible to execute an event in a jackpot game generated by the passage of a game ball to a predetermined area. As a result, if an event such as a predetermined production is forcibly terminated, it will be possible to re-execute the event immediately after the event ends, reducing the time that the event such as a predetermined production is interrupted, and if the event is terminated midway. Even when the event is forcibly terminated, the event is executed without any sense of discomfort, just as when the event is executed continuously to the end.

Further, as a predetermined condition for re-executing the forcibly terminated event, for example, the jackpot game generated by the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is a specific jackpot game. Specifically, the specific jackpot game generated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device as a predetermined condition is, for example, a fixed variable jackpot game, a 16R (probable variable) jackpot game (with a long playing time (a predetermined number, e.g. 7 to 10) A jackpot game in which the above round games are executed), a 5R probability-variable jackpot game, and a (5R) normal jackpot game.

By re-executing an event such as a predetermined performance when a specific jackpot game is executed, the predetermined performance is re-executed as a benefit for executing the specific jackpot game. In addition, since the specific jackpot game is a probability-variable jackpot game, it becomes possible to further provide the bonus of re-execution of an event such as a predetermined production that is forcibly terminated as a bonus for the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. In addition, since the specific jackpot game is a jackpot game in which many (more than a predetermined number of) round games are executed, such as a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot, events such as predetermined effects can be effectively held using the length of the playing time. It will be possible to rerun it. Further, since the specific jackpot game is a normal jackpot game, it becomes possible to re-execute an event such as a predetermined performance as compensation in the case that the jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player.

Note that the event such as the predetermined performance may be re-executed at any of the opening, opening/closing execution mode, and ending of the jackpot game, and may be executed over two or more of these periods. Of course, the re-execution of an event such as a predetermined production may be executed at a timing other than the jackpot game. In addition, as a predetermined condition for re-executing an event such as a predetermined performance, the passage of a game ball (entering ball) in a predetermined area (entering area) where it is possible to generate a jackpot game by passing the gaming ball (entering ball). ), or stopping the launch of the game ball 99 for a certain period of time. Since these are the predetermined conditions for re-executing the predetermined performance, it becomes possible for the player to intentionally re-execute the predetermined performance.

In addition, when re-executing the numerical index acquisition performance when the predetermined performance as an event is a numerical index acquisition performance such as a game performance, the numerical index acquired during a specific period may be carried over, or the numerical index acquired during a specific period may be carried over. may be obtained from 0.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 88, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a condition device is activated when decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination in a variable game, and when the condition device is activated, a first role continuous activation gate described below is activated. The game ball passes through G1 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first role-linked operation gate") or the second role continuous operation gate G2 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second role-linked operation gate") This is a jackpot game in which a role object continuous operation device is activated, and an opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes a variable prize opening 316 is continuously operated by the operation of this role object continuous operation device, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained. is executed. In other words, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is based on the passage (ball entry) of the game ball 99 at the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the second role-linked operation gate G2, which is a predetermined area (ball entry area). It is possible to generate a jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 72 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board shown in FIG. 72. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the clone device 37 and the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above are omitted. Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 316 is provided below the second winning opening 316 (lower center of the gaming board 31), and the main display section 36 is provided at the lower right of the gaming board 31. However, the roles and functions of the variable winning hole 316 and the main display section 36 are basically the same as in the first embodiment described above. However, although the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 could enter the variable winning hole 316 of the first embodiment described above, the variable winning hole of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment It is preferable that at least the game ball 99 that is launched to the left side area of the game board 31 and is launched to the third movement path R3 can enter the ball 316. Of course, among the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the game balls 99 launched onto at least one of a first movement route R1 and a second movement route R2, which will be described later, may be allowed to enter.

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a branch portion 48 is provided between the decorative portion 310 provided above the symbol display portion 341 and the outer rail 312. The branching portion 48 defines a first movement path R1 and a second movement path R2 as movement paths of the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31. Note that the decorative portion 310 and the branch portion 48 are formed by, for example, assembling members made of resin or the like to the game board 31. The gaming machine 10 also has a first role-linked operation gate G1 through which the game ball 99 moving on the first movement route R1 can pass, and a second role-linked operation gate G1 through which the game ball 99 moving on the second movement route R2 can pass. It further includes a one-hole croon device 60 disposed above the gate G2 and the second linked operation gate G2.

The first movement path R1 is defined between the decorative portion 310 and the branching portion 48, and is the movement of the game ball 99 that is ejected with a relatively low intensity among the game balls 99 that are ejected to the right side area of the game board 31. Define the route. This first movement route R1 is further defined by a separation nail 481 and a guide nail 482 on the downstream side in the movement direction of the game ball 99, and the separation nail 481 and guide nail 482 allow the game ball 99 moving on the first movement path R1 to be controlled. Guide to the first role-linked operation gate G1. The separation nails 481 are lined up from the downstream end of the downstream end in the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the branching part 48 to the upper left of the one-hole croon device 60, which will be described later, which is the lower right of the first role-linked operation gate G1. It is located in The guide nails 482 are arranged in line from the downstream end of the decorative portion 310 on the downstream side in the moving direction of the game ball 99 to the upper left of the first role-linked operation gate G1. Further, the guide nail 482 is provided with drop portions 483 having a wider interval than the diameter of the game ball 99. Therefore, when the game ball 99 moving on the first movement route R1 does not pass through the drop portion 483, it passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1, and when it passes through the drop-off portion 483, it passes through the first role-linked operation gate. Does not pass G1. That is, the game ball 99 launched on the first movement path R1 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 with a certain probability. Note that instead of the separation nails 481 and the guide nails 482, resin members or the like may be used to play the same role as the separation nails 481 and the guide nails 482.

In this embodiment, among the game balls 99 launched on the first movement path R1, some game balls 99 pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1, and some game balls 99 are dropped without passing through the first role-linked operation gate G1. The ratio of the game ball 99 passing through the portion 483 is set, for example, in the range of 1:1 to 1:10, preferably in the range of 1:2 to 1:5, and typically in the range of 1:3 to 1:5. It is set to about 4. In other words, the probability that the game ball 99 launched on the first movement path R1 passes through the first role-linked gate G1 is set, for example, in the range of 1/2 to 1/11, preferably 1/3 to 1/6. Typically, it is set to about 1/4 to 1/5. By setting the probability that the game ball 99 launched on the first movement route R1 passes through the first role-linked gate G1 in such a range, when the game ball 99 is continuously launched, the game can be completed in about a few seconds. The ball 99 can be passed through the first role-linked gate G1. As a result, the game ball 99 launched on the first movement route R1 can be passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1 while suppressing stress on the player, and the game ball 99 can be passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1. The game can be enjoyed by focusing on whether the ball 99 passes or not. In addition, in order to suppress the occurrence of wasted balls, the launch of the game ball 99 is stopped every time the game ball 99 is launched, so-called stop hitting, which minimizes the occurrence of wasted balls while starting the first movement. It is also possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not one game ball 99 moving along the route R1 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1.

Note that the drop portion 483 of the guide nail 482 may be omitted. That is, the probability that the game ball 99 launched on the first movement path R1 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 may be set to 100%. In this way, by setting the probability of the game ball 99 launched on the first movement route R1 passing through the first role-linked gate G1 to 100%, the first role can be achieved by launching at least one game ball 99. It becomes possible to allow the game ball 99 to pass through the linked gate G1. As a result, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device without generating wasted balls, so the "base" which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) Deterioration is prevented. As a result, disadvantages caused by the player selecting the first movement route R1 are prevented.

Further, the general winning hole may be arranged at a position where the game ball 99 passing through the dropping portion 483 of the guide nail 482 can enter. In this way, by arranging the general prize opening at a position where the game ball 99 passing through the dropping portion 483 of the guide nail 482 can enter, the game ball 99 launched onto the first movement path R1 is placed in the first winning combination. The wasted balls generated by passing through the dropping portion 483 without passing through the operating gate G1 can be guaranteed by the prize balls (for example, 5 to 10 balls per winning) for winning the game balls 99 to the general prize opening. . This prevents the base from decreasing, and as a result, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by selecting the first movement route R1.

Further, on the first movement route R1, a first route detection sensor Rs1 is provided on the upstream side of the first role-linked operation gate G1. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is a sensor that detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the first movement route R1. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high frequency transmission type sensor, a capacitance sensor, a magnetic sensor), and the like. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main control device 4 (see FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the first movement route R1 based on the output from the first route detection sensor Rs1.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 as sensor detection processing in the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main controller 4, the MPU 41 operates when the conditioner is activated (the conditioner activation flag is set). (set to on), and when neither the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag nor the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is on, it is detected that the game ball 99 has moved along the first movement route R1. In other words, when the condition device is activated and the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 It is determined that the game ball 99 has moved along the first movement route R1.

The first role-linked operation gate G1 provides an opportunity to operate the role item continuous operation device when the game ball 99 passes. This first role-linked operation gate G1 vertically penetrates through the game ball 99 launched on the first movement path R1 so as to be able to pass therethrough. The first role-linked operation gate G1 has a first role object continuous operation gate sensor Gs1 (hereinafter also referred to as "first role-linked gate sensor") that can detect the passage of the game ball 99. The first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high-frequency transmission type sensor, a capacitance sensor, a magnetic sensor), etc., and is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main controller 4. (See Figure 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1 based on the output from the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1.

Here, in the sensor detection process executed by the main controller 4 in FIG. 77, which will be described later, the MPU 41 sets the condition that the conditional device is activated and the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is not set to on. When passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1, it is determined whether or not it has passed through the first role-linked gate G1. That is, when the condition state is activated, the MPU 41 activates the first role-linked activation gate on the condition that the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is determined whether the game ball 99 has passed through G1. When the game ball 99 is launched on the first movement route R1, the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 with a certain probability. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game ball 99 to pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1 in a short time (for example, about a few seconds) from the start of launching the game ball 99 onto the first movement route R1, and to activate the role object continuous operation device. can. Thereby, when the player selects the first movement route R1, it becomes possible to start the jackpot game in a short time from the start of the ball. In other words, by selecting the first movement route R1, the player can move quickly after the end of the variable game if the condition device is activated by stopping displaying the jackpot symbol combination on the symbol display section 341. A jackpot game can be started. As a result, by selecting the first movement route R1, for example, when the closing time of the game hall is approaching or when there is a limit on the playing time due to personal circumstances, the player can use the remaining playing time. You can secure the opportunity to receive more jackpot lottery tickets without wasting your money. In addition, even if you do not wish to perform the setting value suggestion performance (estimate the setting value) described below, by selecting the first movement route R1, you can start the jackpot game early without wasting time. .

On the other hand, the second movement path R2 is defined between the branching part 48 and the outer rail 312, and among the game balls 99 that are launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the game balls are fired with a high intensity such as the maximum strength. 99 travel routes are defined. This second movement route R2 is further defined by a separation nail 481 and a guide nail 484 on the downstream side in the movement direction of the game ball 99, and the separation nail 481 and guide nail 484 allow the game ball 99 moving on the second movement path R2 to be controlled. It is guided to the one-hole clone device 60. The separation nails 481 are arranged in line from the downstream end of the downstream end of the branching portion 48 in the moving direction of the game ball 99 to the upper left part of the one-hole croon device 60 as described above. The guide nails 484 are arranged in line from a predetermined position on the outer rail 312 to above the center of the one-hole croon device 60 (above the through hole 605, which will be described later). That is, the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 are guided to the left side of a through hole 605 (see FIGS. 74 and 75), which will be described later, in the one-hole croon device 60. In this way, the game ball 99 is guided to the left side of the through hole 605 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484, that is, to a position avoiding the through hole 605, so that the through hole 605 This prevents the game ball 99 from directly entering the ball. In addition, the separation nails 481 and the guide nails 484 are arranged without forming a gap large enough for the game ball 99 to pass through, so that the game ball 99 that passes through the second movement route R2 is always connected to the game ball 99. It is guided to the one-hole croon device 60. In this way, the game ball 99 passing through the second movement route R2 is always guided to the one-hole croon device 60, so that by launching one game ball 99 onto the second movement route R2, It becomes possible to allow the game ball 99 to pass through the dual role operation gate G2. This prevents the base from decreasing, and as a result, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by selecting the second movement route R2. Note that instead of the guide nail 484, a resin member or the like may be used to perform the same role as the guide nail 484.

Moreover, the space between the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 is defined by a branch part 48 and a separation nail 481, and these branch parts 48 and separation nails 481 are provided in series without a gap for the game ball 99 to pass through. ing. Therefore, the game ball 99 launched on the first movement path R1 is prevented from changing its movement path to the second movement path R2 during the movement of the first movement path R1; The game ball 99 launched to R2 is prevented from changing its travel route to the first travel route R1 during the movement of the second travel route R2. That is, mutual movement of the game ball 99 between the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 is restricted. This prevents the travel route selected by the player from being changed against the player's will, and makes it possible to reliably reflect the player's intention regarding the selection of the travel route.

In addition, in the second movement route R2, the game ball 99 is always guided to the one-hole croon device 60 by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484, but the game ball 99 guided to the one-hole croon device 60 is as described below. When it is released from the one-hole croon device 60, it always passes through the second role continuous operation gate G2 (second role continuous operation gate sensor Gs2). On the other hand, in the first movement route R1, as described above, the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482 operate the first role-linked operation gate with a predetermined probability, for example, a probability set in the range of 1/2 to 1/11. Pass G1. That is, the game ball 99 launched on the second movement route R2 passes through the role-linked operation gate with a higher probability than the game ball launched on the first movement route R1. Thereby, in the second movement route R2 where the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed, the accessory continuous actuation device can be operated by launching fewer game balls 99 than in the first movement path R1. Therefore, in the second movement route R2, there is an advantage that generation of wasted balls can be suppressed compared to the case where the game ball 99 is launched onto the first movement route R1 and the accessory continuous actuation device is activated.

Further, a second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided on the upper side of the one-hole croon device 60 on the second movement route R2. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is a sensor that detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the second movement route R2. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high frequency transmission type sensor, a capacitance sensor, a magnetic sensor), and the like. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main control device 4 (see FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the second movement route R2 based on the output from the second route detection sensor Rs2.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 as sensor detection processing in the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main controller 4, the MPU 41 operates when the conditioner is activated (the conditioner activation flag is set). (set to on), and when neither the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag nor the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is on, it is detected that the game ball 99 has moved along the second movement route R2. In other words, when the condition device is activated and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, It is detected that the game ball 99 has moved along the second movement route R2.

The one-hole croon device 60 delays the time from launching the game ball 99 onto the second movement path R2 until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. Specifically, the one-hole croon device 60 restricts (delays) the falling of the game ball 99 on the game board 31 by rolling and rotating the game ball 99 in a croon section 601, which will be described later. A predetermined period of time from when the game ball 99 is detected by the 2-route detection sensor Rs2 until the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2 disposed below the lower opening 606 of the one-hole croon device 60. The above shall be ensured. This predetermined time is set, for example, in a range of 1 minute to 20 minutes, preferably in a range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes, and is typically set to about 10 minutes. By setting a predetermined time (residence time, delay time) in such a range, while the fall of the game ball 99 is delayed in the one-hole croon device 60, numerical values such as ball output performance including the set value are Information can be expressed or implied (at least partially displayed). In this way, while the falling of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one-hole croon device 60, game information regarding the ball output performance, such as a set value, is specified or suggested, which reduces the player's interest and makes him or her bored. You can enjoy the preparation time (the time from when the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous operation device is activated) by recognizing or estimating the ball payout performance such as the set value. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Here, FIG. 74 is a perspective view showing the one-hole croon device 60, and FIG. 75 is a sectional view of the game board 31 along a portion corresponding to the X4-X4 cutting line in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the one-hole croon device 60 includes a croon section 601 and a discharge section 602.

The croon portion 601 has a bottomed cylindrical shape having a bottom wall portion 603 and a peripheral wall portion 604. A through hole 605 is provided in the center of the bottom wall portion 603 . The peripheral wall portion 604 extends upward from the peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 603, and prevents the game ball 99 from jumping out from the bottom wall portion 603. In this croon part 601, the game ball 99 guided by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 goes around the bottom wall part 603 along the peripheral wall part 604, and for example, the rotation radius is reduced by attenuation of the moving speed of the game ball 99. As the ball becomes smaller, the ball enters the through hole 605. The discharge part 602 is formed in a hollow shape having a lower opening 606, and the inside thereof communicates with the through hole 605. That is, the release section 602 has a closed cross-sectional structure (surrounded structure) with respect to the release direction (movement direction) of the game ball 99. In the discharge section 602, the game balls 99 that enter the through hole 605 are discharged one by one below the game board 31. Thereby, in the Cloon device 60, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls 99 from being released at the same time, and to release the game balls 99 one by one.

It is also conceivable that the one-hole croon device 60 be configured so that only one game ball 99 is guided. Specifically, there is a front and rear through hole above the second route detection sensor Rs2 that moves the game ball 99 to the back side of the game board 31, and a front and rear through hole that opens and closes this front and rear through hole and when the front and rear through hole is opened. A through-hole opening/closing door is provided to guide the game ball 99, and the front and rear through-holes are opened at least from the time the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 until the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2. It is conceivable to guide the game ball 99 to the back side of the game board 31 by opening and closing the through-hole opening/closing door and the front and rear through-holes. In this way, by configuring so that only one game ball 99 is guided to the one-hole croon device 60, even when a plurality of game balls 99 are continuously launched onto the second movement path R2. , only one game ball 99 can be guided to the one-hole croon device 60. As a result, by guiding a plurality of game balls 99 to the one-hole croon device 60, for example, the residence time of the game balls 99 in the one-hole croon device 60 can be significantly shortened due to mutual interference of the plurality of game balls 99. If this is prevented and the second moving route R2 is selected, it is possible to equalize the delay time of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device in the one-hole croon device 60. Further, even if a plurality of game balls 99 are continuously launched onto the second movement path R2, only one game ball 99 is guided to the one-hole croon device 60, so that a plurality of game balls 99 Ball clogging in the one-hole croon device 60 that may occur due to the ball being guided to the one-hole croon device 60 is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 moving along the second moving route R2 is guided to the croon section 601 of the one-hole crooning device 60 by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484, but the game ball 99 moving along the second moving route R2 The game ball 99 may be guided to the croon section 601 by moving it to the back side of the game board 31 above the croon section 601.

As shown in FIG. 75, the second role-linked operation gate G2 is arranged below the lower opening 606 of the discharge part 602 of the one-hole croon device 60, and allows the game ball 99 discharged from the lower opening 606 to pass through. It is.

The second role-linked operation gate G2, like the first role-linked operation gate G1, provides an opportunity to operate the role item continuous operation device when the game ball 99 passes. This second role-linked operation gate G2 is launched onto the second movement path R2 and penetrates vertically so that the game ball 99 released from the one-hole croon device 60 can pass therethrough. Further, the second role-linked operation gate G2 is provided directly below the discharge section 602 of the one-hole croon device 60, and the game ball 99 released from the discharge section 602 always passes through the second role-operated operation gate G2. Further, the second role-linked operation gate G2 has a second role-playing object continuous operation gate sensor Gs2 (hereinafter also referred to as "second role-linked gate sensor") that can detect the passage of the game ball 99. The second linked gate sensor Gs2 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high frequency transmission type sensor, a capacitance sensor, a magnetic sensor), etc., and is connected to the MPU 41 via the input/output I/F 42 of the main controller 4. (See Figure 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2 based on the output from the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2.

Here, in the sensor detection process executed by the main controller 4 in FIG. 77, which will be described later, the MPU 41 sets a condition that the conditioner is activated and the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is not set to ON. , when passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2, it is determined whether or not it has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2. That is, when the condition state is activated and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the MPU 41 activates the second role-linked activation gate G2 to play the game ball 99. It is possible to detect that the ball 99 has passed.

When the game ball 99 is launched onto the second movement path R2, the game ball 99 can be guided to the one-hole croon device 60 by launching one game ball 99; After being retained in the hole croon device 60 for a predetermined time or more, it is discharged from the one hole croon device 60 and passes through the second role linkage gate G2. In this way, by launching one game ball 99, the game ball 99 can pass through the second role-operating gate G2, so the minimum number of game balls 99 required to operate the role-playing continuous operation device can be reduced. is one ball, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wasted balls due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device.

In addition, when the second movement route R2 is selected, unlike the case where the first movement route R1 is selected, the accessory continuous operation device is not activated immediately from the start of the operation of the condition device, and at least the game ball During the time from when the game ball 99 is moved to the one-hole croon device 60 until the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole croon device 60, the accessory continuous operating device is not operated. Therefore, by selecting the second movement route R2, the player can delay the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device and delay the start of the jackpot game. Further, in this embodiment, after the condition device is activated as described later, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the 7-segment display section 39 Numerical information for recognizing or estimating ball payout performance, including set values, is specified or suggested.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated by stop displaying a jackpot symbol combination on the symbol display section 341, the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous activation device is activated. By selecting either the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2, which have different times, the jackpot game can be started immediately after the activation of the conditional device, or the time until the start of the jackpot game can be set longer. You can choose whether to obtain information (benefits) that allows you to estimate numerical information regarding ball payout performance, including value. Then, by selecting the first movement route R1 and starting the jackpot game immediately after the activation of the conditional device, for example, if the closing time of the game hall is approaching or the playing time is limited due to personal circumstances, etc. Even in such cases, it is possible to secure opportunities to receive more jackpot lottery drawings without wasting the remaining playing time. In addition, when there is no need to estimate numerical information related to ball dispensing performance, etc., for example, when the setting values are already recognized or when the setting values are not interested, the first moving route R1 can be used for the same time. You can secure the opportunity to receive more jackpot drawings within the same period. On the other hand, when delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by selecting the second movement route R2, the game is played by estimating numerical information regarding ball payout performance etc. during the time until the accessory continuous activation device is activated. can be enjoyed.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
The main timer interrupt process executed by the main controller 4 in this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the content of the sensor detection process (see step S1001 in FIG. 20).

[Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection process of this embodiment, the process when the condition device is activated is different from the above-described first embodiment; Based on the detection results by the sensor Rs2 and the second gate sensor Gs2, various flags related to these sensors Rs1, Gs1, Rs2, and Gs2 are set to on or off, and the gate sensor Gs1 and the second gate sensor Gs2 are set to ON or OFF. A command related to the detection result by gate sensor Gs2 is set. Here, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of sensor detection processing according to this embodiment.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the sensor detection process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the conditional device activation flag is set to on (step S3401). The condition device activation flag is a flag indicating that the condition device, which is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous activation device, is activated, and in step S3605 of the variable game control process in FIG. It is set to ON when it is determined that the first special symbol on the symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display section 363 is a jackpot symbol and is stopped and displayed. Then, if the conditional device activation flag is on (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3402, and if the conditional device activation flag is off (step S3401: No), the process goes to step S3415. Transition.

<Step S3402>
If the conditional device activation flag is on (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set on (step S3402). The first role-related gate sensor detection invalid flag is a flag that disables the detection of the game ball 99 by the first role-related gate sensor Gs1 when the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-related gate sensor Gs1, It is set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 in step S3409, which will be described later. Then, when the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3411, and sets the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF. If so (step S3402: No), the process moves to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
If the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3402: Yes). S3403). The second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is a flag that disables the detection of the game ball 99 by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 when the game ball 99 is detected by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2, It is set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2 in step S3405, which will be described later. Then, when the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3413, and sets the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF. If so (step S3403: No), the process moves to step S3404.

<Step S3404>
If the second role gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3404). . The first route detection sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 has been detected by the first route detection sensor, and the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the output from the first route detection sensor Rs1 in step S3415, which will be described later. Set to on if detected. Then, if the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3405, and if the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3404: No), the process moves to step S3407.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
When the first role-related gate sensor detection invalid flag and the second role-related gate sensor detection invalid flag are set to OFF (No in both steps S3403 and S3404), the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON. (Step S3404: Yes), that is, if the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 selects the second winning combination referred to in Step S3403. The continuous gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3405), the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3406), and the process proceeds to step S3415.

<Step S3407>
When the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag and the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag are set to OFF (No in both steps S3403 and S3404), the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3404: No), that is, when the game ball 99 is not detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 sets the second route detection sensor detection flag to ON. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S3407). The second route detection sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 has been detected by the second route detection sensor, and in step S3415, which will be described later, the passing of the game ball 99 is detected by the output from the second route detection sensor Rs2. Set to on if detected. Then, if the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3408, and if the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3407: No), the process moves to step S3415.

<Steps S3408 to S3510>
If the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3407: Yes), that is, if the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the MPU 41 sets a second route detection command (step S3408). The second route detection command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the second movement route R2 has been selected after the condition device is activated, and is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the second movement route R2 has been selected after the activation of the condition device. It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301. On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the second route detection command, it causes the symbol display section 341 and the 7-segment display section 39 to start a setting value suggestion production process that suggests a setting value.

Next, the MPU 41 sets the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag referred to in step S3402 to ON (step S3409), and sets the second route detection sensor detection flag to OFF (step S3410). The process moves to step S3415.

<Step S3411>
If the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3411). ). The second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 is detected by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2, that is, the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2. This second role-linked gate sensor detection flag turns on the output from the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 when the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked gate G1 in other sensor detection processing in step S3415, which will be described later. - Set to ON when the output of the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 is ON in the determination process based on OFF. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2. do. If the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3412, and if the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3411: No), the process moves to step S3415.

<Step S3412>
When the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a second role-linked gate sensor detection command (step S3412), and moves the process to step S3415. The second role-linked gate sensor detection command notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked activation gate G2 when the second movement route R2 is selected after the condition device is activated. This is a command and is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the second role-related gate sensor detection command, it ends the setting value suggestion production process that suggests the setting value on the symbol display section 341 and the 7-segment display section 39.

<Step S3413>
If the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3413). ). The first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1, that is, the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked gate G1. This first role-linked gate sensor detection flag turns on the output from the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked gate G1 in other sensor detection processing in step S3415, which will be described later. - It is set to ON when the output of the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 is ON in the determination process based on OFF. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked gate G1. do. If the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3414, and if the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3413: No), the process moves to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
When the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a first role-linked gate sensor detection command (step S3414), and moves the process to step S3415. The first role-linked gate sensor detection command notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked activation gate G1 when the first movement route R1 is selected after the condition device is activated. This is a command and is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 5 ends the game explanation performance on the symbol display section 341 when receiving the first role-related gate sensor detection command.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 41 executes other sensor detection processing, and ends the sensor detection processing. Other sensor detection processes include, in addition to the sensor detection process executed by the main controller 4 in the first embodiment, a first route detection sensor Rs1, a first linked gate sensor Gs1, and a second route detection sensor Rs2. , and when the game ball 99 is executed by the second role-related gate sensor Gs2, a flag indicating that the game ball 99 has been detected by these sensors Rs1, Gs1, Rs2, Gs2 is set to ON, and the first When the route detection sensor detection flag or the second route detection sensor detection flag is set on, a process of setting these flags off is executed. Note that the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag and the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag are referred to in the condition device activation process of FIG. is not set to off in step S3415.

In the sensor detection process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 detects the game ball 99 from being detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 on the condition that the condition device is activated (the condition device activation flag is set to ON). When the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 first, it is determined whether or not the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked gate G1 based on the output from the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1. be done. On the contrary, when the conditional device is activated, the MPU 41 detects that the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked gate G2 based on the output from the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2.

In this way, on the condition that the conditional device is activated, the MPU 41 operates the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 based on the outputs from the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is detected that the ball 99 has moved. Therefore, even if the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in a state where the condition device is not operating, the MPU 41 will not operate based on the outputs from the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2. The movement of the game ball 99 on the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 is not detected, and the passage of the game ball 99 through the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation gate G2 is not detected. As a result, the accessory continuous operating device is prevented from being operated in a state where the conditions for operating the accessory continuous operating device are not satisfied, and the variable prize opening 319 is prevented from being opened.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the condition device is activated, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, , the passage of the game ball 99 at the first role-linked gate G1 is detected, and the process of detecting the passage of the game ball 99 at the second role-linked gate G2 is not executed, while the first route detection sensor Rs1 When the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected, passage of the game ball 99 at the second role link operation gate G2 is detected, and the first role link is activated. The process of detecting the passage of the game ball 99 through the activation gate G1 is not executed. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2. is restricted from being detected, and when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first combination of winnings is restricted. Detection of passage of the game ball 99 through the operating gate G1 is restricted. Therefore, while the accessory continuous actuation device is prevented from being activated by the game ball 99 moving on the second movement path R2 after the first movement path R1 is selected, the second movement path R2 is not selected. The accessory continuous actuation device is prevented from being activated by the game ball 99 moving along the first movement path R1. As a result, when the second movement route R2 is selected, the falling of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one-hole croon device 60, and the game ball 99 is launched onto the first movement route R1 in a state where the operation of the accessory continuous device is delayed. Even if the game ball 99 passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1, the role object continuous operation device is prevented from being activated. Therefore, for example, when the operation of the conditional device is delayed, numerical information regarding the ball output performance, including the set value described below, may be revealed or suggested during the passage of the game ball 99 at the first role-operating gate G1. Prevented from being terminated.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
The main processing executed by the main control device 4 in this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the content of variable game control (see FIG. 79). Furthermore, in the main process of this embodiment, in addition to the main process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 23), a conditional device activation process is executed (see FIG. 78). Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main process executed by the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 79 is a variable game process executed in the main process of FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure.

[Variable game control processing]
As shown in FIG. 79, in the sensor detection process of this embodiment, execution of the variable game is restricted while the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are activated, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. After the fluctuating game for the case ends, a process of activating the conditional device is executed.

<Steps S3601 and S3602>
In the variable game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the conditional device activation flag is set to ON (step S3601), and if the conditional device activation flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), it is determined whether the accessory continuous actuation device activation flag is set to on (step S3602). Here, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is a flag for continuously operating the opening/closing door 319 of the variable prize opening 316, and the condition device is activated in step S3707 in the condition device operation process of FIG. 80, which will be described later. is set to ON when passage of the game ball 99 at the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the second role-linked operation gate G2 is detected.

Then, when both the conditional device activation flag and the accessory continuous activation device activation flag are set to OFF (No in steps S3601 and S3602), the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. (Steps S1401 to S1408). In addition, when either the conditional device activation flag or the accessory continuous activation device activation flag is set to ON, the variable game process is ended.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot type flag is set to ON when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, that is, when the variable game is ended. (Step S3603) If the jackpot type flag is set to ON (Step S3603: Yes), the process moves to Step S3604, and if the jackpot type flag is set to OFF (Step S3603: No), the corresponding The variable game control process ends. Here, the jackpot type flag is a flag indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and also indicates whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot, It includes a jackpot flag, a 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and a 16R probability variation jackpot flag. The jackpot type flag is set to ON when setting the first pending command or the second pending command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5, for example, in the first pending command setting process or the second pending command setting process in FIG. 21. .

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
If the jackpot type flag is set to ON (Step S3603: Yes), a conditional device activation command is set (Step S3604), a conditional device activation flag is set to ON (Step S3605), and the variable game processing is executed. finish. The condition device activation command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the condition device is activated, and the audio lamp is activated in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. It is transmitted to the control device 5. On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the conditional device activation command, it causes the symbol display section 341 and the like to start a game explanation performance.

[Condition device operation processing]
The condition device activation process of the present embodiment is a process that is executed when the condition device is activated, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag or the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is flagged. If it is set to on, processing for activating the accessory continuous activation device is executed. Here, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the condition device activation process executed in the main process of FIG. 78.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 80, in the conditional device activation process of this embodiment, it is first determined whether the conditional device activation flag is set to on (step S3701), and the conditional device activation flag is set to on. If so (step S3701: Yes), the process moves to step S3702, and if the conditional device activation flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the conditional device activation process ends.

<Step S3702>
If the conditional device activation flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the first role-related gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3702), and If the linked gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), the process moves to step S3703, and if the first linked gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3702: No). , the process moves to step S3709.

<Steps S3703 and S3704>
If the first role-related gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first role-related gate detection flag to OFF (step S3703), and the first role-related gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3703). It is determined whether the invalid flag is set to on (step S3704). Then, when the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the conditional device activation processing, and the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF. If it has been set (step S3704: No), the process moves to step S3705.

<Steps S3705 and S3706>
If the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3704: No). S3705). Then, when the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF (step S3706). The process moves to step S3707. On the other hand, when the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF (step S3705: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3707.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 sets the accessory continuous activation device activation flag to ON, and the conditional device activation flag referred to in step S3602 in the variable game control process in FIG. 79 and step S3701 in the conditional device activation process. is set to OFF (step S3708), and the conditional device activation process ends. In other words, if the condition device is operating and the second role-related gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2) When the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 (when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operating gate G1), the opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable prize opening 316 is opened and closed. An accessory continuous operating device that operates continuously is activated.

<Step S3709>
If the first role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second role-linked gate sensor detection flag is set to on (step S3709). If the second role-related gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the process moves to step S3710, and if the second role-related gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3709: Yes), the process moves to step S3710. S3709: No), the conditional device activation process ends.

<Steps S3710 and S3711>
If the second role connected gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second role connected gate detection flag to OFF (step S3710), and the second role connected gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3710). It is determined whether the invalid flag is set on (step S3711). Then, when the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3711: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the conditional device activation processing, and the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF. If it has been set (step S3711: No), the process moves to step S3712.

<Steps S3712 and S3713>
If the second role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (step S3711: No). S3712). Then, when the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF (step S3713). The process moves to step S3707. On the other hand, if the first role-linked gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to OFF (step S3712: No), the process moves to step S3707. Here, in step S3707, the accessory continuous activation device activation flag is set to ON, and the conditional device activation flag is further set to OFF (step S3708), thereby ending the conditional device activation process. In other words, if the condition device is operating and the first role-related gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1) When the game ball 99 is detected by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 (when the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2), the opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable prize opening 316 is opened. An accessory continuous operating device that operates continuously is activated.

In the condition device activation process of the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated and the second role-related gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (the first route detection sensor Rs2 is set to When the game ball 99 is detected by the detection sensor Rs1), when the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 (when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1), the variable winning hole The accessory continuous operating device that continuously operates the opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes the door 316 is activated. On the contrary, if the conditional device is activated and the first role-related gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to on (the second route detection sensor Rs2 is activated before the first route detection sensor Rs1 When the game ball 99 is detected), when the game ball 99 is detected by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 (when the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2), the variable prize opening 316 is opened and closed. The accessory continuous operating device that continuously operates the opening/closing door 319 is activated.

In this way, by activating the accessory continuous activation device on the condition that the condition device is activated, the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 when the condition device is not activated. Even if it is, the MPU 41 does not detect the passage of the game ball 99 at the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation gate G2. As a result, in a state where the conditions for operating the accessory continuous operating device are not established, the accessory continuous operating device is prevented from being activated, and the variable prize opening 319 is prevented from being opened.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the condition device is activated, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, , while the passage of the game ball 99 at the first role-linked gate G1 is detected, and the process of detecting the passage of the game ball 99 at the second role-linked gate G2 is not executed, the first route detection sensor Rs1 When the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected, passage of the game ball 99 at the second role link operation gate G2 is detected, and the first role link is activated. The process of detecting passage of the game ball 99 through the operating gate G1 is not executed. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2. is restricted from being detected, and when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first combination of winnings is restricted. Detection of passage of the game ball 99 through the operating gate G1 is restricted. Therefore, while the accessory continuous actuation device is prevented from being activated by the game ball 99 moving on the second movement path R2 after the first movement path R1 is selected, the second movement path R2 is not selected. The accessory continuous actuation device is prevented from being activated by the game ball 99 moving along the first movement route R1. As a result, when the second movement route R2 is selected, the falling of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one-hole croon device 60, and the game ball 99 is launched onto the first movement route R1 in a state where the operation of the accessory continuous device is delayed. Even if the game ball 99 passed through the first role-linked operation gate G1, the role object continuous operation device is prevented from being activated. Therefore, for example, when the operation of the conditional device is delayed, numerical information regarding the ball output performance, including the set value described below, may be revealed or suggested midway through the passage of the game ball 99 at the first role-operating gate G1. Prevented from being terminated.

In addition, in the conditional device activation process of this embodiment, when the conditional device activation flag is set to ON, it is determined whether the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 and the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2. However, it may be determined whether or not the condition device is activated when the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 and the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2. That is, when the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 or the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game can be generated based on the conditional device activation flag or the like. It may be determined whether the

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 88, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment, instead of the setting value suggestion process (see FIG. 34) of the sub-timer interrupt process in the first embodiment described above, the setting value Suggestive effect processing is executed (see FIG. 81). Furthermore, in the sub-timer interrupt process of this embodiment, in addition to the sub-timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 34), a game explanation effect process is executed (see FIG. 81). Furthermore, the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment differs from the sub-timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 34) in the content of command determination processing (see FIG. 82).

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, in addition to the command determination process of the first embodiment described above, commands necessary for starting or ending the game explanation production process and the setting value suggestion production process, which will be described later, are received. It is determined whether or not. Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 82, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a conditional device activation command has been received (step S3901). The condition device activation command is a command indicating that the condition device is activated, and is set in step S3604 in the variable game control process of FIG. 79 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Then, when the MPU 51 receives the conditional device activation command (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and when the conditional device activation command is not received (step S3901: No), the process proceeds to step S3903. Transition.

<Step S3902>
If the conditional device activation command is received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game explanation performance start flag to ON (step S3902), and ends the command determination process. The game explanation performance start flag is a flag for starting a game explanation performance (see FIG. 84), which will be described later, and is used to determine whether or not to start the game explanation performance in step S4001 of the game explanation performance process in FIG. 83, which will be described later. is referenced by the MPU 51. That is, the game explanation performance is started when the conditional device is activated, that is, when the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341.

<Step S3903>
If the conditional device activation command has not been received (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second route detection command has been received (step S3903). The second route detection command is a command indicating that the second movement route R2 has been selected after the condition device is activated, and is set in step S3408 in the sensor detection process of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. be done. Then, when the MPU 51 receives the second route detection command (step S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3904, and when the second route detection command is not received (step S3903: No), the process proceeds to step S3904. The process moves to S3905.

<Step S3904>
When the second route detection command is received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value suggestion performance start flag to ON (step S3904), and ends the command determination process. The setting value suggestion performance start flag is a flag that starts the setting value suggestion performance as well as ending the game explanation performance described below, and determines whether or not to end the game explanation performance in step S4007 of the game explanation performance process of FIG. 83, which will be described later. It is referred to by the MPU 51 in order to determine whether or not to start the setting value suggestion effect in step S4101 of the setting value suggestion effect process in FIG. 86, which will be described later. In other words, when the condition device is activated, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, when the second movement route R2 is selected, , the setting value suggestion performance is started at the same time as the game explanation performance is ended.

<Step S3905>
If the second route detection command has not been received (step S3903: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first role-linked gate sensor detection command has been received (step S3905). The first role-linked gate sensor detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked activation gate G1 when the first movement route R1 is selected after the condition device is activated, and is a command that indicates that the game ball 99 has passed through the first role-linked activation gate G1. It is set in step S3414 in the sensor detection process of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of FIG. Then, when the MPU 51 receives the first role-linked gate sensor detection command (step S3905: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3906, and when the first role-linked gate sensor detection command is not received (step S3905: No), the process moves to step S3907.

<Step S3906>
When the first role combination gate sensor detection command is received (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game explanation production end flag to ON (step S3906), and ends the command determination process. The game explanation performance end flag is a flag for ending the game explanation performance, which will be described later, and is referenced by the MPU 51 in step S4006 of the game explanation performance processing in FIG. 83, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to end the game explanation performance. Ru. In other words, the game explanation performance is such that when the first moving route R1 is selected after the condition device is activated, the game ball 99 passes through the first role combination activation gate G1, that is, the role object continuous activation device is activated. be terminated in case.

<Step S3907>
If the first role-linked gate sensor detection command has not been received (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second role-linked gate sensor detection command has been received (step S3907). The second role-linked gate sensor detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked activation gate G2 when the second movement route R2 is selected after the condition device is activated, and is a command that indicates that the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked activation gate G2. It is set in step S3412 in the sensor detection process of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of FIG. Then, when the MPU 51 receives the second role-linked gate sensor detection command (step S3907: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3908, and when the second role-linked gate sensor detection command is not received (step S3907: No), the process moves to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
When the second role-linked gate sensor detection command is received (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value suggestion performance end flag to ON (step S3908), and ends the command determination process. The setting value suggestion effect end flag is a flag for ending the setting value suggestion effect, which will be described later. It is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine whether to terminate the process. In other words, the setting value suggestion performance (game performance and display on the 7-segment display section 39) is such that when the second movement route R2 is selected after the condition device is activated, the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked activation gate G2. In other words, when the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the operation is terminated. Further, the setting value suggestion performance end flag is also referred to by the MPU 51 in step S4112 in the setting value suggestion process to be described later, in order to determine whether or not to end the game performance in the setting value suggestion performance. That is, if the game ball 99 passes through the second role gate G2 during the game performance, the game performance is forcibly terminated.

<Step S3909>
If the second role-linked gate sensor detection command has not been received (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S3909), and ends the command determination processing. Processes based on other commands are, for example, processes executed in the command determination process of the first embodiment described above.

[Game explanation performance processing]
In the game explanation production process of this embodiment, a game explanation production that explains the game progress contents when the first movement route R1 is selected and the game progress content when the second movement route R2 is selected (see FIG. 84) is executed (see FIG. 84). Here, FIGS. 83 and 85 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game explanation production process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of this embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a display on the symbol display section 341 in the game explanation production. It is a figure showing an example of a screen.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 83, in the game explanation performance process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the game explanation performance start flag is on (step S4001). The game explanation performance start flag is a flag for starting the game explanation performance, and when it is determined in the command determination process of FIG. 82 that a conditional device activation command has been received (step S3901: Yes), the command determination process is It is set to on in step S3902. That is, the MPU 51 stops displaying the jackpot symbol combination on the symbol display section 341 (when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result is ended), and the condition device is activated. If so, the game explanation performance is started. Then, when the game explanation performance start flag is on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4002, and when the game explanation performance start flag is off (step S4001: No), the process moves to step S4002. The process moves to S4005.

<Steps S4002 to S4004>
If the game explanation performance start flag is on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the game explanation performance (step S4002). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game explanation performance flag indicating that the game explanation performance is being executed to ON (step S4003), sets the game explanation performance start flag to OFF (step S4004), and starts the game explanation performance. Finish the process.

Here, the game explanation performance is a performance that explains the game progress content when the first movement route R1 is selected and the game progress content when the second movement route R2 is selected, and is executed in the symbol display section 341. be done. As shown in FIG. 84, in the game explanation performance, the symbol display section 341 displays a game board image in which the upper half of the game board 31 is viewed from the front, and a game board image placed at the bottom of this game board image that prompts players to play to the right. A character image (character image "Right-handed! Choose the route!") prompting the user to select either route (first travel route R1) or B route (second travel route R2) is displayed. The game board image includes an image (broken line arrow image) explaining the A route (first movement route R1) and B route (second movement route R2), and each route displayed in a portion corresponding to the symbol display section 341. It includes an explanatory image explaining the advantages of selecting ``If you choose route A, the jackpot game will start immediately'' and ``If you choose route B, you may be able to find out the setting value''.

In this way, by executing the game explanation effect, it is possible to know the advantages of selecting route A (first moving route R1) and selecting route B (second moving route R2). . Therefore, the player can refer to the game explanation performance and select a route that provides the advantage he/she wants to enjoy.

Further, the game explanation performance is started when the conditional device is activated, that is, when the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341. Therefore, by stopping the launch of the game ball 99 before or immediately after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to secure time to fully grasp the game progress content through the game explanation performance. In particular, when a performance is executed in which there is a high possibility that a combination of jackpot symbols will be stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341, the launching of the game ball 99 is generally stopped in order to prevent the occurrence of wasted balls. Similarly, in order to prevent the occurrence of wasted balls, the fixed period of time from when the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed to when the variable prize opening 316 starts to be opened without immediately starting to launch the game ball 99 is set. It is common practice to stop launching the game ball 99. In this way, when the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341, the launching of the game ball 99 is often stopped for a certain period of time. This makes it possible to secure time to fully understand the progress.

Note that the explanation images include a route A selection explanation image that explains the advantages of selecting route A (first travel route R1), and a route B selection explanation image that explains the advantages of choosing route B (second travel route R2). The route selection explanation images do not need to be displayed at the same time; for example, the A route selection explanation image and the B route selection explanation image may be switched and displayed. Further, for example, when the route A selection explanation image and the route B selection explanation image are switched and displayed, they may be switched automatically at regular intervals, and the player operates the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), and the selection determination unit 21 It is conceivable that the selection button 21A or the decision button 21B (see FIG. 53) can be switched by operating the plurality of selection buttons 21A and decision button 21B (see FIG. 53).

Further, in this embodiment, when the condition device is activated, the game explanation effect is started unconditionally, but for example, when the first movement route R1 (route A) is selected, the game explanation effect is started, When the second movement route R2 (route B) is selected, the setting value suggestion performance may be started without executing the game explanation performance.

<Step S4005>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 83, if the game explanation performance start flag is off (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the game explanation performance flag set to on in step S4003 is set to on. (Step S4005). If the game explanation production flag is set to ON (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4006, and if the game explanation production flag is set to OFF (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4006. The process moves to step S4010 in FIG.

<Step S4006>
If the game explanation performance flag is set to ON (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the game explanation performance end flag is set to ON (step S4006). The game explanation performance end flag is a flag that ends the game explanation performance, and in the command determination process of FIG. 82, when it is determined that the first role connected gate sensor detection command has been received (step S3905: Yes), It is set to on in step S3906 of command determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 controls the game when the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked operation gate G1 when the first movement route R1 is selected after the condition device is activated, that is, when the role object continuous operation device is activated. End the explanatory performance. Then, if the game explanation performance end flag is on (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4007, and if the game explanation performance end flag is off (step S4006: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4007, and if the game explanation performance end flag is off (step S4006: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4007. Finish the production process.

In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game explanation performance is started by the operation of the conditional device (the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols in the symbol display section 341), and the first winning combination gate Gs1 is activated. The game is terminated when the game ball 99 passes, or when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, but the game explanation performance is performed when the condition device starts operating. A right-hand hit request effect that requests the player to launch the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31 (to hit the right side) when the condition device starts operating without starting the operation is displayed on the symbol display section 341, etc. It may also be executed. In this case, after the condition device is activated, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 (when the game ball 99 is guided to the clone device 60) , the right-hand hit request performance may be completed and the game explanation performance may be executed while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device in the clone device 60 is delayed. The game explanation performance may be similar to the game explanation performance described above with reference to FIG. 84, or may be different from the game explanation performance described above. However, the game explanation performance explains that at least either the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 can be selected, and the advantages of selecting the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2. It is necessary for the performance to make the player aware that the game is intended to be played.

By the way, in a gaming machine where a right-handed hit is performed when decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of jackpot symbols on a display device such as a symbol display section, many players hit the game ball to the right side area of the game board with maximum strength. . Therefore, if the player does not fully understand the game content in the game machine 10 of this embodiment, it is assumed that the player will unconditionally hit the game ball 99 with the maximum strength as in the conventional game machine.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 with maximum strength, the game ball 99 moves along the second movement path R2, and the accessory continuous actuation device operation is delayed. Therefore, if the right play request performance is executed when the condition device starts operating, and the game explanation performance is executed when the second movement route R2 is selected, it is possible to prevent players from fully understanding the game content on the gaming machine 10. If the player launches the game ball 99 with maximum strength when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in combination with the jackpot symbol on the symbol display section 341, the game explanation will be provided, making it possible to understand the game content. . That is, even if the player does not fully understand the game content, if the player unconditionally launches the game ball with maximum strength, he or she selects at least the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2. It is possible to understand the advantages of selecting the first moving route R1 and the second moving route R2. As a result, after the next jackpot (the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the jackpot symbols on the symbol display section 341), the player understands the game content and moves to the first moving route R1 and the second moving route according to his/her preference. Either of the moving routes R2 can be selected. In particular, since the second movement route R2 is a movement route in which the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed, it becomes possible to spend sufficient time explaining the game when selecting the second movement route R2. , it becomes possible to more reliably inform players of the game contents.

Furthermore, execution of the right hit request performance at the start of the operation of the condition device and the game explanation performance at the time of selecting the second movement route R2 are performed when the condition device is activated when the result of the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode is a jackpot. (so-called first win), and when the condition device is activated when the result of the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is a jackpot (so-called consecutive wins), the game explanation effect is executed by the operation of the condition device. It is preferable that the setting value suggestion effect be executed when the second movement route R2 is selected.

<Steps S4007 to S4009>
If the game explanation performance end flag is on (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game explanation performance (step S4007). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game explanation performance flag indicating that the game explanation performance is being executed to OFF (step S4008), sets the game explanation performance end flag to OFF (step S4009), and executes the game explanation performance. Finish the process.

<Step S4010>
If the game explanation performance flag is set to OFF (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting value suggestion performance start flag is set to ON, as shown in FIG. 85 (step S4010). ). The setting value suggestion performance start flag is a flag that ends the game explanation performance and starts the setting value suggestion performance described later, and is flagged when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received in the command determination process of FIG. (Step S3903: Yes), it is set to ON in step S3904 of the command determination process. That is, the MPU 51 determines that when the condition device is activated and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, the second movement route R2 is selected. If so, the game explanation performance is ended. In other words, the game explanation performance is started after the condition device is activated, and in addition to the case where the first movement route R1 is selected and the game ball 99 passes through the first role-linked activation gate G1, the second movement route R2 is selected. The process ends when the setting value suggestion effect is started.

Then, if the setting value suggestion performance start flag is set to ON (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4011, and if the setting value suggestion performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4010: No), the game explanation performance process ends.

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
When the setting value suggestion performance start flag is on (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game explanation performance (step S4011). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game explanation effect flag indicating that the game explanation effect is being executed to OFF (step S4012), and ends the game explanation effect process.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion production process of this embodiment, when the second movement route R2 is selected after the condition device is activated, the game production executed on the symbol display section 341 is executed, and the points ( A 7-segment effect is executed in which a non-set value other than the set value that defines the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery is specified or suggested on the 7-segment display section 39, depending on the number of fulfillment of a specific condition. Here, FIGS. 86 and 88 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion effect process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 86, in the setting value suggestion effect processing of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to on (step S4101). The setting value suggestion performance start flag is a flag for starting the setting value suggestion performance, and in the command determination process of FIG. 82, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes), the command is It is set to on in step S3904 of the determination process. That is, the MPU 51 determines that when the condition device is activated and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, the second movement route R2 is selected. In this case, the setting value suggestion effect is started. Then, if the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4102, and if the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), the process moves to step S4107.

<Step S4102>
When the setting value suggestion performance start flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game performance type to be executed on the symbol display section 341 (step S4102).

The game performance of this embodiment is a game in which points can be earned, and the points acquired in this game performance correspond to the number of fulfillments of a specific condition. That is, the game effect is an opportunity to satisfy a specific condition in a specific period, and in this game effect, one specific condition is satisfied every time one point is acquired in the game effect. In this way, by giving an opportunity for a specific condition to be satisfied during a specific period (executing a production such as a game production), the condition device is activated to focus on the opportunity provided during the specific period, and then the role model is continuously created. It becomes possible to increase interest in the progress of the game during the waiting period until the activation device is activated. In particular, by providing an opportunity for a specific condition to be met as a performance such as a game performance, it is possible to further increase interest in the number of fulfillments of the specific condition (points to be acquired) that are satisfied in a specific period.

Further, in this embodiment, since there are six game setting values 1 to 6, five game setting values excluding the setting value are non-setting values. On the other hand, the seven segment display section 39 displays numbers using seven segments A to G. Therefore, in order to understand one non-setting value, 7 specific conditions must be met, and in order to understand all non-setting values, 35 specific conditions need to be met. . Therefore, in the game production, it is possible to understand one non-setting value for every 7 points acquired, and by obtaining 35 points or more, it is possible to understand all non-setting values, and as a result, the setting value can be understood. can.

Here, FIG. 87(A) is a diagram showing an example of a game type determination table used by the audio lamp control device, and the MPU 51 determines the game type based on this game type determination table.

As shown in FIG. 87(A), in the game type determination table, the game types include a coin acquisition game (game A), a mission achievement game (game B), a battle game (game C), a quiz game (game D), and Five prediction games (games E) are defined by a game type lottery counter, and the MPU 51 selects a game according to the value of the game type lottery counter.

In the coin acquisition game (game A), for example, coins displayed on the symbol display section 341 are acquired by selecting the direction of movement of the character, and points are awarded according to the value of the acquired coins. In the mission achievement game (game B), for example, a plurality of missions are sequentially given to the player, and points are awarded according to the number of missions accomplished and the level of accomplishment. In the battle game (game C), for example, a player's ally character and enemy character are pitted against each other, and points are awarded according to the number of enemy characters defeated by the ally character and the strength of the enemy. In the quiz game (game D), for example, questions and multiple answers are presented, and points are awarded according to the number of questions answered correctly by the player and the difficulty level. In the prediction game (game E), points are awarded depending on the number and value of jewels contained in a treasure box selected by the player from a plurality of treasure boxes, for example.

In this way, a game for acquiring points (the number of fulfillment of a specific condition) for making a non-setting value explicit or suggested on the 7-segment display section 39 is selected from a plurality of games with different methods of acquiring points. Therefore, the decrease in interest in game performance due to repeated execution of the same game is reduced. In addition, if the same game is played repeatedly, there is a concern that players will be able to easily beat the game, but by setting multiple games, it is possible to increase the difficulty of beating the game. This prevents non-set values from being easily grasped.

In addition, in the game type determination table, there are five game types: a coin acquisition game (game A), a mission achievement game (game B), a battle game (game C), a quiz game (game D), and a prediction game (game E). Each of the two games is configured, for example, as a player participation type game or a scenario management type game. A player participation type game is a game in which the progress of the game and the result (number of points earned) are determined by the player's operations on the operation buttons 20 and the selection determining section 21. The coin acquisition game (game A), the mission achievement game (game B), the battle game (game C), the quiz game (game D), and the prediction game (game E) can be easily configured as player participation games. In a player participation type game, the progress and result of the game are determined by the player's operations, so it is easy to increase interest in the game. On the other hand, scenario management games are executed according to a scenario in which the game progress and result (number of points earned) are determined in advance, such as a coin acquisition game (game A), a mission achievement game (game B), and a battle game (game C) is easy to configure as a scenario management type game. In a scenario management type game, points corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios are always awarded even to players who do not actively participate in the game. Therefore, the non-setting value is displayed or suggested on the 7-segment display section 39 even for players who are not interested in the game.

The game type lottery counter is a loop counter with a counter value of 0 to 149, and is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 149. . The coin earning game (game A) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 0 to 49, and the selection rate is 33.3%. The mission achievement game (game B) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 50 to 89, and the selection rate is 26.7%. The battle game (game C) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 90 to 119, and the selection rate is 20.0%. The quiz game (game D) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 120 to 139, and the selection rate is 13.3%. The prediction game (game E) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 140 to 149, and the selection rate is 6.7%. In this way, the five games, coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E), have different selection rates. , the coin acquisition game (game A), the mission achievement game (game B), the battle game (game C), the quiz game (game D), and the prediction game (game E) have higher selection rates in this order.

In addition, the five games, coin earning game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E), each have a point acquisition difficulty level. different. Point acquisition difficulty is, for example, the expected value of points earned in a game.The lower the expected value, the higher the point acquisition difficulty.Conversely, the higher the expected value, the higher the point acquisition difficulty. low. The point acquisition difficulty level may be defined including initial points (see FIG. 87(B)), which will be described later, but in this embodiment, initial points are not included. Further, the point acquisition difficulty level may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 at the start of the game performance. The point acquisition difficulty level is displayed, for example, by the number of star images correlated with the difficulty level. The point acquisition difficulty level is higher in the order of coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E). On the other hand, the selection rate is determined by the difficulty of obtaining points in the following order: coin acquisition game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and prediction game (game E). low. In this way, by setting multiple games with different points acquisition difficulty levels, each game is characterized by the point acquisition difficulty level, so it is possible to increase interest in the game production, and it is possible to increase interest in the game production. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the is selected or not.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the higher the difficulty level of point acquisition, the higher the selection rate of the game, while the lower the difficulty level of point acquisition, the lower the selection rate, and the difference between the high level of point acquisition difficulty and the high selection rate. They have a contradictory relationship. In this way, the higher the difficulty level of a game to obtain points, the higher the selection rate, which prevents many points from being easily obtained and prevents non-set values (set values) from being easily grasped. . On the other hand, since the selection rate is lower for games with lower difficulty to earn points, in exchange for the lower selection rate, if the selection rate is selected, you will be given the opportunity to play many point games, so it is important to understand the non-set value (set value). Opportunities are given, and a decrease in interest in game performance caused by repeatedly selecting a game with a low difficulty level for obtaining points is suppressed. Therefore, due to the contradictory relationship between high point acquisition difficulty and high selection rate, it prevents non-set values (set values) from being easily grasped, and suppresses a decline in interest in game production. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate and point acquisition difficulty level of each game are set unevenly, but at least one of the selection rate and point acquisition difficulty level may be set uniformly. Further, the number of games is not limited to five, and may be any other number, and the types of games are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 87(A).

<Steps S4103 and S4104>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 86, in step S4103, the MPU 51 sets an initial point, and further sets the initial point as the value of the point counter (step S4104). Initial points are points that are given to the player at the start of the game, in addition to points earned in the game. In this way, by providing initial points, points can be earned even in games other than games, so even if a game with a high degree of difficulty in earning points is selected, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to earn points in the game.

Here, FIG. 87(B) is a diagram showing an example of an initial point determination table used by the audio lamp control device, and the MPU 51 determines the initial points based on this initial point determination table.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), in the initial point determination table, each game type is defined by an initial point lottery counter, and the MPU 51 selects initial points according to the game type and the value of the initial point lottery counter. . In this way, by setting the initial points for each game type, each game is characterized not only by the difficulty of obtaining points but also by the initial points, making it possible to further increase interest in the game production. In addition, the player can enjoy the game depending on which game is selected.

The initial point lottery counter is a loop counter with a counter value of 0 to 299, and is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 299. In the coin acquisition game (game A), initial points are selected from 0 points, 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, and 5 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the highest initial points are 5 points and all It is the lowest in the game, and the higher the initial points, the harder it is to be selected. Further, in the coin acquisition game (game A), the expected value of initial points is 1.4 points, which is the lowest among all games. In the mission achievement game (game B), initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the highest initial point is 8 points, which is relatively high. Although it is high, the higher the initial point, the harder it is to be selected. Further, in the mission achievement game (game B), the expected value of initial points is 2.6 points, which is the second lowest among all games. In the battle game (game C), initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the highest initial point is 8 points, which is relatively high. , a high initial point is relatively easy to select. Further, in the battle game (game C), the expected value of initial points is 3.8 points, and this expected value is an intermediate value among all games. In the quiz game (game D), initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the highest initial point is 8 points, which is relatively high. , the higher the initial point, the easier it is to be selected. Further, in the quiz game (game D), the expected value of initial points is 4.9 points, which is the second highest among all games. In the prediction game (game E), initial points are selected from 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, 8 points, and 10 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the highest initial point is 10 points, which is the highest among all games. The highest and higher initial points are more likely to be selected. Further, in the prediction game (game E), the expected value of initial points is 6.9 points, which is the highest among all games.

As mentioned above, the higher the difficulty of acquiring points in a game, the more difficult it is for people to choose high initial points, and the lower the expected value of initial points. Points are easy to select and the expected value of the initial points is high, and there is a contradictory relationship between the high degree of difficulty in obtaining points and the high initial points and expected value. In this way, the higher the difficulty level of a game to obtain points, the more difficult it is to select high initial points, and the lower the expected value of initial points, which prevents easy acquisition of many points, (setting value) is prevented from being easily grasped. On the other hand, the lower the difficulty level of a game to obtain points, the more likely it is that a high initial point will be selected, and the expected value of the initial point is high, giving opportunities for many point games, making it easier to understand non-set values. , a decrease in interest in game performance caused by repeatedly selecting a game with a low point acquisition difficulty level is suppressed. Therefore, the high level of point acquisition difficulty and the high level of point acquisition difficulty and the high level of initial points and expected values prevent non-set values (set values) from being easily grasped. At the same time, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in game performance.

Note that in this embodiment, there is a contradictory relationship between the level of difficulty in obtaining points and the level of initial points and expected value, but there is a correlation between the level of difficulty in obtaining points and the level of initial points and expected value. You can. In other words, the more difficult the game is to acquire points, the more likely it is that a high initial point will be selected, and the expected value of the initial point will be high; The expected value of the initial points may also be set to be low. By defining the relationship between the level of difficulty in obtaining points and the initial points and expected value, for example, the higher the difficulty in obtaining points in a game, the higher the initial points, but the harder it is to accumulate points during the game, and the more difficult it is to obtain points. The gameplay tends to be a fast-start type. On the other hand, the lower the difficulty level of a game to obtain points, the lower the initial points, but the easier it is to accumulate points during the game, and the more difficult the point acquisition is, the more points are accumulated during the game. In this way, by establishing a correlation between the level of difficulty in acquiring points and the level of initial points and expected value, it becomes possible to characterize the increase in the number of acquired points (elapsed time) according to the game type. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of point acquisition according to the game type, which further improves the interest of the game.

Further, the initial points do not need to be set for each game type, and the same points may be selected with the same probability in all games, or the selection rate of each initial point may be made uniform. Further, the initial points do not necessarily have to be given, and the points acquired in the game performance may start from 0 points.

Further, the acquired (selected) initial points may be displayed on the symbol display section 341, and in this case, the player can grasp the initial points at the start of the game, so the player can accurately grasp the acquired points including the initial points. It becomes possible to do so. On the other hand, the initial points do not need to be displayed on the symbol display section 341. In this case, the player cannot grasp the initial points at the start of the game, and therefore cannot accurately grasp the acquired points including the initial points. However, in step S4103, the initial point is internally added to the value of the point counter, so for example, if a high point is selected as the initial point, an unexpectedly large number of segments may be added in the 7-segment presentation described later. By controlling A to G, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

<Steps S4105 and S4106>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 86, in step S4105, the MPU 51 sets a game presentation time counter indicating the remaining time of the game presentation, and further starts the game presentation and sets a game presentation flag indicating that the game presentation is being executed. It is set to on (step S4106), and the set value suggestion effect processing is ended. The value of the game production time counter is, for example, after the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the second role-linked operation gate G2 disposed below the lower opening 606 of the one-hole croon device 60 is detected. It is set to a value corresponding to less than the minimum time required to display all non-set values as a 7-segment display of the set value suggestion display from the design time (theoretical value) until 99 passes. . The minimum time is the time required to control the seven segments A to G of the seven segment display section 39 five times each for a total of 35 times. For example, if the time required to control one segment is 0.5 seconds, the minimum time is 17 seconds. .5 seconds.

<Step S4107>
If the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game effect flag set to ON in step S4106 is set to ON, that is, the game effect is executed. It is determined whether or not (step S4107). If the game effect flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4108, and if the game effect flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4108. The process moves to step S4119 of 88.

<Step S4108>
If the game effect flag is set to on (step S4107: Yes), a game effect progress process is executed. In this game effect progress processing, for example, images are changed and screens are switched. Changing the image or switching the screen is performed depending on, for example, the remaining time of the game performance or the player's operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determining section 21. In addition, in the game performance progress process, points earned by the player from the end of the setting value suggestion performance process in the previous sub-timer interrupt process to the setting value suggestion process in the current sub-timer interrupt process. If there is, a process of storing this point in the RAM 512 is executed.

<Step S4109>
In step S4109, the MPU 51 executes a process of updating the value of the point counter. Specifically, based on the points stored in the RAM 512 in step S4108, the MPU 51 changes the setting value in the current sub-timer interrupt process from the end of the setting value suggestion production process in the previous sub-timer interrupt process. The points acquired by the player up to the suggestion performance processing are added to the value of the point counter.

<Steps S4110 and S4111>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the game performance time counter indicating the remaining time of the game performance. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the game performance time counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the game performance or not, and whether it is the end timing of the game performance (step S4111 ). If the value of the game performance time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to S4113, and if the value of the game performance time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No). , the process moves to S4112.

<Step S4112>
If the value of the game performance time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), that is, if there is time left to execute the game performance, it is determined whether the set value suggestion performance end flag is set to on. (Step S4112). The setting value suggestion performance end flag is a flag that ends the setting value suggestion performance, and in the command determination process of FIG. 82, when it is determined that the second role connected gate sensor detection command has been received (step S3907: Yes) , is set to ON in step S3908 of the command determination process. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2 by being ejected from the one-hole croon device 60 in a situation where there is time left for the game performance. to decide. Then, when the setting value suggestion performance end flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4116 of FIG. 88, and the setting value suggestion performance end flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S4112: No), the setting value suggestion effect is ended.

<Steps S4113 to S4115>
If the value of the game performance time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), that is, if it is the end timing of the game performance, the 7-segment performance start flag is set to ON (step S4113), and the game performance flag is further set to ON. is set to OFF (step S4114), and a game effect end process is executed (step S4115), thereby terminating the set value suggestion effect process.

The 7-segment effect start flag is a flag that starts a 7-segment effect that indicates or suggests a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39, and whether or not to start the 7-segment effect is determined in step S4119 of FIG. 88, which will be described later. It is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine.

<Steps S4116 to S4118>
If the set value suggestion performance end flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the value of the game performance time counter (step S4116), as shown in FIG. 88, and further starts the set value suggestion performance. The end flag is set to OFF (step S4117), and game performance end processing is executed, such as setting the game performance flag to OFF (step S4118), and the set value suggestion performance process is ended.

By the way, the residence time (delay time) of the game ball 99 in the one-hole croon device 60 is not constant, and varies depending on the entrance angle and position of the game ball 99, and also when a plurality of game balls 99 are in one-hole croon. If they are present in the device 60 at the same time, it is assumed that the game balls 99 will be ejected from the one-hole croon device 60 in a shorter time than the designed time (theoretical value) due to mutual interference of the game balls 99. In other words, in a situation where there is time left for the game production, the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole croon device 60, and the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2, thereby causing the role object continuous operation device is assumed to be activated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the staying time of the game ball 99 in the one-hole clown device 60 is shorter than the designed time, the game performance is forcibly terminated. This prevents the game effect from being executed on the symbol display section 341 after the start of the jackpot game, making it possible to appropriately execute the jackpot game effect.

In addition, when the game performance is forcibly terminated due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, unlike the case where the game performance is terminated due to the end timing of the game performance (the value of the game performance time counter is 0), the game performance is terminated at 7. The segment performance start flag is never set to on. That is, when the game performance is forcibly terminated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the setting value suggestion performance is ended without executing the 7-segment performance. Thereby, the setting value suggestion performance can be completed before the accessory continuous operation device is activated.

Further, even if the game performance is forcibly terminated due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to execute the 7-segment performance. For example, by not using the 7-segment display section 39 in the jackpot game performance, the 7-segment performance can be executed even after the start of the jackpot game. In other words, by not using a display device for indicating or suggesting a non-set value in a set value suggestion performance in a jackpot game performance, the game performance may be forcibly terminated due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. However, it is possible to explicitly or suggest non-setting values on the display device. In this way, by clearly indicating or suggesting the non-set value on the display device that is not used in the jackpot game, even if the game performance is forcibly terminated due to the operation of the accessory continuous activation device, the non-set value will be shown to the player. The player can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the non-set value even after the start of the jackpot game. Further, when the game performance is forcibly terminated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, information indicating or suggesting a non-set value may be provided on the symbol display section 341 during execution of the jackpot game. The information may be provided at any of the opening, opening/closing execution mode, and ending of the jackpot game, but, for example, the setting value suggestion screen (FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) ), see FIG. 47(C)), this can be executed by displaying an additional image including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display section 39 at the opening or ending.

Furthermore, even if an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is forcibly terminated due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the event (predetermined effect) is executed again if a predetermined condition is met. Good too. In this way, by re-executing the event (predetermined effect), many opportunities to confirm the event (predetermined effect) can be secured. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase interest in the game by re-executing the event (predetermined performance), and it becomes possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, as a predetermined condition for re-execution when an event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) is forcibly terminated, for example, an event such as a game effect occurs before the end timing of the event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) arrives. (predetermined performance) may be terminated. That is, if an event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) is ended before the event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) arrives, the event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) is re-executed. In this way, if an event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) is ended before the end timing of the event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) arrives, the event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) is re-executed. As a result, even if an event such as a game performance (predetermined performance) is interrupted in the middle, the event such as a game performance (predetermined performance) can be executed to the end as compensation. This makes it possible to further increase interest in the game by re-executing events such as game effects (predetermined effects), and also allows you to increase the amount of benefits provided by events such as game effects (prescribed effects). Coverage will be provided until the end of the period in which you receive the benefit, without interruption.

Moreover, as a predetermined condition to be re-executed when an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is forcibly terminated, for example, a jackpot game may be executed. In this way, since the predetermined condition is that the jackpot game is executed, it becomes possible to execute an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect in the jackpot game. In other words, when the game ball passes (enters) into the first role-linked operating gate G1 (first predetermined (ball entry) area) or the second role-linked action gate G2 (second predetermined (ball entry) area), the game When an event such as a production (predetermined production) is interrupted midway, the first role-related operation gate G1 (first predetermined (ball entry) area) or the second role-related operation gate G2 (second predetermined (ball entry) area) ) It becomes possible to execute an event (predetermined performance) such as a game performance in a jackpot game that is generated by the passage of the game ball to the ball. As a result, when an event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) is forcibly terminated, the event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) can be re-executed immediately after the event such as a game effect (predetermined effect) ends. This makes it possible to shorten the time during which events such as game effects (predetermined effects) are interrupted, and even if events such as game effects (predetermined effects) are forcibly terminated in the middle, events such as game effects (predetermined effects) can be interrupted. The predetermined effect is executed without any sense of discomfort, as in the case where is executed continuously until the end.

Further, the predetermined condition may be limited to the execution of a specific jackpot game. Specifically, the specific jackpot game is, for example, a variable probability jackpot game, a 16R (variable probability) jackpot game (a jackpot game with a long playing time (a predetermined number (for example, 7 to 10) or more round games are executed) ), 5R guaranteed variable jackpot game, (5R) normal jackpot game, etc. When a specific jackpot game as a predetermined condition is a variable probability jackpot game, the player is given the benefit of re-executing the specified performance that is forcibly terminated when it is a variable probability game that is advantageous to the player, further improving the advantage of the player. be done. In particular, if a specific jackpot game as a predetermined condition is a jackpot game in which many (a predetermined number or more) round games are executed, such as a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot, the execution time of the specific jackpot game is long, so game effects etc. It becomes possible to secure sufficient re-execution time for the event (predetermined effect). In addition, if a specific jackpot game as a predetermined condition is a normal jackpot game, this normal jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than a variable jackpot game, so it is forcibly terminated as compensation for the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player. An event (predetermined performance) such as a game performance is re-executed.

In addition, if the non-set value is specified or suggested when the game effect is forcibly terminated due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the non-set value is specified based on the points earned until the game effect is forcibly terminated, for example. or suggested. In addition, when the game performance is forcibly terminated, the player is disadvantaged because the time to earn points is short, but this disadvantage can be solved, for example, in the seventh embodiment described below. As will be explained, it is also possible to provide compensation by adding compensation points to the points earned at the end of the game performance.

<Step S4119>
If the game effect flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment effect start flag is set to ON (step S4119). The 7-segment performance start flag is a flag for starting the 7-segment performance, and step S4113 in FIG. 86 is set to ON when the game performance is ended. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the 7-segment performance due to the end of the game performance. Then, when the 7-segment performance start flag is set to ON (step S4119: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4120, and when the 7-segment performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4119: No), the process moves to step S4128.

<Steps S4120 and S4121>
If the 7-segment performance start flag is set to ON (step S4119: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the value of the point counter (step S4120), and determines whether the value of the point counter is 1 or more. (Step S4121). If the value of the point counter is 1 or more (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4122, and if the value of the point counter is not 1 or more (if it is 0), the process moves to step S4122. do.

<Steps S4122 to S4124>
If the value of the point counter is 1 or more (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process for clarifying or suggesting non-setting on the 7-segment display section 39 (steps S4122 to S4124). The processing in steps S4122 to S4124 in the setting value suggestion production of this embodiment is basically the same as steps S2303 to S2306 in the 7-segment display unit control processing in FIG. 49 in the first embodiment, and is The number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in the first embodiment may be replaced with the acquired points in this embodiment. Specifically, in step S4122, the MPU 51 reads segment display unit control information from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Then, the MPU 51 determines the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the point counter acquired in step S4120 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S4122. (Step S4123), and controls the 7-segment display section 39 based on this control content (Step S4124).

<Steps S4125 to S4127>
In step S4125, the MPU 51 clears the value of the point counter. Then, the MPU 51 turns on the 7-segment control flag (step S4126), sets the 7-segment performance start flag to OFF (step S4127), and ends the set value suggestion performance.

<Step S4128>
If the 7-segment performance start flag is set to OFF (step S4119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment control flag indicating that the 7-segment display unit 39 is under control is set to ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 7-segment display section 39 is being controlled (step S4128). If the 7-segment control flag is set to ON (step S4128: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4329, and if the 7-segment control flag is set to OFF (step S4128: No). , ends the setting value suggestion performance.

<Step S4129>
When the 7-segment control flag is set to ON (step S4128: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting value suggestion performance end flag for ending the setting value suggestion performance is set to ON, that is, the 7-segment performance. It is determined whether or not to terminate (step S4129). If the setting value suggestion performance end flag is set to ON (step S4129: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4131, and if the setting value suggestion performance end flag is set to OFF (step S4129: No), the process moves to step S4130.

<Step S4130>
If the set value suggestion performance end flag is set to OFF (step S4129: No), the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display section 39 (step S4130), and ends the set value suggestion performance. That is, while the 7-segment control flag is set on, the MPU 51 sequentially controls segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 according to the control details set in step S4123. This step S4130 continues until the set value suggestion performance end flag is set to ON by receiving the second role linked gate sensor detection command in step S3907 in the command determination process of FIG. This process is repeated until the game ball 99 passes through the gate G2. As a result, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the points earned by the player in the game is controlled, and a non-setting value is specified or suggested.

In addition, in the 7-segment performance, the number of segments A to G is controlled according to the points that the player has earned in the game, but the control status of the segments A to G may be displayed on the symbol display section 341. This makes it easier to guess non-set values while preventing the occurrence of a blank period in which no performance is performed on the symbol display section 341 between the end of the game performance and the start of the jackpot game performance. .

Further, the display contents (display history) of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment performance may be displayed as an additional image on the symbol display section 341 in the jackpot game. Specifically, the additional image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as, for example, an opening performance or an ending performance of a jackpot game. Further, the additional image may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 as an additional image including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display section 39, as in the first embodiment described above (Fig. 47 (B1), FIG. 47(B2), and FIG. 47(C)). In this way, by displaying the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment performance in the jackpot game on the symbol display section 341, information regarding the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the jackpot game can be displayed. It is possible to confirm. As a result, if you do not know that information regarding non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, when you miss the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, or when you miss the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, Even if you have forgotten it, you can recognize the contents displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 again. Therefore, the player can once again specify or estimate the non-set value and recognize or estimate the set value based on the additional image displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the jackpot game.

By the way, as mentioned above, the residence time (delay time) of the game ball 99 in the one-hole croon device 60 is not constant, and the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole croon device 60 in a shorter time than the designed time (theoretical value). It is assumed that In other words, in a situation where the control of the segments A to G corresponding to the points earned by the player in the game has not been completed, the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole croon device 60, and the second role-operating gate is activated. It is assumed that the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball 99 passing through G2. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the control of the number of segments A to G corresponding to the points has not been completed, the 7-segment performance is forcibly terminated when the accessory continuous operation device is activated. . This prevents the 7-segment performance from being executed in parallel during the execution of the jackpot game performance, making it possible to appropriately execute the jackpot game performance. In addition, when the 7-seg performance is forcibly terminated, if an additional image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the jackpot game as described above, this additional image will replace the information that was originally scheduled to be presented in the 7-seg performance. All the information that was previously provided will be presented again. Thereby, even if the 7-seg performance is forcibly terminated, the player can reliably enjoy benefits corresponding to the rights (points) acquired in the game performance.

Further, even if a jackpot game is started by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to execute the 7-segment effect in the same way as when the game effect is forcibly terminated. For example, by not using the 7-segment display section 39 in the jackpot game performance, the 7-segment performance can be continuously performed even when the jackpot game is in effect. In other words, by not using a display device for indicating or suggesting a non-set value in a set value suggestion performance in a jackpot game performance, even if a jackpot game is executed, the non-set value will be displayed on the display device. It is possible to continue to carry out explicit or implied actions. In this way, by explicitly indicating or suggesting a non-set value on a display device that is not used in a jackpot game, a jackpot game performance is started in a situation where the control of segments A to G corresponding to the number of points has not been completed. Even if the value is not set, information that clearly indicates or suggests the non-set value can be continuously provided to the player, and even after the jackpot game has started, the player can continue to guess the non-set value and enjoy the progress of the game. be able to.

<Steps S4131 and S4132>
If the setting value suggestion effect end flag is set to ON (step S4129: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 (step S4131), and also controls the 7-segment control. The flag is set to OFF (step S4132), and the set value suggestion effect processing is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the 7-segment performance is ended when the setting value suggestion performance end flag is set to on, but even in the jackpot game, non-setting is clearly indicated or suggested on the 7-segment display section 39. information may be displayed continuously. In this way, by continuously displaying information that explicitly or suggests non-setting on the 7-segment display section 39 during a jackpot game, it becomes possible to guess the non-setting value even during the execution of a jackpot game. . This allows more time to guess non-set values, making it possible to guess non-set values more accurately, and increasing interest in jackpot games, which tend to be boring. .

As described above, in this embodiment, if the first moving route R1 is selected when the conditional device is activated, the accessory continuous activation device is activated in a short time. On the other hand, if the second movement route R2 is selected when the conditional device is activated, the operation of the accessory continuous activation device is delayed, and the game effect is executed while the activation of the accessory continuous activation device is delayed. At the same time, information for specifying or estimating the non-set value is provided on the 7-segment display section 39 according to the points acquired in the game effect. Therefore, by selecting the first movement route R1 when the conditional device is activated, the accessory continuous activation device is activated in a short time, and the time until the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) starts is wasted. This can be avoided, and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented. Furthermore, by selecting the first movement route R1 when the player's playing time is limited, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling irritated or uncomfortable due to the slow start of the opening/closing execution mode. This prevents the player from having a bad impression of the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the activation of the accessory continuous activation device is delayed by selecting the second moving route R2 when the condition device is activated, information for specifying or estimating the non-setting value is provided, so the non-setting It becomes possible to guess and specify the value, which improves the interest of the game. As described above, in this embodiment, when the condition device is activated, it is possible to select the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2, and the advantages of selecting the respective movement routes R1 and R2 are different. . This allows the player to select the travel routes R1 and R2 according to his or her interests and circumstances, thereby improving convenience and interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to fifth embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to sixth embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, when the condition device is activated, the player can select which of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 to move the game ball 99, and the first movement route R1 When selecting , the accessory continuous actuation device is activated in a short time, while when the second moving route R2 is selected, the operation of the accessory continuous activation device is delayed by the one-hole croon device 60, and the accessory continuous activation device is activated in a short time. A case has been described in which, while the operation of the device is delayed, a game effect is executed and information for specifying or estimating a non-set value is provided according to the points acquired in the game effect.

However, in the sixth embodiment described above, the staying time of the game ball 99 in the one-hole croon device 60 is not necessarily constant as described above, and the staying time varies, and in this case, the game performance is It is also assumed that the execution time will be shorter than the design time (theoretical time). If the execution time of the game effect becomes shorter than the design time (theoretical time), the game effect will be forcibly terminated, and the expected value of points that can be earned in the game effect will be lower than the theoretical value, and the non-set value may be specified or The amount of information required for guessing is also less than the expected value, which puts the player at a disadvantage, and this can be a factor that reduces interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the accessory continuous actuation device is activated before reaching the design time (theoretical time) in which a specific condition can be satisfied, that is, the specific time (for example, game effect execution time) is When shortened, it is assumed that a certain number of specific conditions are satisfied in addition to the number of specific conditions that have already been met (for example, points earned in a game). In this way, it is assumed that a certain number of specific conditions are met when the accessory continuous activation device is activated before the theoretical time is reached, so the expected number of fulfillment of the specific conditions is small. Compensation will be provided in case of. As a result, if the time during which a specific condition can be met becomes shorter than the theoretical time (when the specific time is shortened), the disadvantage suffered by the player is reduced, and a decline in interest in the game is suppressed. .

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, focusing on the differences from the above-described sixth embodiment.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In this embodiment, a part of the procedure of the setting value suggestion effect processing is different from the above-described sixth embodiment. Here, FIG. 89 and FIG. 90(A) are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion production process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89, in the setting value suggestion production process of this embodiment, when the setting value suggestion production end flag is set to on, if the game production is in the middle of execution (the value of the game production time counter is not 0), This is the same as in the sixth embodiment described above in that even if the game effect is (steps S4116 to S4118), the game effect is ended.

<Step S4201>
In the setting value suggestion rendering process of this embodiment, when the game rendering is ended (step S4118), compensation point addition processing is executed (step S4201), and then the setting value suggestion rendering process is ended. In this compensation point addition process, compensation points are added to the points earned by the player until the game production is forcibly terminated, and based on the points to which the compensation points have been added, segments A to A of the 7-segment display section 39 are added. G control is executed.

Here, FIG. 90(B) is a diagram showing an example of a compensation point determination table used by the audio lamp control device 5, and the MPU 51 determines compensation points based on this compensation point determination table.

As shown in FIG. 90(B), in the compensation point determination table, compensation points are defined by a compensation point lottery counter for each game type, and the MPU 51 determines compensation according to the game type and the value of the compensation point lottery counter. Select a point. The compensation point lottery counter is a loop counter with a counter value of 0 to 149, and is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 149. In the coin acquisition game (game A), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, 8 points, and 10 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the highest compensation point is 10 points and all It is the highest in the game, and the higher the compensation points, the harder it is to be selected. Further, in the coin acquisition game (game A), the expected value of compensation points is 6.9 points, which is the highest among all games. In the mission achievement game (game B), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the highest compensation point is 8 points, which is relatively high. The higher the compensation point, the more likely it is to be selected. Furthermore, in the mission achievement game (game B), the expected value of compensation points is 4.9 points, which is the second highest among all games. In the battle game (game C), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the highest compensation point is 8 points, which is relatively high. , a high compensation point is relatively easy to select. Further, in the battle game (game C), the expected value of compensation points is 3.8 points, and this expected value is an intermediate value among all games. In the quiz game (game D), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points, and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the highest compensation point is 8 points, which is relatively high. , the higher the compensation point, the more difficult it is to be selected. Furthermore, in the quiz game (game D), the expected value of compensation points is 2.6 points, which is the second lowest among all games. In the prediction game (game E), compensation points are selected from 0 points, 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, and 5 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the highest compensation point is 5 points, which is the highest compensation point among all games. The lowest and highest compensation points are less likely to be selected. Further, in the prediction game (game E), the expected value of compensation points is 1.4 points, which is the lowest among all games.

In this way, compensation points are awarded when the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole croon device 60 in a shorter time than the design time (theoretical time) (when the specific period is shortened), so that points can be earned in the game. It is possible to compensate for the disadvantage suffered by the player due to the shortening of the time during which the player can obtain the game.

In addition, in the compensation point determination table, contrary to the initial points, the higher the difficulty of acquiring points in a game, the higher the compensation points are likely to be selected, and the expected value of compensation points is higher; The lower the degree, the more difficult it is to select high compensation points, and the lower the expected value of compensation points, and there is a correlation between the degree of difficulty in obtaining points and the higher compensation points and expected value. In this way, the more disadvantageous a game is to the player, the easier it is to obtain a large compensation, while the more advantageous a game is to the player, the more difficult it is to obtain a large compensation. ), while it is more advantageous for the game ball 99 to fall from the one-hole croon device 60 in a shorter time than the designed time, the more advantageous the player is to play the game, the more the game ball 99 will fall from the one-hole croon device 60 in a shorter time than the designed time. It is possible to provide gameplay that would be disadvantageous if the player did so. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on not only the game type but also the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole croon device 60 according to the game type, which improves the interest of the game. be done. Furthermore, when the game ball 99 is dropped from the one-hole croon device 60 in a shorter time than the designed time, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the compensation points that are acquired. Particularly, when a game is selected that is disadvantageous to the player because the expected value of initial points is small and the difficulty of obtaining points is high, the one-hole croon device 60 is operated in a shorter time than the designed time in order to obtain many compensation points. You can enjoy the game by focusing on the behavior of the game ball 99 in the one-hole croon device 60 while hoping that the game ball 99 will fall from the hole. When the ball 99 falls, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on the compensation points while expecting to obtain larger compensation points.

In this embodiment, although there is a correlation between the level of difficulty in obtaining points and the level of compensation points and expected value, there is a contradictory relationship between the level of difficulty in obtaining points and the level of compensation points and expected value. You can. In other words, the higher the difficulty of obtaining points in a game, the more difficult it is to select a high compensation point and the lower the expected value of compensation points, while the lower the difficulty of obtaining points, the more likely a high compensation point is selected. In addition to being easy to use, the expected value of compensation points may be made high. By defining the relationship between the level of difficulty in obtaining points and the compensation points and expected value, it is possible to award compensation points proportional to the difficulty level in obtaining points in each game. The expected value of points is maintained. As a result, when a game advantageous to the player is selected, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player when the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole croon device 60 in a shorter time than the designed time. Become.

Further, compensation points may be awarded according to the remaining time of the game performance (the time until the game ball falls from the one-hole croon device 60). For example, the more time remaining in the game production (the shorter the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole croon device 60), the more points may be awarded (the higher the expected value of compensation points). It will be done. In this case, the shorter the time in which points can be earned in the game, the more compensation points (expected value) will be obtained, so that compensation is provided commensurate with the disadvantage suffered by the player. Of course, even when awarding compensation points according to the remaining time of the game performance (the time until the game ball falls from the one-hole croon device 60), the game type (for example, point acquisition difficulty level) is determined as described above. It is also conceivable to award compensation points depending on the situation.

In addition, compensation points do not need to be set for each game type, and the same points may be selected with the same probability in all games. In this case, the expected value of compensation points in each game is uniform. The unfairness between each game is eliminated.

Further, the selection rate of each compensation point may be made uniform, and of course, compensation points do not necessarily need to be provided.

<Step S4202>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 89, in step S4202, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment performance start flag to ON. This 7-segment performance start flag is a flag for starting the 7-segment performance as described above, and is referred to in step S4119 of the setting value suggestion performance process in FIG. 88. That is, in this embodiment, if the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole croon device 60 is short and the game presentation is forcibly terminated, the 7-segment presentation is performed even after the accessory continuous operation device is activated. is executed as a compensation effect, which will be described later. As a result, even if the game effect is forcibly terminated, the 7-segment effect is executed as a compensation effect based on the points obtained by adding the compensation points to the points acquired before the game effect is forcibly terminated, and the game information to infer non-set values can be given to the user.

<Steps S4203 and S4204>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 sets a compensation performance time counter and further sets a compensation performance flag on (step S4204). The compensation performance time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time of the 7-segment performance executed as the compensation performance. The compensation effect flag is a flag indicating that the compensation effect is being executed, and in step S4205 to determine whether or not to set the 7-segment control flag to ON, in order to execute the compensation effect, the flag shown in FIG. Referenced by the MPU 51 in step S4206.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether the compensation effect flag set to on in step S4204 is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the compensation performance is to be started as a 7-segment performance, and if it is not a compensation performance (step S4205: Yes), by setting the 7-segment control flag to ON (step S4126), A 7-segment performance is executed that ends when the set value suggestion performance end flag is turned on, that is, when the game ball 99 passes through the second role-linked operation gate G2. On the other hand, if it is not a compensation performance (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 maintains the compensation performance flag on without setting the 7-segment control flag on, and uses the compensation performance time counter set in step S4203 to Compensation performance is executed in which the prescribed 7-segment performance is ended when a specified time has elapsed (the value of the compensation performance time counter is 0).

<Step S4206>
If the 7-segment control flag set in step S4126 is off (step S4128: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the compensation effect flag indicating that the player is on is on (step S4206). If the compensation effect flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4207, and if the compensation effect flag is off (step S4206: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion effect process. .

<Steps S4207 and S4208>
If the compensation performance flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the compensation performance time counter (step S4207), and checks whether the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is 0. A determination is made (step S4208). If the value of the compensation performance time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4210, and if the value of the compensation performance time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4208: No). ), the process moves to step S4209.

<Steps S4209 to S4211>
If the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4208: No), the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled in the same manner as step S4130 (step S4209), and the set value suggestion performance process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the compensation performance time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 as in step S4131 (step S4210). , sets the compensation effect flag to OFF (step S4211), and ends the set value suggestion effect processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole croon device 60 is short and the game performance is forcibly ended (when the specific period is shortened), Even after the activation device is activated, the 7-segment performance is executed as a compensation performance. Thereby, even if the game performance is forcibly terminated, the 7-segment performance is executed as a compensation performance. This prevents the disadvantage that the player suffers due to not performing the 7-segment effect when the game effect is forcibly terminated, that is, the disadvantage that information for estimating the non-set value cannot be obtained. Furthermore, in the compensation performance, a 7-segment performance is executed as a compensation performance based not only on the points acquired until the game performance is forcibly terminated, but also on the points obtained by adding compensation points. Therefore, a player who suffers the disadvantage of being deprived of a part of the opportunity to earn points in the game due to the forced termination of the game performance can be compensated for this disadvantage in the form of compensation points.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to sixth embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to seventh embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Eighth embodiment]
In the above-mentioned sixth embodiment, as explained in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, the staying time of the game ball 99 in the one-hole croon device 60 is not necessarily constant, and the execution time of the game effect is different from the designed one. If the time becomes shorter than the theoretical time, the game performance will be forcibly terminated, the expected value of points that can be earned through the game performance will be lower than the theoretical value, and the amount of information for identifying or guessing the non-set value is also expected. This may give the player a disadvantage of being less than the value, and this may become a factor that reduces interest in the game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the activation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the rotating body for the game ball moving on the second movement path is delayed. For example, when the condition device is activated, the rotating body moves the game ball from a predetermined posture (first posture) in a standby state to a predetermined area (for example, a second role continuous gate) where the accessory continuous operation device starts operating. The rotation is driven so that the time required for changing to a specific posture (third posture) for moving is made constant. By delaying the actuation of the accessory continuous actuation device by driving the rotating body in this manner, the delay time of the activation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the accessory continuous actuation device is equalized. As a result, the disadvantage suffered by the player when the time during which a specific condition can be satisfied becomes shorter than the theoretical time is reduced, and a decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above.

This embodiment differs from the above-described sixth embodiment in the configuration for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device. Here, FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 92(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92(B) 93 is a perspective view of the rotating body 70 provided on the game board 31, and FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the function of the rotating body 70.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92(A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in place of the croon device 60 of the sixth embodiment described above, a means for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is used. A rotating body 70 is provided. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment employs the rotating body 70, the peripheral configuration of the rotating body 70 is different from that of the sixth embodiment described above.

The rotating body 70 limits or delays the falling of the game ball 99 launched onto the second movement path R2 from the game board 31, and moves the game ball 99 to a second role-linked operation gate disposed on the lower right side of the rotating body 70. This is to move it to G2. This rotating body 70 can be rotated clockwise when the game board 31 is viewed from the front by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. 92(B), the rotating body 70 has a substantially cylindrical shape with a constant thickness comparable to the diameter of the game ball 99, and has a housing portion 701 and a circumferential surface 702. The accommodating portion 701 is recessed toward the center in the radial direction and opens in the front-rear direction D1 and outward in the radial direction. That is, the accommodating portion 701 has an open cross-sectional structure (a structure in which a portion of the periphery is not enclosed (an open structure)). The accommodating part 701 can accommodate one game ball 99 that is launched onto the second movement path R2, and when the rotating body 70 is rotated with the game ball 99 accommodated in the accommodating part 701, the accommodating part The game ball 99 accommodated in the ball 701 is released while rolling one game ball 99 toward the second role-linked operation gate G2 (see FIGS. 93(B) and 93(C)). That is, the ejection part of the game ball 99 in the delay means is not limited to the closed cross-sectional structure like the ejection part 602 of the Kroon device 60 of the sixth embodiment described above with respect to the ejection direction (movement direction) of the game ball 99. , it may have an open cross-sectional structure like the accommodating portion 701 of the rotating body 70. In other words, if the discharge section of the delay means can discharge the game balls 99 one by one while rolling toward the second role-linked operation gate G2 which is a predetermined area (ball entry area), at least a part of the game balls 99 can be released while rolling. It may also have an open configuration, for example as a groove or cutout. Of course, the accommodating portion 701 of the rotating body 70 of this embodiment may have a closed cross-sectional structure with respect to the release direction (movement direction) of the game balls 99.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92(A), above the rotating body 70, a separating nail 481 and a guiding nail 482 are provided for guiding the game ball 99 launched onto the second movement path R2 to the rotating body 70. There is. The separation nails 481 and the guide nails 482 are basically the same as the separation nails 481 and the guide nails 482 of the sixth embodiment described above, but the lowermost ends of the separation nails 481 and the guide nails 482, respectively, are connected to the rotating body 70. A holding portion 485 is configured to hold the game ball 99 in contact with the peripheral surface 702 of the ball (see FIG. 93(A)). The game ball 99 is held in contact with the circumferential surface 702 of the rotary body 70 in the holding portion 485, and thereby rolls relatively on the circumferential surface 702, and the accommodating portion 701 of the rotary body 70 is directed upward. When it is in the open position, it is accommodated in the accommodation section 701 (see FIG. 93(B)). Note that the holding portion 485 may be formed of a member made of resin or the like. In this case, the holding portion 485 is formed, for example, as a gate penetrating vertically.

A second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided near the holding portion 485, and this second route detection sensor Rs2 detects that the game ball 99 is on the second movement route R2, as in the sixth embodiment described above. Detects being launched. The second route detection sensor Rs2 can further detect that the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485. Note that a sensor for detecting that the game ball 99 is held in the holding section 485 may be provided separately from the second route detection sensor Rs2. In this case, the second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided above (upstream side) the sensor that detects that the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485. Thereby, the game ball 99 launched onto the second movement route R2 can be detected earlier than when the second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided near the holding part 485. Furthermore, when the holding section 485 is configured as a gate, the holding section 485 may include a second route detection sensor Rs2, similar to the first role-linked gate sensor Gs1 and the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2.

Further, the separation nail 481 is provided with drop portions 486 having a wider interval than the diameter of the game ball 99. This dropping portion 486 has the role of causing the game ball 99 launched onto the second moving path R2 to fall downward from the left side of the second role-linked operation gate G2 while the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485. (See FIG. 93(A)). In this way, the separating nail 481 is provided with a dropping portion 486, and the game ball 99 that is launched onto the second movement path R2 while the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485 is moved to the left of the second role-linked operation gate G2. By dropping the game balls 99 downward from the side, it is possible to prevent balls from clogging in the second movement path R2 when a large number of game balls 99 are launched while the game balls 99 are held in the holding part 485.

As described above, the second role-linked operation gate G2 is arranged on the lower right side of the rotating body 70, and the guide nail 487 is provided above the second role-linked operation gate G2. The guide nail 487 guides the game ball 99 held by the holding part 485 of the rotating body 70 to the second role-linked operation gate G2 when the game ball 99 is released from the rotating body 70 (FIG. 93(C) )reference).

The rotating body 70 is rotatable in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as described above, but the rotating state and the stopped state are controlled by the MPU 51. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(A), when the conditioner is not activated, the rotating body 70 is stopped in the first attitude in which the housing part 701 is opened downward, and the stopping position is Fixed. Then, when the condition device is activated and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 (the holding part 485), the rotating body 70 starts rotating in the clockwise direction, and when the rotating body 70 returns to the first posture, the rotating body 70 rotates. to stop. In other words, the rotating body 70 starts rotating from the home position, and when it reaches the home position again after making one rotation, the rotation is stopped at the home position. When the rotating body 70 rotates once from the first attitude, during that time it passes through the second attitude shown in FIG. 93(B) and the third attitude shown in FIG. 93(C). The second posture shown in FIG. 93(B) is a posture in which the accommodating portion 701 of the rotating body 70 is opened upward. It falls and is contained. The third posture shown in FIG. 93(C) is a posture in which the accommodating portion 701 of the rotating body 70 opens to the right, and in this third posture, the game ball 99 accommodated in the accommodating portion 701 is released.

Here, when the rotating body 70 is rotated, the rotational speed of the rotating body 70 is constant or approximately constant at least from the first attitude shown in FIG. 93(A) to the third attitude shown in FIG. 93(C). It is said that As described above, the attitude of the rotating body 70 in the standby state is the first attitude, and the rotational speed of the rotating body 70 is constant or substantially constant at least from the first attitude to the third line of sight, and the accessory is continuously operated. The time during which activation of the device is delayed is constant or approximately constant. This prevents the game performance from being forced to end due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device before the end of the game performance, thereby preventing the time during which points can be earned from becoming short. As a result, the irritation and discomfort caused by forcibly ending the game presentation or 7-segment presentation (setting value suggestion presentation) is prevented, and the player suffers from the shortening of the time in which points can be earned. Since disadvantages can be eliminated, a decline in interest in games is suppressed.

Further, the rotational speed when the rotating body 70 is rotationally driven is such that, for example, the time required for the rotating body 70 to change from the first attitude to the third attitude is the same as that of the one-hole croon device 60 in the sixth embodiment described above. The rotation speed is set to a time that is approximately the same as the designed time (theoretical time) of the staying time of the game ball 99. Specifically, the time it takes for the rotating body 70 to change from the first attitude to the third attitude is set, for example, in a range of 1 minute to 20 minutes, preferably in a range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes. and is typically set to about 10 minutes. By setting the time required for the rotating body 70 to change from the first posture to the third posture within such a range, the game can be performed while the rotating body 70 delays the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device. Setting value suggestion performance including performance and 7-segment performance can be reliably executed.

In this embodiment, the rotating body 70 is rotatable in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, but the rotating body 70 may be rotatable in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, or clockwise when viewed from below. It may also be something that can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, such as a roulette. That is, the rotating body 70 is not particularly limited in its rotating direction or shape as long as it can delay the operation of the accessory continuous operating device.

In addition, if the method of rotationally driving the rotating body 70 is such that the time during which the operation of the accessory continuous actuator is delayed is constant or approximately constant, the rotation of the rotating body 70 is not necessarily started from the first attitude and the rotation is constant or approximately constant. It is not necessary to use a method of making one rotation at a substantially constant rotation speed. For example, the rotation may be started from the first attitude, the rotating body 70 may be stopped for a certain period of time at one or more locations such as the second attitude or the third attitude, and then rotated again. When the rotating body 70 is stopped in the second posture, the game balls 99 held in the holding section 485 can be reliably accommodated in the accommodating section 701 of the rotating body 70. Furthermore, when the rotating body 70 is stopped in the third posture, the game ball 99 accommodated in the housing portion 701 of the rotating body 70 can be reliably guided to and passed through the second role-linked operation gate G2.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the condition device is activated, if the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 ( When it is detected that the game ball 99 is held in the holding part 485), the rotating body 70 starts rotating in the clockwise direction, but the rotating body 70 may be kept rotating at all times. . In this case, it is preferable that the rotating body 70 be rotated at a constant or substantially constant rate, but in addition to rotating at an irregular speed, it may also be driven to perform irregular rotation by repeating rotation and stopping. By keeping the rotating body 70 constantly rotating in this way, the time during which the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed can be changed to the timing when the game ball 99 is launched onto the second movement path R2 (attitude of the rotating body 70 (storage) 701 position)). Therefore, by keeping the rotating body 70 constantly rotating, a game feature is provided in which the player can select the time for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device depending on the launch timing of the game ball 99, and the interest of the game is improved. be done.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96, focusing on the differences from the aforementioned sixth embodiment.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment, in addition to the setting value suggestion process (see FIG. 81) for the sub-timer interrupt process in the sixth embodiment described above, An operation control process is executed (see step S4301 in FIG. 94). Furthermore, the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment differs from the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 82) in the content of command determination processing (see FIG. 95).

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received, the process necessary for operating the rotating body 70 is different from the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. executed. Here, FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Steps S4401 and S4402>
As shown in FIG. 95, if it is determined that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 receives the second route detection command in the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Similarly to the case where it is determined that the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S3904). Further, the MPU 51 sets the rotating body operation start flag to ON (step S4401), sets the rotating body operation time counter (step S4402), and ends the command determination process.

Here, the rotating body operation start flag is a flag for starting the rotation of the rotating body 70, and it is determined whether or not to start the rotation of the rotating body 70 in step S4501 of the rotating body operation control process in FIG. 96, which will be described later. It is referenced by the MPU 51 for this purpose.

Further, the rotating body operating time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining operating time (rotation time) of the rotating body 70, and when the value of the rotating body operating time counter becomes 0, the rotation of the rotating body 70 is stopped. In other words, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 when the condition device is activated (the game ball 99 is held by the holding unit 485), If it is detected that the rotating body 70 is rotating), a rotating body rotation start flag is set to ON in order to start the rotation of the rotating body 70, and a rotating body operation time counter that defines the rotation time of the rotating body 70 is set.

Note that the value of the rotating body operation time counter is such that when the rotation of the rotating body 70 starts from the first posture (see FIG. 93(A)) and is rotated at a constant speed, the rotating body 70 returns to the first posture (see FIG. 93(A)). (see FIG. 93(A)). Further, the operation of the rotating body 70 may be controlled using a sensor capable of detecting the attitude of the rotating body. For example, a detection sensor such as an optical sensor is provided at each portion where the housing section 701 is located when the rotating body 70 is in the first to third postures, and the position of the housing section 701 is confirmed by these sensors while the rotating body The operation of 70 may be controlled.

[Rotating body operation control processing]
In the rotating body operation control process of this embodiment, a process of starting the rotation of the rotating body 70 and stopping the rotation of the rotating body 70 is executed. Here, FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the rotating body operation control process of this embodiment.

<Step S4501>
In the rotating body operation control process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the rotating body operation start flag for starting the rotation of the rotating body 70 is set to ON (step S4501). ). If the rotating body operation start flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4502, and if the rotating body operation start flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No). , the process moves to step S4505.

<Steps S4502 to S4504>
If the rotating body operation start flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the rotating body 70 in the first posture (FIG. 93(A)) so that the rotating body 70 rotates at a constant speed. (see) (step S4502), and a rotating body operation flag indicating that the rotating body 70 is rotating is set to ON (step S4503). Then, the MPU 51 sets the rotary body operation start flag to OFF (step S4504), and ends the rotary body operation control process.

<Step S4505>
If the rotating body operation start flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 sets the rotating body operation flag, which is set to ON in step S4503, indicating that the rotating body 70 is rotating, to ON. In other words, it is determined whether the rotating body 70 is rotating (step S4505). If the rotating body operation flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4506, and if the rotating body operation flag is set to OFF (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4506. The rotating body operation control process ends.

<Steps S4506 and S4507>
If the rotating body operation flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the rotating body operation time counter indicating the remaining rotation time of the rotating body 70 (step S4506), and It is determined whether the value of the rotating body operation time counter is 0 (step S4507). If the value of the rotating body operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4508, and if the value of the rotating body operating time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: :No), the rotary body operation control process ends.

<Step S4508 and Step S4509>
If the value of the rotating body operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 stops the rotation of the rotating body 70 (step S4508), and sets the rotating body operating flag to OFF (step S4508). S4509), the rotary body operation control process ends. In this way, by stopping the rotation of the rotating body 70 when the value of the rotating body operation time counter becomes 0, the rotating body 70 rotates once and takes the first posture (see FIG. 93(A). )).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 when the condition device is activated (the game ball 99 is detected by the holding unit 485 If it is detected that the ball 99 is held), the rotating body 70 starts rotating from the same first attitude in each rotation and rotates at the same constant speed in each rotation. Therefore, when the rotary body 70 is used to delay the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the time during which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the rotor 70 is delayed is equalized. This prevents the game performance from being forced to end due to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device before the end of the game performance, thereby preventing the time during which points can be earned from becoming short. As a result, the irritation and discomfort caused by forcibly ending the game presentation or 7-segment presentation (setting value suggestion presentation) is prevented, and the player suffers from the shortening of the time in which points can be earned. Since disadvantages can be eliminated, a decline in interest in games is suppressed.

Note that the delay means for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is not limited to the one-hole croon device 60 of the sixth embodiment described above or the rotating body 70 of this embodiment, but may be other means. good. The delay means may be anything that delays or stops the downward fall of the game ball 99, thereby delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device. For example, it may be a means of lengthening the movement path or reducing the movement speed. It may also be a means for opening and closing the upper opening of the second link gate. As such a delay means, for example, a means for defining the movement path of the game ball 99 by a member made of resin or the like assembled to the game board 31, a means for adjusting the layout of nails driven into the game board 31, etc. can be considered. . Further, the delay means may be a means for moving the game ball 99 upward once it has reached a predetermined position, once or multiple times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to seventh embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to eighth embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Ninth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, depending on the firing intensity of the game ball 99, which of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 has a different time from the launch of the game ball 99 until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. The case where the player can select whether to move the game ball 99 has been described above.

However, when the player is required to select which of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 to move the game ball 99 based on the firing intensity of the game ball 99, errors in adjusting the firing strength or the launch of the game ball 99 may occur. There is a concern that the game ball 99 may be launched onto a moving path contrary to the player's wishes due to the occurrence of a defect. If the game ball 99 is launched in a moving path contrary to the player's wishes in this way, it is assumed that the player's impression of the game machine will be adversely affected by feelings such as irritation and discomfort.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the movement path through which the game ball can move is switched by the distribution member that is activated in response to the activation of the condition device. In this way, by switching the movement path through which the game ball can move by the distribution member, the player can move the first movement path and the second movement path by firing the game ball while checking the operation of the distribution member. You can select which of the movement routes you want to move the game ball on. This eliminates the need to adjust the firing intensity, reducing the possibility that a movement route that is contrary to the player's wishes will be selected, and thereby suppressing the deterioration of the player's impression of the gaming machine.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above. Note that FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining a modification of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the configuration for allowing the player to select whether to allow the game ball 99 to pass through the first role-linked gate G1 or to pass the game ball 99 through the second role-linked gate G2 is the above-mentioned sixth feature. This embodiment differs from the embodiment of . Note that in this embodiment, the lamp display section 35 (see FIG. 64) in the fifth embodiment described above is used instead of the 7-segment display section 39 as a device that clearly indicates or suggests a non-set value. . Here, FIG. 97 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 98 is a main view of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 97 for explaining the function of the distribution member 80. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the branching part 48 in the sixth embodiment described above is omitted, and the fourth movement defined between the decorative part 310 and the outer rail 312 is The game ball 99 launched toward the right side area of the game board 31 is guided to the upper right side of the game board 31 by the path R4. In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a distribution member 80 is provided above the separation nail 481, and by switching the posture of the distribution member 80, the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation are activated. It is possible to select which gate G2 the game ball 99 should pass through.

As shown in FIGS. 98(A) and 98(B), the distribution member 80 has a distribution portion 801 and a rotating shaft 802. This distribution member 80 can be rotated left and right around a rotation shaft 802 when viewed from the front of the game ball board 31 by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31, so that ) It is possible to switch between the first attitude shown in FIG. 98(B) and the second attitude shown in FIG. 98(B). The first posture shown in FIG. 98(A) guides the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 to the first movement path R1 that can pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1, and This is a posture that limits guidance of the game ball 99 to the second movement path R2 (one-hole croon device 60) that can pass through the operating gate G2. On the other hand, in the second posture shown in FIG. ), and is a posture that restricts the guidance of the game ball 99 to the first movement route R1 that can pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1.

Although the distribution member 80 is rotatable between the first attitude and the second attitude as described above, the rotating state and the stopped state are controlled by the MPU 51. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the distribution member 80 is stopped in the first attitude when the conditioner is not activated, and the stopping position is fixed. Therefore, when the condition device is not activated, the distribution member 80 is in the first position, so that when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 is in the first position. It is guided toward the activation gate G1.

Here, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game ball 99 is guided to the first role-linked operation gate G1 by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482, as in the sixth embodiment described above. In the embodiment, the guide nail 482 does not have a drop portion 483 through which the game ball 99 can pass. As a result, when the distribution member 80 is in the first attitude, all the game balls 99 are guided to the first role-linked operation gate G1 by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 482, and pass through the first role-linked operation gate G1. On the other hand, guiding of the game ball 99 to the one-hole croon device 60 is restricted. Therefore, when a game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in a state where the condition device is not activated, it is restricted that a large number of game balls 99 are guided to the one-hole croon device 60, and the one-hole Game balls 99 are prevented from clogging in the clown device 60.

Then, when the condition device is activated, the MPU 51 switches the orientation of the distribution member 80 between the first orientation and the second orientation at regular time intervals. Furthermore, when the condition device is activated, when the game ball 99 is detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, the distribution member 80 stops at the first attitude. It is said to be in a state of In this way, when the game ball 99 is detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, the distribution member 80 is stopped in the first attitude, so that the condition device Even if the game balls 99 are launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the operating state, a large number of game balls 99 are restricted from being guided to the one-hole croon device 60, and the game with the one-hole croon device 60 is restricted. Ball clogging of the balls 99 is prevented.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 104, focusing on the differences from the aforementioned sixth embodiment.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment, in addition to the setting value suggestion process (see FIG. 81) of the sub-timer interrupt process in the sixth embodiment described above, Member operation control processing is executed (see step S4601 in FIG. 99). Further, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the content of command determination processing is different from the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 82) (see FIGS. 100 and 101). .

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, when it is determined that the conditional device activation command, the first gate detection command, and the second gate detection command have been received, the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above is Differently, processing necessary for the operation of the rotating body 70 is executed. Here, FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 100, when it is determined that the conditional device activation command has been received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the conditional device activation command has been received in the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Similarly to the case where it is determined, the game explanation performance start flag for starting the game explanation performance is set to ON (step S3902). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the left operation flag to ON (step S4701), and ends the command determination process.

Here, the left operation flag is used to move the distribution member 80 in the left direction when viewed from the front in order to switch the posture of the distribution member 80 from the first posture shown in FIG. 98(A) to the second posture shown in FIG. 98(B). This is a flag for rotating the distribution member 80 in the left direction, and is referenced by the MPU 51 in step S4801 of the distribution member operation control process in FIG. 102, which will be described later. be done. That is, the left operation flag is also a flag that starts switching control of the distribution member 80 in the distribution member operation control process. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated, the distribution member 80 is placed in the second posture capable of guiding the game ball 99 to the second movement path R2, that is, the one-hole croon device 60 (second role-linked operation). The game ball 99 can be immediately switched to the second posture in which the game ball 99 can be guided to the gate G2).

<Steps S4702 and S4703>
If it is determined that the conditional device activation command has not been received (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first route detection command has been received (step S4702), and receives the first route detection command. If it is determined that the command has been executed (step S4702: Yes), the first route detection flag is set to on (step S4703), and the command determination process ends.

Here, the first route detection command is such that when the conditional device is activated, the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. This is a command set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 when The first route detection flag is activated when the game ball is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. This flag is used to stop the distribution member 80 in the first posture shown in FIG. 98A in steps S4806 and S4820 of the distribution member operation control process in FIGS. This is referred to by the MPU 51 in order to determine whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 in the stopped state in the first posture.

<Step S4704>
As shown in FIG. 101, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 receives the second route detection command in the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above. Similarly to the case where it is determined that the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S3904). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to ON (step S4704), and ends the command determination process.

Here, the second route detection command is such that when the conditional device is operating, the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. This is a command set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 when The second route detection flag detects the distribution member 80 when the game ball is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. This flag is used to stop the distribution member 80 in the first posture shown in FIG. 98A in steps S4808 and S4822 of the distribution member operation control process in FIGS. This is referred to by the MPU 51 in order to determine whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 in the stopped state in the first posture.

[Distribution member operation control processing]
In the distribution member control process of this embodiment, the distribution member 80 is controlled to be in a stopped state in the first posture shown in FIG. ) is executed. Here, FIGS. 102 to 104 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control process of this embodiment.

<Step S4801>
As shown in FIG. 102, in the distribution member control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the left operation flag is set to on (step S4801). Here, the left operation flag is a flag that is set to ON when the conditioner is activated (see FIG. 100), and by rotating the distribution member 80 to the left in front view, the distribution member 80 is turned on. This is a flag that starts switching control. That is, the distribution member 80 is switched and controlled in response to the operation of the conditioner. If the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4802, and if the left operation flag is set to OFF (step S4801: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4802. The process moves to step S4805 of 103.

<Steps S4802 to 4804>
When the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 to the left when viewed from the front (step S4802). As a result, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the first attitude shown in FIG. 98(A) to the second attitude shown in FIG. 98(B), and switching control of the allocation member 80 is triggered by the operation of the condition device. is started. In this way, by starting the switching control of the distribution member 80 in response to the operation of the conditioner, it is possible to recognize that the conditioner has been activated when switching of the distribution member 80 is started. , it can be recognized that the accessory continuous operation device can be operated. As a result, when the condition device is not activated, for example, during the execution of a variable game, the game ball 99 is prevented from being shot out unnecessarily toward the role-linked activation gates G1 and G2, and the disadvantage suffered by the player is reduced. . Then, the MPU 51 sets on the left-moving flag indicating that the distribution member 80 has been moved to the left (the second posture) (step S4803). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets a left operation time counter (step S4804), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

Here, the left operation time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time for the distribution member 80 to maintain the second posture (the remaining time until switching to the first posture), and when the value of the left operation time counter becomes 0. In this case, when the distribution member 80 is rotated to the right, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the second attitude to the first attitude. Note that the value of the left operation time counter is set, for example, to a value corresponding to a time during which the player can select the second movement route R2 with ample time. Specifically, the value of the left actuation time counter is set, for example, from a range of 1 second to 20 seconds, preferably from a range of 2 seconds to 10 seconds, and more preferably from a range of 2 seconds to 7 seconds. set to the value corresponding to the time

<Step S4805>
When the left movement flag is set to OFF (step S4801: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the medium flag is set to on (step S4805). The MPU 51 moves the process to step S4805 when the left-moving flag is set to ON (step S4805: Yes), and moves the process to step S4805 when the left-moving flag is set to OFF (step S4805: No). The process moves to step S4819 in FIG.

<Steps S4806 and S4807>
If the left-movement flag is set to on (step S4805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag (Fig. 100) is set to on (step S4806). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and end the switching control of the distribution member 80 based on the detection of the game ball 99 by the first route detection sensor Rs1. If the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4806: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag to OFF (step S4807), and moves the process to step S4816. On the other hand, if the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4806: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4808.

<Steps S4808 and S4809>
When the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4806: No), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to ON upon detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. (see FIG. 101) is set to on (step S4808). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and end the switching control of the distribution member 80 based on the detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. If the second route detection flag is set to ON (step S4808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to OFF (step S4809), and moves the process to step S4816. On the other hand, if the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4808: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4810.

<Steps S4810 and S4811>
If the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4808: No), the MPU 51 indicates the remaining time for maintaining the second attitude of the distribution member 80 (remaining time until switching to the first attitude). The value of the left actuation time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4810), and it is determined whether the value of the left actuation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4811). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to switch the distribution member 80 from the second attitude to the first attitude. If the value of the left actuation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4811: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4812, and if the value of the left actuation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4811: No). ), the distribution member control process ends.

<Steps S4812 to S4815>
If the value of the left operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4811: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 to the right based on the elapse of the specified time (step S4812). As a result, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the second attitude to the first attitude, and the game ball 99 is allowed to be guided to the first movement path R1 (first role-linked operation gate G1), and the second movement path Guidance of the game ball 99 to R2 (second role-linked operation gate G2) is restricted (see FIG. 98(A)). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the right-moving flag indicating that the distribution member 80 has been moved to the right (in the first posture) (step S4813). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the right-hand operation time counter (step S4814), sets the left-hand movement flag to OFF (step S4815), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

Here, the right operation time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time for the distribution member 80 to maintain the first posture (the remaining time until switching to the second posture), and when the value of the right operation time counter becomes 0. In this case, by rotating the distribution member 80 to the left, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the first attitude to the second attitude. Note that the value of the right operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to, for example, a time during which the player can select the first movement route R1 with a margin, and is set to be approximately the same as the value of the left operation time counter described above. Ru. That is, the value of the right operation time counter is set, for example, from a range of 1 second to 20 seconds, preferably from a range of 2 seconds to 10 seconds, and more preferably from a range of 2 seconds to 7 seconds. is set to the value corresponding to . Further, by setting the value of the right actuation time counter to be approximately the same as the value of the left actuation time counter described above, the distribution member 80 is regularly switched between the first attitude and the second attitude. This makes it easier for the player to time the launch of the game ball 99 to select the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2.

<Steps S4816 to S4818>
If the first route detection flag is set to on (step S4806: Yes), if the first route detection flag is set to off (step S4807), or if the second route detection flag is set to on (Step S4808: Yes), and when the second route detection flag is set to OFF (Step S4809), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 to the right (Step S4816). Thereby, when either the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 is selected, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the second attitude to the first attitude. Further, the MPU 51 clears the value of the left operation time counter (step S4817), sets the left movement flag to OFF (step S4818), and ends the distribution member operation control process. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2 after starting the switching control of the distribution member 80, the MPU 51 controls the distribution member 80 as shown in FIG. 98(A). The switching control of the distributing member 80 is ended with the distributing member 80 in the stopped state in the first attitude.

<Step S4819>
When the leftward movement flag is set to OFF (step S4805: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the in-motion flag is set to on (step S4819). If the right movement flag is set to ON (step S4819: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4820, and if the right movement flag is set to OFF (step S4818: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4820. The distribution member operation control process ends.

<Steps S4820 and S4821>
If the right-moving flag is set to on (step S4819: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag (Fig. 100) is set to on (step S4820). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and end the switching control of the distribution member 80 based on the detection of the game ball 99 by the first route detection sensor Rs1. If the first route detection flag is set on (step S4820: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag off (step S4821), and moves the process to step S4830. On the other hand, if the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4820: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4822.

<Steps S4822 and S4823>
When the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4820: No), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to ON upon detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. (see FIG. 101) is set to on (step S4822). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to stop the distribution member 80 and end the switching control of the distribution member 80 based on the detection of the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. If the second route detection flag is set on (step S4822: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag off (step S4823), and moves the process to step S4830. On the other hand, if the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4822: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4824.

<Steps S4824 and S4825>
If the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4822: No), the MPU 51 indicates the remaining time for maintaining the first attitude of the distribution member 80 (remaining time until switching to the second attitude). The value of the right operation time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4824), and it is determined whether the value of the right operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4825). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to switch the distribution member 80 from the first attitude to the second attitude. If the value of the right operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4825: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4826, and if the value of the right operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4825: No). ), the distribution member control process ends.

<Steps S4826 to S4829>
If the value of the right operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4825: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 to the left based on the elapse of the specified time (step S4826). As a result, the attitude of the distribution member 80 is switched from the first attitude to the second attitude, allowing the game ball 99 to be guided to the second movement path R2 (second role-linked operation gate G2), and the first movement path Guidance of the game ball 99 to R1 (first role-linked gate G1) is restricted (see FIG. 98(B)). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the left-moving flag indicating that the distribution member 80 has been moved to the left (ie, in the second posture) (step S4827). Further, the MPU 51 sets the left-hand operation time counter (step S4828), sets the right-hand movement flag to OFF (step S4829), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

<Steps S4830 and S4831>
If the first route detection flag is set to on (step S4820: Yes), if the first route detection flag is set to off (step S4821), or if the second route detection flag is set to on (Step S4822: Yes), and when the second route detection flag is set to OFF (Step S4823), the MPU 51 clears the value of the right movement time counter (Step S4830) and turns off the right movement flag. (step S4831), and the distribution member operation control process ends. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2 after starting the switching control of the distribution member 80, the MPU 51 controls the distribution member 80 as shown in FIG. 98(A). Switching control of the distributing member 80 is ended with the distributing member 80 in the stopped state in the first posture.

As described above, in this embodiment, by switching and controlling the distribution member 80 using the operation of the conditional device as a trigger, the game ball 99 is guided to the first movement path R1 that can guide the game ball 99 to the first role-linked operation gate G1. A state in which the ball 99 is guided and a state in which the game ball 99 is guided to the second movement route R2 that can guide the game ball 99 to the second role-linked operating gate G2 (one-hole croon device 60) are switched. Thereby, the player can determine through which of the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation gate G2 the game ball 99 should pass through to activate the role item continuous operation device by switching control of the distribution member 80. , can be selected by firing the game ball 99 while checking the operation of the distribution member 80. Therefore, since it is not necessary to adjust the firing strength of the game ball 99 in order to select the role-linked operation gates G1 and G2 that activate the role-operated continuous operation device, the role-linked operation gates G1 and G2 against the player's will do not The accessory continuous activation device is prevented from being activated. Specifically, when it is desired to immediately start a jackpot game by selecting the first role-linking operation gate G1, the player selects the second role-linking operation gate G2 against the player's will, thereby causing the role item continuous operation. It is prevented that the operation of the device is delayed. On the contrary, if the player wishes to obtain information necessary for estimating a set value such as a non-set value by selecting the second role linked gate G2, the first role is selected against the player's will. By selecting the linked gate G1, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being started immediately. As a result, deterioration of the impression of the gaming machine 10 is suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 that is launched toward the right side area of the game board 31 moves along the fourth movement path R4, and the game ball 99 is moved by the distribution member 80 to the first role-linked operation gate G1 or the fourth movement path R4. Although it is distributed to the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 that can be guided to the dual role operation gate G2 (single-hole croon device 60), the first role operation gate G1 or the second movement path using the distribution member 80 The distribution of the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 that can be guided to the role-linked operation gate G2 (one-hole croon device 60) is not limited to the method described above. For example, the role-operated gate G1 allows the game ball 99 to pass through by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball 99 along the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 described in the sixth to eighth embodiments, The distribution member 80 can be applied to the configuration in which G2 is selected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, the distribution member 80 is provided on the left end side of the branching part 48 that defines the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2, and is shown by solid lines and virtual lines in FIG. As such, either the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 may be selectable by switching the distribution member 80. By making it possible to select one of the second movement paths R2 by switching the distribution member 80 in this way, when launching the game ball 99 toward the right side area of the game board 31, the firing intensity can be adjusted. Either the first moving route R1 or the second moving route R2 can be selected without making any adjustments. This eliminates the need to adjust the firing intensity, thereby preventing the player from selecting a movement route that is contrary to his or her wishes, and suppressing the deterioration of the player's impression of the gaming machine.

In this case, the distribution member 80 performs switching control of the distribution member 80 from when it is activated by the conditioner until the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is preferable to do so. By the way, when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is executed, it is assumed that the player may misunderstand that it is necessary to launch the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board 31. Therefore, by setting the period during which the distribution member 80 is switched and controlled to be the period from when it is activated by the conditioner until the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, The player is prevented from unnecessarily launching the game ball 99 into the right side area of the game board 31.

In addition, when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is not executed, such as when the condition device or the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, the distribution member 80 moves the game ball 99 on the first movement route R1. It is preferable to stop the game ball 99 in a posture that allows movement of the game ball 99 and restricts movement of the game ball 99 on the second movement path R2. By setting the attitude of the distributing member 80 when the switching control of the distributing member 80 is not executed in this way, the game balls 99 can be placed in the right side area of the game board 31 in a situation where the accessory continuous actuation device cannot be operated. Even if the game ball 99 is launched, the game ball 99 can be prevented from being guided to the clone device 60. As a result, when a large number of game balls 99 are launched into the right side area of the game board 31 in a situation where the accessory continuous actuation device cannot be operated, balls jam in the clown device 60. is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to eighth embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to eighth embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

Furthermore, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, when the condition device is operating and the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, If the detection of the game ball 99 by the second role-linked gate sensor Gs2 is disabled and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first role-linked gate sensor The case where the detection of the game ball 99 of Gs1 is disabled has been explained. In other words, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, when the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by one movement path (role combination operation sensor) is selected, the function by the other movement path (role combination operation sensor) is selected. The case where the operation of the continuous operation device is restricted has been explained. On the other hand, when a condition device is used, if a predetermined condition is met, after one movement path is selected, the movement path (role connection movement sensor) that activates the role continuous actuation device is moved to the other movement path. It is also possible to make it possible to change the route (role-linked operation sensor). For example, when the conditional device is activated, if the movement of a game ball in one movement path is detected, the activation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game ball launched into the other movement path is permitted. After one movement path is selected, the game ball is launched onto the other movement path, thereby making it possible to change the movement path for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. This allows the player to change the travel route according to his or her will, if he or she makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route. Specifically, when the conditional device is activated, for example, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the one-hole croon device 60 detects the successive accessory. The operation of the actuating device is delayed, but during that time, the game ball 99 is launched onto the first movement path R1, so that the game ball 99 is launched into the first role link before the game ball 99 is detected by the second role link gate sensor Gs2. It becomes possible to detect the game ball 99 by the gate sensor Gs1. Therefore, not only can the originally desired travel route be changed when a travel route that is contrary to the player's wishes is selected, but also the jackpot can be immediately won if the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed in the one-hole croon device 60. When it is desired to start a game, for example, when it is obvious that many or desired points cannot be acquired in the game performance, it becomes possible to immediately start a jackpot game.

Preferably, the predetermined condition under which the role-linked operation gate for operating the role-playing object continuous operation device is changed from the previously selected one is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, since the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player, it becomes possible to change the role-linked operation gate that operates the accessory continuous operation device according to the player's will.

In addition, various methods can be considered for changing the previously selected role-linked operation gate that operates the role-operated continuous operation device. For example, if one route detection sensor out of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the other route detection sensor, the movement route is the same as that of the other route detection sensor. The invalidation of the detection of the game ball 99 at the other role-operation gate (the other role-operation sensor) (the restriction on the operation of the role-operation continuous operation device based on the other role-operation sensor) is suspended for a certain period of time ( For example, it is conceivable to set a flag that suspends detection invalidation for a certain period of time. In other words, it is conceivable to allow the change of the role-linked operation gate that operates the role-player continuous operation device for a certain period of time. As a result, if the player wishes to change the movement route by selecting a movement route against the player's will before a certain period of time has elapsed, it is possible to change the movement route, but after a certain period of time has elapsed, the player will be able to change the movement route against the player's will. The movement route for operating the continuous operating device is prevented from being changed, and it becomes possible to more appropriately reflect the player's intention.

As a method of changing the role-linked operation gate that operates the other role-operated continuous operation device from the previously selected one, for example, one of the route detection sensors of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 If the game ball 99 is detected before the other route detection sensor, the game ball 99 passes through the other accessory activation gate (the other role-linked activation sensor) provided on the same movement route as the other route detection sensor. When the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is restricted, and when a certain number (one or more) of game balls 99 are detected by the other route detection sensor, the operation of the other accessory operation gate (the other role It is also conceivable to release and enable the restriction on the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device due to the passage of the game ball 99 at the actuation sensor). In this case, after one role-linked activation gate is selected first, a certain number or more of game balls 99 are launched onto the other movement route and the other route detection sensor detects a certain number of game balls 99. The role-linked operation gate that activates the role-player continuous operation device can be changed from the previously selected one. In addition, the condition for canceling the restriction on the operation of the role object continuous operation device due to the passage of game balls 99 by the other role-linked operation sensor is set to the condition that a certain number of game balls 99 are detected by the other route detection sensor. By setting, it is necessary to launch at least a certain number of game balls to the other player's movement path, so the role object continuous activation device is caused by the game ball 99 passing through the other role-linked activation sensor against the player's will. The restriction on the operation of is suppressed from being lifted.

In addition, one or both of the route detection sensors of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 are omitted, and the role continuous operation sensor is not disabled until the accessory continuous operation device operates. It is also possible to keep it in effect.

Furthermore, when the operation button 20 or the like is operated by the player, it may be possible to cancel the invalidation of the detection of the game ball 99 by the other role-operating gate (the other role-linked operation sensor).

In addition, when the role-linked operation gate that operates the role-playing continuous operation device is changed from the previously selected one, for example, when the operation of the role-linked operation device at the second role-linked operation gate G2 is selected first. The movement of the game ball 99 on the first movement path R1 is detected before the accessory continuous operation device is activated, or the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the passage of the game ball at the first role combination operation gate G1. When activated, it is conceivable to forcibly end the game performance even if it is in the middle of the game performance, that is, to forcibly end the specific period in which a specific condition is satisfied. For example, such a forced termination of the specific period can be done by first selecting the operation of the accessory continuous activation device at the second role-linked activation gate G2, and then launching the game ball 99 on the first movement path R1. This can be done at the will of the person. In this way, by allowing the player to end the specific period (a numerical index acquisition performance such as a game performance), it becomes possible to end the specific period at the player's will. This makes it possible for the player to determine the timing for activating the accessory continuous activation device even after the start of the specific period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth to ninth embodiments, the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation gate G2 were provided in the right side area of the game board 31, but the first role-linked operation gate G1 and the second role-linked operation gate G1 At least one of the dual-role operation gates G2 may be provided at a position through which the game ball 99 launched to the left side area of the game board 31 can pass. In other words, if the accessory continuous actuation device is to be activated (occurrence of a jackpot) based on the passage (entering ball) of the game ball 99 in a predetermined area (ball entry area), the predetermined area (ball entry area) may be provided at a position through which the ball can be passed when hitting the ball left-handed and at a position through which it can pass when hitting the ball right-handed. For example, the first role-linked operation gate G1 may be provided in the left side area of the game board 31, while the second role-linked operation gate G2 may be provided in the right side area of the game board 31. In this case, when the conditional device is activated, the jackpot game can be started in a short time by immediately activating the accessory continuous operating device by hitting the left, and the activation of the accessory continuous operating device (starting the jackpot game) by hitting the right. ), it is possible to obtain information that indicates or suggests a non-setting value. Further, if the role-linked action gate can be selected by distinguishing between left-handed and right-handed players, selection of the role-linked action gate will be facilitated.

Furthermore, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the role-linked operation gates G1, G2 and the role-linked gate sensors Gs1, Gs2 are individually provided on each of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2. However, one role-linked operation gate and one role-linked gate sensor may be provided, and one role-linked operation gate and role-linked gate sensor may be shared by both the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2. . In other words, when the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated (occurrence of jackpot) based on the passing (ball entry) of the game ball 99 in a predetermined area (ball entry area), the predetermined area (ball entry area) may be provided at only one location.

Furthermore, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the delay means such as the croon device 60 and the rotating body 70 are provided on the second movement route R2, but the delay means may also be provided on the first movement route R1. good. That is, the first moving route R1 may be a delay route that delays the operation of the accessory continuous operating device, and the second moving route R2 may be a route in which the accessory continuous operating device is activated in a short time.

[Tenth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot) A specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set, and the number of game balls 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within the specific period when a specific condition is satisfied In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. We have explained the case presented in

By the way, in the gaming machine, like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, a jackpot lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In some cases, a jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, some gaming machines perform a lottery to determine not only whether the game is a big hit or a miss, but also whether the game is a small win or not. Here, a small win is a win different from a jackpot, and if the lottery result is a small win, a small win game is executed, and after the execution of a small win game, the gaming state (probability change) before the small win game is executed. The gaming state and time-saving gaming state) are maintained. In a game where the lottery result of a jackpot lottery includes small wins in addition to jackpots, there is a gaming machine that increases the number of balls put out by successive small wins in a game state where the probability changes between jackpot games.

However, in a gaming machine that increases the number of balls paid out by successive small wins in variable probability gaming conditions between jackpot games, the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening that operates in jackpot games and small winning games accounts for the total number of balls paid out. The percentage will be higher. In other words, the role ratio (ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the second winning hole and the variable number of balls paid out from the variable winning hole in the total number of balls paid out by winning to all the winning holes where prize balls are paid out) and the continuous role ratio (the ratio of the variable winning hole number of paid out balls to the total number of paid out balls due to winnings to all winning holes where prize balls are paid out) becomes high. In other words, a gaming machine that increases the number of balls put out by successive small wins in a game state with variable probability between jackpot games is undesirable because the rate of increase in the number of balls put out is large and may result in arousing the player's desire for gambling.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, instead of increasing the difference ball mainly by entering the game ball into the variable winning hole in the jackpot game or the small win game, the second special drawing lottery in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) To increase a player's game balls (balls held) mainly by entering game balls into a special winning hole in a variable game in which lottery results are announced. Here, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio become higher as the number of balls paid out by the game balls entering the variable winning hole increases. Therefore, the main reason for the increase in the number of game balls played by players is the entry of game balls into the special winning opening, not the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning opening. As a result, it is possible to lower the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio compared to a gaming machine that increases the number of game balls played by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is launched into a predetermined area (for example, the right side area) of the game board, some of the game balls, rather than all of the game balls that were launched into the predetermined area, are sent to the distribution device (for example, the right side area). The player is distributed to the front side of the game board by the Croon device). Therefore, when game balls are launched into a predetermined area in a variable game that announces the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery in a variable probability game state (high probability mode), some of the game balls enter the special winning hole. Therefore, by setting the distribution ratio to the front side of the game board in the distribution device (1/3 in this embodiment), the speed at which the player's game balls (balls held) increase can be set. It becomes possible to set the rate of increase in the number of balls to a level that does not arouse the gambling spirit of players.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is launched into a predetermined area (for example, the right area) in a variable game that announces the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery in a variable probability game state (high probability mode), the game ball is sent to the special winning hole. The player's number of game balls (balls held) is increased by the entry of the game ball. Therefore, the number of prize balls in the special winning hole (15 in this embodiment) and the variable time of the variable game (in this embodiment Since the speed at which the player's game balls (balls held) increase can be set by setting 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds, the speed at which the balls are increased can be set to a level that does not arouse the player's desire for gambling. It becomes possible to do so.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 106 to 121, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, like the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, encourages left-handed hitting in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode). Right-handed hitting is encouraged. However, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, the reason why left-handed playing is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) and right-handed playing is encouraged in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) is as follows. Since this is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration of the right side area of the gaming board 31 is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 106 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the game board 31 of the first embodiment described above in that it has a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 316A and a second This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the variable prize opening 316B) and the clone device 63 are different, and that a special prize opening 69 is provided. Hereinafter, according to the movement flow path of the game ball 99 in the right side area of the game board 31, and with reference to FIGS. The opening 316B and the special winning opening 69 will be explained in this order.

[First variable prize opening 316A]
The first variable prize opening 316A provides an opportunity to pay out the game ball 99 when the game ball 99 enters, and is provided on the upper side of the right side area of the game board 31. The first variable winning hole 316A is provided with a first opening/closing door 319A that switches whether or not to restrict entry of the game ball 99 into the first variable winning hole 316A. In addition, the basic configuration of the first variable winning a prize opening 316A and the first opening/closing door 319A is the same as the variable winning opening 316 and the opening/closing door 319 of the first embodiment described above.

The first opening/closing door 319A is opened/closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the first opening/closing door 319A opens, the game ball 99 can enter the first variable winning opening 316A, and when the first opening/closing door 319A closes, the game ball 99 can enter the first variable winning opening 316A. The entry of game balls 99 is restricted. In addition, the first opening/closing door 319A is moved to a position where the first variable winning opening 316A is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the 2R variable jackpot game, and is otherwise moved to a position where the first variable winning opening 316A is closed. will be put on standby. As a result, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the round game in the 2R probability-variable jackpot game can enter the first variable winning hole 316A.

Here, the 2R fixed variable jackpot game is a case where the lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 as described later is a jackpot. (See FIG. 111(D)). That is, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the round game in the 2R probability variable jackpot game can enter the first variable winning hole 316A.

In addition, the upper left and upper right of the first variable winning opening 316A prevent the occurrence of spilled balls (gaming balls 99 that move below the first variable winning opening 316A without entering the first variable winning opening 316A). A guide nail is installed to prevent this and guide the game ball 99 to the first variable winning hole 316A. Therefore, all of the game balls 99 that are hit right at the time of opening can enter the first variable winning hole 316A. That is, the first variable winning hole 316A is so-called perfect, in which the game ball 99 flowing down from above the first variable winning hole 316A when the first variable winning hole 316A is opened is entered without becoming a spilled ball. Configured as a secure attacker.

The configuration in which the first variable winning opening 316A is a completely secured attacker is not limited to the configuration in which nails are driven into the upper left and upper right of the first variable winning opening 316A, but may be other configurations. For example, the first variable winning opening 316A may be configured as a completely secured attacker by providing a regulating portion having at least a part of the part that can move the game balls 99 one ball at a time above the first variable winning opening 316A. good.

Specifically, the regulating section moves the game balls 99 downward one ball at a time while meandering in the left-right direction or front-back direction of the game board 31, and moves the game balls 99 downward one ball at a time in a spiral manner. In other words, it may be a device that delays the falling of the game ball 99. Such a regulating section is configured to include, for example, a ball entry section and an ejection section for the game balls 99. It is preferable that the ball entry section is configured to allow the game balls 99 to enter one ball at a time in order to rectify the game balls 99. The ejection section may be one that sequentially ejects the game balls 99 one by one, or may be one that ejects a plurality of game balls 99 at once. That is, the regulating section may be configured to allow the game balls 99 to enter the first variable winning hole 316A one ball at a time, or may cause a plurality of game balls 99 to enter the first variable winning hole 316A at once. It may be configured as follows.

Of course, the regulating section does not necessarily have to be configured to delay the flow of the game ball 99. For example, a gate may be provided above the first variable prize opening 316A through which game balls 99 can pass one by one, and all game balls 99 may be guided to the gate using nails or various other members.

It should be noted that the first variable winning hole 316A does not necessarily need to be configured as a completely secured attacker as long as the expected difference ball value in the 2R probability variable jackpot game exceeds 100%.

[Second prize opening 315]
The second winning hole 315 provides an opportunity to execute a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game or a small win game by entering the game ball 99. Note that the lottery result in the second special symbol lottery is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven segment display device of the second special symbol display section 363, as in the first embodiment described above.

In addition, unlike the first embodiment described above, the second winning hole 315 includes an electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory member) 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315. (See FIG. 4) is not provided. That is, the game ball 99 can be entered into the second prize opening 315 without being limited to the normal electric accessory member. Accordingly, in the game board 31 of this embodiment, the through gate 317 in which a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second prize opening 315 when the passage of a game ball is detected is omitted. , the normal winning lottery is not executed either. In other words, like the first winning hole 314, the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315 not only in the variable game state but also in the normal game state without being limited to the normal electric accessory member. be.

The second winning hole 315 is provided in the right side area of the game board 31 between the first variable winning hole 316A and the clone device 63, which will be described later. Therefore, the second winning hole 315 contains a game ball 99 that has been hit to the right side area of the game board 31 in a state other than the 2R fixed variable game state (in a state where the first variable winning hole 316A is closed), a so-called right-hit game. Ball 99 can enter the ball. That is, the game ball 99 can enter the second prize opening 315 regardless of whether it is in the variable probability game state or the normal game state.

In addition, in the first prize opening 314, similarly to the first embodiment described above, whether the game ball 99 launched to the left side area of the game board 31, so-called the game ball 99 hit to the left, is in a variable probability game state. It is possible to enter the ball regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, in the case of a left-handed player, the first special symbol lottery result is announced by the first special symbol display section 362 when the game ball 99 enters the first prize opening 314 (a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery)). ) is executed, and when the game ball 99 enters the second prize opening 315 in the case of a right-handed player, a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in which the lottery result is announced by the second special symbol display section 363 is executed. executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second winning opening 315 is arranged between the first variable winning opening 316A and the croon device 63, but the second winning opening 315 is located above the first variable winning opening 316A. It may be arranged below the croon device 63, which will be described later.

[Clune device 63]
Among the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the clone device 63 removes the game balls 99 that have not entered either the first variable winning hole 316A or the second winning hole 315 on the game board 31. It is distributed to either the front side or the back side. Here, FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the Kroon device, FIG. 108(A) is a sectional view taken along the X5-X5 cutting line in FIG. 107, and FIG. 108(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X6-X6 cutting line in FIG. It is a sectional view along a line.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the croon device 63 includes a circumferential portion 630 and three through holes 631, 632, 632. This clone device 63 is fixedly provided to the game board 31. That is, the Croon device 63 is not a movable object that can move between multiple positions (a movable object that can take multiple postures), but a non-movable object that is fixed at a predetermined position (a non-mobile object that maintains one posture). movable object). In this way, by providing the croon device 63 as a fixed object (immovable object), it becomes possible to ensure the consistency of the distribution ratio between the front side and the back side of the game board 31, and the croon device It becomes possible to take countermeasures against a strategy hit in a timing hit in which the game ball 99 is launched based on the timing of distribution by 63.

It is preferable that at least the portion of the croon device 63 where the game ball 99 rolls or moves is made of resin. The croon device 63 is, for example, entirely integrally molded from resin or formed by assembling a plurality of resin members. There is no particular restriction on the resin material used for the Cloon device 63, and any known resin material can be used. From the viewpoint of ease of processability (moldability), thermoplastic resin is preferable, and from the viewpoint of easy availability of resin materials and suppressing deterioration of the Croon device 63 over time, the resin material used for the Croon device 63 is, for example, Easily available ABS resin, PC resin, PP resin, etc. are preferred. In this way, by making at least the part where the game ball 99 rolls or moves made of resin, it is possible to improve durability and workability (moldability), and it is also possible to reduce manufacturing costs. become. Of course, the croon device 63 is not limited to being made of resin, and may be partially or entirely made of a material other than resin, for example, may be entirely made of metal, or may be made of a combination of resin and metal.

The upper part of the orbiting part 630 is open, and among the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the balls do not enter either the first variable winning hole 316A or the second winning hole 315, and the upper part It is possible to introduce a game ball 99 falling from the ball. This orbiting section 630 is for orbiting the game ball 99 introduced from above, and includes a peripheral wall section 634, an annular orbiting section 635, and a bottom wall section 636. The peripheral wall portion 634 protrudes upward from the peripheral edge of the annular surrounding portion 635 and prevents the game ball 99 circulating in the surrounding portion 630 from detaching from the surrounding portion 630. The annular circulating portion 635 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 634 and the bottom wall portion 636 in an inclined state with the inner side being lower, and allows the game ball 99 introduced into the rotating portion 630 from above to circulate. The bottom wall portion 636 is provided at the center of the circumferential portion 630, which is inside the annular circumferential portion 635, and is provided with three through holes 631, 632, and 633.

The three through holes 631 to 633 include a first through hole 631, a second through hole 632, and a third through hole 633 that vertically penetrate the bottom wall portion 636. Each of the through holes 631 to 633 moves the game balls 99 introduced through the upper openings 631A, 632A, and 633A opened on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 636 to the lower part of the croon device 63. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the game ball 99 introduced into the first through hole 631 is discharged from the lower opening 631B, and is discharged from the discharge port 64 provided on the front side of the game board 31. From there, it is discharged to the front side of the game board 31. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108(B), the game balls 99 introduced into the second through hole 632 and the third through hole 633 are discharged from the lower openings 632B and 633B, and are installed on the back side of the game board 31. The game board 31 is discharged from the discharge section 65 to the back side of the game board 31.

Further, the upper openings 631A, 632A, 633A of the three through holes 631 to 633 are circular with a diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. The diameters of the upper openings 631A, 632A, and 633A are the same or approximately the same, and the upper openings 631A, 632A, and 633A are arranged on the same or approximately the same circumference. Therefore, the game ball 99 introduced into the circulating portion 630 is introduced into the three through holes 631 to 633 with the same or substantially the same probability (ratio). That is, the game balls 99 introduced into the orbiting section 630 are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 with a probability (ratio) of 1/3, and distributed to the back side of the game board 31 with a probability (ratio) of 2/3. It will be done. That is, the distribution ratio of game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 in the clone device 63 is 1:2.

Note that the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 in the clone device 63 does not necessarily have to be 1:2. It may be set as appropriate depending on the number of balls paid out based on the number of balls entered.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of through holes 631 to 633 in the Kroon device 63 is three, and the diameters of the upper openings 631A to 633A of the through holes 631 to 633 are the same or approximately the same. The number and diameter may be appropriately set according to the design value of the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31.

In addition, in this embodiment, among the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the game balls 99 that did not enter either the first variable winning hole 316A or the second winning hole 315 are By distributing the game balls 99 to either the front side or the back side of the game board 31 by the device 63, a predetermined ratio (1/3 in this embodiment) of the game balls 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B or the special winning hole 69. For example, depending on the arrangement of the nails driven into the game board 31, a predetermined ratio (1/3 in this embodiment) of the game balls 99 can be distributed to the second variable prize opening 316B or the special prize opening 69. The balls that can be entered may be divided into areas, and the clown device 63 may be provided with an accessory or an actuating member to send game balls 99 of a predetermined ratio (1/3 in this embodiment) to the second variable prize opening 316B or to a special prize. Balls that can enter the opening 69 may be divided into areas.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 by the Kroon device 63, which is a non-movable object (a non-movable object that maintains one posture) fixed at a predetermined position, is played in the game. A movable object that can be moved between multiple positions (a movable object that can assume multiple postures) is used as the distribution means, and is distributed to the front side and the back side of the board 31. The game balls 99 may be distributed to the front side and the back side of the game board 31.

In addition, the distribution means such as the croon device 63 has an area where the game ball 99 can enter the special winning hole 69 (second variable winning hole 316), and a region where the game ball 99 can enter the special winning hole 69 (second variable winning hole 316). As long as the game balls 99 are distributed to areas where the balls 99 cannot enter, the configuration does not necessarily have to be such that the game balls 99 are distributed between the front side and the back side of the game board 31.

[Second variable winning opening 316B]
As shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning hole 316B provides an opportunity to pay out the game ball 99 when the game ball 99 enters, and the first variable winning hole 316A, the second winning hole 315, and the clone device It is provided in a position downward to the left in the right side area of the game board 31, which is a position below 63.

Here, FIG. 109(A) is a partially cutaway diagram for explaining the second variable winning opening 316B, and FIG. 109(B) is a diagram along the X7-X7 cutting line in FIG. 109(A). FIG. In addition, FIG. 110(A) is a partially cutaway diagram for explaining the second variable winning opening 316B, and FIG. 110(B) is a cross section taken along the X8-X8 cutting line in FIG. 110(A). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the second variable winning opening 316B has a second opening/closing door 319B that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of the game ball 99 into the second variable winning opening 316B. It is provided along the mouth 316B in a downward-left direction. This second opening/closing door 319B closes the second variable prize opening 316B by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31, so that the game ball 99 enters the second variable prize opening 316B. There is a standby position on the front side (see Figure 109) that restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second variable winning hole 316B by opening the second variable winning hole 316B, and an open position on the rear side (see Figure 109) that allows the game ball 99 to enter the second variable winning hole 316B. 110)).

In addition, the second opening/closing door 319B is moved to a position where the second variable prize opening 316B is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the 2R normal jackpot game or the open game of the small winning game, and in other cases, the second variable winning opening 319B is It waits at the position where the prize opening 316B is closed. As a result, the second variable prize opening 316B is filled with game balls 99 that have been launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the round game of the 2R variable jackpot game or the open game of the small win game. Game balls 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 (introduced into the first through hole 631 of the clown device 63 and discharged to the front side of the game board 31 from the discharge port 64 provided on the front side of the game board 31 A game ball 99) (see FIG. 108(A)) can enter the ball. The game ball 99 entered into the second variable winning hole 316B is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the discharge port 316Ba provided in the second variable winning hole 316B.

Here, the 2R normal jackpot game is executed when the lottery result in the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot as described later (see FIG. 111(D)). That is, the second variable prize opening 316B contains game balls 99 that are shot out to the right side area of the game board 31 in the round game of the 2R normal jackpot game, and are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63. A game ball 99 discharged from the discharge port 64 can enter the ball. In addition, the discharge port 64 is provided above the second variable winning port 316B, and since there is no obstacle between the discharge port 64 and the second variable winning port 316B, the second variable winning port 316B is located above the second variable winning port 316B. It is configured as a so-called completely secured attacker that allows all the game balls 99 discharged from the ball 64 to enter when released.

In addition, as a configuration in which the second variable winning a prize opening 316B is a completely secured attacker, for example, a regulating part having at least a part of the part that can move the game balls 99 one ball at a time above the second variable winning a prize opening 316B can be adopted. . As the regulating section, the same regulating section as in the case of configuring the first variable prize opening 316A described above as a completely secured attacker can be adopted.

In addition, the second variable winning hole 316B is opened when the expected difference ball value is less than or equal to 100% in the 2R normal jackpot game or small win game, and during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability game state (high probability mode). As long as the expected ball difference value based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the special winning hole 69 exceeds 100%, it is not necessarily necessary to configure the player to be a completely secured attacker.

In addition, the small winning game is a win in which the total opening time of the second variable winning opening 316B for one winning is short (for example, 1.6 seconds or less), and in this embodiment, the number of openings of the second variable winning opening 316B is short (for example, 1.6 seconds or less). includes an open game in which the second variable prize opening 316B is opened for a maximum of 1.6 seconds in one play. In this small winning game, as described below, if the lottery result in the second special symbol lottery is a small win, or if the lottery result in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability mode (variable probability game state) is a small win. (See FIG. 111(B) and FIG. 111(C)). That is, the second variable prize opening 316B contains game balls distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63 among the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the open game of the small winning game. 99 balls are allowed.

In addition, in the 2R normal jackpot game or small win game, the number of balls 99 paid out (number of prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B is 3 balls in this embodiment ( (See FIG. 113(B)). On the other hand, since the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 by the Cloon device 63 is 1:2, the game balls are placed in the second variable prize opening 316B in the 2R normal jackpot game or small win game. When the player hits the ball to the right in order to land the ball 99, the expected value of the increase in the number of game balls 99 (held by the player) by the player is one ball or less, and an increase in the number of game balls 99 cannot be expected.

In addition, in the 2R normal jackpot game or small win game, when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B, the number of paid balls 99 (number of prize balls) is not limited to 3 balls, When the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 by the device 63 is 1:N, it is preferable to set it to N+1 or less. By doing so, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 (balls owned) by the player will increase when the player hits the right hand in order to enter the game ball 99 into the second variable winning hole 316B in the 2R normal jackpot game or small win game. The value can be set to 1 ball or less.

On the other hand, when waiting in a position where the second door 319B is closed (when the second variable prize opening 316B is closed), the game board Among the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the game balls 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63 roll on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B and move to the left side. In addition, since the special winning opening 69 is provided adjacent to the left side of the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening/closing door 319B, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B and moves to the left side. 99 can enter the special winning hole 69. That is, the second opening/closing door 319B has the role of not only restricting and allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second variable winning hole 316B, but also guiding the game ball 99 to the special winning hole 69.

[Special prize opening 69]
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 109, the special prize opening 69 provides an opportunity to pay out the game ball 99 when the game ball 99 enters, and is located to the left of the second variable prize opening 316B and the second opening/closing door 319B. It is located adjacent to the side. In addition, out of the game balls 99 shot out to the right side area of the game board 31, the special prize opening 69 is distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63, and the balls that do not enter the second variable prize opening 316B are stored. A game ball 99 can be entered. In addition, a plurality of nails are driven in the upper left of the special prize opening 69, so that the game ball 99 guided to the special prize opening 69 by the second opening/closing door 319B can easily enter the ball without spilling. There is. The number of balls to be paid out (number of prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69 is set to be larger than the other winning holes 313, 314, 315, 316A, and 316B (Fig. 113 ( See B). In this embodiment, when the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69, the number of balls to be paid out (number of prize balls) is 15 balls. On the other hand, the distribution ratio of game balls 99 in the clone device 63 is 1:2 between the front side and the back side of the game board 31. Therefore, if the number of balls to be paid out (number of prize balls) of the special winning hole 69 is set to 15, if the player hits the right ball with the game ball 99 able to enter the special winning hole 69, the player's game ball 99 (balls held) increases.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), when a player hits right in a variable game (second special figure game) that notifies the lottery result of the second special figure lottery, A game ball 99 can enter the special winning hole 69. Therefore, in this embodiment, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls 99 of the player by hitting right in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode).

Note that the number of balls paid out (number of prize balls) when the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69 does not necessarily have to be 15, but the number of balls paid out (number of prize balls) when the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69 is not necessarily 15, but When the allocation ratio is 1:N, it is preferable that the number of balls paid out (number of prize balls) by the game balls 99 entering the special winning hole 69 is set to exceed N+1 balls. In this way, if the distribution ratio between the front side and the back side of the game board 31 in the clone device 63 is 1:N, 1/(N+1) game balls will be placed in the special prize opening 69 and the game balls 99 will be It is possible to enter the ball. Therefore, by hitting right in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) in which the number of balls paid out (number of prize balls) by entering the game ball 99 into the special winning hole 69 is set to exceed N+1 balls, the player's It becomes possible to increase the number of game balls 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special winning opening 69 is provided adjacent to the left side of the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening/closing door 319B, but the special winning opening 69 is As long as it is a position where the game ball 99 guided by rolling on the upper surface can enter, it does not necessarily need to be placed adjacent to the second variable prize opening 316B and the second opening/closing door 319B. For example, the special winning opening 69 is arranged at a position adjacent to or apart from the second variable winning opening 316B and the second opening/closing door 319B in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, preferably at least in the horizontal direction. Good too. In this case, it is preferable to provide a guiding means for guiding the game ball 99 rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B to the special prize opening 69. As the guiding means, for example, driving a plurality of nails, arranging a member made of a resin material, etc., guiding the game ball 99 by an electric movable object, a combination of these, etc. can be considered.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable winning opening 316A (first opening/closing door 319A), the second winning opening 315, the croon device 63, the second variable winning opening 316B (second opening/closing door 319B), and the special winning opening 69 are , when the game ball 99 is hit right to the right side area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 can enter or be distributed, and the first prize opening 314 is configured to allow the game ball 99 to enter or be distributed to the left side area of the game board 31. Although the game ball 99 was configured to be able to enter when hitting left-handed to hit 99, the arrangement of the various winning holes 313, 314, 315, 316A, 316B and the croon device 63 is different from the technical aspects of the present invention. Ideas can be changed as appropriate within the applicable scope. For example, contrary to the example shown in FIG. When the game ball 99 is hit to the left and the game ball 99 is hit to the left, the game ball 99 can enter or be distributed, and the first prize opening 314 is used to hit the game ball 99 to the right side of the game board 31 to the left. It may be configured such that the game ball 99 can enter the ball. In this case, right-handed hitting is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and left-handed hitting is encouraged in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode).

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all of the jackpot games are 2R (round games are played twice), and the lottery results in the jackpot lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) include small wins. , a special prize opening 69 is provided, so the system configuration is different from the first embodiment in terms of a win/fail table, a distribution table, a fluctuation table, etc.

[Acceptance table]
The win/fail table of this embodiment has a jackpot probability different from that of the first embodiment described above, and also includes a small jackpot as a lottery result. Here, FIG. 111(A) shows the low probability mode first special symbol winning/failure used in the first special symbol lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first prize opening 314 in the low probability mode. The table, FIG. 111(B) is a low probability mode second special figure winning/failing table used for the second special figure lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315 in the low probability mode. , FIG. 111(C) is used for the first special drawing lottery or the second special drawing lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the high probability mode. This is a high probability mode validity table. That is, in this embodiment, in the low probability mode, different winning/losing tables are used for the first special drawing lottery and the second special drawing drawing, and in the high probability mode, the same winning table is used for the first special drawing drawing and the second special drawing drawing. A win/fail table is used.

As shown in FIGS. 111(A) and 111(B), the low probability lottery used in the first special drawing lottery is executed when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314 in the low probability mode. Probability mode first special figure winning/failure table, and low probability mode second special figure used in the second special figure lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315 in the low probability mode. A plurality of win/fail tables are provided in which the probability that the lottery result in the first special drawing lottery or the second special drawing lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) differs depending on the game setting value. The low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failing table each include six winning/failure tables corresponding to six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high jackpot probability that is advantageous to the player. becomes. Furthermore, in the low probability mode first special symbol winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special symbol winning/failing table, the jackpot probability in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same game setting value is the same. That is, in the low probability mode, the jackpot probability depends on the game setting value, and as long as the game setting value is the same, there is no difference in the jackpot probability between the first special drawing lottery and the second special drawing drawing, and the jackpot probability is the same.

Specifically, in the game setting value 1 in the low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failing table (low probability mode winning/failure table), out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, The number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 590 (0 to 589). That is, with the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/111 (590/65536).

In the game setting value 2 in the low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failing table (low probability mode winning/failure table), the lottery in the jackpot lottery is selected from among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535. The number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 606 (0 to 605). That is, with the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/109 (606/65536).

In the game setting value 3 in the low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failing table (low probability mode winning/failure table), a lottery is drawn in the jackpot lottery out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535. The number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 618 (0 to 617). That is, with the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/107 (618/65536).

In the game setting value 4 in the low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failing table (low probability mode winning/failure table), the lottery in the jackpot lottery is selected from among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535. The number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 630 (0 to 629). That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/105 (630/65536).

With the game setting value 5 in the low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failing table (low probability mode winning/failure table), a lottery is drawn in the jackpot lottery out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535. The number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 636 (0 to 635). That is, with the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/103 (636/65536).

In the game setting value 6 in the low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failing table (low probability mode winning/failure table), the number of random numbers in the jackpot lottery out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 is The number of random numbers for which the lottery result is a jackpot is 649 (0 to 648). That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/101 (649/65536).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 111(A), in the low probability mode first special symbol winning/failing table, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random value that results in a jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be incorrect. becomes. That is, the lottery result in the first special drawing lottery (big hit lottery) in the low probability mode will be either a jackpot or a miss, but will not be a small win.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(B), in the low probability mode second special figure win/fail table, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random value that results in a jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is small. It's a hit. That is, the lottery result in the first special drawing lottery (big hit lottery) in the low probability mode will be either a big hit or a small win, and there will be no loss.

As shown in FIG. 111(C), the first special drawing lottery or the second special drawing is executed when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 in the high probability mode. In the high probability mode win/fail table used for the lottery, the probability that the lottery result in the first special drawing drawing or the second special drawing drawing will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) is the same for the six game setting values 1 to 6. That is, in the high probability mode, the jackpot probability does not depend on the game setting value, and there is no difference in the jackpot probability between the first special drawing lottery and the second special drawing drawing, and the jackpot probability is the same. Specifically, in the high probability mode win/fail table, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 that are common to all game settings 1 to 6, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is , 3277 (0 to 3276), and the jackpot probability is about 1/20 (3277/65536). In addition, the lottery results in the first special drawing lottery and the second special drawing lottery (jackpot lottery) in the high probability mode will be either a big hit or a small hit, and there will be no loss. Note that the small winning probability is approximately 19/20 (62259/65536).

In addition, in the low probability mode first special figure winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special drawing winning/failure table, the random numbers that result in jackpots in the jackpot drawings between the same game setting values are common, but the random numbers that become jackpots are common. It is also possible that they do not have something in common. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot win may not be continuous values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

In addition, the low probability mode first special symbol winning/failure table and the low probability mode second special symbol winning/failing table are provided six times each according to the six levels of game setting values, but the low probability mode first special symbol winning/failing table And there should be at least one low probability mode second special symbol validity table. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels.

In addition, the jackpot probability in low probability mode varies depending on the game setting value, and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is uniform, but on the contrary, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is uniform. , a plurality of stages of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability may be different depending on the game setting values for both the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

Moreover, the jackpot probability, the miss probability, and the small win probability in the various win/fail tables can be changed as appropriate within the scope to which the technical idea of the present invention can be applied. In particular, the jackpot probability and small win probability in the high probability mode win/fail table are the set value of the expected difference ball value due to the game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69 in the high probability mode (probability variable gaming state), the special winning hole It can be changed as appropriate according to the number of prize balls of 69 and the variable display time of the high probability mode (variable probability game state).

[Distribution table]
In this embodiment, the jackpot types include a 2R fixed variable jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot, but in the case where the first special drawing lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first prize opening 314 is a jackpot. The classification of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the second special drawing lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315 is a jackpot. Here, FIG. 111(D) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 111(D), if the first special lottery drawn after the game ball 99 enters the first prize opening 314 is a jackpot, it will always be a 2R probability-variable jackpot, and the second If the second special drawing lottery executed upon entry of the game ball 99 into the winning hole 315 is a jackpot, it will always be a 2R normal jackpot. That is, regardless of whether it is a low probability mode or a high probability mode, the jackpot type is set according to the type of the winning hole 314, 315 that triggered the jackpot lottery.

Here, as mentioned above, since the left-handed game ball 99 can enter the first prize opening 314, if the lottery result is a jackpot in the first special lottery (jackpot lottery) for left-handed players. In both the low probability mode (normal gaming state) and the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state), there is a 2R probability variable jackpot game which is transferred to the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) after the end of the game as a jackpot game. executed. In addition, in the high probability mode (variable probability game state), as will be described later, when the game ball 99 is entered into the special winning hole 69 during the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting right, the expected difference ball value is 100. This is a gaming state that is advantageous to players who exceed %. Therefore, in the low probability mode (normal gaming state), in order to shift to the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, left-handed hitting that allows the game ball 99 to enter the first prize opening 314 is encouraged, and In the probability mode (variable probability game state), right-handed hitting is encouraged where the expected difference ball value during the variable display of the second special symbol exceeds 100%.

On the other hand, since the right-handed game ball 99 can enter the second prize opening 315, if the lottery result is a jackpot in the second special lottery (jackpot lottery) for right-handed players, the probability is low. In both the mode (normal game state) and the high probability mode (variable probability game state), a 2R normal jackpot game which is shifted to a low probability mode (normal game state) after the end of the game is executed as a jackpot game. In addition, in the low probability mode (normal game state), as will be described later, by hitting right, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69 during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, and the difference ball is expected. This is a disadvantageous gaming state for players whose value is less than or equal to 100%. That is, in the low probability mode (normal gaming state), if the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery by right-handed players is a jackpot, there is a problem in which it is not possible to shift to the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Not only is it profitable, but in low probability mode (normal gaming state) there is no advantage to hitting right because the expected value of the difference ball will never exceed 100%, so in low probability mode (normal gaming state) there is no advantage to hitting right. Left-handed hitting is encouraged. In other words, in the low probability mode (normal gaming state), even if you hit right, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69 during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the expected difference ball value is less than 100% or A so-called strategy countermeasure is taken by creating a gaming state that is disadvantageous to players who are below the mark.

In addition, in this embodiment, two types of jackpot are set as 2R certain variable jackpot and 2R normal jackpot game, but the number of jackpot types is not limited to two, but may be three or more, and various jackpots may be used. The number of rounds of the game is also not limited to 2R, and may be any other number of rounds. For example, the number of rounds for a regular jackpot may be set to 3 or more rounds so that the player can get more balls, or the number of rounds for a regular jackpot may be set to 1 round, which is not desirable for the player. The normal jackpot game may be ended in a short time.

[Maximum opening time and maximum number of balls entered for each variable prize opening 316A, 316B]
As mentioned above, three winning types are set in this embodiment: 2R probability variable jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, and small win. Here, FIG. 113(A) is a diagram showing an example of the maximum opening time and the maximum number of balls entered for each variable winning hole 316A, 316B.

As shown in FIG. 113(A), in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot game is executed after the variable game that notifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. In this 2R probability variable jackpot game, an opening/closing execution mode including two round games in which the first variable prize opening 316A is opened is executed. In each round game, if 30 seconds have passed from the start of opening of the first variable winning hole 316A, or before 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of opening of the first variable winning hole 316A, 10 or more items are placed in the first variable winning hole 316A. When the game ball 99 is entered, the first variable prize opening 316A is closed by the first opening/closing door 319A, thereby ending the game. Then, when the game ball 99 enters the first variable winning hole 316A, the number of balls paid out is 10 balls (see FIG. 113(B)), and as described above, the first variable winning hole 316A is a so-called completely secured attacker. It is configured as. Therefore, in each round game of the 2R variable jackpot game, all of the game balls 99 hit to the right can enter the first variable winning hole 316, and there is a difference of 9 balls for the firing of 1 game ball 99. It is possible to get balls. As a result, in the 2R fixed variable jackpot game, 200 balls can be expected to come out by entering the game ball 99 into the first variable prize opening 316A in each round game, and the player's game ball 99 (balls held) is approximately It is expected that the number of balls will increase by 180 balls.

The 2R probability-variable jackpot game may include an opening that is executed before the opening/closing execution mode is executed, or may include an ending that is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, the opening/closing execution mode may include an interval between round games. In addition, the number of balls paid out (prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the first variable winning hole 316A is not limited to 10 balls, and the expected difference ball value in the 2R variable jackpot game is 100% or more. It can be changed within a certain range.

In the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the 2R normal jackpot game is executed after the variable game that notifies you of the 2R normal jackpot. In this 2R normal jackpot game, unlike the 2R variable probability jackpot game, an opening/closing execution mode including two round games in which the second variable prize opening 316B is opened is executed. In each round game, if 30 seconds have passed from the start of opening of the second variable winning hole 316B, or before 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of opening of the second variable winning hole 316B, 10 or more coins are placed in the second variable winning hole 316B. When a game ball is entered, the second variable prize winning opening 316B is closed and the game ends. Then, when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B, the number of balls paid out is 3 balls, and in the 2R normal jackpot game, the game by the game ball 99 entering the second variable winning hole 316B. It is not expected that the number of game balls 99 (balls held) by players will increase. Specifically, the second variable prize opening 316B is provided below the clown device 63 as described above, and the game ball 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clown device 63 with a probability of 1/3 is inserted into the second variable winning hole 316B. He is an attacker who is guaranteed to get the ball in. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is hit to the right, it is expected that 3 balls will be paid out compared to the 3 balls 99 are launched, so the expected difference ball value will be 0 balls, and the player's game ball 99 (held) will be expected to be paid out. No increase in the number of balls) is expected.

The 2R normal jackpot game may include an opening that is executed before the opening/closing execution mode is executed, or may include an ending that is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, the opening/closing execution mode may include an interval between round games. However, in the opening, ending, and interval, the second variable prize opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B, and the game ball 99 can enter the special prize opening 69, so the normal gaming state (low As a countermeasure against right-handed batting (probability mode), it is preferable to set the opening, ending, and interval times as short as possible, or to omit them.

In the case of a small win, the small win game is executed after the fluctuating game that notifies you of the small win. In this small winning game, an open game in which the second variable prize opening 316B is opened is executed. This opening game is performed when 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of opening of the second variable winning hole 316B, or before 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of opening of the second variable winning hole 316B. When 10 or more game balls are entered, the second variable winning hole 316B is closed and the game ends. In other words, the small winning game does not end when the maximum number of game balls 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B, and 1.8 seconds elapse from the start of opening of the second variable winning hole 316B. It ends with this. Then, when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B, the number of balls to be paid out is 3 balls, and in the small winning game, the ball goes to the second variable winning hole 316B as in the above-mentioned 2R normal jackpot game. It is not expected that the player's number of game balls 99 (balls held) will increase due to the entry of game balls 99 into the game.

Note that the small winning game may include an opening that is executed before the open game is executed, or may include an ending that is executed after the open game ends. However, in the small winning game, as with the 2R normal jackpot game mentioned above, as a countermeasure against right-handed hitting in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the opening and ending times should be set as short as possible or omitted. is preferred.

In addition, the number of balls paid out (prize balls) when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B in the 2R normal jackpot game or the small winning game is not limited to 3 balls, but in the 2R normal jackpot game or the small winning game. It is possible to change the expected difference ball value in a winning game within a range of 100% or less.

Further, when the game ball 99 is hit to the right, some of the game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315, but in this embodiment, the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 and is paid out. The number of balls is set to one (see FIG. 113(B)). Therefore, when the game ball 99 is hit to the right, the expected difference ball value when the ball enters the second winning hole 315 is 0 balls, and when the game ball 99 is hit to the right, the expected difference ball value when the ball enters the second winning hole 315 is 0 balls. The entry of the game ball 99 does not affect the expected difference ball value in the 2R normal jackpot game and the small win game.

In addition, the number of paid balls (prize balls) of each winning hole 313, 314, 315, 316A, and 316B shown in FIG. 113(B) can be changed as appropriate within the scope where the technical idea of the present invention is applicable. In particular, in addition to the first variable winning hole 316A and the second variable winning hole 316B mentioned above, the number of balls (prize balls) paid out from the special winning hole 69 is not limited to 15 balls, but in the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) When hitting, the expected value of the difference ball can be changed within the range of over 100%,

[Variation table]
In this embodiment, as a variable table, a table corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is set for the first special lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314, and A table corresponding to the probability mode types (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set for the second special drawing lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315.

Here, FIGS. 112(A) to 121(D) are diagrams showing examples of variation tables of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation tables include a low probability mode first special pattern jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 112(A), a low probability mode first special chart loss fluctuation table shown in FIG. 112(B), and a low probability mode first special pattern jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 112(C). A low probability mode second special symbol fluctuation table shown in FIG. 112(D) and a high probability mode second special symbol fluctuation table shown in FIG. 112(D) are provided.

Note that the fluctuation patterns (fluctuating display times) shown in FIGS. 112(A) to 121(D) are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the technical concept of the present invention. In particular, the fluctuation pattern in the low probability mode second special symbol fluctuation table shown in FIG. %, and the variation pattern in the high probability mode second special symbol variation table shown in FIG. It is possible to change the expected value within a range exceeding 100%,

As shown in FIG. 112(A), the low probability mode first special pattern jackpot variation table of this embodiment includes the normal jackpot variation table of the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(A)) and the probability variable jackpot variation table of the first embodiment described above. This is similar to the table (see FIG. 15(B)). Specifically, in the low probability mode first special figure jackpot fluctuation table of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern "01" (fluctuation display time = 30 seconds), the fluctuation pattern "02" ( (variable display time = 60 seconds) or variable pattern "03" (variable display time = 90 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 112(B), the low probability mode first special symbol deviation variation table of this embodiment is similar to the passing/missing variation table of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 15(C)). . Specifically, in the low probability mode first special symbol deviation fluctuation table of the present embodiment, each stop type at the time of a deviation (reach outside of the front and rear, reach other than the front and back, and complete failure) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. , a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front/back off reach or front/back off reach, the variation pattern is "01" (variation display time = 30 seconds), the variation pattern is set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Either "02" (fluctuation display time = 60 seconds) or fluctuation pattern "03" (fluctuation display time = 90 seconds) is selected. On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of deviation is completely off, the variation pattern is "04" (variation display time = 7 seconds) or the variation pattern "05" (variation display time = 10 seconds) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. seconds) is selected.

As shown in FIG. 112(C), in the low probability mode second special symbol variation table of this embodiment, the variation pattern "06" (variation display time = 1 second) is always displayed regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. selected. That is, when the game ball 99 is hit right to the right area of the game board 31 in the low probability mode, the game ball 99 enters the second prize opening 315, and the second special drawing lottery is executed. In this case, the variable display time will be 1 second regardless of the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery.

As shown in FIG. 112(D), in the high probability mode second special symbol fluctuation table of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern "01" (fluctuation display time = 30 seconds), the fluctuation pattern Either "02" (fluctuation display time = 60 seconds) or fluctuation pattern "03" (fluctuation display time = 90 seconds) is selected.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball 99 is hit right to the right side area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 enters the second prize opening 315, and the second special drawing lottery is held. The variable display time of the second special symbol in the low probability mode (normal gaming state) when is executed is set as short as 1 second, and the expected value of the difference ball is 100% or less (the difference ball is 0). It is set so that it becomes a ball or a minus. The details of the difference ball expected value being less than or equal to 100% (the difference ball becomes 0 ball or negative) will be clarified later, but the second winning hole 315 and the first variable among the 99 game balls hit right. Games that do not win in the winning slot 316A are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 at a predetermined ratio (1:2 in this embodiment) by the clone device 63. When the second variable prize opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B in cases other than the 2R normal jackpot game or the small win game, the game balls 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63 are awarded. Balls can be entered into the special winning hole 69 with a large number of balls (15 balls in this embodiment (see FIG. 113(B))). Furthermore, for example, if the game balls 99 can be fired at regular intervals of 0.6 seconds and the game balls 99 are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 with a probability of 1/3 by the clone device 63, the average number of game balls 99 is 1/3. The game ball 99 will reach the second opening/closing door 319B at a frequency of 1 ball per 8 seconds (0.56 balls/1 second) (taking into consideration the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315) In reality, the frequency is lower than 1 ball every 1.8 seconds (0.56 balls/1 second). Therefore, if the variable display time of the second special figure in the low probability mode (normal gaming state) is set to a short time (1 second in this embodiment), the second opening/closing door will open while the second special figure is variablely displayed. It becomes difficult to reach 319B. In addition, the game ball 99 that has reached the second opening/closing door 319B rolls on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 319B and then enters the special prize opening 69 (see FIG. 109), so as in this embodiment, When the variable display time of the second special figure in the low probability mode (normal gaming state) is set to a short time (1 second in this embodiment), many game balls rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B. 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B by opening the second variable winning hole 316B in the 2R normal jackpot game or small winning game (see FIG. 111(B)) that is executed after the second special figure is stopped and displayed. Therefore, most of the balls do not enter the special winning hole 69. In this way, by setting the variable display time of the second special symbol to a short time (1 second in this embodiment) in the low probability mode (normal gaming state), the right In the case of hitting, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69, so the number of game balls 99 of the player decreases, and an increase in the number of game balls 99 cannot be expected. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, hitting right in the low probability mode (normal gaming state) is disadvantageous to the player and is not encouraged.

In addition, in order to increase the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69 when hitting right in the normal game state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 is placed on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 319B. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the residence time of . Examples of configurations that increase the residence time of the game balls 99 on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 319B include, for example, a configuration in which the moving distance of the gaming balls 99 on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 319B is lengthened; A configuration that reduces the moving speed of the game ball 99 at , and a combination of these configurations are conceivable. Specifically, as a configuration that increases the moving distance of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B, for example, a configuration that increases the total length of the second opening/closing door 319B in the left and right direction, Possible configurations include a configuration in which the game ball 99 is moved while meandering in the front-rear direction or vertical direction of the game board 31 on the top surface, a configuration in which the game ball 99 is moved in a spiral shape, and a combination of two or more of these. In addition, as a configuration to reduce the moving speed of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B, a configuration that reduces the inclination angle of the second opening/closing door 319B, a configuration in which the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B is A conceivable configuration is to increase the movement resistance by providing convex portions or concave portions or by roughening the surface.

In addition, instead of adopting a configuration in which the residence time of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B is longer, or in addition to, a special case where the game ball 99 is hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). In order to increase the difficulty of entering the game balls 99 into the prize opening 69, a discharge port 64 through which the game balls 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63 are discharged, and a second opening/closing door 319B. In between, a delay means may be provided to delay the flow of the game ball 99. In this case, the delay means may have the same structure as the one that lengthens the residence time of the game ball 99 on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B.

On the other hand, when the second special drawing lottery is executed, the variable display time in the high probability mode (variable gaming state) is set as long as 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds. ) is set so that the expected value of the difference ball when hitting the ball to the right exceeds 100% (the difference ball becomes positive). The details of why the expected difference ball value exceeds 100% (the difference ball becomes positive) will be clarified later, but as mentioned above, the game ball 99 hit to the right hits one ball every 1.8 seconds on average. The second opening/closing door 319B is reached at a frequency of (0.56 beads/1 second). When the variable display time of the second special figure in the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) is set to a long time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds in this embodiment), the variable display of the second special figure It becomes possible for many game balls 99 to reach the second opening/closing door 319B inside. Therefore, even if the game ball 99 that has reached the second opening/closing door 319B rolls on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 319B and then enters the special prize opening 69, even if the ball 99 reaches the second opening/closing door 319B and enters the special prize opening 69, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Many game balls 99 are entered into the special winning hole 69. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls for the special winning hole 69 is 15 balls, which is set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the other winning holes 313, 314, 315, 316A, and 316B (Fig. 113(B) )reference). Therefore, if you hit right in the high probability mode (probability variable gaming state), it is easy for the game ball 99 to enter the special winning hole 69, and the number of prize balls in the special winning hole 69 is large, so you can not play the game. The player's number of game balls 99 increases. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, hitting right in the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) is advantageous for the player and is encouraged.

Note that the details of the expected difference ball value when the ball is hit to the right will be explained in detail in the description of the game flow of the gaming machine 10, which will be described later.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating display time) of the second special figure fluctuation table in low probability mode is not limited to 1 second, but is set so that the expected difference ball value is 100% or less (the difference ball becomes 0 balls or negative). It may be set to another time, or a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation display time) may be set.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating display time) of the second special symbol fluctuation table in high probability mode should be set so that the expected difference ball value exceeds 100% (the difference ball becomes positive), 30 seconds, 60 seconds. Alternatively, the time period is not limited to 90 seconds, but may be set to another time, and the variation pattern (variation display time) may be set to one type of fixed time, for example, other than three types.

[Game flow of gaming machine 10]
Next, the game flow of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 114(A) and 114(B).

First, a description will be given of how to launch the game ball 99 (the use of left-handed and right-handed strikes) that is recommended in the gaming machine 10. Here, in FIG. 114(A), left-handed hitting is performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and in other than the normal gaming state (low probability mode) (variable probability gaming state and winning game (big winning game or small winning game)) This is the game flow when hitting right-handed. The example shown in FIG. 114(A) is a game flow when the game ball 99 is launched in the encouraging procedure in which the expected ball difference value is the largest.

In the encouragement procedure shown in FIG. 114(A), a left-handed hit is performed in which the game ball 99 is hit to the left side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and a game ball 99 is hit to the right side of the game board 31 in other than the normal gaming state. By hitting the ball 99 to the right, the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69, and the expected value of the difference ball of the game ball 99 exceeds 100% (the player's game ball 99 (ball held) increase).

Here, in the gaming machine 10, when playing left-handed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 can enter the first winning hole 314, but cannot enter the second winning hole 315. be. Then, when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314, a first special drawing lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed. The first special drawing lottery in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is a lottery to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss (see Figure 111 (A)), and if the lottery result is a jackpot, the distribution is 2R probability variation. This is only a jackpot, and 2R usually does not become a jackpot (see FIG. 111(D)). If the first special drawing lottery in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is a loss, the lottery result in the first special drawing drawing triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first prize opening 314 will be a jackpot. The jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is repeated until the winning number is reached.

Then, if the lottery result in the first special drawing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 is a jackpot, the 2R probability variable jackpot game will be played after the variable game that notifies the lottery result. executed. In this 2R fixed variable jackpot game, a round game in which the first variable winning hole 316A is opened is executed twice, and as mentioned above, the player can enter the game ball 99 into the first variable winning hole 316A by right-handed hitting. The number of game balls 99 (balls held) increases. When such a 2R probability-variable jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a probability-variable game state. That is, in this embodiment, when the lottery result in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is a jackpot, the game is shifted to the variable probability gaming state.

The variable probability gaming state is a high probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). In this variable probability game state, by performing a right hit, the game ball 99 is placed in the special prize opening 69 during the execution of the variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (during the variable display of the second special symbol). The player can increase the number of game balls 99 (balls held) by entering the game balls 99 into the special winning hole 69.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, when hitting right in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315 and the ball can enter the first winning hole 314. It is impossible. Then, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, a second special drawing lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed. The second special drawing lottery in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) is a lottery to determine whether it is a jackpot or a small win (see Figure 111(C)), and if the lottery result is a jackpot, the distribution is 2R. There is usually only a jackpot, and there is no 2R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 111(D)).

If the lottery result in the second special lottery in the second special lottery in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) is a jackpot, the 2R normal jackpot game is executed after the variable game that notifies the lottery result ends. . In this 2R normal jackpot game, a round game in which the second variable winning hole 316B is opened is executed twice, but as described above, when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B by hitting the right hand, However, no increase in the number of game balls 99 (balls held) by players is expected. When such a 2R normal jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a normal game state. That is, in this embodiment, when the lottery result in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) is a jackpot, the game is shifted to the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) is a small win, the small win game is executed after the variable game that notifies the lottery result ends. In this small winning game, an open game in which the second variable winning hole 316B is opened is executed once, but as described above, when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B by hitting the right hand, An increase in the number of game balls 99 (balls owned) by players is not expected. When such a small winning game ends, the variable probability game state is maintained without shifting to the normal game state (low probability mode). That is, in this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) is maintained until the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery becomes a jackpot, and is triggered by the lottery result in the second special drawing drawing becoming a jackpot. The game is then transferred to the normal gaming state. In other words, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), generally "2nd special drawing lottery → Variable game with small winning notification → Small winning game → 2nd special drawing lottery → Variable game with small winning notification → Small winning game... The game flow is 2nd special drawing lottery → variable game with small winning notification → small winning game → 2nd special drawing lottery → variable game with jackpot notification → jackpot game.

Here, in the small winning game, an open game in which the second variable prize opening 316B is opened as described above is executed once, but in this open game, the game ball 99 hit right is a completely secured attacker. The game ball 99 is not entered into the special winning hole 69 while the second variable winning hole 316B is entered. On the other hand, in the small winning notification variable game executed between small winning games, the second variable prize opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B, and the second variable prize opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B, and the second variable winning opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B. The game ball 99 can enter the special winning hole 69. Therefore, if you hit right during the small hit notification variable game (during the variable display of the second special symbol) executed between small hit games, the game ball is distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the croon device 63. 99 moves toward the special prize opening 69 by rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B. Then, the probability of being distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clown device 63 is 1/3, and the prize balls in the special prize opening 69 are 15 balls (see FIG. 113(B)), so the game with 3 balls is possible. For each ball 99 launched, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 will increase by a maximum of 12 balls (the maximum expected value per ball is 4 balls).

In addition, the variable pattern (fluctuating display time of the second special symbol) of the variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) is set as long as 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds. (See FIG. 112(D)). Therefore, for example, if the firing interval of the game balls 99 is 0.6 seconds, if 30 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation display time), it is possible to launch 50 game balls 99 during the fluctuation game. Therefore, the theoretical maximum difference in balls in one variable game is 200 balls. Similarly, if 60 seconds is selected as the variable pattern (variable display time), the theoretical maximum difference in one variable game is 400 balls, and if 90 seconds is selected as the variable pattern (variable display time). The theoretical maximum difference in balls in one variable game is 600 balls.

In addition, since the average value of the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the variable game that announces the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) is 60 seconds (see Figure 112 (D)) , the expected value of the theoretical maximum difference ball in one variable game when hitting right in the variable probability game state is 400 balls. In other words, the theoretical maximum difference in the number of balls increased per minute (60 seconds) when playing right-handed in the variable probability gaming state is 400 balls. Since the gaming machine 10 has a jackpot probability of 1/20 and a small win probability of 19/20 in the variable probability gaming state, the maximum expected ball difference in a small win game in the variable probability gaming state is approximately 8000 balls. becomes. On the other hand, as mentioned above, in the 2R fixed variable jackpot game, you can expect a difference of about 180 balls by entering the game ball 99 into the first variable winning hole 316A, and in the 2R normal jackpot game and small winning game, you can expect a difference of about 180 balls. An increase in the difference in balls cannot be expected depending on the entry of the game ball 99 into the mouth 316B. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, instead of increasing the difference ball mainly by entering the variable winning holes 316A and 316B in a jackpot game or a small winning game, the game machine 10 performs a right-handed hit in a variable probability game state (high probability mode). As a result, a new game feature is provided in which the number of game balls 99 is increased mainly by entering the game balls 99 into the special winning hole 69 in a variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special drawing lottery.

By the way, some gaming machines perform a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed. Further, in some jackpot drawings, a drawing is held not only to determine whether it is a big hit or a miss, but also to determine whether or not it is a small win. Here, a small win is a win different from a jackpot, and if the lottery result is a small win, a small win game is executed, and after the execution of a small win game, the gaming state (probability change) before the small win game is executed. The gaming state and time-saving gaming state) are maintained. In a game where the lottery result of a jackpot lottery includes small wins in addition to jackpots, there is a gaming machine that increases the number of balls put out by successive small wins in a game state where the probability changes between jackpot games.

However, in a gaming machine that increases the number of balls paid out by successive small wins in variable probability gaming conditions between jackpot games, the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening that operates in jackpot games and small winning games accounts for the total number of balls paid out. The percentage will be higher. In other words, the role ratio (ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the second winning hole and the variable number of balls paid out from the variable winning hole in the total number of balls paid out by winning to all the winning holes where prize balls are paid out) and the continuous role ratio (the ratio of the variable winning hole number of paid out balls to the total number of paid out balls due to winnings to all winning holes where prize balls are paid out) becomes high. In other words, a gaming machine that increases the number of balls put out by successive small wins in a game state with variable probability between jackpot games is undesirable because the rate of increase in the number of balls put out is large and may result in arousing the player's desire for gambling.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, instead of increasing the difference ball mainly by entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning slots 316A and 316B in a jackpot game or a small winning game, The player's game balls 99 (balls held) are increased mainly by the entry of game balls 99 into a special winning hole 69 in a variable game that announces the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery in mode). Here, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio become higher as the number of balls paid out by the game balls 99 entering the variable winning holes 316A, 316B increases. Therefore, the main reason for the increase in the number of game balls 99 of the player is the entry of game balls 99 into the special winning hole 69 rather than the entering of the game balls 99 into the variable winning holes 316A and 316B. It is possible to lower the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio compared to a game machine that mainly uses the input of game balls to increase the number of game balls 99 of the player.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the game ball is hit to the right, not all of the game balls 99 hit to the right, but some of the game balls 99 are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is hit right in a variable game that announces the lottery result in the second special lottery in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), some of the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69. Therefore, by setting the allocation ratio to the front side of the game board 31 (1/3 in this embodiment) in the clone device 63, the speed at which the player's game balls 99 (balls held) increase can be set. It becomes possible to set the increasing speed of balls to a level that does not arouse the gambling spirit of the players.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the game ball 99 enters the special prize opening 69 when a player hits right in a variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special lottery in the variable probability game state (high probability mode). The number of game balls 99 (held by the player) of the player is increased by the ball. Therefore, the number of prize balls in the special winning hole 69 (15 in this embodiment) and the variable time of the variable game (in this embodiment By setting 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds), you can set the speed at which the player's game balls 99 (balls held) increase, so the speed at which the balls are increased can be adjusted to a level that does not arouse the player's gambling spirit. It becomes possible to set.

Next, the launching of the game ball 99, which is not encouraged in the gaming machine 10, will be explained. Here, FIG. 114(B) is a game flow when a non-encouraged right hit is performed in the normal game state (low probability mode).

In the non-encouragement procedure shown in FIG. 114(B), the game ball 99 is hit to the right side of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) by hitting the game ball 99 into the special winning slot 69. It is set so that it becomes difficult to enter the ball and the expected difference ball value of the game balls 99 is less than or equal to 100% (the number of game balls 99 (held by the player) does not increase).

Here, in the gaming machine 10, when hitting right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315, but cannot enter the first winning hole 314. be. Then, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), a second special drawing lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed. The second special drawing lottery in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is a lottery to determine whether it is a jackpot or a small win (see Figure 111 (B)), and if the lottery result is a jackpot, the distribution is 2R. There is usually only a jackpot, and there is no 2R probability-variable jackpot (see FIG. 111(D)). In other words, in the case of the second special drawing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315, even if it is a jackpot in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), it will not be a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot, but a 2R Usually a jackpot.

If the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315 is a jackpot, the 2R normal jackpot game will be played after the variable game that notifies the lottery result. executed. In this 2R normal jackpot game, a round game in which the second variable winning hole 316B is opened is executed twice, but as described above, when the game ball 99 enters the second variable winning hole 316B by right-handed hitting, However, no increase in the number of game balls 99 (balls held) by players is expected. Therefore, if you hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), even if the lottery result in the second special drawing is a jackpot, the probability-variable jackpot game will not be executed, and the probability-variable jackpot game will not be executed. Since the number of game balls 99 cannot be expected to increase, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Furthermore, when the 2R normal jackpot game based on the second special drawing lottery in the low probability mode (normal gaming state) ends, the normal gaming state is maintained. That is, in this embodiment, when a right hand is played in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the lottery result in the second special drawing is a jackpot, and the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode) is activated. The game is transferred to the normal gaming state without being transferred to the normal gaming state. In this way, if you hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), you will not be transferred to the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), so you will not be able to enter the special prize opening 69 as in the incentive procedure. An increase in the number of game balls 99 due to the entry of game balls 99 cannot be expected, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode) is a small win, the small win game is executed after the variable game that notifies the lottery result ends. In this small winning game, an open game in which the second variable winning hole 316B is opened is executed once, but as described above, the game ball 99 entering the second variable winning hole 316B by right-hand hitting can also be played once. An increase in the number of game balls 99 (balls owned) by players is not expected. When such a small winning game ends, the normal gaming state is maintained without shifting to the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode). That is, in this embodiment, when a right hand is made in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery becomes a small win, and the transition is made to the variable probability gaming state. There is no problem and the normal gaming state is maintained. In other words, if you hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), generally "2nd special drawing lottery → small winning notification variation game → small winning game → 2nd special drawing drawing → small winning notification fluctuation Game → Small winning game... 2nd special drawing lottery → Variable game with small winning notification → Small winning game → 2nd special drawing lottery → Variable game with jackpot notification → 2R normal jackpot game → 2nd special drawing lottery → Small winning The game flow is "Information fluctuation game → Small winning game...".

Here, in the small winning game, an open game in which the second variable prize opening 316B is opened as described above is executed once, but in this open game, the game ball 99 hit right is a completely secured attacker. The game ball 99 is not entered into the second variable winning hole 316B and the special winning hole 69. Therefore, an increase in the number of game balls in small winning games cannot be expected.

In addition, in a variable game with a small win notification that is executed between small win games when you hit right in the normal game state (low probability mode), the second variable prize opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B. However, the variation pattern (variation display time) of the variation game of the small winning notification is as short as 1 second (FIG. 112(B)). In addition, a second variable prize opening 316B and a second opening/closing door 319B are provided below the Croon device 63, and when a player plays right, the game is distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the Croon device 63. The ball 99 can enter the special prize opening 69 by rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 319B and moving to the left side. Therefore, even if you hit right during a variable game with small hit notification, while the second variable prize opening 316B is closed by the second opening/closing door 319B in the variable game, the game ball 99 will appear in the second opening/closing door 319B. There is a low possibility that the game ball 99 will reach the second opening/closing door 319B, but the small winning game will start before the game ball 99 reaches the special prize opening 69, and the second variable prize opening will be closed. There is also a possibility that 316B will be released. Therefore, if you hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), there is a low possibility that a game ball will enter the special winning hole 69 during a variable game with small hit notification, and an increase in the number of game balls 99 can be expected. do not have. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode).

In this way, in this embodiment, when a player hits right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the 2R probability variable jackpot game in which an increase in the number of game balls 99 can be expected is executed, and the transition to the probability variable gaming state is also possible. Moreover, an increase in the number of game balls 99 cannot be expected in the 2R normal jackpot game, the small win game, and the variable game in which it is announced that the lottery result in the second special drawing lottery is a small win. Therefore, it is not advantageous for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) because an increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected. That is, in the present embodiment, a so-called strategy strategy is taken by making it impossible to expect an increase in the number of game balls 99 when hitting right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode).

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115 to 121, focusing on the differences from the processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above. do.

In this embodiment, a part of the main processing executed by the main controller 4 is different from the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure executed by the main control device 4.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
As shown in FIG. 115, the main process of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the variable game control process (step S4901) and the jackpot game control process (step S4902), and the small win game control process ( This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that step S4903) is executed. Hereinafter, the variable game control process of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 116, the jackpot game control process of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120, and the small win game of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. Each control process will be explained.

[Variable game control processing]
In the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, since a small win is included as a win type, it is determined whether or not a small win game is in progress in order to determine whether to start the variable display of special symbols. (Step S1400). Then, when the small winning game is in progress (step S1400: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process without starting the variable display of the special symbols. On the other hand, if the small winning game is not in progress (step S1400: No), the variable display of the special symbols is started on the condition that the big winning game or the variable game (symbols are changing) is not in progress. That is, in this embodiment, since a small win is included as a lottery result in the jackpot lottery, not being in a small win game is added as a condition for starting the variable display of special symbols.

[Jackpot game control processing]
In the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the first special lottery that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 is a jackpot, the first variable winning hole is Control is performed to execute a 2R variable jackpot game in which a round game in which the game ball 99 can enter the second prize opening 315 is executed twice. When the lottery result in the 2 special drawing lottery is a jackpot, control is performed to execute a 2R normal jackpot game in which a round game in which a game ball 99 can enter a second variable winning hole 316B is executed twice.

<Step S5001>
As shown in FIG. 117, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game execution flag is set to on as step S5001. The jackpot game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON in step S5004, which will be described later, in the jackpot game control process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. If the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S5001: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5009, and if the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5001: No). , the process moves to step S5002.

<Step S5002>
When the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5002). The 2R probability variable jackpot flag is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R probability variable jackpot, and is set on, for example, in the variation pattern setting process in step S1604 of the variation start process in FIG. 26. Then, when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5002: Yes), that is, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5004. On the other hand, if the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S5002: No), that is, if the jackpot type is not a 2R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5003.

<Step S5003>
When the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (Step S5002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (Step S5003). The 2R normal jackpot flag is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, and is set to on in the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S1604 of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 26, for example. . Then, when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5003: Yes), that is, when the jackpot type is the 2R normal jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5004. On the other hand, when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S5003: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S5004 and S5005>
If the 2R guaranteed variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5002: Yes), or if the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S5003: Yes), that is, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON (step S5004), and sets the value of the round number counter to 2 in order to execute two round games in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game (step S5004). S5005)

<Steps S5006 to S5008>
In step S5006, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started (step S5006). The jackpot game start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in the main process of FIG. When the audio lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command, it executes the process of determining the jackpot game effect (see step S2107 of the command determination process in FIG. 37). In addition, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening of the jackpot game is in progress (step S5007), sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S5008), and controls the jackpot game. Finish the process.

<Step S5009>
If the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S5001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag set to ON in step S5007 of the jackpot game control process is set to ON or not. That is, it is determined whether the opening of the jackpot game is being executed (step S5009). If the opening flag is set to on (step S5009: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5010, and if the opening flag is set to off (step S5009: No), the process proceeds to step S5010 of FIG. The process moves to S5022.

<Steps S5010 and S5011>
If the during opening flag is set to ON (step S5009: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S5008 of the jackpot game control process (step S5010), and calculates the value after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the opening time counter is 0, that is, whether or not the opening is ended and the opening/closing execution mode is started (step S5011). When the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S5011: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5013, and when the value of the opening time counter is not 0 (step S5011: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. finish.

<Steps S5013 to S5016>
If the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S5011: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to OFF (step S5013). In addition, the MPU 41 determines whether the 2R probability variable jackpot game flag is set on as shown in FIG. 118, that is, whether or not to start the opening/closing execution mode of the 2R probability variable jackpot game (step S5014). When the 2R variable jackpot game flag is set to ON (step S5014: Yes), the MPU 41 opens the first variable prize opening 316A by moving the first opening/closing door 319A to the operating position on the back side, and plays a round. At the same time as starting the game (step S5015), the first variable winning hole opening flag indicating that the first variable winning hole 316A is open is set on (step S5016), and the process moves to step S5019. On the other hand, when the 2R probability variable jackpot game flag is set to OFF (step S5014: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5017.

<Steps S5017 and S5018>
If the 2R guaranteed variable jackpot game flag is set to OFF (step S5014: No), it can be determined that the 2R normal jackpot game flag is set to ON, so the MPU 41 operates the second opening/closing door 319B on the back side. By moving it to the position, the second variable winning hole 316B is opened and a round game is started (step S5017), and the second variable winning hole opening flag indicating that the second variable winning hole 316B is open is turned on. (step S5018), and the process moves to step S5019.

<Steps S5019 to S5021>
When the first variable winning hole opening flag is set to ON (step S5016) or when the second variable winning hole opening flag is set to ON (step S5018), the MPU 41 controls the remaining variable winning holes 316A and 316B. A variable prize opening opening time counter indicating the opening time is set (step S5019).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game in the opening/closing execution mode is started (step S5020), and also sets a round game start command in step S5005 in FIG. 117 in the jackpot game control process. 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games set in (step S5021), and the jackpot game control is ended. Note that the round game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S5022>
If the opening flag is set to OFF (step S5009: No), as shown in FIG. 119, the MPU 41 controls the variable flag that is set to ON in step S5016 or step S5018 of FIG. 118 in the jackpot game control process. Whether or not the winning opening opening flag (first variable winning opening opening flag or second variable winning opening opening flag) is set to on, that is, whether the variable winning openings 316A, 316B are opened during the execution of a round game. It is determined whether or not (step S5022). If the variable winning hole opening flag is set to ON (step S5022: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5023, and if the variable winning hole opening flag is set to OFF (step S5022: No), the process moves to step S5036.

<Step S5023>
When the variable winning a prize opening flag is set on (step S5022: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning a prize flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the variable winning a prize opening 394 is set on. It is determined whether a winning has occurred in the variable winning openings 316A, 316B (step S5023). The variable winning flag is set to ON when setting a prize ball command for winning to the variable winning holes 316A, 316B, for example, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1402 in the main process of FIG. If the variable winning flag is set to ON (step S5023: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5024, and if the variable winning flag is set to OFF (step S5023: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5024. The process moves to S5028.

<Steps S5024 and S5025>
If the variable winning flag is set to ON (step S5023: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning counter indicating the number of winnings in the variable winning holes 316A, 316B (step S5024), and sets the variable winning flag to is set to off (step S5025).

<Steps S5026 and S5027>
In step S5026, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the variable prize winning counter added in step S5024 is 10. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to close the variable winning openings 316A, 316B due to the entry of the upper limit number of game balls 99. When the value of the variable winning a prize counter is 10 (step S5026: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the variable winning a prize opening time counter to 0 (step S5027), and moves the process to step S5030. On the other hand, if the value of the variable prize winning counter is not 10 (step S5026: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5028.

<Step S5028>
If the variable winning flag is off (Step S5023: No) or if the value of the variable winning counter is not 10 (Step S5026: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the variable winning opening time counter (Step S5028). ), it is determined whether the value of the variable prize opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5029). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to close the variable winning holes 316A, 316B upon reaching the maximum opening time. When the value of the variable winning opening opening time counter is 0 (Step S5029: Yes), the process moves to Step S5030, and when the value of the variable winning opening opening time counter is not 0 (Step S5029: No), the corresponding jackpot game Control processing ends.

<Steps S5030 and S5031>
When the value of the variable winning opening time counter is 10 (step S5026: Yes), the value of the variable winning opening opening time counter is subtracted to 0 (step S5027), or when the value of the variable winning opening opening time counter is 0 (Step S5029: Yes), since the MPU 41 can determine that it is the timing to close the variable winning openings 316A, 316B, it moves the opening/closing doors 316A, 316B to the standby position on the front side and closes the variable winning openings 316A, 316B. Then, the round game ends (step S5030), and the variable winning hole opening flag is set to OFF (step S5031). That is, in the round game, either the elapse of a predetermined period (maximum opening time) defined by the variable winning hole opening time counter or the entry of the upper limit number of game balls 99 into the variable winning holes 316A, 316B are satisfied. In this case, the variable winning openings 316A and 316B are closed, thereby ending the game.

<Step S5032>
In step S5032, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round number counter that is set in step S5005 in FIG. 117 and subtracted in step S5021 in FIG. 118 in the jackpot game control process is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode by determining whether there are any round games left to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. If the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S5032: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5039, and if the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S5032: No), the process moves to step S5033. do.

<Steps S5033 to S5035>
If the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S5032: No), it can be determined that there are still round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode, so the MPU 41 determines the interval ( The variable winning interval flag indicating that the variable winning openings 316A and 316B are waiting to be opened is set to ON (step S5033), and the process continues until the variable winning openings 316A and 316B are opened. A variable winning interval time counter indicating the remaining time is set (step S5034). Then, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning interval start command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the variable winning interval (step S5035), and ends the jackpot game control process. The variable winning interval start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S5036>
If the variable winning opening flag is set to OFF (step S5022: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the variable winning interval flag, which is set to ON in step S5033, is set to ON ( Step S5036). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning holes 316A and 316B are closed and are in a standby state for opening. If the variable winning interval flag is set to on (step S5036: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5037, and if the variable winning interval flag is set to off (step S5036: No), the process proceeds to step S5037. The process moves to step S5043 in FIG. 120.

<Steps S5037 and S5038>
If the flag during the variable winning interval is set to ON (step S5036: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the variable winning interval time counter set in step S5034 (step S5037), and the variable winning interval after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not the interval time counter is 0, that is, whether or not it is the timing to open the variable prize winning holes 316A, 316B (timing to start the round game) (step S5038). If the variable winning interval time counter is 0 (step S5038: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the timing to open the variable winning holes 316A, 316B (start timing of the round game), so the process is executed in step S5014 in FIG. Then, the process of opening the variable prize openings 316A, 316B by operating the opening/closing doors 319A, 319B to the rear side as described above is executed (steps S5014 to S5021). On the other hand, if the variable winning interval time counter is not 0 (step S5038: No), the jackpot game control process is ended.

<Steps S5039 to S5042>
If the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S5032: Yes), it can be determined that there are no round games left to be played in the opening/closing execution mode (this is the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode). An ending start flag indicating that an ending has started in the game is set on (step S5039), and an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time is set (step S5040). Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start the ending (step S5041), and sets the jackpot flag (2R guaranteed variable jackpot flag or 2R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S5041). S5042), the jackpot game control process is ended. Note that the ending start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S5039>
When the variable winning interval flag is set to OFF (step S5036: No), as shown in FIG. 120, the MPU 41 starts the ending that is set to ON in step S5039 of FIG. 119 in the jackpot game control process. It is determined whether the flag is set on, that is, whether it is the timing to start the ending in the jackpot game (step S5043). If the ending start flag is set to ON (step S5043: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5044, and if the ending start flag is set to OFF (step S5043: No), the process moves to step S5044. The process moves to S5047.

<Steps S5044 to S5046>
If the ending start flag is set to ON (step S5043: Yes), the MPU 41 sets an ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to ON (step S5044), and sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining ending time. is set (step S5045). Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending start flag to OFF (step S5046), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S5047>
When the ending start flag is set to OFF (step S5043: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to ON in step S5044 in the jackpot game control process is set to ON. It is determined whether an ending is being executed in the jackpot game (step S5047). If the ending flag is set to ON (step S5047: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5048, and if the ending flag is set to OFF (step S5047: No), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S5048, and if the ending flag is set to OFF (step S5047: No), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S5048. Control processing ends.

<Steps S5048 and S5049>
If the ending flag is set to ON (step S5047: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter set in step S5045 in the jackpot game control process (step S5048), and after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the ending time counter is 0, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the ending (jackpot game) (step S5049). When the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S5049: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5050, and when the value of the ending time counter is not 0 (step S5049: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. finish.

<Steps S5050 to S5052>
If the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S5049: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the end timing of the ending (jackpot game), so it is set to ON in step S5044 in the jackpot game control process. The ending flag is set to OFF (step S5050), and the jackpot game execution flag that is set to ON in step S5004 of FIG. 117 in the jackpot game control process is set to OFF (step S5051). Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends (step S5052), and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot game end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

As described above, in the jackpot game control process, a process is performed to execute a jackpot game consisting of an opening, two round games, and an ending. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, as a round game, a process is executed in which the first variable winning hole 316A is opened in the 2R variable probability jackpot game, and a process in which the second variable winning hole 316B is opened in the 2R normal jackpot game is executed. be done.

[Small winning game control process]
In the small winning game control process of this embodiment, the lottery result in the first special drawing lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 in the high probability mode (variable probability game state) is If it is a small win, or if the lottery result in the second special lottery that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is a small win, a game is entered into the second variable winning hole 316B. Control is performed to execute a small winning game in which an open game in which the ball 99 is released so that it can enter is executed once.

<Step S5101>
As shown in FIG. 121, in the small winning game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the small winning game execution flag is set on as step S5101. The small winning game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small winning game is being executed, and is set to ON in step S5104, which will be described later, of the small winning game control process. If the small winning game execution flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5107, and if the small winning game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), the process moves to step S5102.

<Step S5102>
When the small winning game execution flag is set to off (step S5101: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small winning flag is set to on (step S5102). The small hit flag is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win, and is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S1604 of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 26, for example. Then, when the small hit flag is set to ON (step S5102: Yes), that is, when the hit type is a small hit, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5103. On the other hand, if the small win flag is set to off (step S5102: No), that is, if the win type is not a small win, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S5103 and S5104>
If the small winning flag is set to ON (step S5102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a small winning game start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a small winning game will be started (step S5103). , sets on the small winning game execution flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed (step S5104). Note that the small winning game start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 115) executed by the MPU 41.

<Steps S5105 and S5106>
In step S5105, the MPU 41 opens the second variable prize opening 316B by moving the second opening/closing door 319B to the operating position on the back side to start the small winning opening game (step S5105), and the second variable A second variable winning hole opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the winning hole 316B is set (step S5106), and the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S5107 and S5108>
When the small winning game execution flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the flag indicating the remaining opening time of the second variable winning opening 316B set in step S5106 of the small winning game control process. The value of the second variable winning opening opening time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S5107), and it is determined whether the value of the second variable winning opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5108). If the value of the second variable prize opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5108: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5109, and the value of the second variable winning opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5108: Yes). If it is not 0 (step S5108: No), the small hit game control process is ended.

<Steps S5109 to S5111>
If the value of the second variable winning opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5108: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the second opening/closing door 319B to the standby position on the front side and opens the second variable winning opening 316B. By closing, the small winning open game is ended (step S5109), and the small winning game execution flag and the small winning flag are set to OFF (steps S5110 and S5111), and the small winning game control process is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, instead of increasing the difference ball mainly by entering the game ball 99 into the variable winning holes 316A and 316B in a jackpot game or a small win game, the variable probability game state (high probability mode ) The player's game balls 99 (balls held) are increased mainly by the entry of game balls 99 into a special winning hole 69 in a variable game that announces the lottery result in the second special lottery in ). Here, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio become higher as the number of balls paid out by the game balls 99 entering the variable winning holes 316A, 316B increases. Therefore, the main reason for the increase in the number of game balls 99 of the player is the entry of the game balls 99 into the special winning hole 69 rather than the entering of the game balls 99 into the variable winning holes 316A and 316B. It is possible to lower the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects compared to a game machine in which the player's number of game balls 99 is increased mainly by the entry of game balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is hit to the right, not all of the game balls 99 hit to the right, but some of the game balls 99 are distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the croon device 63. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is hit right in a variable game that announces the lottery result in the second special lottery in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), some of the game balls 99 enter the special winning hole 69. Therefore, by setting the allocation ratio to the front side of the game board 31 (1/3 in this embodiment) in the clone device 63, the speed at which the player's game balls 99 (balls held) increase can be set. It becomes possible to set the increasing speed of balls to a level that does not arouse the gambling spirit of the players.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a player hits right in a variable game that notifies the lottery result of the second special lottery in a variable probability game state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 enters the special prize opening 69. Accordingly, the number of game balls 99 (balls held) by the player is increased. Therefore, the number of prize balls in the special winning hole 69 (15 in this embodiment) and the variable time of the variable game (in this embodiment By setting 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds), you can set the speed at which the player's game balls 99 (balls held) increase, so the speed at which the balls are increased can be adjusted to a level that does not arouse the player's desire for gambling. It becomes possible to set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to ninth embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to tenth embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Eleventh embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, the game ball 99 that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is fixed to the right side area of the game board 31 by the Croon device 63, which is configured as a non-movable object, at a predetermined ratio. The game balls 99 distributed to the front side close the second variable prize opening 316B during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode). By being guided to the special prize opening 69 by the second opening/closing door 319B, instead of increasing the difference ball mainly by entering the game ball 99 into the variable prize openings 316A and 316B in jackpot games and small winning games, The case where the player's game balls (balls held) are increased mainly by entering the game ball 99 into the special winning hole 69 during the variable display of the second special figure in the game state (high probability mode) has been described.

However, the clone device 63 configured as a non-movable object fixed to the game board 31 is relatively large, and since the symbol display section 341 is provided in the center of the game board 31, the right side area of the game board 31 is Placing the croon device 63 at a location tends to reduce the degree of freedom in design. Furthermore, if a large space is to be secured for the clone device 63 in the right side area of the game board 31, it may be necessary to design the front view area of the symbol display section 341 arranged in the center of the game board 31 to be small. . Since the symbol display section 341 is used for performing image production, it is not preferable to reduce the front view area of the symbol display section 341 in order to improve the interest through the image production.

In addition, in the configuration in which the game balls 99 distributed to the front side of the game board 31 by the clone device 63 are guided to the special winning opening 69 by the second opening/closing door 319B that closes the second variable winning opening 316B, the probability variable gaming state ( It cannot be completely excluded that the game ball 99 enters the special prize opening 69 at a timing other than during the variable display of the second special figure in the high probability mode), and it may become a target for players to attack. do not have.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, depending on the attitude of the flow path regulating member, which is a movable member provided on the game board, the game ball launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board is controlled to the player's profit (for example, By letting the ball flow down one of multiple profit channels (e.g., three profit channels) with different expected ball output values, expected difference ball values, multiple inflows with different player profits (e.g., payout of game balls) A game ball can enter any of the areas. Further, in the present embodiment, the attitude of the flow path defining member is defined in accordance with the gaming state defined based on the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the flow path defining member is in the first posture in the inactive state, so that the game ball launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board can enter the sorting device and flow down the low profit channel where the expected profit is the lowest among the multiple profit channels. In addition, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), the flow path defining member is in the operating state in which it is alternately switched between the second posture and the third posture, so that the flow path defining member is in the second posture. In this case, a game ball launched into a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side area) can enter the special winning hole (first ball entry area) and the expected profit is the highest among multiple profit channels. While flowing down the profit flow path, when the flow path regulating member is in the third position, a game ball launched into a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side area) enters the general winning hole (second ball entry area). Among a plurality of possible profit channels, the expected profit flows down a medium profit channel, which is between a low profit channel and a high profit channel.

In this way, in this embodiment, by changing the attitude of the flow path defining member according to the gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to flow down the profit flow path with different profits given to the player. . Since the flow path defining member is a movable object that can change its posture, it can be formed smaller than a non-movable object such as the above-mentioned clown device 63, so that less space is provided on the game board for arranging the flow path defining member. It is possible to set it small. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board flows down the low-profit flow path due to the flow path defining member being inactive, and When it is activated, it flows down the high profit flow path or medium profit flow path. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize the flow path through which the game ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the flow path defining member is in an inactive state or an activated state. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) has a plurality of Flow down the low profit channel where the expected profit is the lowest among the profit channels. As a result, the game ball launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board is displayed at a timing other than during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), that is, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). Since it is completely eliminated that the game ball enters the special winning hole which is particularly advantageous to the player in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), by allowing the game ball to enter the special winning hole in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). This will prevent you from becoming a target of tactics that seek to receive unfair profits.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, at least a portion of the low profit channel is provided on the back side of the game board, and the medium profit channel and the high profit channel are provided on the front side of the game board. That is, in this embodiment, two of the three profit channels are provided on the front side of the game board, and one of the three profit channels is provided on the back side of the game board. It will be done. As a result, the space on the back side of the game board is used effectively, so the space required on the front side of the game board to provide multiple profit channels can be reduced. The degree of freedom in design is improved. In addition, when the high profit channel and the medium profit channel are provided on the front side of the game board, the high profit channel and the medium profit channel are more interesting to the player because the profit given to the player is higher than the low profit channel. Since it is easy to visually grasp the flow path, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest in the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the expected ball output value when a game ball flows down a low profit channel is set to 1 ball or less (0.5 ball in this embodiment). In this way, by setting the expected ball payout value when a game ball flows down a low profit channel to 1 ball or less (0.5 balls in this embodiment), in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) The expected ball output value when a game ball is launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board is set to one ball or less. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the expected difference ball value becomes 0 balls or less, and the player's holding is Since the number of balls decreases, measures are taken to prevent so-called strategic hitting.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the flow path defining member is in an operating state in which it is alternately switched between the second position and the third position in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side The game ball launched into the area) flows down either the high profit channel or the medium profit channel, and the rate at which the game ball flows down the medium profit channel is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows down the high profit channel. (In this embodiment, the ratio of high profit flow path: low profit flow path = 1:2) is set higher. As described above, in this embodiment, when the flow path defining member is in the operating state where it is alternately switched between the second attitude and the third attitude in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the specific area of the game board ( For example, a game ball launched to the right side area flows down either the high profit channel or the medium profit channel. Therefore, when a game ball is launched into a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side area) in a variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the player will not be disadvantaged by the game ball flowing down the low-profit channel. , it is possible to give the player a profit when the game ball flows down the high profit flow path and the medium profit flow path, and it becomes possible to increase the number of balls held by the player in a variable probability gaming state. In addition, when a game ball is launched into a specific area of the game board (for example, the right side area) while the flow path regulating member is in operation, the medium profit flow is lower than the rate at which the game ball flows down the high profit flow path. By setting the rate at which game balls flow down the high-profit flow path to a higher rate, players are prevented from excessively increasing the amount of balls they own without giving players too much profit from the flow of game balls down the high-profit flow path. can be suppressed. As a result, by suppressing an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player, the player's desire for gambling is not excessively stimulated, and by increasing the number of balls held by the player in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the player's interest in the game can be increased. It becomes possible to improve.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state (low probability mode), the flow path defining member is in the first posture in the inactive state, so that the game ball launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board is A flow path defining member so that the ball always flows down the low profit flow path where the expected profit is the lowest among the multiple profit flow paths, and so that the game ball does not flow down the high profit flow path and the low profit flow path. posture is controlled. In this way, in the present embodiment, the flow path defining member is maintained in the first posture of the inactive state in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), thereby making it possible to identify the game board in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). When a game ball is launched into an area (for example, the right side area), the game ball always flows down the low profit channel and is never guided into the high profit channel or medium profit channel. As a result, when a game ball is launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the game ball will flow down the high profit channel and medium profit channel. The player is not given the lowest profit (for example, the prize ball from entering the special winning slot or the general winning slot) and the game ball always flows down the low-profit channel. Granted. Therefore, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the player is appropriately prevented from intentionally launching a game ball into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board, that is, from attempting a strategy shot.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball dispersion area is provided above the flow path defining member to disperse (randomly flow down) game balls launched into a specific area (for example, the right side area) of the game board, A game ball rectifying region is provided between the region and the flow path defining member to rectify the game balls flowing down the game ball dispersion region and allow the game balls to pass one by one. In this way, in this embodiment, the game balls launched into a specific area of the game board are dispersed in multiple directions in the game ball distribution area and flow down, and rectified in the game ball rectification area, so that each ball is distributed at irregular timing. and flows down toward the flow path defining member. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game balls that are launched into a specific area of the game board are supplied to the flow path defining member one by one at irregular timing, and are given to the player according to the attitude of the flow path defining member. Flow down one of the profit channels with different profits at irregular timing. For this reason, it is considered difficult to launch a game ball at the timing when the game ball flows down a high-profit flow path that provides a high profit to the player. Prevented.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 122 to 131, focusing on the differences from the first and tenth embodiments described above.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, like the gaming machines 10 according to the first and tenth embodiments described above, encourages left-handed playing in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode). right-handed hitting is encouraged in However, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, although the details will be described later, the reason why left-handed playing is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) and right-handed playing is encouraged in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) is as follows. Since it is different from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration of the downstream area of the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is different from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. is different. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69 by hitting right in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode). The structure of the right side area of the game board 31 is similar to the above-described tenth embodiment in that the number of balls to be put out is increased by the number of balls. This embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment described above in the configuration of the downstream area of the game ball 99 launched. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 126, the configuration of the downstream area of the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 will be described.

Here, FIG. 122 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 123 is an enlarged view of main parts of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 122, and FIG. 124(A) is the same as FIG. FIGS. 124(B) and 124(C) are sectional views of the sorting device 94 provided on the gaming board 31 shown in FIG. 122, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are shown in FIG. 122. It is an enlarged view of the main part of the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 122, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming ball dispersion area 74, a gaming ball rectifying area 75, and a flow path in the downstream area of the gaming ball 99 launched to the right side area of the gaming board 31. A regulation member 84, a low profit flow path 76, a high profit flow path 77, a medium profit flow path 78, a distribution device 94, a variable winning hole 316C, a special winning hole 69, and a general winning hole 313A are provided.

[Game ball distribution area 74]
As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the game ball distribution area 74 defines a plurality of channels (routes) through which the game balls 99 can be moved by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31. Since the game ball distribution area 74 is formed by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31, the game ball distribution area 74 can be easily formed when driving other nails into the game board 31. In addition, the game ball dispersion area 74 defines a plurality of channels (routes) through which the game balls 99 can move using a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31, thereby dispersing the game balls 99 in multiple directions. and let it flow down randomly. Note that the game ball distribution area 74 may be provided by fixing a member (accessory object) made of resin, metal, or the like to the game board 31.

In addition, a second prize opening 315 is provided in the game ball distribution area 74. That is, in this embodiment, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, the second special drawing lottery is executed by causing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315 by hitting the right hand. In this embodiment, for the same reason as in the tenth embodiment described above, it is set so that it is disadvantageous for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) (Fig. 114 (See (B)), left-handed hitting is encouraged in the normal gaming state (low probability mode).

[Game ball rectification area 75]
The game ball rectification area 75 is located below the game ball dispersion area 74 and directly above the flow path defining member 84, and is provided with a flow path (route) through which one game ball 99 can pass by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31. ). Since the game ball rectification area 75 is formed by a plurality of nails driven into the game board 31, the game ball rectification area 75 can be easily formed when driving other nails into the game board 31. In addition, the game ball rectification area 75 defines a flow path (route) through which one game ball 99 can pass, so that the second prize opening 315 of the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 Game balls 99 flowing down a game ball dispersion area 74 without entering the ball are rectified and the game balls 99 are made to flow down one by one toward a flow path defining member 84. Note that the game ball rectification area 75 may be provided by fixing a member made of resin, metal, or the like (for example, a member similar to the through gate 317 of the first embodiment described above) to the game board 31.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are dispersed in multiple directions in the game ball dispersion area 74 and flow down, and are rectified in the game ball rectification area 75 so that the game balls 99 are flown down one ball at a time. It flows down toward the flow path defining member 84 at irregular timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are supplied one by one to the flow path defining member 84 at irregular timing, and the posture of the flow path defining member 84 (the first Which of the three profit channels 76 to 78 gives different profits to the player depending on the posture (see FIG. 124(A)), the second posture (see FIG. 125), or the third posture (see FIG. 126). Flowing down at irregular times. Therefore, it is difficult to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball flows down the high profit flow path 77 where the profit given to the player (for example, expected ball output value, expected ball difference value) is high. This will prevent players from gaining unfair profits.

[Flow path defining member 84]
As shown in FIG. 124(A), FIG. 125, and FIG. 3 postures (see FIG. 126)), the game balls 99 flowing down the game ball rectification area 75 can be adjusted to low profits (described later) in which the profits provided to the player (for example, the expected ball output value, the expected ball difference value) are different. It is determined which of the flow path 76, the high profit flow path 77, and the medium profit flow path 78 the liquid is to be made to flow down. The flow path defining member 84 includes a first guiding portion 841, a second guiding portion 842, a third guiding portion 843, and a closing portion 844, and is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the front in the first attitude.

As shown in FIG. 124(A), the first guiding portion 841 is a V-shaped recess, and is positioned upward when the flow path defining member 84 is in the first attitude described below, and is positioned upwardly to prevent the low profit flow path 76 from forming. The game ball 99 is guided to. As shown in FIG. 125, the second guide section 842 guides the game ball 99 to the high profit channel 77 when the channel defining member 84 is in the second attitude described below. As shown in FIG. 126, the third guiding section 843 guides the game ball 99 to the medium profit flow path 78 when the flow path defining member 84 is in the third attitude described below. As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, when the flow path defining member 84 is operated between the second attitude and the third attitude, the closing part 844 is connected to the inlet of the low profit flow path 76, which will be described later. 762 is closed to prevent game balls 99 from being introduced into the low profit channel 76.

In addition, the flow path regulating member 84 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front of the game board 31 by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31, depending on the gaming state. By controlling the driving means by the MPU 41, any one of the first attitude shown in FIG. 124(A), the second attitude shown in FIG. 125, and the third attitude shown in FIG. 126 can be assumed.

The first posture of the flow path defining member 84 shown in FIG. 124(A) is the posture in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and the flow path defining member 84 is in an inactive steady state stopped at the first stop position. It's an attitude. When the flow path defining member 84 is in the first position, the first guiding portion 841 is located upward, while the closing portion 844 is located downward, and the introduction port 762 of the low profit flow path 76, which will be described later, is opened. Therefore, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the first posture, the game ball 99 flowing down from above is received by the first guide portion 841 which is a V-shaped recess, and is passed through the introduction port 762 into the low profit flow path 76. The game ball 99 is caused to flow down.

[Low profit flow path 76]
As shown in FIG. 124(A), the low profit flow path 76 includes a game ball introduced via the first guide portion 841 of the flow path defining member 84 when the flow path defining member 84 is in the first posture. A game ball 99 is guided to a distribution device 94 (first ball entry area) which will be described later. This low profit channel 76 is set to have the lowest profit (for example, expected ball payout value, expected ball difference value) provided to the player among the three profit channels 76 to 78.

The low profit flow path 76 penetrates the back flow path 761 provided on the back side of the game board 31 and the front and back of the game board 31 directly below the game ball rectification area 75 and above the back flow path 761. An inlet 762 that communicates with the back channel 761 at the top of the back channel 761, and an outlet 763 that penetrates the front and back of the game board 31 at the bottom of the back channel 761 and communicates with the back channel 761 at the bottom of the back channel 761. Be prepared. That is, the low profit flow path 76 allows the game ball 99 introduced from the introduction port 762 to flow down the back surface flow path 761 and is discharged from the discharge port 763. Note that the discharge port 763 is provided directly above a ball entry section 940 of a distribution device 94 to be described later, and game balls 99 discharged from the discharge port 763 enter the distribution device 94.

[Distribution device 94]
As shown in FIGS. 124(B) and 124(C), the sorting device 94 transfers the game balls 99 discharged from the discharge port 763 of the low profit channel 76 to the first channel 941 and the second channel 942. By distributing the game balls 99 to either of the general winning opening 943 and the out opening 944. In this sorting device 94, a sorting member 945 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the present embodiment, the distribution member 945 is maintained in an attitude tilted to the right, thereby distributing the game balls 99 to the first flow path 941 and placing the game balls 99 into the general prize opening 943 at the right operating position. (See FIG. 124(B)), the distribution member 945 is maintained in an attitude tilted to the left, thereby distributing the game balls 99 to the second flow path 942 and allowing the game balls 99 to enter the out port 944. By alternately switching the position of the distribution member 945 between the operating position (see FIG. 124(C)), the game balls 99 are distributed to either the general winning opening 943 or the out opening 944. The distribution member 945 is in an operating state in which it is alternately switched between a right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and a left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) at least in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). controlled by. Of course, the distribution member 945 may be in the operating state in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), the jackpot game state, and the small win game state. In other words, the distribution member 945 may be in an operating state at least in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and may be in an operating state at all times regardless of the gaming state.

Further, the distribution ratio between the first flow path 941 and the second flow path 942 by the distribution member 945 is set to 1:1 or approximately 1:1 by the MPU 41 controlling the driving means. That is, in the distribution device 94, the game balls 99 are distributed to the general winning hole 943 and the out hole 944 at a ratio of 1:1 or approximately 1:1. In the sorting device 94, the number of balls to be paid out (prize ball) when the game ball 99 enters the general prize opening 943 is set to one ball, for example, and when the game ball 99 enters the out opening 944. There is no prize ball. Therefore, in the sorting device 94, the expected ball output value when one game ball 99 is entered is 0.5 balls, and the expected ball difference value is -0.5 balls.

That is, by maintaining the first posture of the flow path defining member 84 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). In this case, the game ball 99 is always guided to the low profit flow path 76, and the game ball 99 is never guided to the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78. As a result, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 flows down the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78. The profit when the game ball 99 is not given to the player and the game ball 99 always flows down the low profit flow path 76 is the profit in the game. granted to the person. In this embodiment, the game balls 99 flowing down the low profit channel 76 are introduced into the sorting device 94 whose expected difference ball value is -0.5 balls. Therefore, if the game ball 99 is launched into the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the number of balls held by the player will decrease, so measures are taken to prevent so-called strategy hits. ing.

In addition, the distribution ratio between the first flow path 941 (general winning hole 943) and the second flow path 942 (out hole 944) in the distribution device 94, the prize balls of the general winning hole 943, etc. are determined according to the normal gaming state ( As long as the expected difference ball value when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the low probability mode) is less than or equal to 0 balls, it can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the configuration of the sorting device 94 can be adjusted appropriately as long as the expected difference ball value when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is 0 balls or less or less. For example, the game balls 99 may be distributed to the general prize opening 943 and the second channel 942 by appropriately setting the arrangement of the nails driven into the game board 31. Further, the sorting device 94 may be omitted, and in this case, the game balls 99 discharged from the discharge port 763 of the low profit channel 76 are discharged from the output port 318 to the back side of the game board 31.

[High profit flow path 77]
As shown in FIG. 125, the high profit channel 77 is a channel that allows the game ball 99 to enter the special prize opening 69, and is provided to the player among the three profit channels 76 to 78. The profit (for example, expected ball output value, expected ball difference value) is set to be the highest.

The second posture is a posture in which the flow path defining member 84 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle from a posture in which the flow path defining member 84 is upside down with respect to the first posture and stopped at a second stop position. . In this second attitude, the closing portion 844 of the flow path defining member 84 is positioned upward, so that the introduction port 762 of the low profit flow path 76 is closed, thereby preventing the game ball 99 from entering the low profit flow path 76. Balls are limited. That is, the high-profit flow path 77 is formed on the front side of the game board 31 when the flow path defining member 84 is in the second position, and special prizes can be won by causing the game ball 99 to flow down on the left side of the flow path defining member 84. This is a flow path that allows the game ball 99 to enter the opening 69.

Here, when the game balls 99 are entered into the special winning hole 69, the number of paid out game balls 99 (prize balls) is the largest among all the winning holes 313A, 313 to 315, 316C, 69, for example. The number is set to 15 as in the tenth embodiment described above. The high profit channel 77 allows the game balls 99 to enter the special prize opening 69, so that the profits provided to the players in the profit channels 76 to 78 (for example, the expected ball output value , expected difference ball value, prize ball) are set to be the highest.

However, as in the tenth embodiment described above, the prize balls in the special winning hole 69 may be within the range in which the number of game balls 99 can be expected to increase during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode). For example, the number is not limited to 15, but may be set to any other number.

[Medium profit flow path 78]
As shown in FIG. 126, the medium profit flow path 78 is a flow path that allows the game ball 99 to enter the general winning hole 313A, and is a flow path that allows the game ball 99 to enter the general winning hole 313A, and is a flow path that allows the game ball 99 to enter the general winning hole 313A. ball expected value) is set between the low profit flow path 76 and the high profit flow path 77.

The third posture is a posture in which the flow path defining member 84 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle from a posture in which the flow path defining member 84 is upside down with respect to the first posture and stopped at a third stop position. be. In this third position, the closing portion 844 of the flow path defining member 84 is positioned upward, so that the introduction port 762 of the low profit flow path 76 is closed, thereby preventing the game ball 99 from entering the low profit flow path 76. Balls are limited. That is, the medium profit flow path 78 is formed on the front side of the game board 31 when the flow path defining member 84 is in the third position, and the general winnings are created by letting the game ball 99 flow down on the right side of the flow path defining member 84. This is a flow path that allows the game ball 99 to enter the opening 313A.

The medium profit flow path 78 allows the game ball 99 to enter the general prize opening 313A, so that the profit provided to the player in the profit flow paths 76 to 78 (for example, the expected ball output value, the expected difference ball value) (value, prize ball) is set between the low profit channel 76 and the high profit channel 77. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of payouts (prize ball) of the game ball 99 when the game ball 99 enters the general winning hole 313A is set to one ball. That is, when the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit channel 78, the expected ball output value is 1 ball, and the expected difference ball value is 0 ball (100%). Therefore, when the game ball 99 is guided to the medium profit channel 78 in the right area of the game board 31, the ball held by the player is maintained. Of course, the number of game balls 99 paid out (prize balls) when the game balls 99 enter the general winning hole 313A should be less than the number of paid balls (prize balls) of the special winning hole 69, and is limited to one ball. However, it may be any other number, and the expected value of the ball when the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit channel 78 exceeds 1 ball (the expected value of the difference ball exceeds 0 ball (100%)). The number of balls held by the player may be increased.

In addition, when the variable prize opening 316C is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319C in a jackpot game or a small win game, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is placed in the flow path by the flow path defining member 84. When guided to the left side of the regulation member 84, the game ball 99 is not entered into the special winning hole 69, but the game ball 99 is entered into the variable winning hole 316C.

In this embodiment, a back channel 761 of the low profit channel 76 is formed on the back side of the game board 31, and a high profit channel 77 and a medium profit channel 78 are formed on the front side of the game board 31. In this way, by forming the back flow path 761 of the low profit flow path 76 on the back side of the game board 31, the space on the back side of the game board 31 is effectively used, so that the profit flow paths 76 to 78 Since the space required on the front side of the game board 31 for providing the profit channels 76 to 78 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in design for providing the profit channels 76 to 78 is improved. In addition, when the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78 are provided on the front side of the game board 31, the profit given to the player is higher than that of the low profit channel 76, and the high profit channel 78 is more interesting to the player. Since it is easy to visually grasp the channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Operation of flow path defining member 84]
Next, an outline of the operation of the flow path defining member 84 will be explained. Note that the specific procedure for controlling the flow path defining member 84 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131.

As shown in FIGS. 124 to 126, in this embodiment, the flow path defining member 84 is controlled according to the gaming state.

<Operation of flow path defining member 84 in normal gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 124, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the flow path defining member 84 is maintained in the non-operating state in the first attitude (see FIG. 124(A)). When the flow path defining member 84 is in the first attitude, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is rectified by the game ball rectifying area 75 and directed toward the first guide portion 841 of the flow path defining member 84. It flows down. When the flow path defining member 84 is in the first posture, the introduction port 762 of the low profit flow path 76 is in an open state, so that the game that has reached the first guide portion 841 of the flow path defining member 84 The balls 99 are guided into the low profit channel 76 one by one through the inlet 762. The game balls 99 introduced into the low profit channel 76 flow down the back channel 761 and are discharged from the discharge port 763, thereby entering the sorting device 94. It should be noted that the game balls 99 entered into the distribution device 94 are distributed to either the general winning opening 943 or the out opening 944.

In this way, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) is always directed to the low profit channel 76 without being guided to the high profit channel 77 or the medium profit channel 78. be guided by. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), when the game ball 99 flows down the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78, Profit, that is, the lowest profit when the game ball 99 always flows down the low profit channel 76 without being awarded to the player by the game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69 or the general winning hole 313A. Granted to the player. Therefore, the player is prevented from intentionally launching a game ball into the right side area of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode). In addition, since the sorting device 94 includes the out port 944, that is, a part of the game balls 99 entered into the sorting device 94 includes the ball entry port from which the game balls 99 are not put out, the normal game state is maintained. (low probability mode), it is now possible to easily and appropriately set the expected ball output value to 1 ball or less (difference ball expected value to 0 balls or less) when game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board. At the same time, it becomes possible to make the expected ball output value (difference ball expected value) more disadvantageous for the player. This makes it possible to further reduce the player's desire to launch the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board in the normal game state (low probability mode), thereby further reducing the player's desire to search for a winning strategy. becomes possible.

<Operation of the flow path regulating member 84 in the variable game state>
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), the MPU 41 activates the driving means for the flow path defining member 84, so that the flow path defining member 84 is in the second position and the second position. It is operated between three positions. That is, in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the MPU 41 regulates the flow path by controlling the driving means in a state where the closing part 844 is located on the upper side and the first guiding part 841 is located on the lower side. By alternately rotating the member 84 in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction, the flow path defining member 84 is operated between the second attitude and the third attitude. When the flow path regulating member 84 is in the second attitude, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is rectified by the game ball rectification area 75, and the inlet 762 of the low profit flow path 76 is By being closed by the closing portion 844 of the regulating member 84, the water is guided to the high profit channel 77 formed on the left side of the channel regulating member 84, without being guided to the low profit channel 76. On the other hand, when the flow path regulating member 84 is in the third attitude, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is rectified by the game ball rectification area 75, and the inlet 762 of the low profit flow path 76 is By being closed by the closing portion 844 of the regulating member 84, the water is guided to the medium profit channel 78 formed on the right side of the channel regulating member 84, without being guided to the low profit channel 76. Therefore, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 hit to the right is not guided to the low profit channel 76 by the flow path regulating member 84 being activated, and the game ball 99 is played in a high profit flow. It is divided into a channel 77 and a medium profit channel 78. As a result, the player can earn a lot of profit (prize balls) by having the game balls 99 distributed to the high profit flow path 77 and entering the special prize opening 69, so that the player's balls can be reduced. The game ball 99 is distributed to the medium profit flow path 78 and entered into the general winning hole 313A, thereby maintaining the number of balls. In addition, since the game ball 99 that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the variable probability gaming state is not guided to the low profit flow path 76, the player's A decrease in the number of game balls 99 is prevented. As a result, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), by performing the encouraged right-handed hit, the player's game balls 99 do not decrease and are distributed to the high profit flow path 77 and played into the special winning slot 69. This game has a new game feature in which the number of balls held by the player increases reliably as the ball 99 enters the ball.

In the present embodiment, the flow path defining member is configured such that more game balls 99 hit right in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) are distributed to the medium profit flow path 78 than to the high profit flow path 77. 84 is controlled. For example, the allocation ratio between the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78 is set to 1:2. As described above, in this embodiment, when the flow path defining member 84 is alternately switched between the second posture and the third posture in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the flow path regulating member 84 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31. By controlling the channel defining member 84 so that more game balls 99 are distributed to the medium profit channel 78 than to the high profit channel 77, the game balls 99 are distributed to the high profit channel 77. To suppress an excessive increase in the number of balls held by a player without giving the player too much profit. As a result, by suppressing an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) without overly stimulating the gambling spirit of the player, thereby creating a new gameplay experience. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a channel defining member 84 is provided for distributing the game balls 99 hit right in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode) into the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1:2). As a control method, for example, first, the flow path defining member 84 is set in the second position, this second position is maintained for a predetermined time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the flow path defining member 84 is set in the third position, and this third position is maintained. The flow path regulating member 84 is maintained in the second position for a specific time longer than the predetermined time, and after the specific time has elapsed, the second position for the predetermined time and the specific time are maintained in the same manner during the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode). It is conceivable to alternately switch between the third posture and the third posture. Then, depending on the ratio between the predetermined time and the specific time, it is possible to adjust the predetermined ratio between the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78.

Also, a flow path defining member 84 for distributing the game balls 99 hit right in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) into the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1:2). As a control method, it is also possible to make the rotational speed of the flow path defining member 84 different between clockwise rotation and counterclockwise rotation. For example, by setting the rotation speed of the flow path defining member 84 in the clockwise direction to be larger than the rotation speed of the flow path defining member 84 in the counterclockwise direction, the distribution ratio (proportion) to the medium profit flow path 78 can be set. ) can be set larger than the distribution ratio (ratio) to the high profit flow path 77. In other words, the channel defining member 84 sets the time percentage in which the game balls 99 can be distributed to the low profit channel 76 to be larger than the time percentage in which the game balls 99 can be distributed to the high profit channel 77. The allocation ratio (ratio) of the game balls 99 to the low profit channel 76 can be set to a large value, and the allocation ratio can be adjusted according to the previous time ratio.

In addition, the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 hit right in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) between the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78 is not limited to 1:2, but can be set to other ratios. Furthermore, it is possible to adjust the rate of increase in the number of balls held by the player by adjusting the distribution ratio between the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78.

<Operation of flow path regulating member 84 in winning game>
In a winning game (2R variable probability jackpot game, 2R normal jackpot game, or small winning game), the MPU 41 activates the driving means for the flow path regulating member 84, so that it is in the variable probability game state (high probability mode). Similarly, the flow path defining member 84 is brought into an operating state in which it is alternately switched between the second attitude and the third attitude. In the winning game, the variable prize opening 316C is opened, so the game balls 99 distributed to the left side area of the passage defining member 84 by the passage defining member 84 enter the variable winning opening 316C.

In addition, the number of balls paid out (prize balls) when the game ball 99 is entered into the variable winning hole 316C is set to be smaller than the prize ball of the special winning hole 69, and is set to one ball, for example. In this way, when the prize ball of the variable winning hole 316C is set to one ball, the number of game balls 99 (held by the player) of the player does not increase due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the variable winning hole 316C. On the other hand, when the prize ball of the general winning hole 313A is also set to one ball, the player's game ball 99 (balls held) does not increase even if the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 316C. Therefore, in this embodiment, an increase in the number of balls held by the player is not expected in the winning game, and the main increase in the number of game balls 99 is due to the game balls 99 entering the special winning hole 69 in the variable probability game state. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to lower the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above.

Of course, the prize ball of the variable winning hole 316C may be set not only to one ball but also to any other number of balls as long as the ratio of prizes and consecutive prizes are below a certain level. The number of balls may be set to a number that increases the number of balls held by the player in a jackpot game.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. I will mainly explain.

In this embodiment, a part of the main processing executed by the main controller 4 is different from the above-described first and tenth embodiments. Here, FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure executed by the main control device.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
As shown in FIG. 127, the main process of this embodiment differs from the first and tenth embodiments in that the jackpot game control process (step S5201) and the jackpot game control process (step S5202) are small win games. The control process (step S4903) is different from the above-described tenth embodiment, and the distribution member control process (step S5203) for the distribution member 945 of the distribution device 94 and the flow path defining member control process for the flow path defining member 84 This embodiment differs from the first and tenth embodiments described above in that (step S5204) is executed.

[Jackpot game control processing]
<Step S5201>
The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment, which has two variable winning holes 316A and 316B, in that it has one variable winning hole 316C. The jackpot game control process of the embodiment is different from the above-described tenth embodiment. In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the jackpot game control process of this embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above in that there is one variable winning opening 316C, but the 2R jackpot of the jackpot game in this embodiment ( The jackpot game control process of this embodiment is different from the jackpot game control process of the above-described first embodiment because it differs from the first embodiment described above in that only the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot are played.

Specifically, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the jackpot game start command, round game start command, round game end command, and ending are executed depending on the progress of the jackpot game. Commands such as a start command and a jackpot end command are set. In addition, in the jackpot game control process of this embodiment, regardless of the jackpot type, that is, regardless of whether it is a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, "2" is set as the number of round games at the start of the jackpot, In the opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 319C is executed.

[Small hit control processing]
<Step S5202>
The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment, which has two variable winning holes 316A and 316B, in that there is one variable winning hole 316C. The small winning game control process of the embodiment is basically the same as the small winning game control process of the tenth embodiment described above. Specifically, in the small winning game control process of this embodiment, in the small winning game control process of the above-described tenth embodiment described with reference to FIG. , and a process is executed in which the second opening/closing door 319B is replaced with the opening/closing door 319C.

[Distribution member control processing]
<Step S5203>
In the distribution member control process of this embodiment, the distribution device distributes the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) to either the general winning opening 943 or the out opening 944. Processing to control the distribution member 945 of 94 is executed. Here, FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in the main process of this embodiment.

In addition, in the following, an example will be explained in which the distribution member 945 is always operated regardless of the game state, but the distribution member 945 only needs to be operated at least in the normal game state, and it is not necessary to operate the distribution member 945 in the normal game state or in the winning game state. Whether or not to operate the distribution member 945 may be set as appropriate.

<Step S5301>
As shown in FIG. 128, in the distribution member control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the right-hand operation flag is set to on (step S5301). The right operating flag is a flag indicating whether or not the distribution member 945 is located at the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) where the distribution member 945 is maintained in an attitude tilted to the right. When neither the right operating flag nor the left operating flag is set to ON, the left operating position is set to ON in step S5304, which will be described later, and the distribution member 945 is maintained in an attitude tilted to the left. (See FIG. 124(C)) to the right operating position (See FIG. 124(B)) in which the posture is maintained tilted to the right. Then, if the right operating flag is set to ON (step S5301: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5306, and if the right operating flag is set to OFF (step S5301: No). , the process moves to step S5302.

<Step S5302>
If the right operating flag is set to OFF (Step S5301: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the left operating flag is set to ON (Step S5302). The left operating flag is a flag indicating whether or not the distributing member 945 is located at the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) where the distributing member 945 is maintained in an attitude tilted to the left; In step S5309, which will be described later, when the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) is maintained in an attitude tilted to the left, the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) is maintained in an attitude inclined to the left. Set to on. Then, if the left operating flag is set to ON (step S5302: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5312, and if the left operating flag is set to OFF (step S5302: No). , the process moves to step S5303.

<Steps S5303 to S5305>
If the left operating flag is set to OFF (step S5302: No), that is, if both the right operating flag and the left operating flag are set to OFF, the MPU 41 determines the current state of the distribution member 945. Regardless of the posture, the distributing member 945 is positioned at the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) where it is maintained in an inclined posture to the right (step S5303), and the right operating flag is set to on (step S5303). S5304). Then, the MPU 41 sets a right operation counter indicating the remaining time for positioning the distribution member 945 at the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)) (step S5305), and ends the distribution member control process.

<Steps S5306 and S5307>
If the right operation flag is set to ON (step S5301: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the right operation counter indicating the remaining time for positioning the distribution member 945 at the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)). (Step S5306), and it is determined whether the value of the right operation counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, whether it is the timing to switch the distribution member 945 to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)). (Step S5307). Then, when the value of the right operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5307: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to switch the distribution member 945 to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)), the MPU 41 performs processing. The process moves to step S5308. On the other hand, if the value of the right operation counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S5307: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the distribution member 945 to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)), the MPU 41 performs the distribution The member control process ends.

<Steps S5308 to S5311>
If the value of the right operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5307: Yes), that is, the distribution member 945 is moved from the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)) to the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)). If it is the switching timing, the MPU 41 switches the distribution member 945 from the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) to the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) (step S5308), and sets the left operating flag. It is set to on (step S5309). Then, the MPU 41 sets a left operation counter indicating the remaining time for positioning the distribution member 945 at the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) (step S5310), and sets the right operation flag to OFF (step S5310). S5311), the distribution member control process ends.

Here, there is no limit to the time the distribution member 945 is positioned at the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and the time at which the distributing member 945 is located at the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)). It is preferable to set the time to distribute the game balls 99 flowing down the path 76 and into the distribution device 94 to the general winning opening 943 and the out opening 944 at a ratio of 1:1 or approximately 1:1. That is, the time for positioning the distribution member 945 in the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and the time for positioning the distribution member 945 in the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) are the same or approximately the same. It is preferable to set the time to a time that allows game balls 99 to be alternately distributed one ball at a time to the general winning hole 943 and the out hole 944. As an example, both the time for positioning the distribution member 945 in the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) and the time for positioning the distribution member 945 in the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) are It is conceivable to set the time to be the same as the firing interval of the balls 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds).

<Steps S5312 and S5313>
If the left operation flag is set to ON (step S5302: Yes), the MPU 41 calculates the value of the left operation counter indicating the remaining time for positioning the distribution member 945 at the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)). (step S5312), and determines whether the value of the left operation counter after the subtraction is 0 or not, that is, the distribution member 945 is moved from the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124(C)). It is determined whether it is time to switch to (see B) (step S5313). Then, when the value of the left operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5313: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the distribution member 945 from the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124(C)). If it is the timing to switch to (see B)), the process moves to step S5314. On the other hand, if the value of the left operation counter after subtraction is not (step S5313: No), the MPU 41 moves the distribution member 945 from the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)). If it is not the timing to switch to (see), the distribution member control process ends.

<Steps S5314 to S5317>
If the value of the left operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5313: Yes), that is, the distribution member 945 is moved from the left operation position (see FIG. 124(C)) to the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)). If it is the timing to switch, the MPU 41 switches the distribution member 945 from the left operating position (see FIG. 124(C)) to the right operating position (see FIG. 124(B)) (step S5314), and sets the right operating flag. Set to on (step S5315). Then, the MPU 41 sets a right operation counter indicating the remaining time for positioning the distribution member 945 at the right operation position (see FIG. 124(B)) (step S5316), and sets the left operation flag to OFF (step S5316). S5317), the distribution member control process ends.

[Flow path regulating member control processing]
<Step S5204>
In the channel regulating member control process of this embodiment, the posture of the channel regulating member 84 is changed to the first posture in which the game ball 99 flows down the low profit channel 76 according to the gaming state (see FIG. 124(A)). , a second posture in which the game ball 99 flows down the high profit channel 77 (see FIG. 125), and a third posture in which the game ball 99 flows down the medium profit channel 78 (see FIG. 126). is executed. Here, FIGS. 129 to 131 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the flow path defining member control process executed in the main process of this embodiment.

In addition, in the following, the channel regulating member 84 is in the first position (see FIG. 124(A)) and is inactive in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), and in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the winning game Operation in which the flow path defining member 84 is switched between the second attitude (see FIG. 125) and the third attitude (see FIG. 126) in the state (2R definite variable jackpot game state, 2R normal jackpot game state, and small win game state) An example of a state will be explained.

<Step S5401>
As shown in FIG. 129, in the flow path defining member control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the flow path defining member operating flag is set to on (step S5401). The flow path defining member operating flag is a flag indicating whether or not the flow path defining member 84 is in an operating state in which it can be switched between the second attitude (see FIG. 125) and the third attitude (see FIG. 126). . In other words, when the flow path defining member operating flag is set to OFF, the flow path defining member 84 is in the first posture stopped at the first stop position (see FIG. 124(A)). It means something. The flow path defining member operating flag is set when the flow path defining member 84 starts operating (the flow path defining member 84 changes from the first attitude (first stop position) to the second attitude (second stop position)). (in the case of transition), it is set to on in step S5406 described later, and the operation of the flow path defining member 84 is terminated, and the flow path defining member 84 is placed in the first posture in which it is not activated (see FIG. 124(A)). (when returning to the first stop position), it is set to OFF in step S5431 of FIG. 131, which will be described later. Then, if the flow path defining member operating flag is set to ON (step S5401: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5408, and confirms that the flow path defining member operating flag is set to OFF. If there is one (step S5401: No), the process moves to step S5402.

<Step S5402>
When the flow path regulating member operating flag is set to OFF (step S5401: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) (step S5402). Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined by, for example, the high probability mode flag that is set to ON when shifting to the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. The judgment is made based on whether or not it is set to on. Then, when the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) (step S5402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5405, and when it is not in the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) (step S5402: No), the process proceeds to step S5405. The process moves to step S5403.

<Step S5403>
If it is not the high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) (step S5402: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game execution flag is set to on (step S5403). The jackpot game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, that is, whether or not it is in a jackpot game state, and is set to on in the jackpot game control process when a jackpot game is started. (For example, see step S5004 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 117 of the tenth embodiment described above). Then, when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S5403: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5405, and when the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5403: No), the process moves to step S5404.

<Step S5404>
If the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5403: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game execution flag is set to ON (step S5404). The small winning game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small winning game is being executed, that is, whether or not the small winning game is in a small winning game state. It is set to on (for example, see step S5104 in the small winning game control process in FIG. 121 of the tenth embodiment described above). Then, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5405 when the small winning game execution flag is set to ON (step S5404: Yes), and when the small winning game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5404: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5405. S5404: No), the flow path defining member control process ends.

<Steps S5405 to S5408>
If the mode is high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) (step S5402: Yes), if the jackpot game execution flag is set to on (step S5403: Yes), or if the small win game execution flag is set to on. (Step S5404: Yes), the MPU 41 rotates the flow path defining member 84 by a predetermined angle to operate the flow path defining member 84 to the second stop position (see FIG. 125), which is the second attitude. (Step S5405). In other words, when transitioning from the normal gaming state (low probability mode) to the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) or the winning gaming state (2R probability variable jackpot gaming state, 2R normal jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state), The operation of the flow path defining member 84 is started, and the flow path defining member 84 is placed in the second attitude (see FIG. 125), so that the game ball 99 starts flowing down into the high profit flow path 77. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the flow path defining member operating flag indicating that the flow path defining member 84 is in an operating state in which the flow path defining member 84 is switched between the second attitude (see FIG. 125) and the third attitude (see FIG. 126). (step S5406). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the second attitude operating flag indicating that the flow path defining member 84 is in operation and in the second attitude (see FIG. 125) (step S5407), and also sets the flow path defining member 84 to be in the second attitude (see FIG. 125). A second posture operation counter indicating the remaining time in the second posture is set (step S5408), and the flow path defining member control process ends.

Here, the initial value of the second attitude activation counter is set according to the time required to stop the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position (see FIG. 125) when the flow path defining member 84 is in the activated state. Ru. Further, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state, the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position is the same as the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the third stop position (see FIG. 126). It is set in relation to In this embodiment, for example, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state, the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position and the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the third stop position are set. is set to be 1:2 or approximately 1:2. That is, the setting is such that for one game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69, two game balls 99 enter the general winning hole 313A. The time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state is the same as the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position when the flow path defining member 84 is in the second posture (when the flow path defining member 84 is in the second position). time during which at least one game ball 99 can flow down into the high profit channel 77 with a high probability and at least one game ball 99 can enter the special prize opening 69. It is preferable to set it to . For example, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state, the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position is set to a time longer than the firing interval of the game balls 99 (for example, 0.6 seconds). is preferable, and more preferably set within a range of about 1 second to 2 seconds.

<Step S5409>
When the flow path defining member operating flag is set to ON (step S5401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) (step S5409). Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined by, for example, the high probability mode flag that is set to ON when shifting to the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. This is determined based on whether or not it is set to on. Then, if the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) (step S5409: Yes), the process moves to step S5412 in FIG. 130, and if it is not in the high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) (step S5409: No). , the process moves to step S5410.

<Step S5410>
If it is not the high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) (step S5409: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game execution flag is set to on (step S5410). The jackpot game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, that is, whether or not it is in a jackpot game state, and is set to on in the jackpot game control process when a jackpot game is started. (For example, see step S5004 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 117 of the tenth embodiment described above). Then, if the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S5410: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S5412 in FIG. 130, and if the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF ( Step S5410: No), the process moves to step S5411.

<Step S5411>
If the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S5410: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game execution flag is set to ON (step S5411). The small winning game execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small winning game is being executed, that is, whether or not the small winning game is in a small winning game state. It is set to on (for example, see step S5104 in the small winning game control process in FIG. 121 of the tenth embodiment described above). Then, when the small winning game execution flag is set to ON (step S5411: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S5412 in FIG. 130, and the small winning game execution flag is set to OFF. If so (step S5411: No), the process moves to step S5425 in FIG. 131.

<Step S5412>
When the channel regulating member operating flag is set to on (step S5401: Yes), and when the high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) is selected (step S5409: Yes), the jackpot game execution flag is set to on. (Step S5410: Yes), or when the small winning game execution flag is set on (Step S5411: Yes), as shown in FIG. 130, the MPU 41 sets the second posture operation flag to Whether it is set to ON or not, that is, the attitude (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is the second attitude (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) or the third attitude (third stop position) (see FIG. 126). (see step S5412). Then, the MPU 41 determines that when the second posture operating flag is set to ON (step S5412: Yes), that is, when the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is the second posture (second stop position). , the process moves to step S5413. On the other hand, when the second attitude operating flag is set to OFF (step S5412: No), that is, when the attitude (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is the third attitude (third stop position), the MPU 41 , the process moves to step S5419.

<Steps S5413 and S5414>
When the second posture operating flag is set to on (step S5412: Yes), that is, when the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is the second posture (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) , the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second attitude action counter (step S5413), and determines whether the value of the second attitude action counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, the attitude (position) of the flow path defining member 84. It is determined whether it is the timing to switch from the second attitude (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) to the third attitude (third stop position) (see FIG. 126) (step S5414). Then, when the value of the second posture operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5414: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 from the second posture (see FIG. 125) to the third posture. If it is the timing to switch to the posture (third stop position), the process moves to step S5415. On the other hand, if the value of the second posture operation counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S5414: No), the MPU 41 changes the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 from the second posture (second stop position) to the third posture. If it is not the timing to switch to the posture (third stop position), the flow path defining member control process ends.

<Steps S5415 to S5418>
If the value of the second posture operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5414: Yes), that is, the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is changed from the second posture (second stop position) to the third posture (third posture). When it is time to switch to the stop position), the MPU 41 rotates the flow path defining member 84 by a predetermined angle to operate from the second stop position, which is the second attitude, to the third stop position, which is the third attitude. Step S5415). As a result, the state where the game balls 99 are flowed down into the high profit flow path 77 is switched to the state where the game balls 99 are flowed down into the medium profit flow path 78 and the game balls 99 are entered into the general prize winning opening 313A. Then, the MPU 41 sets on the third posture operating flag indicating that the flow path defining member 84 is in operation and in the third posture (see FIG. 126) (step S5416), and also sets the flow path defining member 84 to the third posture (see FIG. 126). A third posture operation counter indicating the remaining time in the third posture is set (step S5417). Further, the MPU 41 sets the second posture operating flag to OFF (step S5418), and ends the flow path defining member control process.

Here, the initial value of the third attitude activation counter is set according to the time required to stop the flow path defining member 84 at the third stop position (see FIG. 126) when the flow path defining member 84 is in the activated state. Ru. Furthermore, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state, the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the third stop position is the same as the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position (see FIG. 125). It is set in relation to In this embodiment, as described above, for example, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state, the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the second stop position and the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the third stop position are determined. The ratio is set so that the ratio of the period of time to the period of time for stopping is 1:2 or approximately 1:2. In this case, the time for stopping the flow path defining member 84 at the third stop position when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state is The setting is twice or approximately twice the time for stopping at the second stop position, for example, from a range of 2 seconds to 4 seconds.

<Steps S5419 and S5420>
When the second posture operating flag is set to OFF (step S5412: No), that is, when the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is the third posture (third stop position) (see FIG. 126). , the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the third attitude action counter (step S5419), and determines whether the value of the third attitude action counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, the attitude (position) of the flow path defining member 84. It is determined whether it is the timing to switch from the third attitude (third stop position) to the second attitude (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) (step S5420). Then, when the value of the third posture operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S5420: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 from the third posture (third stop position) to the third posture operation counter. If it is the timing to switch to the second posture (second stop position), the process moves to step S5421. On the other hand, if the value of the third posture operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S5420: No), the MPU 41 changes the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 from the third posture (third stop position) to the second posture. If it is not the timing to switch to the posture (second stop position), the flow path defining member control process ends.

<Steps S5421 to S5424>
If the value of the third posture operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S5420: Yes), that is, the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is changed from the third posture (third stop position) (see FIG. 126) When it is time to switch to the second posture (second stop position) (see FIG. 125), the MPU 41 rotates the flow path defining member 84 by a predetermined angle to switch from the third stop position to the second posture. It is operated to the second stop position (step S5421). As a result, the state where the game balls 99 are flowed down into the medium profit flow path 78 is switched to the state where the game balls 99 are flowed down into the high profit flow path 77 and the game balls 99 are entered into the special prize opening 69. Then, the MPU 41 sets on the second posture operating flag indicating that the flow path defining member 84 is in operation and in the second posture (step S5422), and also sets the second posture operating flag indicating that the flow path defining member 84 is in the second posture. A second posture operation counter indicating the remaining time is set (step S5423). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the third posture operating flag to OFF (step S5424), and ends the flow path defining member control process.

<Step S5425>
When the flow path regulating member operating flag is set to on (step S5401: Yes), the high probability mode (variable probability game state) is not set (step S5409: No), and the jackpot game execution flag is set to off. (Step S5410: No), and when the small winning game execution flag is set to OFF (Step S5411: No), as shown in FIG. 131, the MPU 41 sets the second posture operation flag to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S5425). That is, when it is determined that the MPU 41 is not in the high probability mode, jackpot game, or small win game, but is in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the posture (position) of the flow path defining member 84 is set to the second position. It is determined whether the position is the posture (second stop position) (see FIG. 125) or the third posture (third stop position) (see FIG. 126). Then, when the second posture operating flag is set to ON (step S5425: Yes), that is, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the second posture (when stopped at the second stop position) ), the process moves to step S5426. On the other hand, when the second posture operating flag is set to OFF (step S5425: No), that is, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the third posture (when stopped at the third stop position) ), the process moves to step S5428.

<Steps S5426 and S5427>
If the second posture operating flag is set to ON (step S5425: Yes), that is, if the flow path defining member 84 is in the second posture (stopped at the second stop position), the MPU 41 The second posture operation counter is cleared (step S5426), the second posture operation flag is set to OFF (step S5427), and the process proceeds to step S5430.

<Steps S5428 and S5429>
If the second posture operating flag is set to OFF (step S5425: No), that is, if the flow path defining member 84 is in the third posture (stopped at the third stop position), the MPU 41 The third posture operation counter is cleared (step S5428), the third posture operation flag is set to OFF (step S5429), and the process proceeds to step S5430.

<Steps S5430 and S5431>
When the process of step S5427 or S5429 is completed, the MPU 41 returns the flow path defining member 84 to the first stop position (first posture) (see FIG. 124(A)) (step S5430), and The operating flag is set to OFF (step S5431), and the flow path defining member control process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the posture of the flow path defining member 84 according to the gaming state (normal gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the profit flow channels with different profits given to the player are provided. It becomes possible to cause the game ball 99 to flow down to 76, 77, and 78. Since the flow path defining member 84 is a movable object that can change its posture, it can be formed smaller than a non-movable object such as the croon device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above. Therefore, the space provided on the game board 31 can be set small. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 flows down the low profit flow path 76 due to the flow path defining member 84 being inactive, and When it is activated, it flows down the high profit flow path 77 or the medium profit flow path 78. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the flow path in which the game ball 99 moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the flow path defining member 84 is in an inactive state or an activated state. become.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode) can generate a plurality of profit streams by making the flow path defining member 84 inactive. It flows down the low profit channel 76, which has the lowest expected profit among the channels 76, 77, and 78. As a result, the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is released at a timing other than during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), that is, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). Since it is completely excluded that the game ball 99 enters the special winning hole 69, no one can receive an unfair advantage by entering the game ball 99 into the special winning hole 69 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode). This will prevent you from becoming a target of attacks that attempt to do so.

Further, in this embodiment, a back channel 761 of the low profit channel 76 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and a high profit channel 77 and a medium profit channel 78 are provided on the front side of the game board 31. That is, in this embodiment, two of the three profit channels 76 to 79 are provided on the front side of the game board 31, and one of the three profit channels 76 to 79 is provided on the front side of the game board 31. A flow path 76 is provided on the back side of the game board 31. As a result, the space on the back side of the game board 31 is effectively used, so the space secured on the front side of the game board 31 can be reduced in order to provide the multiple profit flow paths 76 to 79. The degree of design freedom for providing the passages 76 to 79 is improved. In addition, when the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78 are provided on the front side of the game board 31, the profit given to the player is higher than that of the low profit channel 76, and the high profit channel 78 is more interesting to the player. Since it is easy to visually grasp the channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 flows down the low profit channel 76 and enters the sorting device 94, the expected ball output value is 1 ball or less (0.5 ball in this embodiment). Set. In this way, by setting the expected ball output value when the game ball 99 flows down the low profit channel 76 to 1 ball or less (0.5 ball in this embodiment), the normal gaming state (low probability mode ), the expected ball output value when the game ball 99 is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 is set to 1 ball or less. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the expected difference ball value becomes 0 balls or less, and the number of balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, measures have been taken to prevent so-called strategic attacks.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the flow path defining member 84 is switched between the second attitude and the third attitude in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 flows down the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78, and the ratio of the game balls 99 flowing down the medium profit flow path 78 is higher than the ratio of the game balls 99 flowing down the high profit flow path 77. (in this embodiment, high profit flow path: low profit flow path = 1:2). As described above, in this embodiment, when the flow path defining member 84 is in the operating state in which it is alternately switched between the second attitude and the third attitude in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the right side of the game board 31 The game ball 99 launched into the area flows down either the high profit channel 77 or the medium profit channel 78. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is launched into the right side area of the game board 31 in the variable probability game state (high probability mode), the player is not disadvantaged by the game ball 99 flowing down the low profit channel 76. The player can be given a profit when the game ball 99 flows down the high profit flow path 77 and the medium profit flow path 78, and it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player in a variable probability gaming state. In addition, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 while the flow path regulating member 84 is in the operating state, the medium profit flow is lower than the rate at which the game ball 99 flows down the high profit flow path 77. By setting the rate at which the game ball 99 flows down the high-profit flow path 77 to be higher, the player's ball holding can be reduced without giving the player too much profit from the game ball 99 flowing down the high-profit flow path 77. can suppress excessive increases in As a result, by suppressing an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player, the player's desire for gambling is not excessively stimulated, and by increasing the number of balls held by the player in the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode), the player's interest in the game can be increased. It becomes possible to improve.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the flow path defining member 84 is in the first posture of the inactive state, so that the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 is The ball can enter the sorting device 94 and always flows through the low profit channel 76, which has the lowest expected profit among the plurality of profit channels 76 to 78, and plays the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78. The attitude of the flow path defining member 84 is controlled so that the ball 99 does not flow down. As described above, in this embodiment, the flow path defining member 84 is maintained in the first posture of the non-operating state in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), so that the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode) When the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area, the game ball 99 must flow down the low profit channel 76 and be guided to the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78. There isn't. As a result, when the game ball 99 is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the game ball 99 flows down the high profit channel 77 and the medium profit channel 78. The lowest profit when the game ball 99 always flows down the low profit flow path 76 without being given to the player (for example, the prize ball due to the game ball 99 entering the special winning hole 69 or the general winning hole 313A). Profit is given to the player. Therefore, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode), the player is appropriately prevented from intentionally launching the game ball 99 into the right side area of the game board 31, that is, the player is prevented from attempting a winning shot.

Further, in this embodiment, a game ball dispersion area 74 is provided above the flow path defining member 84 to disperse (randomly flow down) the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31. A game ball rectifying area 75 is provided between the game ball dispersing area 74 and the flow path defining member 84 to rectify the game balls 99 flowing down the game ball dispersing area 74 and allowing the game balls 99 to pass one by one. As described above, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are dispersed in multiple directions in the game ball dispersion area 74 and flow down, and are rectified in the game ball rectification area 75 so that the game balls 99 are flown down one ball at a time. It flows down toward the flow path defining member 84 at irregular timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 that are launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are supplied to the flow path defining member 84 one by one at irregular timing, and the player Flows down at irregular timing through any of the profit channels 76 to 78, which have different profits. Therefore, it is difficult to launch the game ball 99 at the timing when the game ball 99 flows down the high profit channel 77 where the profit given to the player is high. Obtaining is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to tenth embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters in the first to eleventh embodiments described above can be made. It is also possible to combine.

[Other variations]
In each of the above embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or made of steel (carbon It may be made of metal such as steel, cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12, but the gaming machine 10 The inner frame 12 may be locked with respect to the front frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and the back pack unit 13 may be locked with respect to the inner frame 12 with a locking means such as a single cylinder lock. A locking means that makes it impossible to open the front frame 11 and a locking means that makes it impossible to open the back pack unit 13 with respect to the inner frame 12 may be provided separately. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the right end portion of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front on the front frame 11. . Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the left end of the back pack unit 13 when viewed from the front is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the right end of the back pack unit 13 when viewed from the front is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12. You may. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the game board 31 included in the game machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the gaming machine 10 has adopted a configuration in which the upper tray 23 and the lower tray 24 are provided, but a configuration in which the lower tray 24 is omitted and only the upper tray 23 is adopted is adopted. Good too. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a configuration was adopted in which the firing handle 22 was provided on the right side when viewed from the front, but a configuration in which the firing handle 22 was provided at other parts such as the left side when viewed from the front was adopted. You can. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of firing handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the firing handles 22 are provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front, may be adopted. Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, the touch sensor 21a that can detect whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the firing handle 22) is provided. Although a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is provided in the firing handle 22 is adopted, a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted may be adopted as the firing handle 22. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, the game ball can be fired using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, when the firing handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, for example, one game ball is generated every 0.6 seconds (100 game balls per minute). Although the configuration is such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired per minute, it may also be configured such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired per minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) per minute. The configuration may be such that a game ball of 1 is fired. Alternatively, the game ball may be ejected when the ejection handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. Alternatively, the game ball may be launched one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the speaker 26 is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker 26 is adopted. Good too. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the game ball has brought with it to the earphone jack, the game ball can listen to the sound of the game machine 10 that it is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding game machines 10. It becomes possible to fully enjoy it. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts variable display based on the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is used. Although a configuration including a 7-segment display device is adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and/or a second special symbol, other configurations may be adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol. Alternatively, a configuration in which the display devices are arranged in a matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a configuration is adopted in which two LED lamps are provided as means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of a game ball through the through gate 317. , Other configurations can be adopted as means for displaying normal patterns, such as a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. A configuration including a display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means such as the pattern display section 341 capable of displaying decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , an LED display device, a plasma display device, a rotating drum display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a combination of two or more of these devices may be employed. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, combinations of two or more of these, etc. can be employed. For example, as the decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, or a combination of two or more of these may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. When a configuration in which the number of decorative symbols is one pattern row is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which there are two or more rows of decorative symbols, for example, a configuration is adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line (valid line). Good too. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory such as the opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes the big winning opening such as the variable winning opening 316. is provided with a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the plate-like member rotates forward about the rotating shaft to open the grand prize opening, and the game board 31 can be slid in the front and back direction. A structure in which the grand prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-like member, a structure in which the grand prize opening is opened and closed by the feather member rotating in the left-right direction (clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction), etc. may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a so-called loop constant changing machine has been described, but for example, a game such as a variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game with the condition of winning a V prize in a jackpot game such as a V-ST machine. In a gaming machine that shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player, a V winning hole is provided in the big winning hole such as the variable winning hole 316. The V winning hole may be able to win at all times when the big winning hole is opened, but it may also be configured to be opened when a specific condition is met. The specific condition includes, for example, execution of a specific round game (for example, a first round game, a final round game). In addition, when the V-winning hole is configured to be opened when a specific condition is met, the V-winning hole is provided with a movable member that can open and close the V-winning hole, and the operation of the movable member is controlled. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the prize opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the V winning hole is opened when a specific condition is met, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning hole is closed when a game ball enters the V winning hole or after a certain period of time has elapsed. . In addition, a plurality of grand prize openings may be provided, and for example, a grand prize opening provided with a V winning hole and a grand winning hole not provided with a V winning hole may be provided separately. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, there are various ordinary electric accessories such as the electric accessory 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of the game ball into the starting winning hole such as the second winning hole 315. For example, a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened left and right in a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory (so-called electric chew), or a rotating shaft extending approximately horizontally below a plate-shaped member. The starting prize opening is opened and closed by the plate-like member that is slidable in the front and back direction of the game board 31. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the starting prize opening is opened and closed by rotating the feather member in the left-right direction (clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the number of prize balls set in each winning hole (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, variable winning hole 316, etc.) is shown as an example. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each winning hole, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

[Summary of the invention]
Hereinafter, a summary of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals may be added to the description for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period. be done. This allows the player to specify specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and also allows the player to recognize predetermined numerical information by displaying all specific numerical information. be. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and further guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix A1', characterized in that:

[Appendix A3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix A1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A2' or A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information using a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4', special information is displayed by a portion of the plurality of display areas of the display means in which specific information is displayed. In other words, the special information display area is shared with the specific information display area. Thereby, the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display means, so the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with a display means for displaying specific information and special information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6', the specific information and special information are displayed as images on the image display means. Therefore, there are many options for image types and display modes to be displayed as specific information and special information, and specific information and special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in specifying or guessing specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine according to appendix A6', wherein the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decoration pattern) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7', specific information and special information are displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the image display means can be used to display a specific image. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that indicates or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8', when specific conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a specified period during which predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is the transition determination. The period is set to indicate or clarify the results of the Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information together with the migration determination result. For example, when a variable display image of a symbol suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is also possible to cause the image display means to display specific information at the same time. This makes it possible to increase interest in suggesting or clarifying the result of migration determination by displaying specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9', a specific condition can be established upon passing through a specific area, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition is satisfied. This allows you to enjoy more about whether or not certain conditions are met. Moreover, specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix A10']
It further includes a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is launched.
The gaming machine according to appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the outlet (373).

[Appendix A11']
It further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the game ball,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine according to appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) allows a ball to enter in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A10 to A12, specific information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second outlet into which the ball can enter in a special game. Display content is controlled. Therefore, in a special game where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The game machine according to appendix A12', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning hole (316) to pass through.

In the game machine according to appendix A13', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which a game ball that has entered the variable winning hole can pass in a special game, the display means The display content of specific information displayed on the screen is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed through the second ejection port by hitting the game ball into the game area and making the game ball win the variable prize opening. Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill by simply playing the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game balls entering the second ejection port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine due to the possibility of a difference in skill. Prevented.

[Appendix A14']
the third outlet (378) through which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) can pass, and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a sorting means (37) for sorting the game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) to either the second outlet (373) or the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. This gives you the gameplay of playing the game. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game balls in the distribution means as to whether or not specific conditions are met.

[Appendix A15']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A16', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the transition determination means has a lower probability of determining that the transition will be made to the special gaming state than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even specific numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A15' or A16', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15' to A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix A19']
The special gaming state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is entered;
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix A18', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A18' or A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value imparting game.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A20', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the specified period is set to the execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set as the execution period of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying specific numerical information, and further guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the special game execution period (regular period). The interest in playing games is improved.

[Appendix A22']
The special game includes a value-giving game (open/close execution mode) that includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value-granting game (open/close execution mode). have,
The gaming machine according to appendix A21', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A23']
The display control means (51) displays at least specific information (numbers) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to appendix A21' or A22', wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23', if a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period of time, and after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player enjoys the game by focusing on specific information displayed on the display means. I can do it. This improves the interest of the game during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The special gaming state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is entered;
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transitioned to when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A23', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start of the predetermined period is a special game to be executed in the special gaming state that is transitioned when the result of transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special gaming state. Set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is transferred to a first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first win, the end period is set for the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which specific information indicating specific numerical information is presented to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of winning a series of games, it is also possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning of a series of games after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information regarding specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed. The convenience of identifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that starts within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
Supplementary note A23' or supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The gaming machine described in A24'.

The gaming machine according to appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game that starts within a predetermined period. That is, when special games are started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as when winning consecutive games, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Moreover, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods within a given period, it is determined whether a specific condition is met for each specific period, and if a specific condition is met in that specific period, each specific period elapses. Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and to focus on specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the special game. It becomes possible to improve.

[Appendix A26']
The special game includes a value-giving game (open/close execution mode) that includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value-giving game,
The specific period includes a period in which the value imparting game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A25', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed from. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be focused on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be focused on the content of specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is completed. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively utilized to provide a gameplay feature in which specific information is displayed, and the game can be made more interesting because it is possible to draw attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that a game ball passes through a specific area (373) and that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) to win a display lottery that is executed as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A26', wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A27', specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area. In this way, by performing a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it is possible to determine whether or not you have won the display lottery (whether specific information is displayed or not). Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the following points, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty level and variation in displaying specific information). As a result, various playability can be imparted to the display of specific information depending on the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3', characterized in that the game machine displays the following.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, it is possible to specify all the specific numerical information. can. Further, it is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information by specifying all specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period, it is expected that many specific conditions will be met in a predetermined period. You can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine according to appendix A28', wherein the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29', the display means is an information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the content displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, and therefore can easily specify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
A supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in A29'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying a plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which information out of a plurality of individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30', wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A31', each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information, so that specific numerical information is specified or estimated based on the correspondence. becomes possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which individual information among the plurality of pieces of individual information will be displayed when specific conditions are met.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30' or A31', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A32', the information display means includes a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with an information display means for displaying specific information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30' or appendix A31', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image that can specify or infer specific numerical information, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. Therefore, specific numerical information can be specified or inferred in various patterns depending on the aspect of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. This improves the gameplay of specifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A34']
According to appendix A33', the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decoration pattern) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A34', a specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the image display means can be used to display a specific image. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix A35']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A29' to A34', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A35', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This allows all or part of the specific information to be displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or alphabets, making it easy to identify or infer specific numerical information, and without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy guessing.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A29', characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A36', specific information is displayed on the individual display section corresponding to specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section on which specific information is displayed is defined for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display section (351 to 356) in one of two modes: a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix A36', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A37', the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes: a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily specified depending on the form of the individual display section. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to appendix A36' or A37', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36' to A38', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A38' and appendix A39', the information display means can be formed easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
display order determining means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Furthermore,
The display control means (51) controls the display means (51) based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. 35, 39, 341), the gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this manner, the display order in which the specific information is displayed is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of the specific information from becoming constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A41', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine is powered on. By the way, power to gaming machines is often turned on before the opening of the gaming parlor. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined every business day by determining the display order of the specific information when the gaming machine is powered on. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and from making the display of the specific information monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (setting value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the special game. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the value imparting game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period. an operating means (21) operated by a player;
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) are displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, by operating the operating means during the special period, the player can cause the second display means to display the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period. Therefore, if a player wants to check the display content of specific information displayed during a specified period, for example, if he has forgotten the display content, or if there is a change in player, he may check the display content during the special period. I can do it. As a result, the player can identify or infer specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine in accordance with the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether

[Appendix A47']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A47', the special period in which the display contents during the specified period can be checked is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully check the displayed content at his or her own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of different prescribed periods,
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A46' or appendix A47', characterized in that at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A49']
The display content display control means (51) causes the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period based on the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A48', characterized in that the display content selected by the second display means (35, 39, 341) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A50']
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A49', characterized in that two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machines according to appendices A48' to A50', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one display content among the display contents of a plurality of specific information displayed in a plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display content selected by the player from the display content of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the content to be presented on the second display means from among the display content of a plurality of pieces of specific information, the player can confirm the display content that he or she desires. As a result, it is possible to effectively check the displayed contents while avoiding checking the displayed contents such as previously checked information or information with a small amount of information, so that the displayed contents can be checked efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be checked at once, so that the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A46' to A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine according to appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. .

The gaming machines according to Appendix A51' and Appendix A52' are provided with a first display means that is displayed during the prescribed period and a second display means that is displayed during the special period, and different displays are displayed during each of the prescribed period and the special period. Specific information is displayed depending on the means. Therefore, in the prescribed period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, standby state), the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented by a second display means such as a variable display image display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so when the variable display image display means is made to present the display content of specific information in a specified period, visibility is improved. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as performances and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by making the variable display image display means present the display contents of the specific information in the specified period, the display contents of the specific information in the specified period can be displayed in a variable manner by the same operations as those for making various settings. It becomes possible to display the image on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience in displaying the display content of specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix A53', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed on the screen.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix A54' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix A55']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix A53', characterized in that a display is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A55', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A56']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to appendix A56', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A57', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order, or to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-set value. It also becomes possible. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders include a first display in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority. including the order;
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display has the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. The order is easy to choose. That is, other than the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information that has the lowest advantage determination probability and is most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last specific information is displayed, the probability of an advantageous judgment that is the most disadvantageous to the player and the probability that is more advantageous to the player are displayed. The possibility of an advantageous judgment probability remains. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the probability of an advantageous determination is the most disadvantageous for the player, which makes it possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from ending early, and to reduce the operating rate of the gaming machine. The decline can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of favorable determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability with the highest probability;
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest priorities,
The second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order (including 100%). The gaming machine according to appendix A57', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order has a lower priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. is likely to be selected. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most disadvantageous for the player, and the game on the gaming machine may be ended early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of gaming machines. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the highest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that it is not only the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player, but also the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, because the priority of the two specific pieces of information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, the advantages for the player are contradictory. Since it becomes difficult to determine until the end which of the two favorable judgment probabilities it is, it becomes possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability having a higher probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. including a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the probability;
The third display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A60', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate for the third display order to be high, the player is given a possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision is higher than the actual first probability of an advantageous decision just before the player grasps the first advantageous decision probability. It can make you look forward to it. Thereby, the user can enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantageous determination probability is high until just before the first advantageous determination probability is grasped.

[Appendix A61']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A61', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate of the fourth display order to be high, specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability whose probability is lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is displayed immediately before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous determination probability becomes specific information indicating the actual first advantageous determination probability and specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower in probability than the first advantageous determination probability. As a result, in the end, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the first advantageous judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so when the set value is grasped. pleasure is improved.

[Appendix A62']
Supplementary Notes A1' to A3 further comprising display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the prescribed period. A gaming machine described in any of '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A62', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is performed as a benefit for the player who played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This can prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A62', wherein a period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A63', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during a waiting period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the waiting period, other players may take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify or guess specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent specific information from being obtained.

[Appendix A64']
The display restriction means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period is limited. The gaming machine described in appendix A62' or appendix A63'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A64', display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during periods other than the specified period. In other words, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify specific numerical information based on the display history. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for making inferences.

[Appendix A65']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. , when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the display means (35, 39, 341), the gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a first display order when a first specific condition is met, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means when a second specific condition is met. The specific information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information is set depending on the type of specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and the plurality of specific numerical information can be prevented from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from quickly grasping that the advantageous determination probability is low when the advantageous determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantageous judgment probability is low, the game on the gaming machine is prevented from being prematurely ended, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix A66']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is such that second predetermined numerical information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix A65', characterized in that the gaming machine is stored in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A66', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. This includes storing numerical information. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, a display order is defined based on predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a defined period according to the display order. That is, since it is possible to set the display order in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67']
If the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix A65' or appendix A66', characterized in that the gaming machine displays a display.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A67', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A68']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A68', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69']
further comprising a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where visibility by the player is restricted;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in (45). That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position that is visible to the player during a prescribed period. displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It's possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and further guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, by displaying predetermined information on the second display means provided in a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted, the player can receive a predetermined numerical value based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. Information can be prevented from being grasped. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped at the gaming hall side during non-business hours. Thereby, the gaming hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, the predetermined numerical information after the change. Since the predetermined information indicating the value can be confirmed, the task of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70']
Further comprising a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A70', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. It is displayed on a second display means provided on the side. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily restrict the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so that it can be opened and closed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A70', characterized in that the second display means (45) is provided at a position where the second display means (45) is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A71', a second display means is provided on the back side of the gaming board that is openably and closably fixed to the frame. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visible to the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. You can check this at the game hall. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted by the simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix A70' or appendix A71', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the game machine according to appendix A72', a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be set by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. You can choose. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even if the game board is opened in the event of a jam in the game machine, the predetermined information will be displayed to the player through the second display means. It is possible to reliably prevent this information from being grasped by someone else.

[Appendix B1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1', since a specific condition can be established upon passing through a specific area, the player can easily understand that the specific condition is satisfied. This allows you to enjoy more about whether or not certain conditions are met. Moreover, specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix B1', characterized in that:

[Appendix B3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix B1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2' or appendix B3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4']
It further includes a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is launched.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1' to B3', wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix B5']
It further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the game ball,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine according to appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) allows a ball to enter in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B4' to Appendix B6', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second ejection port into which the ball can enter in a special game, the specific information displayed on the display means is displayed. The display content of information is controlled. Therefore, in a special game where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The game machine according to appendix B6', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning hole (316) to pass therethrough.

In the game machine according to appendix B7', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole can pass in the special game, the display means The display content of specific information displayed on the screen is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed through the second ejection port by hitting the game ball into the game area and making the game ball win the variable prize opening. Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill by simply playing the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game balls entering the second ejection port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine due to the possibility of a difference in skill. Prevented.

[Appendix B8']
the third outlet (378) through which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) can pass, and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a sorting means (37) for sorting the game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) to either the second outlet (373) or the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix B7', further comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix B8', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of game balls by the distribution means. This gives you the gameplay of playing the game. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game balls in the distribution means as to whether or not specific conditions are met.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1' to B8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix B9', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix B10' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix C1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
At least the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing if a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the above;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, the player can enjoy specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (part of the numerical values) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1', characterized in that it is possible to display the information on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix C3']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1', characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of C3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', in the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that in the second gaming state, the transition determination result is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even specific numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C4', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix C7']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix C6', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix C8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6' or C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix C9', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix C10' is a conventional slot machine in which all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented. Different from the machine.

[Appendix D1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1', when specific conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set as the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying specific numerical information, and further guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the special game execution period (regular period). The interest in playing games is improved.

[Appendix D2']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (part of the numerical values) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix D1', characterized in that it is possible to display the information on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix D1', characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game includes a value-adding game (open/close execution mode) that includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value-adding game (open/close execution mode). have,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix D4', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5']
The display control means (51) displays at least specific information (numbers) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5', if a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period of time, and after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player enjoys the game by focusing on specific information displayed on the display means. I can do it. This improves the interest of the game during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined period.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transitioned to when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix D5', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start of the predetermined period is a special game to be executed in the special gaming state that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special gaming state. Set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is transferred to a first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first win, the end period is set for the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which specific information indicating specific numerical information is presented to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of winning a series of games, it is also possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning of a series of games after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information regarding specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed. The convenience of identifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix D7']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that starts within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
Supplementary note D5' or supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The gaming machine described in D6'.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game that starts within a predetermined period. That is, when special games are started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as when winning consecutive games, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Moreover, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods within a given period, it is determined whether a specific condition is met for each specific period, and if a specific condition is met in that specific period, each specific period elapses. Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and to focus on specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the special game. It becomes possible to improve.

[Appendix D8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The specific period includes a period in which the value imparting game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D7', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed from. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be focused on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be focused on the content of specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is completed. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively utilized to provide a gameplay feature in which specific information is displayed, and the game can be made more interesting because it is possible to draw attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game.

[Appendix D9']
The specific condition is that a game ball passes through a specific area (373) and that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) to win a display lottery that is executed as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D8', wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D9', specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area. In this way, by performing a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it is possible to determine whether or not you have won the display lottery (whether specific information is displayed or not). Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the following points, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty level and variation in displaying specific information). As a result, various playability can be imparted to the display of specific information depending on the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D9', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix D10', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix D11' is a conventional slot machine in which all of a plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented. Different from the machine.

[Appendix E1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types of numerical information are stored in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. As a result, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific information. . Further, it is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information by specifying all specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, since specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are met in a predetermined period, it is expected that a large number of specific conditions will be met in a predetermined period, but depending on the number of specific conditions that are met, You can pay attention to it and enjoy the progress of the game.

[Appendix E2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix E1', characterized in that:

[Appendix E3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix E1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information, as described in any one of appendices E1' to E3'. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the content displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, and therefore can easily specify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
Supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in E4'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying a plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which information out of a plurality of individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5', wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6', each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information, so specific numerical information is specified or estimated based on the correspondence. becomes possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which individual information among the plurality of pieces of individual information will be displayed when specific conditions are met.

[Appendix E7']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7', the information display means includes a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with an information display means for displaying specific information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or E6', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image that allows specifying or inferring specific numerical information, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. Therefore, specific numerical information can be specified or inferred in various patterns depending on the aspect of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. This improves the gameplay of specifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix E9']
According to appendix E8', the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a symbol (decoration symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E9', a specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the image display means can be used to display a specific image. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E5' to E9', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E10', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This allows all or part of the specific information to be displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or alphabets, making it easy to identify or infer specific numerical information, and without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy guessing.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix E4', characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11', specific information is displayed on the individual display section corresponding to specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section on which specific information is displayed is defined for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display section (351 to 356) in one of two modes: a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix E11', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12', the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes: a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily specified depending on the form of the individual display section. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13']
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or E12', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, annular, matrix, or staggered manner.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11' to E13', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendices E13' and E14', the information display means can be formed easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E14', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E16', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the transition determining means has a lower probability of determining that the transition will be made to the special gaming state than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix E17']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or E16', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix E19']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix E18', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can obtain more specific information for specifying specific numerical information, as well as obtain more specific numerical information as the number of consecutive games increases. It is possible to obtain the benefit that it becomes easier to infer or identify.

[Appendix E20']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix E20', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E20', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E21', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix E21', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E22', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix E22' is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix F1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information (non-set value) among the plurality of types of numerical information is ) display control means (51) that causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating
display order determining means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) controls the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Display the specific information on (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this manner, the display order in which the specific information is displayed is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of the specific information from becoming constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1', characterized by the following.

[Appendix F3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine is powered on. By the way, power to gaming machines is often turned on before the opening of the gaming parlor. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined every business day by determining the display order of the specific information when the gaming machine is powered on. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and from making the display of the specific information monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (setting value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the value-adding game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Furthermore,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F8', characterized in that the game machine displays the information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix F10']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', in the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that in the second gaming state, the transition determination result is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or F12', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix F15']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix F14', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix F16']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F16', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F16', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F17', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge the height. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix F17', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix F18' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix G1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. first display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on first display means (35, 39, 341);
display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period. an operating means (21) operated by a player;
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) are displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, by operating the operating means during the special period, the player can cause the second display means to display the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period. Therefore, if a player wants to check the display content of specific information displayed during a specified period, for example, if he has forgotten the display content, or if there is a change in player, he may check the display content during the special period. I can do it. As a result, the player can identify or infer specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine in accordance with the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether

[Appendix G2']
The display control means (51) may cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix G1', characterized in that it is possible.

[Appendix G3']
The display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix G1', wherein the gaming machine is capable of:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. be done. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also be able to specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred based on special information. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4', the special period in which the display contents during the specified period can be checked is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully check the displayed content at his or her own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of mutually different prescribed periods,
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The game according to any one of appendices G1' to G4', characterized in that at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341). Machine.

[Appendix G6']
The display content display control means (51) causes the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period based on the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5', characterized in that the display content selected by the second display means (35, 39, 341) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G7']
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5', characterized in that two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machines according to appendices G5' to G7', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one display content among the display contents of a plurality of specific information displayed in a plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display content selected by the player from the display content of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the content to be presented on the second display means from among the display content of a plurality of pieces of specific information, the player can confirm the display content that he or she desires. As a result, it is possible to effectively check the displayed contents while avoiding checking the displayed contents such as previously checked information or information with a small amount of information, so that the displayed contents can be checked efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be checked at once, so that the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix G8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G7', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine according to appendix G8', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. .

The gaming machines according to Appendix G8' and Appendix G9' are provided with a first display means that is displayed during the prescribed period and a second display means that is displayed during the special period, and different displays are displayed during each of the prescribed period and the special period. Specific information is displayed depending on the means. Therefore, in the prescribed period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, standby state), the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented by a second display means such as a variable display image display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so when the variable display image display means is made to present the display content of specific information in a specified period, visibility is improved. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as performances and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by making the variable display image display means present the display contents of the specific information in the specified period, the display contents of the specific information in the specified period can be displayed in a variable manner by the same operations as those for making various settings. It becomes possible to display the image on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience in displaying the display content of specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G9', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix G10', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in a predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix G11' is a conventional slot machine in which all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented. Different from the machine.

[Appendix H1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-specific numerical information) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is a display control means (51) for displaying a plurality of pieces of specific information (numbers) indicating the set value on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a distinguishable manner;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix H1', characterized by the following.

[Appendix H3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix H1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2' or appendix H3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H4']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1' to H3', characterized in that the game machine displays the information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix H5']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix H4', wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to appendix H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order, or to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-set value. It also becomes possible. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders include a first display in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority. including the order;
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7', the first display has the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. The order is easy to choose. That is, other than the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information that has the lowest advantage determination probability and is most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last specific information is displayed, the probability of an advantageous judgment that is the most disadvantageous to the player and the probability that is more advantageous to the player are displayed. The possibility of an advantageous judgment probability remains. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the probability of an advantageous determination is the most disadvantageous for the player, which makes it possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from ending early, and to reduce the operating rate of the gaming machine. The decline can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of favorable determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability with the highest probability;
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest priorities,
The second display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8', the second display order has a lower priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. is likely to be selected. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine according to Appendix H6', it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of determining advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, and the game on the gaming machine may be ended early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of gaming machines. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the highest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that it is not only the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player, but also the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, because the priority of the two specific pieces of information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, the advantages for the player are contradictory. Since it becomes difficult to determine until the end which of the two favorable judgment probabilities it is, it becomes possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability having a higher probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. including a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the probability;
The third display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9', the priority order of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate for the third display order to be high, the player is given a possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision is higher than the actual first probability of an advantageous decision just before the player grasps the first advantageous decision probability. It can make you look forward to it. Thereby, the user can enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantageous determination probability is high until just before the first advantageous determination probability is grasped.

[Appendix H10']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate of the fourth display order to be high, specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability whose probability is lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is displayed immediately before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous determination probability becomes specific information indicating the actual first advantageous determination probability and specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower in probability than the first advantageous determination probability. As a result, in the end, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the first advantageous judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so when the set value is grasped. pleasure is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1' to H10', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H12', in the first gaming state where the probability that the transition determination means will determine that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that of the second gaming state, the transition determination result is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even specific numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H11' or H12', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11' to H13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix H15']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix H14', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H14' or appendix H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix H16', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1' to H15', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H17', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix H17' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix I1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
display restriction means (51) that restricts display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix I1', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is performed as a benefit for the player who played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This can prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix I1', characterized in that:

[Appendix I3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix I1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2' or appendix I3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix I4']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I3', wherein a period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I4', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during a waiting period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the waiting period, other players may take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify or guess specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent specific information from being obtained.

[Appendix I5']
The display restriction means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period is limited. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I4'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I5', display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during periods other than the specified period. In other words, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify specific numerical information based on the display history. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for making inferences.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I5', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix I6', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I7', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix I7' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the highest setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix J1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
If a second specific condition different from the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types are Display control for displaying on the display means (35, 39, 341) a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the numerical information in a distinguishable manner. means (51);
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied; Displaying the plurality of specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a first display order when a first specific condition is met, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means when a second specific condition is met. The specific information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information is set depending on the type of specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and the plurality of specific numerical information can be prevented from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from quickly grasping that the advantageous determination probability is low when the advantageous determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantageous judgment probability is low, the game on the gaming machine is prevented from being prematurely ended, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix J2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix J1', characterized in that:

[Appendix J3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix J1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2' or Appendix J3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix J4']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is such that second predetermined numerical information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix J1' to appendix J3', characterized in that the game machine is stored in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. This includes storing numerical information. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the predetermined period according to the display order. That is, since it is possible to set the display order in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Thereby, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
If the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J4', characterized in that the game machine displays the following information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix J6']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J8', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or J8', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J9', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific conditions are satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix J10']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix J11']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix J10', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix J12']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix J10' or J11', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J12', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1' to Supplementary Notes J12'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J13', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix J13', characterized in that the game machine displays:

In the gaming machine according to appendix J14', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix J14' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix K1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. first display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on first display means (35, 39, 341);
a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where visibility by the player is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in (45). That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position that is visible to the player during a prescribed period. displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It's possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and further guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, by displaying predetermined information on the second display means provided in a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted, the player can receive a predetermined numerical value based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. Information can be prevented from being grasped. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped at the gaming hall side during non-business hours. Thereby, the gaming hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, the predetermined numerical information after the change. Since the predetermined information indicating the value can be confirmed, the task of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2']
The first display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix K1', characterized in that it is possible to.

[Appendix K3']
The first display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix K1', characterized in that it is possible to.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. be done. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix K4']
Further comprising a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the game machine according to appendix K4', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. It is displayed on a second display means provided on the side. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily restrict the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so that it can be opened and closed,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position where the second display means (45) is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K5', a second display means is provided on the back side of the gaming board that is openably and closably fixed to the frame. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visible to the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. You can check this at the game hall. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted by the simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix K4' or K5', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the game machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be set by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. You can choose. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even if the game board is opened in the event of a jam in the game machine, the predetermined information will be displayed to the player through the second display means. It is possible to reliably prevent this information from being grasped by someone else.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1'1 to K6', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix K7', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to supplementary note K7', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K8', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix K8' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix L1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A gaming machine comprising: a first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which a game ball can move;
A game ball moving on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) can pass, and the accessory continuous actuation device is operated based on the game ball passing. a predetermined area (G1, G2) where
Furthermore,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) have different times from when the game ball is launched until the game ball passes through the predetermined area.

The gaming machine according to appendix L1' includes a first movement path and a second movement path in which the time from when the game ball is launched until the game ball passes through a predetermined area (when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated) is different. In this way, by providing the first movement path and the second movement path with different times from when the game ball is launched to when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, it is possible to It is possible to provide a game feature in which the progress of the game is different depending on the case where the game ball is launched on two movement paths.

[Appendix L2']
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2), The gaming machine according to appendix L1', characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

In the game machine according to appendix L2', when the condition device is activated, a first predetermined area is provided in the first movement path where the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by passing the game ball, and the game ball A second predetermined area is provided on the second movement route, where the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by passing through the second predetermined area. In this way, by providing a predetermined area on each of the first movement path and the second movement path in which the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the game ball can be placed on either the first movement path or the second movement path. By being launched, the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated.

[Appendix L3']
Further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) to delay passage of the game ball launched onto the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2). The gaming machine according to appendix L2'.

In the game machine according to appendix L3', the second movement path is provided with a delay means for delaying the time from the launching of the game ball to the second movement path until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. In this way, by providing the delay means on the second movement path to delay the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the accessory continuous activation device is activated by the game ball launched on the first movement path. A significant time difference can be provided between the time until the game ball is fired and the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball launched on the second movement path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, the game balls are fired on the first movement path and the game balls are fired on the second movement path, and the accessory is continuously activated after the condition device is activated. A significant difference can be made in the preparation time during which the device is activated. Therefore, for example, while it is possible to shorten the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route, it is possible to lengthen the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first movement path, the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated in a short time by firing the game ball onto the first movement path. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuous activation device is activated (the special game starts) by firing the game ball to the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. . Furthermore, if the player's playing time is limited, by allowing the player to select a movement route that reduces preparation time, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening/closing execution mode. can. This prevents the player from having a bad impression of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement path, various events can be held using the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. becomes possible to execute. In this way, various events occur using the preparation time by firing the game ball to the second movement path, which requires a longer preparation time, thereby reducing the preparation time, which tends to become boring due to low player interest. You can enjoy it depending on the occurrence of events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix L4']
Compared to the probability that a game ball launched on the first movement route (R1) passes through the first predetermined area (G1), a game ball launched on the second movement route (R2) passes through the second predetermined area (G1). The gaming machine according to appendix L3', wherein the probability of passing through the area (G2) is set higher.

In the game machine according to appendix L4', the probability that a game ball fired on the second movement path passes through the second predetermined area is higher than the probability that the game ball shot on the first movement path passes through the first predetermined area. The probability is set higher. Thereby, in the second movement path where the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed, the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated by launching fewer game balls than in the first movement path. Therefore, in the second movement path, compared to the case where the game ball is launched onto the first movement path and the accessory continuous activation device is activated, the time required to activate the accessory continuous activation device is disadvantageous, but it is wasteful. This is more advantageous than the case where the game ball is launched onto the first movement path and the accessory continuous actuation device is activated in that the generation of balls can be suppressed.

[Appendix L5']
Supplementary note L4 characterized in that the game ball further includes a prize opening (313) into which a game ball launched into the first movement path (R1) can enter, and which provides an opportunity to award a prize ball when the game ball enters. 'A game machine described in '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L5', a prize opening is provided at a position where the game ball launched on the first movement path can enter, and provides an opportunity to award a prize ball when the game ball enters. As a result, the occurrence of wasted balls until a game ball launched on a first movement path with a low probability of passing through the first predetermined area passes through the first predetermined area is reduced, and the prize ball for winning a game ball into the winning opening is reduced. can be guaranteed by Therefore, the base (which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode)) is prevented from decreasing, and as a result, the failure caused by the player selecting the first movement route is prevented. Profit generation is prevented.

[Appendix L6']
Any one of appendices L1' to L5', characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) to move the game ball to. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix L6', the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball to. In this way, by allowing the player to select which of the first movement path and the second movement path the game ball should be moved to, the period from when the condition device is activated to when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. The player can select the length of the preparation time. As a result, the player's intention is reflected in the selection of the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, so that the player can play the game without feeling stressed.

[Appendix L7']
The player is characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) to move the game ball to by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. The gaming machine described in appendix L6'.

In the game machine according to appendix L7', the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball to by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this way, since the player can select either the first movement route or the second movement route depending on the firing intensity of the game ball, the period from when the condition device is activated to when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated It becomes possible to easily select the length of the preparation time.

[Appendix L8']
The apparatus further includes a benefit granting means (51) that grants a benefit when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time set as a preparation time from when the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous operation device is activated. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix L1' to appendix L7'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L8', a privilege is given when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time set as a preparation time from when the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous activation device is activated. In this way, by awarding a benefit when a specific condition is met during a specific time set as the preparation time, players can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met during the preparation time. This increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix L9']
The gaming machine according to appendix L8', wherein the benefit granting means (51) grants the benefit according to the number of the specific conditions that are met during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L9', benefits are given according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific period. In this way, by granting benefits according to the number of specific conditions that are met during a specific period, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific condition is met, but also to the number of specific conditions that are met. This makes the game even more interesting. Furthermore, by providing benefits according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the preparation time, the content of the benefits can be diversified, making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix L10']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2), including;
Further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) to delay passage of the game ball launched onto the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2). ,
According to appendix L8' or L9', wherein the specific period starts when a game ball is detected on the second movement route (R2) when the condition device is activated. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L10', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected on the second movement path in which the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed by the delay means. The period begins. That is, since the specific period is started when the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed due to the second moving route, the specific period can be set for a long time. Thereby, the types of specific conditions can be diversified, so that the preparation time from when the condition device is activated to when the accessory continuous activation device is activated can be prevented from becoming boring. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix L11']
The benefit granting means (51) is configured to provide the specified bonus if a game ball is detected on the second movement path before a game ball is detected on the first movement path when the condition device is activated. The gaming machine according to appendix L10', characterized in that the benefit is granted when the specific condition is satisfied at a certain time.

In the game machine according to appendix L11', if the condition device is activated and a game ball is detected on the second movement path before the game ball is detected on the first movement path, a certain Benefits will be awarded if the conditions are met. As a result, after the first movement route is selected in order to activate the continuous operation of the accessory in a short time after the activation of the condition device, the operation of the continuous operation of the accessory is delayed due to the game ball detected on the second movement route. This prevents the player from feeling disgusted or irritated by the fact that it takes a long time to operate the accessory continuous operation device against his/her will, and it becomes possible to comfortably proceed with the game.

[Appendix L12']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L8' to L11', wherein the benefit is the presentation of at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating ball output performance.

[Appendix L13']
Storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities) determined by the determination means (41) to execute the special game (jackpot game); ,
From the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41), one numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability is selected for the determination means (41) to determine whether or not to execute the special game. selection means (41) to
Furthermore,
The determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantageous determination probability according to the one numerical information selected by the selecting means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix L12', wherein the performance information is information that allows the one numerical information to be specified or estimated.

[Appendix L14']
The gaming machine according to appendix L13', wherein the benefit is the presentation of at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix L12' to appendix L14', at least one piece of information that allows estimation of ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability, is provided as a benefit when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period. section is presented. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix L15']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2), including;
The second movement route (R2) is provided, and the game ball launched onto the second movement route (R2) is prevented from passing through the second predetermined area (G2) by falling on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L14', further comprising a delay means (60, 70) that delays by limiting or delaying.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L15', the delay means for delaying the passing of the game ball launched on the second movement path through the second predetermined area (delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device) is configured to fire the game ball on the second movement path. This is to limit or delay the falling of game balls on the game board. Such a delay means can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effects of providing the delay means can be easily and reliably enjoyed.

[Appendix L16']
The gaming machine according to appendix L15', wherein the delay means (60, 70) limits or delays the falling of the game ball on the game board (31) for a certain period of time by causing the game ball to orbit.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L16', the falling of the game ball on the game board is restricted or delayed by the delay means that causes the game ball to circulate. That is, the delay means is realized by a means for rotating the game ball. Such a delay means can be easily realized because it can be configured as a known means that is easy to manufacture, for example, a Kroon device.

[Appendix L17']
The gaming machine according to appendix L15', wherein the delay means (60, 70) is a rotating body (70).

In the game machine according to appendix L17', the falling of the game ball on the game board is restricted or delayed by the delay means configured as a rotating body. Since the delay means is a rotating body in this way, the delay means can be realized by known means that are easy to manufacture. Moreover, since the delay means is a rotating body, it becomes easy to control the delay time in the delay means, and it becomes possible to equalize the delay time in the delay means, for example.

[Appendix L18']
Further comprising a rotating body control means (51) for controlling rotation of the rotating body (70),
The rotating body (70) has a storage part (701) that can store game balls,
The rotating body control means (51) starts the rotation of the rotating body (70) from a posture in which the accommodating part (701) is in a fixed position, on the condition that the condition device is activated, and at least Supplementary note L17', characterized in that the rotating body (70) is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed until the rotating body is rotated to a position in which a game ball stored in the part (701) is released. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L18', the rotation of the rotating body is started from a posture in which the accommodating section is in a fixed position, and the rotation continues until the rotating body is rotated at least to the posture in which the game ball accommodated in the accommodating section is released. The body is rotated at a constant or nearly constant speed. In this way, the starting posture of the rotating body is made uniform, and the rotation of the rotating body from the start of the rotating body until the game ball is released is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed, so that the rotating body is started. It is possible to easily equalize the time from when the game ball is released from the rotating body. As a result, the delay time in the delay means can be easily equalized, and for example, when an event is generated while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, the event is not terminated midway and continues as desired. becomes possible to execute.

[Appendix L19']
a benefit granting means (51) for granting a benefit according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific time set as the preparation time;
establishment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition at the specific time when the game ball is launched onto the second movement path (R2) when the condition device is activated;
Furthermore,
In the second movement route (R2), when the condition device is activated, the preparation time from when the game ball is launched until the activation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed compared to the first movement path (R1). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix L1' to appendix L18'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L19', when the conditional device is activated, the game ball is launched on the second movement path where the preparation time from the activation of the conditional device to the activation of the accessory continuous activation device is delayed. In this case, an opportunity is provided to satisfy a specific condition at a specific time. As a result, by using the preparation time for the second movement route, which requires a longer preparation time, various events can be generated during the period when specific conditions are met by the success opportunity providing means, and the player's interest is low. Preparation time, which tends to be boring, can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. In this way, it becomes possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix L20']
Supplementary note L19', characterized in that the establishment opportunity providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical index (for example, a point) that can be correlated with a number, in correlation with the number of establishments of the specific condition. The gaming machine described in .

[Appendix L21']
The gaming machine according to appendix L20', wherein the establishment opportunity providing means (51) is executed on a display means and provides the numerical index through a numerical index acquisition performance that allows the numerical index to be acquired. .

In the gaming machines according to appendix L20' and appendix L21', the number of fulfillment of a specific condition is provided in correlation with a numerical index acquired by an opportunity provided as a numerical index acquisition effect or the like. In this way, by correlating the number of times a specific condition is met with a numerical index, it is possible to diversify the content of opportunities for a specific condition to be met, and for example, it is possible to execute the opportunities as a point-earning performance such as a game performance. become. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix L22']
Further comprising operation means (20, 21) operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix L21', wherein the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance in which different results are obtained depending on the content of the player's operation on the operation means (20, 21).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L22', the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance in which different results are obtained depending on the content of the player's operation on the operating means. That is, the numerical index acquisition performance is executed as a player participation type performance such as a player participation type game performance. In this way, the progress of the numerical index acquisition performance and the result (the acquired numerical index) are determined by the player's operations, thereby improving the interest in the numerical index acquisition performance.

[Appendix L23']
The gaming machine according to appendix L21', wherein the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical index that can be obtained is determined in advance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L23', the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance selected from a plurality of scenarios in which achievable numerical indicators are determined in advance. That is, the numerical index acquisition performance is executed as a scenario management type performance such as a scenario management type game performance. As a result, a numerical index corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios is always provided even to a player who does not actively participate in a numerical index acquisition performance such as a game performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide benefits according to the numerical index even to players who are not interested in the numerical index acquisition performance, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix L24']
Supplementary notes L21' to L23 are characterized in that the establishment opportunity providing means (51) provides compensation for the numerical index when the numerical index acquisition performance is terminated before the elapse of the specific time. A gaming machine described in any of '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L24', the numerical index is compensated when the numerical index acquisition performance is ended before the elapse of a specific time. In this way, the numerical indicator is compensated if the specific time is ended before the specific time is reached, so that the game can be played if the specific time in which the specific conditions can be met is shorter than the theoretical time. The disadvantages experienced by players are reduced, and a decline in interest in games is suppressed.

[Appendix L25']
A first guidance state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movement route (R1) and guidance of the game ball to the second movement route (R2) is restricted; From appendix L1', further comprising a switching means (80) for switching between a second guiding state in which the game ball can be guided and the guidance of the game ball to the first movement path (R1) is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix L24'.

In the game machine according to supplementary note L25', the switching means allows the game ball to be guided to the first movement path and is set to a first guidance state in which guidance of the game ball to the second movement path is restricted, and a second movement path. The second guiding state is switched between a second guiding state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movement path and guidance of the game ball to the first movement path is restricted. In this way, by switching the movement path through which the game ball can move by the switching means, the player can move the first movement path and the second movement path by firing the game ball while checking the operation of the switching means. You can choose which of these to move the game ball. This eliminates the need to adjust the firing intensity, which prevents the player from selecting a moving route that is contrary to his or her wishes, and prevents the player's impression of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

[Appendix L26']
further comprising a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the switching means (80) between the first guiding state and the second guiding state,
The gaming machine according to appendix L25', wherein the switching control means (51) starts switching control for the switching means (80) when the conditional device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L26', switching control for the switching means is started when the conditional device is activated. In this way, by starting the switching control for the switching means when the conditioner is activated, it is possible to recognize that the conditioner has been activated when the switching control for the switching means is started. It can be recognized that the continuous operation device can be operated. This makes it easier for the player to respond to the progress of the game, for example, to recognize whether or not it is a situation in which he or she should hit the right hand. It is suppressed that game balls are unnecessarily launched onto the movement path or the second movement path, and the disadvantage (decreased base (ball output rate)) suffered by the player when the condition device is not activated is reduced.

[Appendix L27']
The switching control means (51) terminates the switching control of the switching means (80) when movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) is detected. The gaming machine according to appendix L26', characterized in that:

In the game machine according to appendix L27', when the movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the switching means that is started when the condition device is activated is terminated. Ru. In this way, when the movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the switching means is terminated, so that when the switching control of the switching means is terminated, the first It can be recognized that there is no need to launch the game ball on the moving path or the second moving path. As a result, game balls are prevented from being ejected into the first movement path or the second movement path, and the disadvantage suffered by the player (decrease in base (ball output rate)) is reduced.

[Appendix L28']
When the game ball is launched onto the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed;
Supplementary note L26' or L27', wherein the switching control unit (51) stops the switching unit (80) in the first guidance state when not performing switching control of the switching unit (80). The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix L28', when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, the switching means is stopped in the first guidance state. Here, in the first guidance state, it is possible to guide the game ball to the first movement path, and guidance of the game ball to the second movement path where the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed is restricted. In this way, the switching means is stopped in the first guidance state when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, so that the switching means is stopped in the first guidance state, and the conditioner is not activated after the selection of the first movement route and the second movement route is completed. This prevents the game ball from being guided to the second movement path, which sometimes delays the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device. This prevents the game ball from staying unnecessarily on the second movement path that delays the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device, regardless of the progress of the game.

[Appendix L29']
If movement of the game ball along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement path (R1) or a restricting means (51) for restricting the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by a game ball launched on the other movement path different from the one movement path of the second movement path (R2). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L28', further comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix L29', if movement of the game ball in one movement path is detected when the conditional device is activated, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball being launched into the other movement path. Operation is restricted. In this way, when the movement of a game ball on one of the movement paths is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game balls that are launched on the other movement path is restricted, so that one movement path is The accessory continuous operating device is prevented from being activated by the game ball moving on the other moving path until the accessory continuous operating device is activated after being selected. As a result, after the movement route for activating the accessory continuous actuation device is selected, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball on the movement path that goes against the player's will, that is, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the player's intention. This prevents the device from being activated at a timing that is contrary to the timing.

[Appendix L30']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). including;
The restriction means (51) is configured to control the predetermined area (G1, G2) provided on the other movement path when the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated. The gaming machine according to appendix L29', characterized in that detection of passing of a gaming ball is restricted in the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L30', if movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated, passage of the game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other movement path is detected. is limited. In this way, when the condition device is activated and the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected, the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area provided on the other movement path is restricted. By simple control, it is possible to restrict the activation of the accessory continuous actuation device by a game ball moving on the other moving path between when one moving path is selected and the accessory continuous actuating device is activated. realizable.

[Appendix L31']
When the game ball is launched onto the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed;
The limiting means (51) prevents the game from being played on the second movement path (R2) before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path (R1) is detected when the condition device is activated. The game machine according to appendix L30', characterized in that, when movement of the ball is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game ball launched into the first movement path (R1) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L31', if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the game ball is launched on the first movement path. The operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball is restricted. Here, since the second moving route is a moving route in which the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is delayed, the second moving route is a moving route in which the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is delayed, so while the operation of the accessory continuous operating device is delayed in the second moving route, the game is moved to the first moving route. When a ball is launched, there is a concern that the accessory continuous actuation device may be activated by the game ball that is later launched into the first movement path, even though the game ball was first launched into the second movement path. be done. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that the accessory continuous actuation device will be activated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the accessory created by the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the operation of the continuous actuation device, the possibility that the accessory continuous actuation device will be actuated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that the accessory continuous activation device will be activated by a game ball that is launched on a moving path that is contrary to the player's will, it is possible to This prevents the actuating device from being actuated, that is, the accessory continuous actuating device from being actuated at an unintended timing.

[Appendix L32']
When the restricting means (51) restricts the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device by the game balls launched into the other movement path, the action by the game balls launched into the other movement path when a predetermined condition is met. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L29' to L31', further comprising a restriction release means (51) for releasing the restriction on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device.

In the game machine according to appendix L32', when the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game ball launched into the other moving path is restricted, the game ball launched into the other moving path when a predetermined condition is met. The restriction on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is lifted. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the moving route for activating the accessory continuous actuating device later when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and thus the convenience in selecting the moving route is improved.

[Appendix L33']
The gaming machine according to appendix L32', wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

[Appendix L34']
The game machine according to appendix L33', wherein the predetermined condition is that movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path before the accessory continuous actuation device is actuated. .

In the gaming machines according to appendix L33' and appendix L34', the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path before the accessory continuous actuation device is activated (the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path). By establishing a predetermined condition that can be established by the player, such as (that the game ball is fired), it becomes possible to change the movement route for activating the accessory continuous actuation device later. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix L35']
If movement of the game ball along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2), a permission means (51) that allows the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by a game ball launched on the other movement path different from the one movement path. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L34', further comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix L35', if movement of the game ball in one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball being launched into the other movement path. Operation is allowed. When the condition device is activated in this way, if the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game balls launched on the other movement path is permitted. After one movement path is selected, the game ball is launched onto the other movement path, thereby making it possible to change the movement path for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix L36']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine according to appendix L35', characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

In the gaming machine according to appendix L36', a predetermined area that provides an opportunity for activation of the accessory continuous actuation device is provided in each of the first movement path and the second movement path. As long as the game ball has not passed through a predetermined area provided on one of the movement routes, even if the game ball is first launched on one movement route, the game ball will be launched on the other movement route later. This makes it possible to change the predetermined area in which the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. For example, the time it takes for the accessory continuous activation device to be activated when the game ball is launched on one moving path is different from the time required for the accessory continuous activation device to be activated when the game ball is launched onto the other moving path. If the time is longer than the time it takes to activate the accessory continuous actuation device, it is possible to shorten the time it takes to activate the accessory continuous actuation device by later firing the game ball to the other moving path.

[Appendix L37']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when a game ball is detected by the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) includes a first predetermined area detection means (Gs1) that detects that a game ball has passed through the first predetermined area (G1), and a second predetermined area (G2). The gaming machine according to appendix L36', characterized in that it includes a second predetermined area detection means (Gs2) that detects that the gaming ball has passed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L37', when passage of the game ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means provided on the first movement route or the second predetermined area detection means provided on the second movement route, The accessory continuous actuation device is activated. In this way, when the game ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means or the second predetermined area detection means, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, and with a simple configuration and control, one movement can be performed. Even after the game ball is launched onto the route, it becomes possible to activate the accessory continuous actuation device by launching the game ball onto the other moving route.

[Appendix L38']
If movement of the game ball in the one movement path is detected during the waiting period from when the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the game ball is fired to the other movement path. Further comprising a restriction means (51) for restricting the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball,
The permitting means (51) is configured to prevent the game ball from playing on the other moving path by the restricting means (51) when movement of the game ball on the one moving path is detected during the preparation time. Allowing the continuous operation device to operate for a certain period of time,
The limiting means (51) prevents the movement of the game ball on the other movement path from when the allowing means (51) starts restricting the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device until the certain period of time has elapsed. The game machine according to any one of appendix L35' to appendix L37', characterized in that the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device by the game ball launched into the other moving path is restricted when the game ball is not detected.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L38', when the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected during the standby period, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game balls that are launched on the other movement path for a certain period of time. is allowed, and if the movement of the game ball on the other movement path is not detected before a certain period of time has elapsed, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path is restricted. That is, for a certain period of time, it is possible to change the movement route in which the accessory continuous actuation device is operated, and after the certain period of time has elapsed, the movement path is restricted from being changed. As a result, if the player wishes to change the movement route by selecting a movement route against the player's will before a certain period of time has elapsed, it is possible to change the movement route, but after a certain period of time has elapsed, the player will be able to change the movement route against the player's will. The movement route for operating the continuous operating device is prevented from being changed, and it becomes possible to more appropriately reflect the player's intention.

[Appendix L39']
a benefit granting means (51) that grants a benefit when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific time set between when the condition device is activated and when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated;
establishment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition at the specific time;
specific period ending means (51) for forcibly ending the specific period when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L38', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix L39', the specific period is forcibly terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, the specific period can be shortened by ending the specific period even before the specific period has elapsed. As a result, it becomes possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device, for example, before the elapse of a specific period, and the accessory continuous operation device can be activated at various timings, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix L40']
The gaming machine according to appendix L39', wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L40', it is possible for the player to satisfy a predetermined condition within a specific period. In this way, by allowing the player to satisfy the predetermined condition during the specific period, it becomes possible to end the specific period at the player's will. This makes it possible for the player to determine the timing for activating the accessory continuous activation device even after the start of the specific period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix L41']
The establishment opportunity providing means (51) is configured to provide a means for providing a game ball when movement of a game ball along one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) is detected during the waiting period. starting the specific period;
The predetermined condition is different from the one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) between the start of the specific period and the end of the specific period. The gaming machine according to appendix L40', wherein the gaming ball is detected on the other moving route.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L41', the specific period set as the standby period is started by the detection of the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths, and the game ball is detected on the other movement path before the elapse of the specified period. The specified period will be forcibly terminated if In this way, the specific period set as the waiting period starts when the movement of the game ball is detected on one of the movement paths, and the specified period is specified when the game ball is detected on the other movement path before the specified period elapses. By forcibly ending the period, after a specific period has started by firing a game ball into one movement route, the specific period can be easily ended by simply firing a game ball into the other movement path. .

[Appendix L42']
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2), including;
Further comprising special game generating means (41) that generates a special game based on a game ball entering the predetermined area (G1, G2) in a predetermined game state,
The special game generating means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the predetermined area (G1, G2), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L41', characterized in that the occurrence of the special game based on a game ball entering the predetermined area (G1, G2) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L42', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball entering the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area is restricted. In this way, by restricting the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball entering the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first predetermined area and the second predetermined area A special game is generated when a game ball enters a predetermined area that is a target of the area, and a special game is prevented from occurring when a game ball enters a predetermined area other than the target area.

[Appendix L43']
The gaming machine according to appendix L42', wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L43', the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game, so that the predetermined area in which the special game is executed is one of the first predetermined area and the second predetermined area. It is limited to a predetermined area different from the area. Therefore, a special game is generated by the entry of a game ball into the other predetermined area which is the target of the first predetermined area and the second predetermined area, and a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into one of the predetermined areas other than the target predetermined area. Games are prevented from occurring.

[Appendix L44']
Supplementary note L43', characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game is terminated by the notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix L44', the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified. In this way, a state in which a special game cannot be generated because the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this case, a special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball entering the other predetermined area.

[Appendix L45']
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and The movement of the game ball along one of the second movement paths (R2) is different from the one movement path of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). The game machine according to appendix L44', characterized in that the game ball is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other different movement path.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L45', when the notification game ends to notify that the determination result is to execute a special game, the movement of the game ball on one movement path is changed to the game ball on the other movement path. If it is detected before the movement of the other movement path, the occurrence of a special game due to the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other movement path is restricted. In this way, when the notification game ends to notify that the judgment result is to execute a special game, the movement of the game ball on one movement path is earlier than the movement of the game ball on the other movement path. If it is detected, the occurrence of a special game due to the passing of a game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other movement route is restricted, and the time until one movement route is selected and a special game is generated. This prevents a special game from being generated by a game ball that moves along the other path. As a result, after the movement route that generates the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement path that is contrary to the player's will, that is, the special game is caused by the passage of time (timing) that is contrary to the player's will. This will be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix L46']
The one movement route is the second movement route (R2),
The gaming machine according to appendix L45', wherein the other moving route is the first moving route (R1).

In the game machine according to appendix L46', if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the game ball is launched on the first movement path. Occurrence of special games using game balls is restricted. Here, since the second movement path is a movement path in which the falling of the game ball is delayed, that is, the movement path in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed, while the occurrence of the special game is delayed in the second movement path, When a game ball is launched on the first movement route, a special game is generated by the game ball that is later launched on the first movement route, even though the game ball has been launched on the second movement route first. This is a concern. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path, a special game using the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the occurrence of this, the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is launched on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention, a special game can be generated by a game ball that is hit on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention. In other words, the special game is prevented from occurring at an unexpected timing.

[Appendix L47']
The special game generating means (41) executes the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2). and restricting the occurrence of the special game based on a game ball entering the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2) when a first predetermined condition is satisfied; The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L42' to L46', wherein the restriction on the occurrence of the special game is canceled when a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L47', when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball being entered into the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area is restricted. It will be canceled. In this way, when the second predetermined condition is met, a special game based on the game ball being entered into the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area can be generated by lifting the restriction on the occurrence of the special game. After the special game is selected to occur in one predetermined area, it is possible to change to the special game in the other predetermined area.

[Appendix L48']
The gaming machine according to appendix L47', wherein the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L48', the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, since the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player, the player can change the predetermined area in which the special game is generated according to his/her will. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix L49']
The game according to appendix L47' or L48', wherein the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (jackpot game). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L49', the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game. In this way, since the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game, the predetermined area to be executed in the special game is one of the first predetermined area and the second predetermined area. is limited to the other predetermined region different from the predetermined region of. Therefore, a special game is generated by the entry of a game ball into the other predetermined area which is the target of the first predetermined area and the second predetermined area, and a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into one of the predetermined areas other than the target predetermined area. Games are prevented from occurring.

[Appendix L50']
A supplementary note characterized in that the first predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is terminated by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The gaming machine described in L49'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L50', the first predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed is terminated by the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes the termination of the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, so that the special game can be generated. This prevents a special game from occurring due to the game ball entering the other predetermined area in a state where the game ball cannot play.

[Appendix L51']
The first predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1 ) and the second movement path (R2), the game ball moves along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). The game machine according to appendix L50', characterized in that the game ball is detected before movement of the game ball on the other movement path different from the movement path.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L51', movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected in a state where the first predetermined condition is a notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified, and the determination result is such that a special game can be generated. In this case, detection of passage of the game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving route is restricted. In this way, in a state where a special game can be generated, by restricting the detection of the passing of a game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other moving route, one moving route is selected and a special game is generated. By simple control, it is possible to restrict a special game from being generated by a game ball that moves on the other moving path until the ball moves on the other side.

[Appendix L52']
The second predetermined condition is that the special game is executed after the completion of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix L51', characterized in that movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path during the period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L52', the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path before the accessory continuous actuation device is activated (a predetermined number of game balls are fired on the other movement path). By satisfying a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as (that is, the player must be able to play), it becomes possible to later change the movement route for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix L53']
The one predetermined area is the first predetermined area (G1),
The gaming machine according to appendix L52', wherein the other predetermined area is the second predetermined area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L53', one predetermined area is the first predetermined area, and the other predetermined area is the second predetermined area. Here, since the second movement path where the second predetermined area is provided is a movement path in which the falling of the game ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of the special game is delayed, the occurrence of the special game in the second movement path If a game ball is launched on the first movement path while the game ball is delayed, the game ball will be launched on the first movement path later even though the game ball was first shot on the second movement path. There is a concern that special games may occur due to the above. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path, a special game using the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the occurrence of this, the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is launched on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention, a special game can be generated by a game ball that is hit on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention. In other words, the special game is prevented from being activated at an unexpected timing.

Furthermore, since one predetermined area is the first predetermined area and the other predetermined area is the second predetermined area, the falling of the game ball is delayed in the second movement path where the occurrence of the special game is delayed. In the meantime, when it is desired to immediately generate a special game, it becomes possible to immediately generate the special game by firing the game ball onto the first movement path.

[Appendix M1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A gaming machine comprising: a first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which a game ball can move;
A game ball moving on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) can pass, and the accessory continuous actuation device is operated based on the game ball passing. a predetermined area where
Furthermore,
The first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) have different times from when the game ball is launched until the game ball passes through the predetermined area,
a benefit granting means (51) that grants a benefit when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time set as a preparation time from when the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous operation device is activated;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix M1', a privilege is given when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time set as a preparation time from when the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous activation device is activated. In this way, by awarding a benefit when a specific condition is met during a specific time set as the preparation time, players can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met during the preparation time. This increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix M2']
The gaming machine according to appendix M1', wherein the benefit granting means (51) grants the benefit according to the number of the specific conditions that are met during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M2', benefits are given according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific period. In this way, by granting benefits according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not specific conditions are met, but also to the number of specific conditions that are met. This makes the game even more interesting. Further, by providing benefits according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the preparation time, the content of the benefits can be diversified, making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix M3']
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2), including;
Further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) to delay passage of the game ball launched onto the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2). ,
According to appendix M1' or appendix M2', wherein the specific period starts when a game ball is detected on the second movement route (R2) when the condition device is activated. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M3', a determination is made as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected on the second movement path in which the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed by the delay means. The period begins. That is, since the specific period is started when the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed due to the second moving route, the specific period can be set for a long time. As a result, the types of specific conditions can be diversified, so that the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the accessory continuous activation device is activated can be prevented from becoming tedious. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix M4']
The benefit granting means (51) is configured to provide the specified bonus if a game ball is detected on the second movement path before a game ball is detected on the first movement path when the condition device is activated. The gaming machine according to appendix M3', characterized in that the benefit is granted when the specific condition is satisfied at a given time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M4', if the condition device is activated and a game ball is detected on the second movement path before the game ball is detected on the first movement path, Benefits will be awarded if the conditions are met. As a result, after the first movement route is selected in order to activate the continuous operation of the accessory in a short time after the activation of the condition device, the operation of the continuous operation of the accessory is delayed due to the game ball detected on the second movement route. This prevents the player from feeling disgusted or irritated by the fact that it takes a long time to operate the accessory continuous operation device against his/her will, and it becomes possible to comfortably proceed with the game.

[Additional note M5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1' to M4', wherein the benefit is presentation of at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating ball output performance.

[Appendix M6']
Storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities) determined by the determination means (41) to execute the special game (jackpot game); ,
From the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41), one numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability is selected for the determination means (41) to determine whether or not to execute the special game. selection means (41) to
Furthermore,
The determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantageous determination probability according to the one numerical information selected by the selecting means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix M5', wherein the performance information is information that allows the one numerical information to be specified or estimated.

[Appendix M7']
The gaming machine according to appendix M6', wherein the benefit is the presentation of at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendices M5' to M7', at least one piece of information from which ball payout performance can be estimated, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability, is provided as a benefit when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period. section is presented. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move;
a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1);
a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2);
a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) to delay passage of the game ball launched onto the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined region (G2);
Equipped with
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when the game ball passes through the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2) when the condition device is activated,
The game machine is characterized in that the delay means (60, 70) restricts or delays the falling of the game ball launched onto the second movement path (R2) on the game board (31).

In the game machine according to appendix N1', a delay means is provided on the second movement path for delaying the time from the launch of the game ball to the second movement path until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. In this way, by providing the delay means for delaying the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated on the second movement path, the accessory continuous activation device is activated by the game ball launched on the first movement path. A significant time difference can be provided between the time until the game ball is fired and the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball launched on the second movement path. That is, when the condition device is activated, the game ball is launched on the first movement path and the game ball is fired on the second movement path, and the accessory is continuously activated after the condition device is activated. A significant difference can be made in the preparation time during which the device is activated. Therefore, for example, while the preparation time can be shortened when the game ball is launched on the first movement route, the preparation time can be lengthened when the game ball is launched on the second movement route.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first movement path, the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated in a short time by firing the game ball onto the first movement path. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuous activation device is activated (the special game starts) by firing the game ball to the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. . Furthermore, if the player's playing time is limited, by allowing the player to select a movement route that reduces preparation time, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening/closing execution mode. can. This prevents the player from having a bad impression of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement path, various events can be held using the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. becomes possible to execute. In this way, various events occur using the preparation time by firing the game ball to the second movement path, which requires a longer preparation time, thereby reducing the preparation time, which tends to become boring due to low player interest. You can enjoy it depending on the occurrence of events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix N1', the delay means for delaying passage of the game ball launched on the second movement path through the second predetermined area (delaying the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device) is configured to This is to limit or delay the fall of game balls fired from the game board. Such a delay means can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effects of providing the delay means can be easily and reliably enjoyed.

[Appendix N2]
The gaming machine according to appendix N1', wherein the delay means (60, 70) limits or delays the falling of the game ball on the game board (31) for a certain period of time by causing the game ball to orbit.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N2', the falling of the game ball on the game board is restricted or delayed by the delay means that causes the game ball to circulate. That is, the delay means is realized by a means for rotating the game ball. Such a delay means can be easily realized because it can be configured as a known means that is easy to manufacture, for example, a Kroon device.

[Appendix N3']
The gaming machine according to appendix N1', wherein the delay means (60, 70) is a rotating body (70).

In the game machine according to appendix N3', the falling of the game ball on the game board is restricted or delayed by the delay means configured as a rotating body. Since the delay means is a rotating body in this way, the delay means can be realized by known means that are easy to manufacture. Moreover, since the delay means is a rotating body, it becomes easy to control the delay time in the delay means, and it becomes possible to equalize the delay time in the delay means, for example.

[Appendix N4']
Further comprising a rotating body control means (51) for controlling rotation of the rotating body (70),
The rotating body (70) has a storage part (701) that can store game balls,
The rotating body control means (51) starts the rotation of the rotating body (70) from a posture in which the accommodating part (701) is in a fixed position, on the condition that the condition device is activated, and at least Supplementary note N3', characterized in that the rotating body (70) is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed until the rotating body is rotated to a position in which a game ball stored in the part (701) is released. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N4', the rotation of the rotating body is started from a posture in which the accommodating section is in a fixed position, and the rotation continues until the rotating body is rotated at least to the posture in which the game ball accommodated in the accommodating section is released. The body is rotated at a constant or nearly constant speed. In this way, the starting posture of the rotating body is made uniform, and the rotation of the rotating body from the start of the rotating body until the game ball is released is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed, so that the rotating body is started. It is possible to easily equalize the time from when the game ball is released from the rotating body. As a result, the delay time in the delay means can be easily equalized, and for example, when an event is generated while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, the event is not terminated midway and continues as desired. becomes possible to execute.

[Appendix O1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move;
When the game ball is movable and the condition device is activated, the preparation time from when the game ball is launched to when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated is delayed compared to the first movement path (R1). a second movement route (R2);
a benefit granting means (51) for granting a benefit according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific time set as the preparation time;
establishment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition at the specific time when the game ball is launched onto the second movement path (R2) when the condition device is activated;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix O1', when the condition device is activated, the game ball is launched onto the second movement path where the preparation time from when the condition device is activated to when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated is delayed. In this case, an opportunity is provided to satisfy a specific condition at a specific time. As a result, by using the preparation time for the second movement route, which requires a longer preparation time, various events can be generated during the period when specific conditions are met by the success opportunity providing means, and the player's interest is low. Preparation time, which tends to be boring, can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. In this way, it becomes possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix O2']
Supplementary note O1' characterized in that the establishment opportunity providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical index (for example, a point) that can be correlated with a number in correlation with the number of establishments of the specific condition. The gaming machine described in .

[Appendix O3']
The gaming machine according to appendix O2', wherein the establishment opportunity providing means (51) is executed on a display means and provides the numerical index through a numerical index acquisition performance that allows the numerical index to be acquired. .

In the gaming machines according to appendix O2' and appendix O3', the number of fulfillment of a specific condition is provided in correlation with a numerical index acquired by an opportunity provided as a numerical index acquisition effect or the like. In this way, by correlating the number of times a specific condition is met with a numerical index, it is possible to diversify the content of opportunities for a specific condition to be met, and for example, it is possible to execute the opportunities as a point-earning performance such as a game performance. become. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix O4']
Further comprising operation means (20, 21) operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix O3', wherein the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance in which different results are obtained depending on the content of the player's operation on the operation means (20, 21).

In the gaming machine according to appendix O4', the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance in which different results are obtained depending on the content of the player's operation on the operating means. That is, the numerical index acquisition performance is executed as a player participation type performance such as a player participation type game performance. In this way, the progress of the numerical index acquisition performance and the result (the acquired numerical index) are determined by the player's operations, thereby improving the interest in the numerical index acquisition performance.

[Appendix O5']
The gaming machine according to appendix O3', wherein the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical index that can be obtained is determined in advance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O5', the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance selected from a plurality of scenarios in which achievable numerical indicators are determined in advance. That is, the numerical index acquisition performance is executed as a scenario management type performance such as a scenario management type game performance. As a result, a numerical index corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios is always provided even to a player who does not actively participate in a numerical index acquisition performance such as a game performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide benefits according to the numerical index even to players who are not interested in the numerical index acquisition performance, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix O6']
The establishment opportunity providing means (51) is characterized in that, when the numerical index acquisition performance is terminated before the elapse of the specific time, compensation for the numerical index is provided. A gaming machine described in any of '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O6', the numerical index is compensated when the numerical index acquisition performance is ended before the elapse of a specific time. In this way, the numerical indicator is compensated if the specific time is ended before the specific time is reached, so that the game can be played if the specific time in which the specific conditions can be met is shorter than the theoretical time. The disadvantages experienced by players are reduced, and a decline in interest in games is suppressed.

[Appendix O7']
Further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) to delay passage of the game ball launched onto the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix O1' to appendix O6'.

In the game machine according to appendix O7', a delay means is provided on the second movement path to delay the time from the launch of the game ball to the second movement path until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. In this way, by providing the delay means on the second movement path to delay the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the accessory continuous activation device is activated by the game ball launched on the first movement path. A significant time difference can be provided between the time until the game ball is fired and the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball launched on the second movement path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, the game balls are fired on the first movement path and the game balls are fired on the second movement path, and the accessory is continuously activated after the condition device is activated. A significant difference can be made in the preparation time during which the device is activated. Therefore, for example, while it is possible to shorten the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route, it is possible to lengthen the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first movement path, the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated in a short time by firing the game ball onto the first movement path. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuous activation device is activated (the special game starts) by firing the game ball to the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. . Furthermore, if the player's playing time is limited, by allowing the player to select a movement route that reduces preparation time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated or uncomfortable due to the slow start of the opening/closing execution mode. can. This prevents the player from having a bad impression of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement path, various events can be held using the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. becomes possible to execute. In this way, various events occur using the preparation time by firing the game ball to the second movement path, which requires a longer preparation time, thereby reducing the preparation time, which tends to become boring due to low player interest. You can enjoy it depending on the occurrence of events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix P1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is launched and then the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) that take different times to reach the destination;
A first guidance state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movement route (R1) and guidance of the game ball to the second movement route (R2) is restricted; a switching means (80) for switching between a second guiding state in which the game ball can be guided and the guiding of the game ball to the first movement path (R1) is restricted;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to supplementary note P1', the switching means allows the game ball to be guided to the first movement path and is restricted from guiding the game ball to the second movement path, and the first guidance state, and the second movement path. A second guiding state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movement path and a second guiding state in which guiding the game ball to the first movement path is restricted is switched. In this way, by switching the movement path through which the game ball can move by the switching means, the player can move the first movement path and the second movement path by firing the game ball while checking the operation of the switching means. You can choose which of these to move the game ball. This eliminates the need to adjust the firing intensity, which prevents the player from selecting a movement route that is contrary to his or her wishes, thereby suppressing a worsening of the player's impression of the gaming machine.

[Appendix P2']
further comprising a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the switching means (80) between the first guiding state and the second guiding state,
The gaming machine according to appendix P1', wherein the switching control means (51) starts switching control for the switching means (80) when the conditional device is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix P2', switching control for the switching means is started when the conditional device is activated. In this way, by starting the switching control for the switching means when the conditioner is activated, it is possible to recognize that the conditioner has been activated when the switching control for the switching means is started. It can be recognized that the continuous operation device can be operated. This makes it easier for the player to recognize how to respond to the progress of the game, for example, whether or not it is a situation in which he should hit the right hand. It is suppressed that game balls are hit out to the moving path or the second moving path unnecessarily, and the disadvantage (decrease in base (ball output rate)) suffered by the player when the condition device is not activated is reduced.

[Appendix P3']
The switching control means (51) terminates the switching control of the switching means (80) when movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) is detected. The gaming machine according to appendix P2', characterized in that:

In the game machine according to appendix P3', when movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the switching means that is started when the condition device is activated is terminated. Ru. In this way, when the movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the switching means is terminated, so that when the switching control of the switching means is terminated, the first It can be recognized that there is no need to launch the game ball on the moving path or the second moving path. As a result, it is suppressed that game balls are unnecessarily launched into the first movement path and the second movement path, and the disadvantage (decreased base (ball output rate)) suffered by the player is reduced.

[Appendix P4']
When the game ball is launched onto the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed;
Supplementary note P2' or P3', characterized in that the switching control means (51) stops the switching means (80) in the first guiding state when not performing switching control of the switching means (80). The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix P4', when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, the switching means is stopped in the first guiding state. Here, in the first guidance state, it is possible to guide the game ball to the first movement path, and guidance of the game ball to the second movement path where the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed is restricted. In this way, the switching means is stopped in the first guidance state when the switching control of the switching means is not executed, so that the switching means is stopped in the first guidance state, and the conditioner is not activated after the selection of the first movement route and the second movement route is completed. This prevents the game ball from being guided to the second movement path, which sometimes delays the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device. This prevents the game ball from staying unnecessarily on the second movement path that delays the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device, regardless of the progress of the game.

[Appendix Q1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is launched and then the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) that take different times to reach the destination;
If movement of the game ball along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2), a restricting means (51) for restricting the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by a game ball launched on the other movement path different from the one movement path. and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q1', if movement of the game ball in one movement path is detected when the conditional device is activated, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball being launched into the other movement path. Operation is restricted. In this way, when the movement of a game ball on one of the movement paths is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game balls that are launched on the other movement path is restricted, so that one movement path is The accessory continuous operating device is prevented from being activated by the game ball moving on the other moving path until the accessory continuous operating device is activated after being selected. As a result, after the movement route for activating the accessory continuous actuation device is selected, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball on the movement path that goes against the player's will, that is, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the player's intention. This prevents the device from being activated at a timing that is contrary to the timing.

[Appendix Q2']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). including;
The restriction means (51) is configured to control the predetermined area (G1, G2) provided on the other movement path when the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated. The gaming machine according to supplementary note Q1', characterized in that detection of passing of a game ball is restricted in the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q2', if movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated, passage of the game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other movement path is detected. is limited. In this way, when the condition device is activated and the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected, the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area provided on the other movement path is restricted. Then, by simple control, the restriction on the activation of the accessory continuous actuation device by a game ball moving on the other moving path between when one moving path is selected and the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. realizable.

[Appendix Q3']
When the game ball is launched onto the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device is delayed;
The limiting means (51) prevents the game from being played on the second movement path (R2) before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path (R1) is detected when the condition device is activated. The game machine according to supplementary note Q2', characterized in that, when movement of the ball is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game ball launched into the first movement path (R1) is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q3', if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the game ball is launched on the first movement path. The operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball is restricted. Here, since the second moving route is a moving route in which the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is delayed, the second moving route is a moving route in which the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is delayed, so while the operation of the accessory continuous operating device is delayed in the second moving route, the game is moved to the first moving route. When a ball is launched, there is a concern that the accessory continuous actuation device may be activated by the game ball that is later launched into the first movement path, even though the game ball was first launched into the second movement path. be done. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that the accessory continuous actuation device will be activated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the accessory created by the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the operation of the continuous actuation device, the possibility that the accessory continuous actuation device will be actuated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that the accessory continuous activation device will be activated by a game ball that is launched on a moving path that is contrary to the player's will, it is possible to This prevents the actuating device from being actuated, that is, the accessory continuous actuating device from being actuated at an unintended timing.

[Appendix Q4']
When the restricting means (51) restricts the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device by the game balls launched into the other movement path, the action by the game balls launched into the other movement path when a predetermined condition is met. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices Q1' to Q3', further comprising a restriction release means (51) for releasing the restriction on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q4', when the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game balls fired into the other moving path is restricted, the game balls fired into the other moving path when a predetermined condition is met. The restriction on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is lifted. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the moving route for activating the accessory continuous actuating device later when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and thus the convenience in selecting the moving route is improved.

[Appendix Q5']
The gaming machine according to appendix Q4', wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

[Appendix Q6']
The gaming machine according to appendix Q5', wherein the predetermined condition is that movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path before the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. .

In the gaming machines according to appendix Q5' and appendix Q6', the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path before the accessory continuous actuation device is activated (the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path). By establishing a predetermined condition that can be established by the player, such as (that the game ball is fired), it becomes possible to change the movement route for activating the accessory continuous actuation device later. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will, so the player will be able to Convenience is improved.

[Appendix R1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is launched and then the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) that take different times to reach the destination;
If movement of the game ball along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2), a permission means (51) that allows the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by a game ball launched on the other movement path different from the one movement path. and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix R1', if movement of the game ball in one movement path is detected when the conditional device is activated, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball being launched into the other movement path. Operation is allowed. When the condition device is activated in this way, if the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game balls launched on the other movement path is permitted. After one movement path is selected, the game ball is launched onto the other movement path, thereby making it possible to change the movement path for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix R2']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined areas (G1, G2) include a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1), and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine according to appendix R1', characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

In the gaming machine according to appendix R2', a predetermined area that provides an opportunity for activation of the accessory continuous activation device is provided in each of the first movement path and the second movement path. As long as the game ball has not passed through a predetermined area provided on one of the movement routes, even if the game ball is first launched on one movement route, the game ball will be launched on the other movement route later. This makes it possible to change the predetermined area in which the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. For example, the time it takes for the accessory continuous activation device to be activated when the game ball is launched on one moving path is different from the time required for the accessory continuous activation device to be activated when the game ball is launched onto the other moving path. If the time is longer than the time it takes to activate the accessory continuous actuation device, it is possible to shorten the time it takes to activate the accessory continuous actuation device by later firing the game ball to the other moving path.

[Appendix R3']
The accessory continuous activation device is activated when a game ball is detected by the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) when the condition device is activated,
The predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) includes a first predetermined area detection means (Gs1) that detects that a game ball has passed through the first predetermined area (G1), and a second predetermined area (G2). The gaming machine according to appendix R2', characterized in that it includes a second predetermined area detection means (Gs2) that detects that the gaming ball has passed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R3', when passage of the game ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means provided on the first movement route or the second predetermined area detection means provided on the second movement route, The accessory continuous actuation device is activated. In this way, when the game ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection means or the second predetermined area detection means, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, and with a simple configuration and control, one movement can be performed. Even after the game ball is launched onto the route, it becomes possible to activate the accessory continuous actuation device by launching the game ball onto the other moving route.

[Appendix R4']
If movement of the game ball in the one movement path is detected during the waiting period from when the condition device is activated until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the game ball is fired to the other movement path. Further comprising a restriction means (51) for restricting the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball,
The permitting means (51) is configured to prevent the game ball from playing on the other moving path by the restricting means (51) when movement of the game ball on the one moving path is detected during the preparation time. Allowing the continuous operation device to operate for a certain period of time,
The limiting means (51) prevents the movement of the game ball on the other movement path from when the allowing means (51) starts restricting the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device until the certain period of time has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix R1' to appendix R3', characterized in that, if the game ball is not detected, the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device by the game ball launched into the other moving path is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R4', if the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected during the standby period, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game balls that are launched on the other movement path for a certain period of time. is allowed, and if the movement of the game ball on the other movement path is not detected before a certain period of time has elapsed, the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path is restricted. That is, for a certain period of time, it is possible to change the movement route in which the accessory continuous actuation device is operated, and after the certain period of time has elapsed, the movement path is restricted from being changed. As a result, if the player wishes to change the movement route by selecting a movement route against the player's will before a certain period of time has elapsed, it is possible to change the movement route, but after a certain period of time has elapsed, the player will be able to change the movement route against the player's will. The movement route for operating the continuous operating device is prevented from being changed, and it becomes possible to more appropriately reflect the player's intention.

[Appendix R5']
Further comprising a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) to delay passage of the game ball launched onto the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix R1' to appendix R4'.

In the game machine according to appendix R5', a delay means is provided on the second movement path for delaying the time from the launching of the game ball to the second movement path until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. In this way, by providing the delay means on the second movement path to delay the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the accessory continuous activation device is activated by the game ball launched on the first movement path. A significant time difference can be provided between the time until the game ball is fired and the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball launched on the second movement path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, the game balls are fired on the first movement path and the game balls are fired on the second movement path, and the accessory is continuously activated after the condition device is activated. A significant difference can be made in the preparation time during which the device is activated. Therefore, for example, while it is possible to shorten the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route, it is possible to lengthen the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first movement path, the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated in a short time by firing the game ball onto the first movement path. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuous activation device is activated (the special game starts) by firing the game ball to the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. . Furthermore, if the player's playing time is limited, by allowing the player to select a movement route that reduces preparation time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated or uncomfortable due to the slow start of the opening/closing execution mode. can. This prevents the player from having a bad impression of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement path, various events can be held using the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. becomes possible to execute. In this way, various events occur using the preparation time by firing the game ball to the second movement path, which requires a longer preparation time, thereby reducing the preparation time, which tends to become boring due to low player interest. You can enjoy it depending on the occurrence of events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix S1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player for whom the accessory continuous activation device is activated (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a condition device that is activated on the condition that the result of the determination by the determination means (41) is to execute the special game, and whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device;
A first movement path (R1) and a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is launched and then the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) that take different times to reach the destination;
a benefit granting means (51) that grants a benefit when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific time set between when the condition device is activated and when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated;
establishment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition at the specific time;
specific period ending means (51) for forcibly ending the specific period when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix S1', the specific period is forcibly terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, the specific period can be shortened by ending the specific period even before the specific period has elapsed. As a result, it becomes possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device, for example, before the elapse of a specific period, and the accessory continuous operation device can be activated at various timings, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix S2']
The gaming machine according to appendix S1', wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player during the specific period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix S2', it is possible for the player to satisfy a predetermined condition within a specific period. In this way, by allowing the player to satisfy the predetermined condition during the specific period, it becomes possible to end the specific period at the player's will. This makes it possible for the player to determine the timing for activating the accessory continuous activation device even after the start of the specific period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix S3']
The establishment opportunity providing means (51) is configured to provide a means for providing a game ball when movement of a game ball along one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) is detected during the waiting period. starting the specific period;
The predetermined condition is different from the one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) between the start of the specific period and the end of the specific period. The gaming machine according to appendix S2', wherein the gaming ball is detected on the other moving route.

In the gaming machine according to appendix S3', the specific period set as the standby period is started by the detection of the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths, and the game ball is detected on the other movement path before the specified period elapses. The specified period will be forcibly terminated if In this way, the specific period set as the waiting period starts when the movement of the game ball is detected on one of the movement paths, and the specified period is specified when the game ball is detected on the other movement path before the specified period elapses. By forcibly ending the period, after a specific period has started by firing a game ball into one movement route, the specific period can be easily ended by simply firing a game ball into the other movement path. .

[Appendix S4']
Further, a delay means (60, 70) is provided on the second movement path (R2) and delays activation of the accessory continuous actuation device by the game ball launched onto the second movement path (R2). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes S1' to Supplementary Notes S3'.

In the game machine according to appendix S4', a delay means is provided on the second movement path for delaying the time from the launch of the game ball to the second movement path until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. In this way, by providing the delay means on the second movement path to delay the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, the accessory continuous activation device is activated by the game ball launched on the first movement path. A significant time difference can be provided between the time until the game ball is fired and the time until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by the game ball launched on the second movement path. In other words, when the condition device is activated, the game balls are fired on the first movement path and the game balls are fired on the second movement path, and the accessory is continuously activated after the condition device is activated. A significant difference can be made in the preparation time during which the device is activated. Therefore, for example, while it is possible to shorten the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route, it is possible to lengthen the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route.

By shortening the preparation time when the game ball is launched onto the first movement path, the accessory continuous actuation device can be activated in a short time by firing the game ball onto the first movement path. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuous activation device is activated (the special game starts) by firing the game ball to the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. . Furthermore, if the player's playing time is limited, by allowing the player to select a movement route that reduces preparation time, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening/closing execution mode. can. This prevents the player from having a bad impression of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, by lengthening the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement path, various events can be held using the preparation time from when the condition device is activated until when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. becomes possible to execute. In this way, various events occur using the preparation time by firing the game ball to the second movement path, which requires a longer preparation time, thereby reducing the preparation time, which tends to become boring due to low player interest. You can enjoy it depending on the occurrence of events. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest during the preparation time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix S5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices S1' to S4', wherein the benefit granting means (51) grants a benefit according to the number of the specific conditions that are satisfied in the specific time.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S5', benefits are given according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific period. In this way, by granting benefits according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specific period, it is possible to draw attention to the number of specific conditions that are met, rather than just whether or not the specific conditions are met. Therefore, the interest in the game is further improved. Furthermore, by providing benefits according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the preparation time, the content of the benefits can be diversified, making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix S6']
Supplementary note S5' characterized in that the establishment opportunity providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical index (for example, a point) that can be correlated with a number in correlation with the number of establishments of the specific condition. The gaming machine described in .

[Appendix S7']
The gaming machine according to appendix S6', wherein the establishment opportunity providing means (51) is executed in a display means and provides the numerical index through a numerical index acquisition performance that allows the numerical index to be acquired. .

In the gaming machines according to appendix S6' and appendix S7', the number of fulfillment of a specific condition is provided in correlation with a numerical index acquired by an opportunity provided as a numerical index acquisition effect or the like. In this way, by correlating the number of times a specific condition is met with a numerical index, it is possible to diversify the content of opportunities for a specific condition to be met, and for example, it is possible to execute the opportunities as a point-earning performance such as a game performance. become. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix S8']
Further comprising operation means (20, 21) operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix S7', wherein the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance in which different results are obtained depending on the content of the player's operation on the operation means (20, 21).

In the gaming machine according to appendix S8', the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance in which different results are obtained depending on the content of the player's operation on the operating means. That is, the numerical index acquisition performance is executed as a player participation type performance such as a player participation type game performance. In this way, the progress of the numerical index acquisition performance and the result (the acquired numerical index) are determined by the player's operations, thereby improving the interest in the numerical index acquisition performance.

[Appendix S9']
The gaming machine according to appendix S7', wherein the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical index that can be obtained is determined in advance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix S9', the numerical index acquisition performance is a performance selected from a plurality of scenarios in which achievable numerical indicators are determined in advance. That is, the numerical index acquisition performance is executed as a scenario management type performance such as a scenario management type game performance. As a result, a numerical index corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios is always provided even to a player who does not actively participate in a numerical index acquisition performance such as a game performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide benefits according to the numerical index even to players who are not interested in the numerical index acquisition performance, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix S10']
The establishment opportunity providing means (51) is characterized in that, when the numerical index acquisition performance is terminated before the elapse of the specific time, compensation for the numerical index is provided.Additional notes S7' to S9 A gaming machine described in any of '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix S10', the numerical index is compensated when the numerical index acquisition performance is ended before the elapse of a specific time. In this way, the numerical indicator is compensated if the specific time is ended before the specific time is reached, so that the game can be played if the specific time in which the specific conditions can be met is shorter than the theoretical time. The disadvantages experienced by players are reduced, and a decline in interest in games is suppressed.

[Appendix T1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and the second entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward the sphere area (G2),
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2), the special game generating means (41) executes a predetermined determination process and then generates the special game ball. A gaming machine characterized by generating games.

In the game machine according to appendix T1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball along the first movement path, it is possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball along the second movement path, the generation of the special game can be delayed. , it becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of special games is delayed.

[Appendix T2']
Supplementary note T1 characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is a state in which notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game has been completed by a notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified. 'A game machine described in '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T2', the predetermined gaming state is a state in which the notification that the determination result is that a special game will be executed has been completed by the notification game. In other words, when the condition device necessary for the execution of a special game in which the accessory continuous activation device is activated and a game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, a special game occurs. A special game is generated by the means. Therefore, when the condition device is operating, a special game can be executed by launching a game ball to either the first movement path or the second movement path, and the occurrence of unnecessary special games is restricted. can.

[Appendix T3']
The gaming machine according to appendix T2', wherein the predetermined gaming state is a state before execution of the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T3', the predetermined gaming state is a state before execution of the special game is started. That is, the predetermined game state is a state in which the condition device is activated, before the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, and before the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. be. This prevents a new special game from being generated after the special game has occurred.

[Appendix T4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1' to T3', wherein the predetermined determination process is a determination process of whether or not the special game is in a state in which it is possible to generate the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T4', the predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area determines whether or not a special game can be generated. It is processing. As a result, when a game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, a special game is generated when a special game can be generated, and a special game is not generated when a special game can be generated. Sometimes unnecessary occurrences of special games are prevented.

[Appendix T5']
In a state where the special game generation means (41) can generate the special game, the game ball moves along one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2). is detected, the first ball entry area (G1) is provided on the other movement path different from the one movement path of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). or further comprising a restriction means (51) for restricting the generation of the special game by the special game generation means (41) based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry area (G2);
The predetermined determination process is performed by the special game generating means based on the fact that a game ball is entered into the first ball entry area (12) and the second ball entry area (G2) by the limiting means (51). The gaming machine according to appendix T4', characterized in that the process of determining whether or not the occurrence of the special game is restricted according to (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T5', the predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is performed when the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area in a state where a special game can be generated. This is a process for determining whether or not generation of a special game by the special game generation means based on the game ball being entered into the second ball entry area is restricted. That is, when the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected in a state in which a special game can be generated, the generation of the special game by the game balls launched on the other movement path is restricted. In this way, when the movement of a game ball on one movement path is detected in a state where a special game can be generated, the generation of a special game by a game ball that is launched on the other movement path is restricted, A special game is generated by a game ball moving on the other movement path between when one movement path is selected and when a special game is generated by the game ball passing through the ball entry area provided on one movement path. be prevented from being As a result, after a movement path that generates a special game is selected, a special game can be generated by a game ball on a movement path that is contrary to the player's will, that is, a special game can be caused by the passage of time (timing) that is contrary to the player's will. This will be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix T6']
From appendix T1', further comprising a movement restriction means (48, 481) for restricting mutual movement of the game ball between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). The gaming machine described in any of appendix T5'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T6', mutual movement of the game ball between the first movement path and the second movement path is restricted by the movement restriction means. In this way, mutual movement of the game ball between the first movement path and the second movement path is restricted, so that the game ball launched on the first movement path may be moved to the second movement path during the first movement path. The movement path is prevented from being changed to the movement path, and on the contrary, the movement path of the game ball launched to the second movement path is prevented from being changed to the first movement path during the movement of the second movement path. This will be prevented. Thereby, it becomes possible to generate a special game by passing the game ball to the ball entry area provided on the movement path where the game ball is first launched, and it is possible to appropriately impart the intended playability.

[Appendix T7']
The gaming machine according to appendix T6', wherein the movement restriction means (48, 481) defines a distance between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2).

[Appendix T8']
The first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) define a movement path of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31),
The movement restriction means (48, 481) controls the game between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix T6' or T7', characterized in that mutual movement of balls is restricted.

In the gaming machines according to appendix T7' and appendix T8', the movement restriction means defines the distance between the first movement route and the second movement route. As described above, since the movement restricting means defines between the first movement route and the second movement route, the first movement route and the second movement route are determined by the structure itself that defines the first movement route and the second movement route. Mutual movement of the game ball with the second movement path can be restricted.

[Appendix T9']
Display means (341) on which a predetermined effect is executed;
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect ends. and means (51) for terminating the effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1' to T8', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix T9', when the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect is ended when the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. In this way, when the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect is terminated by the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, so that the game ball is launched onto the first movement path, for example. Since the game ball that is launched can immediately pass through the first ball entry area, it is possible to immediately finish the predetermined performance, while the game ball that is launched on the second movement path is delayed in passing through the second ball entry area. Because of this, it is not possible to immediately end the predetermined performance. Therefore, the player can select the first moving route and the second moving route depending on whether or not he or she wants to check the predetermined performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix T10']
Supplementary note characterized in that the predetermined performance is executed based on the end of notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game by a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41). The gaming machine described in T9'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T10', the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that the special game will be executed. In this way, by executing the predetermined effect based on the completion of the notification that the special game will be executed, the predetermined effect can be performed appropriately in the special game without interfering with the effect being executed in the notification game. Can be executed.

[Appendix T11']
The gaming machine according to appendix T10', wherein the performance ending means (51) ends the predetermined performance based on the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T11', the predetermined performance is ended based on the execution of the special game. In this way, by ending the predetermined performance based on the execution of the special game, the performance in the special game can be appropriately executed without the predetermined performance interfering with the performance performed in the special game.

[Appendix T12']
The predetermined effect is when the notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the judgment result is to execute the special game is completed, the second moving route (R2) The gaming machine according to appendix T10' or appendix T11', characterized in that the gaming machine includes an effect that is started when a game ball is detected at .

In the gaming machine according to appendix T12', the predetermined performance includes a performance that is started when a game ball is detected on the second movement route after the end of the notification that a special game will be executed. In this way, by including the performance that is triggered by the detection of the game ball on the second movement route after the end of the notification that the special game will be executed, the predetermined performance can cause the game ball to move on the second movement route. A predetermined effect is executed while the flow of the image is delayed. Thereby, since the execution time of the predetermined performance can be set longer, various performances can be executed as the predetermined performance, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the predetermined performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix T13']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix T9' to appendix T12', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of performance information serving as an index indicating ball payout performance.

[Appendix T14']
Storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities) determined by the determination means (41) to execute the special game (jackpot game); ,
From the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41), one numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability is selected for the determination means (41) to determine whether or not to execute the special game. selection means (41) to
Furthermore,
The determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantageous determination probability according to the one numerical information selected by the selecting means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix T13', wherein the performance information is information that allows the one numerical information to be specified or estimated.

[Appendix T15']
The gaming machine according to appendix T14', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendices T13' to T15', as the predetermined performance, a performance is performed in which at least a part of information that allows estimation of ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability, is presented. . As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix T16']
When the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect is executed when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2). A performance ending means (51) for ending the performance;
performance re-execution means (51) for re-executing the predetermined performance based on establishment of the predetermined condition when the predetermined performance is terminated by the performance termination means (51);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T9' to T15', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix T16', by re-executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to secure many opportunities to confirm the predetermined effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase interest in the game through the predetermined performance.

[Appendix T17']
The gaming machine according to appendix T16', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined performance is ended by the performance ending means (51) before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T17', the predetermined condition is that the predetermined performance is ended before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives. That is, if the predetermined performance is ended before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives, the predetermined performance is re-executed. In this way, if the predetermined performance is ended before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives, the predetermined performance will be re-executed, so even if the predetermined performance is interrupted midway, the predetermined performance will be re-executed as compensation. can be executed to the end. Thereby, it becomes possible to further increase interest in the game through the predetermined performance.

[Appendix T18']
The predetermined performance includes a notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified, from the end of the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game to the first ball entry area (G1) or the Executed during a specific period set for the period until the game ball passes through the second ball entry area (G2),
The gaming machine according to appendix T16' or T17', wherein the performance re-execution means re-executes the predetermined performance when the special game is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T18', the predetermined performance is a notification game and the determination result is from the end of the notification that a special game will be executed until the game ball passes through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. The predetermined performance is executed during a specific period set during the period of , and is re-executed when a special game is generated. In this way, the predetermined performance is executed in a specific period, and when a special game is generated, the predetermined performance is re-executed, thereby making it possible to execute the predetermined performance in the special game. In other words, if the predetermined performance is interrupted midway due to the passing of the game ball to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, the game ball may pass to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance in the special game that is generated. As a result, when the predetermined performance is terminated, it becomes possible to immediately re-execute the predetermined performance after the predetermined performance ends, reducing the time during which the predetermined performance is interrupted, and preventing the predetermined performance from being forcibly terminated midway. Even if the predetermined effect is executed continuously until the end, the predetermined effect is executed without any discomfort.

[Appendix T19']
The special game includes a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player,
As described in appendix T18', the performance re-execution means re-executes the predetermined performance when a specific special game among the plurality of special games is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T19', the predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, when a specific special game is generated among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player when a predetermined condition is met, the predetermined effect is re-executed, so that the specific special game is As a bonus for being executed, the predetermined performance is re-executed.

[Appendix T20']
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game (jackpot game) with a first probability based on the establishment of the determination condition. is determined by the determining means (41) at a second probability that is higher than the first probability based on the first special game (normally jackpot) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the establishment of the determination condition. A second special game (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether to execute the special game (jackpot game) after the special game ends;
The gaming machine according to appendix T19', wherein the specific special game is the first special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T20', it is determined that the special game is a first special game that is shifted to the first gaming state after the end of the special game, and that the special game is shifted to the special game from the first gaming state after the end of the special game. A second special game is transferred to a second game state with a high probability of being played, and when the predetermined performance is forcibly terminated, the predetermined performance is re-executed on the condition that it is the first special game. That is, when the first special game that is more disadvantageous than the second game is executed, the predetermined performance that is forcibly terminated is re-executed as compensation.

[Appendix T21']
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game (jackpot game) with a first probability based on the establishment of the determination condition. is determined by the determining means (41) at a second probability that is higher than the first probability based on the first special game (normally jackpot) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the establishment of the determination condition. A second special game (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether to execute the special game (jackpot game) after the special game ends;
The gaming machine according to appendix T19', wherein the specific special game is the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T21', it is determined that the special game is a first special game that is shifted to the first gaming state after the end of the special game, and that the special game is shifted to the special game from the first gaming state after the end of the special game. A second special game is transferred to a second game state with a high probability of being played, and when the predetermined performance is forcibly terminated, the predetermined performance is re-executed on the condition that it is the first special game. In other words, the predetermined performance that is forcibly terminated when the second special game that is more advantageous than the first game is executed is re-executed. As a result, the advantage of re-executing a predetermined performance that is forcibly terminated in the case of an advantageous second special game is provided, and the advantage of the second special game is further improved.

[Appendix T22']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix T16' to appendix T21', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of performance information serving as an index indicating ball payout performance.

[Appendix T23']
Storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities) determined by the determination means (41) to execute the special game (jackpot game); ,
From the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41), one numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability is selected for the determination means (41) to determine whether or not to execute the special game. selection means (41) to
Furthermore,
The determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantageous determination probability according to the one numerical information selected by the selecting means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix T22', wherein the performance information is information that allows the one numerical information to be specified or estimated.

[Appendix T24']
The gaming machine according to appendix T23', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendices T22' to T24', as a predetermined performance, a performance is performed in which at least a part of information from which ball payout performance can be estimated, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability, is presented. . Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the predetermined effect is information that allows estimation of the ball output performance, the predetermined effect is re-executed after the predetermined effect is finished, giving many opportunities to estimate the ball output performance, which improves the game. You will be able to enjoy the progress even more.

[Appendix T25']
From appendix T1', further comprising a movable receiving member (80) provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of receiving game balls to the second movement path (R2). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix T24'.

In the game machine according to appendix T25', the movable receiving member provided upstream of the second ball entry area allows the game ball to be received into the second movement path. In this way, since the movable receiving member provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry area can receive the game ball into the second movement path, the game ball can be moved to the second movement path with a simple configuration. , it becomes possible to generate a special game by entering the game ball into the second ball entry area on the second movement path.

[Appendix T26']
The movable receiving member (80) has a first state in which it can accept game balls into the second movement path (R2), and a second state in which it restricts the reception of game balls into the second movement path (R2). The gaming machine according to appendix T25', wherein the gaming machine is capable of switching between states.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T26', the movable receiving member switches between a first state in which it can accept game balls into the second movement path and a second state in which it restricts acceptance of game balls into the second movement path. It is possible. In this way, the movable receiving member can switch between the first state in which it can accept game balls into the second movement path and the second state in which it restricts the reception of game balls into the second movement path. In the first state, the game ball enters the second ball entry area of the second movement path to generate a special game, and in the second state, the game ball enters the second ball entry area of the second movement path. This prevents a special game from occurring unnecessarily due to the ball entering the ball.

[Appendix T27']
The movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the first state, and restricts the reception of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix T26', characterized in that acceptance is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T27', the movable receiving member restricts acceptance of game balls to the first movement path in the first state, and restricts reception of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the second state. It is possible. In this way, the movable receiving member restricts acceptance of game balls to the first movement path in the first state, and allows reception of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the second state. , a game ball that is launched while being received on the first movement path is prevented from being received on the second movement path against the player's will; A game ball fired in a state where the ball can be received is prevented from being received in the first movement path against the player's will.

[Appendix T28']
Further comprising a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the movable receiving member (80) between the first state and the second state,
The switching control means (51) controls the movable receiving member (51) when the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game is completed due to the notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified. 80) The gaming machine according to any one of appendix T25' to appendix T27', characterized in that switching control for 80) is started.

In the game machine according to appendix T28', switching control for the movable receiving member is started when the notification game ends to notify that the determination result is that a special game will be executed. In this way, if the switching control for the movable receiving member is started when the notification that the determination result is that the special game is to be executed by the notification game ends, the switching control for the movable receiving member is started. It is possible to recognize that the special game is in a state where it is possible to generate a special game. This makes it easier for the player to recognize how to respond to the progress of the game, for example, whether or not it is a situation in which he should play right-handed. It is suppressed that the game balls are unnecessarily launched into the movement path and the second movement path, and the disadvantage (decreased base (ball output rate)) suffered by the player in a state where a special game cannot be generated is reduced. .

[Appendix T29']
The switching control means (51) controls switching of the movable receiving member (80) when movement of the game ball on the first movement path (R1) or the second movement path (R2) is detected. The gaming machine according to appendix T28', characterized in that the gaming machine is terminated.

In the game machine according to appendix T29', when the movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the movable receiving member is ended. In this way, when the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated when movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated. It can be recognized that there is no need to launch the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path. As a result, game balls are prevented from being ejected into the first movement path or the second movement path, and the disadvantage suffered by the player (decrease in base (ball output rate)) is reduced.

[Appendix T30']
Further comprising a restriction means for restricting the occurrence of the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix T1' to appendix T29'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T30', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is restricted. In this way, by restricting the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are restricted. A special game is generated when a game ball enters the intended ball entry area in the second ball entry area, and a special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball entering an unintended ball entry area. be done.

[Appendix T31']
The gaming machine according to appendix T30', wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T31', the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result for executing the special game, so that the ball entry area to be executed by the special game is one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. It is limited to the other ball entry area that is different from one ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated when a game ball enters the target ball entry area of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game occurs when the game ball enters the other ball entry area that is not the intended ball entry area. A special game is prevented from occurring due to the ball entering.

[Appendix T32']
Supplementary note T31' characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game is terminated by a notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix T32', the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified. In this way, a state in which a special game cannot be generated because the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this case, a special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball entering the other ball entering area.

[Appendix T33']
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and The movement of the game ball along one of the second movement paths (R2) is different from the one movement path of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). The game machine according to appendix T32', characterized in that the game ball is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other different movement path.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T33', when the notification game ends to inform that the determination result is to execute a special game, the movement of the game ball on one movement path is changed to the game ball on the other movement path. If it is detected before the movement of the other movement path, the occurrence of a special game due to the passage of the game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other movement path is restricted. In this way, when the notification game ends to notify that the judgment result is to execute a special game, the movement of the game ball on one movement path is earlier than the movement of the game ball on the other movement path. If detected, the occurrence of a special game due to the passage of a game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving route is restricted, thereby reducing the time until one moving route is selected and a special game occurs. A special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball moving on the other moving path in between. As a result, after the movement route that generates the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement path that is contrary to the player's will, that is, the special game is caused by the passage of time (timing) that is contrary to the player's will. This will be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix T34']
The one movement route is the second movement route (R2),
The gaming machine according to appendix T33', wherein the other moving route is the first moving route (R1).

In the game machine according to appendix T34', if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the game ball is launched on the first movement path. Occurrence of special games using game balls is restricted. Here, since the second movement path is a movement path in which the falling of the game ball is delayed, that is, the movement path in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed, while the occurrence of the special game is delayed in the second movement path, When a game ball is launched on the first movement route, a special game is generated by the game ball that is later launched on the first movement route, even though the game ball has been launched on the second movement route first. This is a concern. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path, a special game using the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the occurrence of this, the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is launched on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention, a special game can be generated by a game ball that is hit on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention. In other words, the special game is prevented from occurring at an unexpected timing.

[Appendix T35']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T30' to T34', further comprising a restriction canceling means for canceling the restriction on the occurrence of the special game when a specific condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T35', when a specific condition is met, the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is restricted. It will be canceled. In this way, when the specific conditions are met, the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball being entered into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is lifted. After selecting the occurrence of a special game using one ball entry area, it becomes possible to change to the occurrence of a special game using the other ball entry area.

[Appendix T36']
The gaming machine according to appendix T35', wherein the specific condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T36', the specific condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, since the specific condition is a condition that can be established by the player, the player can change the ball entry area in which the special game occurs according to his/her will. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix T37']
The gaming machine according to appendix T35' or T36', wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determining means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T37', the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result for executing the special game, so that the ball entry area to be executed by the special game is one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. It is limited to the other ball entry area which is different from one ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated by the entry of a game ball into the target ball entry area of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the other ball entry area which is the target of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. A special game is prevented from occurring due to the ball entering.

[Appendix T38']
Supplementary note T37' characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game is terminated by the notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix T38', the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified. In this way, a state in which a special game cannot be generated because the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this case, a special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball entering the other ball entering area.

[Appendix T39']
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and The movement of the game ball along one of the second movement paths (R2) is different from the one movement path of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). The game machine according to appendix T38', characterized in that the game ball is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other different movement path.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T39', when the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected in a state where the determination result can generate a special game due to the notification game in which the predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means, Detection of passage of the game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving path is restricted. In this way, in a state where a special game can be generated, by restricting the detection of the passing of a game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving route, one moving route is selected and a special game is generated. By simple control, it is possible to restrict the special game from being generated by the game ball moving on the other moving path until the game is played.

[Appendix T40']
The specific condition is a period from the end of the notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the judgment result is to execute the special game until the special game is executed. The gaming machine according to appendix T39', wherein movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path during that time.

In the game machine according to appendix T40', the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path (a predetermined number of game balls are detected on the other movement path) before the special game occurs (the accessory continuous actuation device is activated). By establishing a specific condition that can be established by the player, such as firing a number of game balls), it is possible to later change the movement path that causes the special game to occur (the accessory continuous actuation device is activated). Become. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix T41']
The one ball entry area is the first ball entry area (G1),
The gaming machine according to appendix T40', wherein the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T41', one ball entry area is the first ball entry area, and the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area. Here, since the second movement path where the second ball entry area is provided is a movement path where the falling of the game ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of the special game is delayed, the second movement path is the movement path where the special game is delayed. A game in which, if a game ball is launched on the first movement path while the occurrence is delayed, the game ball is fired on the first movement path later, even though the game ball is fired on the second movement path first. There is a concern that special games may occur due to the ball. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path, a special game using the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the occurrence of this, the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is launched on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention, a special game can be generated by a game ball that is hit on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention. In other words, the special game is prevented from being activated at an unexpected timing.

In addition, since one ball entry area is the first ball entry area and the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in the second movement path where the occurrence of the special game is delayed. If it is desired to immediately generate a special game during the delay, it becomes possible to immediately generate the special game by firing the game ball to the first movement path.

[Appendix T42']
Any one of appendices T1' to T41', characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) to move the game ball to. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix T42', the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball to. In this way, by allowing the player to select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball to, the player can select the length of time until the special game is executed. becomes possible. As a result, the player's intention is reflected in the selection of the time until the special game is executed, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling stressed.

[Appendix T43']
The player is characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) to move the game ball to by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. The gaming machine described in appendix T42'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T43', the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball to by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this way, by allowing the player to select either the first movement route or the second movement route depending on the firing intensity of the game ball, it is possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed. becomes possible.

[Appendix T44']
A first state provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of accepting game balls to the second movement path (R2), and a game ball to the first movement path (R1). The gaming machine according to appendix T42', further comprising a movable receiving member (80) that can be switched between a second state in which it is possible to receive a second state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T44', the movable receiving member switches between a first state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second movement path and a second state in which the game ball can be accepted into the first movement path. It will be done. In this way, by being able to switch between the first state in which the movable receiving member can accept game balls to the second movement path and the second state in which it can accept game balls to the first movement path, the movable receiving member By firing the game ball while checking the attitude of the receiving member, the first movement path and the second movement path can be selected, making it possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed. Become.

[Appendix T45']
The movable receiving member (80) limits the acceptance of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the first state, and limits the reception of game balls to the second movement path (R2) in the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix T44', characterized in that acceptance is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T45', the movable receiving member restricts acceptance of game balls to the first movement path in the first state, and restricts reception of game balls to the second movement path in the second state. . In this way, the movable receiving member restricts the reception of game balls to the first movement path in the first state, and restricts the reception of game balls to the second movement path in the second state. A game ball that is launched while the game ball is accepted in the movement path is prevented from being received in the second movement path against the player's will, and conversely, the game ball is not accepted in the second movement path. This prevents game balls fired in a state where the ball is being held in the first movement path against the player's will.

[Appendix U1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
movement restricting means (48, 481) for restricting mutual movement of the game ball between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2);
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and the second entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward the sphere area (G2),
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2), the special game generating means (41) executes a predetermined determination process and then generates the special game ball. A gaming machine characterized by generating games.

In the game machine according to appendix U1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball along the first movement path, it is possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball along the second movement path, the generation of the special game can be delayed. , it becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of special games is delayed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix U1', mutual movement of the game ball between the first movement path and the second movement path is restricted by the movement restriction means. In this way, mutual movement of the game ball between the first movement path and the second movement path is restricted, so that the game ball launched on the first movement path may be moved to the second movement path during the first movement path. The movement path is prevented from being changed to the movement path, and on the contrary, the movement path of the game ball launched to the second movement path is prevented from being changed to the first movement path during the movement of the second movement path. This will be prevented. Thereby, it becomes possible to generate a special game by passing the game ball to the ball entry area provided on the movement path where the game ball is first launched, and it is possible to appropriately impart the intended playability.

[Appendix U2']
The gaming machine according to appendix U1', wherein the movement restriction means (48, 481) defines a distance between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2).

[Appendix U3']
The first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) define a movement path of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31),
The movement restriction means (48, 481) controls the game between the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix U1', characterized in that mutual movement of balls is restricted.

In the gaming machines according to appendices U2' and U3', the movement restriction means defines the distance between the first movement route and the second movement route. As described above, since the movement restricting means defines between the first movement route and the second movement route, the first movement route and the second movement route are determined by the structure itself that defines the first movement route and the second movement route. Mutual movement of the game ball with the second movement path can be restricted.

[Appendix V1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
Display means (341) on which a predetermined effect is executed;
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect ends. and means (51) for terminating the effect.
Equipped with
The game ball falling delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and a ball entry area. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward (G1, G2),
A game characterized in that the special game generation means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the ball entry area (G1, G2). Machine.

In the game machine according to appendix V1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball on the first movement path, it is possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball on the second movement path, the generation of the special game can be delayed, It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix V1', when the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect is ended when the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. In this way, when the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect is ended when the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, so that, for example, the game ball is launched onto the first movement path. Since the game ball that is launched can immediately pass through the first ball entry area, it is possible to immediately finish the predetermined performance, while the game ball that is launched on the second movement path is delayed in passing through the second ball entry area. Because of this, it is not possible to immediately end the predetermined performance. Therefore, the player can select the first moving route and the second moving route depending on whether or not he or she wants to check the predetermined effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix V2']
Supplementary note characterized in that the predetermined performance is executed based on the end of notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game by a notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41). The gaming machine described in V1'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix V2', the predetermined performance is executed based on the end of the notification that the special game will be executed. In this way, by executing the predetermined effect based on the completion of the notification that the special game will be executed, the predetermined effect can be performed appropriately in the special game without interfering with the effect being executed in the notification game. Can be executed.

[Appendix V3']
The gaming machine according to appendix V2', wherein the performance ending means (51) ends the predetermined performance based on the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix V3', the predetermined performance is ended based on the execution of the special game. In this way, by ending the predetermined performance based on the execution of the special game, the performance in the special game can be appropriately executed without the predetermined performance interfering with the performance performed in the special game.

[Appendix V4']
The predetermined effect is when the notification game that notifies the judgment result by the judgment means (41) that the judgment result is to execute the special game is completed, the second moving route (R2) The gaming machine according to appendix V2' or V3', characterized in that the gaming machine includes an effect that is started when a game ball is detected at .

In the game machine according to appendix V4', the predetermined performance includes a performance that is started when a game ball is detected on the second movement route after the end of the notification that a special game will be executed. In this way, by including the performance that is triggered by the detection of the game ball on the second movement route after the end of the notification that the special game will be executed, the predetermined performance can cause the game ball to move on the second movement route. A predetermined effect is executed while the flow of the image is delayed. As a result, since the execution time of the predetermined performance can be set longer, the predetermined performance can be performed in a variety of ways, and the player's interest in the predetermined performance can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix V5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices V1' to V4', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of performance information serving as an index indicating ball payout performance.

[Appendix V6']
Storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities) determined by the determination means (41) to execute the special game (jackpot game); ,
From the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41), one numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability is selected for the determination means (41) to determine whether or not to execute the special game. selection means (41) to
Furthermore,
The determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantageous determination probability according to the one numerical information selected by the selecting means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix V5', wherein the performance information is information that allows the one numerical information to be specified or estimated.

[Appendix V7']
The gaming machine according to appendix V6', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendices V5' to V7', as a predetermined performance, a performance is performed in which at least a part of information from which ball payout performance can be estimated, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability, is presented. . Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix W1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
Display means (341) on which a predetermined effect is executed;
When the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect is executed when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2). A performance ending means (51) for ending the performance;
performance re-execution means (51) for re-executing the predetermined performance based on establishment of the predetermined condition when the predetermined performance is terminated by the performance termination means (51);
Equipped with
The game ball falling delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and a ball entry area. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward (G1, G2),
A game characterized in that the special game generation means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the ball entry area (G1, G2). Machine.

In the game machine according to appendix W1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball on the first movement path, it becomes possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball on the second movement path, the generation of the special game is delayed, It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix W1', when the predetermined performance is executed, the predetermined performance is ended when the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. In this way, when the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect is terminated by the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, so that the game ball is launched onto the first movement path, for example. Since the game ball that is launched can immediately pass through the first ball entry area, it is possible to immediately finish the predetermined performance, while the game ball that is launched on the second movement path is delayed in passing through the second ball entry area. Because of this, it is not possible to immediately end the predetermined performance. Therefore, the player can select the first moving route and the second moving route depending on whether or not he or she wants to check the predetermined performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix W1', by re-executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to secure many opportunities to confirm the predetermined effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase interest in the game through the predetermined performance.

[Appendix W2']
The gaming machine according to appendix W1', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined performance is ended by the performance ending means (51) before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W2', the predetermined condition is that the predetermined performance is ended before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives. That is, if the predetermined performance is ended before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives, the predetermined performance is re-executed. In this way, if the predetermined performance is ended before the end timing of the predetermined performance arrives, the predetermined performance will be re-executed, so even if the predetermined performance is interrupted midway, the predetermined performance will be re-executed as compensation. can be executed to the end. Thereby, it becomes possible to further increase interest in the game through the predetermined effect.

[Appendix W3']
The predetermined performance includes a notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified, from the end of the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game to the first ball entry area (G1) or the Executed during a specific period set for the period until the game ball passes through the second ball entry area (G2),
The gaming machine according to appendix W1' or W2', wherein the performance re-execution means re-executes the predetermined performance when the special game is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W3', the predetermined performance is a notification game and the determination result is from the end of notification that a special game will be executed until the game ball passes through the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. The predetermined performance is executed during a specific period set during the period of , and is re-executed when a special game is generated. In this way, the predetermined performance is executed in a specific period, and when a special game is generated, the predetermined performance is re-executed, thereby making it possible to execute the predetermined performance in the special game. In other words, if the predetermined performance is interrupted midway due to the passing of the game ball to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, the game ball may pass to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance in the special game that is generated. As a result, when the predetermined performance is terminated, it becomes possible to immediately re-execute the predetermined performance after the predetermined performance ends, reducing the time during which the predetermined performance is interrupted, and preventing the predetermined performance from being forcibly terminated midway. Even if the predetermined effect is executed continuously until the end, the predetermined effect is executed without any discomfort.

[Appendix W4']
The special game includes a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player,
The performance re-execution means re-executes the predetermined performance when a specific special game among the plurality of special games is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied, as described in appendix W3'. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W4', the predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, when a specific special game is generated among a plurality of special games with different advantages for the player when a predetermined condition is met, the predetermined effect is re-executed, so that the specific special game is As a bonus for being executed, the predetermined performance is re-executed.

[Appendix W5']
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game (jackpot game) with a first probability based on the establishment of the determination condition. is determined by the determining means (41) at a second probability that is higher than the first probability based on the first special game (normally jackpot) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the establishment of the determination condition. A second special game (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether to execute the special game (jackpot game) after the special game ends;
The gaming machine according to appendix W4', wherein the specific special game is the first special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W5', it is determined that the special game is a first special game in which the special game is shifted to the first gaming state after the end of the special game, and that the special game is shifted to the special game from the first gaming state after the end of the special game. A second special game is transferred to a second game state with a high probability of being played, and when the predetermined performance is forcibly terminated, the predetermined performance is re-executed on the condition that it is the first special game. That is, when the first special game that is more disadvantageous than the second game is executed, the predetermined performance that is forcibly terminated is re-executed as compensation.

[Appendix W6']
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game (jackpot game) with a first probability based on the establishment of the determination condition. is determined by the determining means (41) at a second probability that is higher than the first probability based on the first special game (normally jackpot) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the establishment of the determination condition. A second special game (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether to execute the special game (jackpot game) after the special game ends;
The gaming machine according to appendix W4', wherein the specific special game is the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix W6', it is determined that the special game is a first special game that is shifted to the first gaming state after the special game ends, and that the special game is shifted to the special game from the first gaming state after the special game ends. A second special game is transferred to a second game state with a high probability of being played, and when the predetermined performance is forcibly terminated, the predetermined performance is re-executed on the condition that it is the first special game. In other words, the predetermined performance that is forcibly terminated when the second special game that is more advantageous than the first game is executed is re-executed. As a result, the advantage of re-executing a predetermined performance that is forcibly terminated in the case of an advantageous second special game is provided, and the advantage of the second special game is further improved.

[Appendix W7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices W1' to W6', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of performance information serving as an index indicating ball payout performance.

[Appendix W8']
Storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities) determined by the determination means (41) to execute the special game (jackpot game); ,
From the plurality of numerical information stored in the storage means (41), one numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability is selected for the determination means (41) to determine whether or not to execute the special game. selection means (41) to
Furthermore,
The determining means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantageous determination probability according to the one numerical information selected by the selecting means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix W7', wherein the performance information is information that allows the one numerical information to be specified or estimated.

[Appendix W9']
The gaming machine according to appendix W8', wherein the predetermined performance includes a performance that presents at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

In the gaming machines according to appendices W7' to W9', as the predetermined performance, a performance is performed in which at least a portion of information that allows estimation of ball payout performance, such as a piece of numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability, is presented. . As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the ball payout performance, such as one piece of numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability, and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, since the predetermined effect is information that allows estimation of the ball output performance, the predetermined effect is re-executed after the predetermined effect is finished, giving many opportunities to estimate the ball output performance, which improves the game. You will be able to enjoy the progress even more.

[Appendix X1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
a movable receiving member (80) provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of receiving game balls to the second movement path (R2);
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and the second entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward the sphere area (G2),
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2), the special game generating means (41) executes a predetermined determination process and then generates the special game ball. A gaming machine characterized by generating games.

In the game machine according to appendix X1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball on the first movement path, it is possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball on the second movement path, the generation of the special game can be delayed, It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix X1', the movable receiving member provided upstream of the second ball entry area allows the game ball to be received into the second movement path. In this way, since the movable receiving member provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry area can receive the game ball into the second movement path, the game ball can be moved to the second movement path with a simple configuration. , it becomes possible to generate a special game by entering the game ball into the second ball entry area on the second movement path.

[Appendix X2']
The movable receiving member (80) has a first state in which it can accept game balls into the second movement path (R2), and a second state in which it restricts the reception of game balls into the second movement path (R2). The gaming machine according to appendix X1', characterized in that the gaming machine is capable of switching between states.

In the gaming machine according to appendix X2', the movable receiving member switches between a first state in which it can accept game balls into the second movement path and a second state in which it restricts acceptance of game balls into the second movement path. It is possible. In this way, the movable receiving member can switch between the first state in which it can accept game balls into the second movement path and the second state in which it restricts the reception of game balls into the second movement path. , in the first state, the game ball enters the second ball entry area of the second movement path, making it possible to generate a special game, and in the second state, the game ball enters the second ball entry area of the second movement path. This prevents a special game from occurring inadvertently due to the ball entering the ball.

[Appendix X3']
The movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the first state, and restricts the reception of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix X2', characterized in that acceptance is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix X3', the movable receiving member restricts acceptance of game balls to the first movement path in the first state, and restricts reception of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the second state. It is possible. In this way, the movable receiving member restricts acceptance of game balls to the first movement path in the first state, and allows reception of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the second state. , a game ball that is launched while being received on the first movement path is prevented from being received on the second movement path against the player's will; A game ball fired in a state where the ball can be received is prevented from being received in the first movement path against the player's will.

[Appendix X4']
Further comprising a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the movable receiving member (80) between the first state and the second state,
The switching control means (51) controls the movable receiving member (51) when the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game is completed due to the notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified. 80) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices X1' to X3', characterized in that switching control is started for 80).

In the gaming machine according to appendix X4', switching control for the movable receiving member is started when the notification game that the determination result indicates that a special game will be executed ends. In this way, if the switching control for the movable receiving member is started when the notification that the determination result is that a special game is to be executed is finished by the notification game, the switching control for the movable receiving member is started. It is possible to recognize that the special game is in a state where it is possible to generate a special game. This makes it easier for the player to recognize how to respond to the progress of the game, for example, whether or not it is a situation in which he should play right-handed. It is possible to suppress game balls from being unnecessarily launched into the movement path or the second movement path, and the disadvantage (decrease in base (ball output rate)) suffered by the player in a state in which a special game cannot be generated is reduced. .

[Appendix X5']
The switching control means (51) controls switching of the movable receiving member (80) when movement of the game ball on the first movement path (R1) or the second movement path (R2) is detected. The gaming machine according to appendix X4', characterized in that the gaming machine is terminated.

In the game machine according to appendix X5', when movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the movable receiving member is ended. In this way, when the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated when the movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, the switching control of the movable receiving member is terminated. It can be recognized that there is no need to launch the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path. As a result, game balls are prevented from being ejected into the first movement path or the second movement path, and the disadvantage suffered by the player (decrease in base (ball output rate)) is reduced.

[Appendix Y1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and the second entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward the sphere area (G2),
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2), the special game generating means (41) executes a predetermined determination process and then generates the special game ball. generate games,
Further comprising a restriction means for restricting the occurrence of the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the game machine according to appendix Y1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball on the first movement path, it becomes possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball on the second movement path, the generation of the special game is delayed, It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix Y1', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball being entered into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is restricted. In this way, by restricting the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are restricted. A special game is generated when a game ball enters the intended ball entry area in the second ball entry area, and a special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball entering an unintended ball entry area. be done.

[Appendix Y2']
The gaming machine according to appendix Y1', wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix Y2', the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result for executing the special game, so that the ball entry area to be executed by the special game is one of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. It is limited to the other ball entry area which is different from one ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated by the entry of a game ball into the target ball entry area of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the other ball entry area which is the target of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. A special game is prevented from occurring due to the ball entering.

[Appendix Y3']
Supplementary note Y2' characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the judgment result is to execute the special game is terminated by a notification game in which the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is notified. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix Y3', the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified. In this way, a state in which a special game cannot be generated because the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this case, a special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball entering the other ball entry area.

[Appendix Y4']
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and The movement of the game ball along one of the second movement paths (R2) is different from the one movement path of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). The game machine according to appendix Y3', characterized in that the game ball is detected before the movement of the game ball on the other different movement path.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Y4', when the notification game ends to inform that the determination result is to execute a special game, the movement of the game ball on one movement path is changed to the game ball on the other movement path. If it is detected before the movement of the other movement path, the occurrence of a special game due to the passage of the game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other movement path is restricted. In this way, when the notification game ends to notify that the judgment result is to execute a special game, the movement of the game ball on one movement path is earlier than the movement of the game ball on the other movement path. If detected, the occurrence of a special game due to the passage of a game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving route is restricted, thereby reducing the time until one moving route is selected and a special game occurs. A special game is prevented from occurring due to the game ball moving on the other moving path in between. As a result, after the movement route that generates the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement path that is contrary to the player's will, that is, the special game is caused by the passage of time (timing) that is contrary to the player's will. This will be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix Y5']
The one movement route is the second movement route (R2),
The gaming machine according to appendix Y4', wherein the other moving route is the first moving route (R1).

In the gaming machine according to appendix Y5', if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the game ball is launched on the first movement path. Occurrence of special games using game balls is restricted. Here, since the second movement path is a movement path in which the falling of the game ball is delayed, that is, the movement path in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed, while the occurrence of the special game is delayed in the second movement path, When a game ball is launched on the first movement route, a special game is generated by the game ball that is later launched on the first movement route, even though the game ball has been launched on the second movement route first. This is a concern. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path, a special game using the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the occurrence of this, the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is launched on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention, a special game can be generated by a game ball that is hit on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention. In other words, the special game is prevented from occurring at an unexpected timing.

[Appendix Z1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and the second entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward the sphere area (G2),
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2), the special game generating means (41) executes a predetermined determination process and then generates the special game ball. generate games,
limiting means for restricting the occurrence of the special game based on a game ball entering the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) when a first predetermined condition is satisfied; ,
a restriction canceling means for canceling the restriction on the occurrence of the special game when a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine further comprising:

In the game machine according to supplementary note Z1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball on the first movement path, it is possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball on the second movement path, the generation of the special game can be delayed, It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note Z1', when the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is restricted. . In this way, by restricting the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area when the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first ball entry area A special game is generated by the entry of a game ball into the target ball entry area of the area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the target ball entry area. is prevented.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note Z1', when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is a special game. Occurrence restrictions are lifted. In this way, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the restriction on the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area is lifted. This makes it possible to select the occurrence of a special game based on one ball entry area and then change to the occurrence of a special game based on the other ball entry area.

[Appendix Z2']
The gaming machine according to appendix Z1', wherein the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Z2', the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, since the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player, the player can change the ball entry area in which the special game occurs according to his/her will. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will, so the player will be able to Convenience is improved.

[Appendix Z3']
The game according to appendix Z1' or Z2', wherein the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (jackpot game). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Z3', the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game. In this way, since the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing a special game, the ball entry area to be executed in the special game is the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. The ball entry area is limited to the other ball entry area, which is different from the one ball entry area. Therefore, a special game is generated by the entry of a game ball into the target ball entry area of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the other ball entry area which is the target of the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area. A special game is prevented from occurring due to the ball entering.

[Appendix Z4']
A supplementary note characterized in that the first predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is terminated by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The gaming machine described in Z3'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Z4', the first predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game is terminated by the notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes the termination of the notification that the determination result is to execute a special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, so that it is possible to generate the special game. A special game is prevented from occurring due to the entry of a game ball into the other ball entry area in a state where the game ball cannot enter the other ball entry area.

[Appendix Z5']
The first predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1 ) and the second movement path (R2), the game ball moves along one of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2). The game machine according to supplementary note Z4', characterized in that the game ball is detected earlier than the movement of the game ball on the other movement path different from the movement path.

In the game machine according to supplementary note Z5', movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected in a state where the first predetermined condition is a notification game in which the determination result by the determination means is notified, and the determination result is such that a special game can be generated. In this case, detection of passage of the game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving route is restricted. In this way, in a state where a special game can be generated, by restricting the detection of the passing of a game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other moving route, one moving route is selected and a special game is generated. By simple control, it is possible to restrict the special game from being generated by the game ball moving on the other moving path until the game is played.

[Appendix Z6']
The second predetermined condition is that the special game is executed after the completion of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by a notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The gaming machine according to additional note Z5', characterized in that movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path during the period.

In the game machine according to appendix Z6', the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement path before the accessory continuous actuation device is activated (a predetermined number of game balls are fired on the other movement path). By satisfying a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as (that is, the player must be able to play), it becomes possible to later change the movement route for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. As a result, if the player makes a mistake in selecting the travel route or changes his or her mind after selecting the travel route, the player will be able to change the travel route according to his or her will. Convenience is improved.

[Appendix Z7']
The one ball entry area is the first ball entry area (G1),
The gaming machine according to additional note Z6', wherein the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area (G2).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Z7', one ball entry area is the first ball entry area, and the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area. Here, since the second movement path where the second ball entry area is provided is a movement path where the falling of the game ball is delayed, that is, the occurrence of the special game is delayed, the second movement path is the movement path where the special game is delayed. A game in which, if a game ball is launched on the first movement path while the occurrence is delayed, the game ball is fired on the first movement path later, even though the game ball is fired on the second movement path first. There is a concern that special games may occur due to the ball. In other words, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before the game ball is fired, there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path, a special game using the game ball that is launched on the first movement path. By restricting the occurrence of this, the possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is fired first by a game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by dealing with the case where there is a high possibility that a special game will be generated by a game ball that is launched on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention, a special game can be generated by a game ball that is hit on a movement path that is contrary to the player's intention. In other words, the special game is prevented from being activated at an unexpected timing.

Furthermore, since one ball entry area is the first ball entry area and the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in the second movement path where the occurrence of the special game is delayed. If it is desired to immediately generate a special game during the delay, it becomes possible to immediately generate the special game by firing the game ball to the first movement path.

[Appendix AA1']
a determining means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first ball entry area (G1) that is provided on a first movement path (R1) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
a second ball entry area (G2) that is provided on a second movement path (R2) along which the game ball can move and is capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball;
special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2) in a predetermined gaming state;
a game ball flow delay means (60, 70) that is provided upstream of the second ball entry area (G2) and delays the flow of the game ball;
Equipped with
The game ball flow delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball, a rolling section (603, 702) that rolls the game ball for a predetermined period, and the second entry section (601, 485) that receives the game ball. It has a discharge part (602, 701) that discharges game balls one by one toward the sphere area (G2),
When a game ball enters the first ball entry area (G1) or the second ball entry area (G2), the special game generating means (41) executes a predetermined determination process and then generates the special game ball. generate games,
A gaming machine characterized in that a player can select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) to move the game ball to.

In the game machine according to supplementary note AA1', the game ball flow delay means delays the flow of the game ball launched into the second ball entry area. Therefore, compared to the time it takes for a game ball moving along the first movement path to enter the first ball entry area, the time it takes for a game ball moving along the second movement path to enter the second ball entry area is longer. The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is launched on the first movement route or the game ball is launched on the second movement route. For example, by firing a game ball on the first movement path, it becomes possible to immediately generate a special game, while by firing a game ball on the second movement path, the generation of the special game is delayed, It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note AA1', the player can select which of the first moving route and the second moving route the game ball should be moved to. In this way, by allowing the player to select which of the first movement path and the second movement path to move the game ball to, the player can select the length of time until the special game is executed. becomes possible. As a result, the player's intention is reflected in the selection of the time until the special game is executed, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling stressed.

[Appendix AA2']
The player is characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement path (R1) and the second movement path (R2) to move the game ball to by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. The gaming machine described in Appendix AA1'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix AA2', the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path the game ball should be moved to by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this way, by allowing the player to select either the first movement route or the second movement route depending on the firing intensity of the game ball, it is possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed. becomes possible.

[Appendix AA3']
A first state provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry area (G2) and capable of accepting game balls to the second movement path (R2), and a game ball to the first movement path (R1). The gaming machine according to appendix AA1', further comprising a movable receiving member (80) that can be switched between a second state in which it is possible to receive a second state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix AA3', the movable receiving member switches between a first state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second movement path and a second state in which the game ball can be accepted in the first movement path. It will be done. In this way, by being able to switch between the first state in which the movable receiving member can accept game balls to the second movement path and the second state in which it can accept game balls to the first movement path, the movable receiving member By firing the game ball while checking the attitude of the receiving member, the first movement path and the second movement path can be selected, making it possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed. Become.

[Appendix AA4']
The movable receiving member (80) limits the acceptance of game balls to the first movement path (R1) in the first state, and limits the reception of game balls to the second movement path (R2) in the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix AA3', characterized in that acceptance is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix AA4', the movable receiving member restricts acceptance of game balls to the first movement path in the first state, and restricts reception of game balls to the second movement path in the second state. . In this way, the movable receiving member restricts the acceptance of game balls into the first movement path in the first state, and restricts the reception of game balls into the second movement path in the second state. A game ball that is launched while being accepted in the movement path is prevented from being received in the second movement path against the player's will, and conversely, a game ball is not accepted in the second movement path. This prevents game balls fired in a state where the ball is being held in the first movement path against the player's will.

[Appendix A1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery based on the entry of game balls;
A first flow path (such as 631), which is provided below the first ball entry area, and a second flow path (such as an expected ball output value) having a lower gaming value (for example, expected ball output value) than the first flow path (such as 631). 632, 633, etc.);
a second ball entry area (69) provided below the sorting means (63) and provided with a first ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a second ball entry port (316Ba) into which a game ball can enter, and a switching means ( 319B), and a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided at a position adjacent to or separated from the second ball entry area (69) in the left-right direction at least below the distribution means (63). and,
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second channels (632, 633, etc.) than to the first channel (631, etc.),
The switching means (319B) is configured to switch the game ball to the second lottery when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. comprising a rolling means that switches the ball entrance to a state in which the ball can enter and rolls the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Fluctuation display means (363) for performing a fluctuation display for a predetermined period when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. and,
As the variable display time in the variable display means (363), a first period (for example, 1 second) and a second period (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period are set under predetermined conditions. display time setting means (41) that is set according to the game condition (for example, variable probability gaming state or normal gaming state);
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41), the switching means (319B) disables the game ball from entering the second ball entrance. and means (41) for allowing game balls sorted by the sorting means (63) to the first channel (631, etc.) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix A1, the game balls are sorted by the distribution means into the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower gaming value than the first flow path, and the game balls are distributed into the second flow path, which has a lower gaming value than the first flow path. The game balls are sorted according to a high ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first period and the second period, which is longer than the first period, are set as the variable display time in the variable display means, and the second period is set as the variable display time. When set, the switching means disables the entry of game balls into the second ball entry port, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are placed in the second ball entry area. The ball can enter the first ball entrance. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls that are distributed by the distribution means to the first channel where the gaming value is high and the distribution ratio is low are displayed in the first channel in the second ball entry area. By being able to enter the ball into the ball entrance, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls when the second period is set as the variable display time. In other words, a new game feature in which the player can obtain high gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period. It becomes possible to provide

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the gaming value is an expected ball payout value.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, the gaming value is the expected ball payout value. In this way, since the game value is the expected ball output value, the player can obtain a large number of balls by entering the game ball into the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period. It becomes possible to provide a new game experience in which the following is possible.

[Appendix A3]
The predetermined lottery is performed by switching the switching means ( 319B) is a lottery (second special drawing lottery) to decide whether to switch or not.
The predetermined lottery result changes the switching means from a state in which a game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance (316Ba) to a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entrance (316Ba). (319B) The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or A2, characterized in that the result of switching is (2R normal jackpot or small win).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, a predetermined lottery is performed to determine whether or not the switching means performs a switch from a state in which a game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance to a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entrance. If the lottery result in is a result of switching by the switching means from a state in which game balls cannot enter the second ball entry port to a state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry port, for a predetermined period of time. A variable display is performed. That is, when a variable display is performed for a predetermined period of time, the game ball can enter the second ball entrance, and if the lottery result of a predetermined lottery is the predetermined lottery result, the player can receive a high game It becomes possible to provide a new gaming experience in which it is possible to obtain value.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the sorting means (63) is made of resin.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the distributing means is made of resin. In this way, by making the distribution means made of resin, it is possible to improve durability and workability (moldability), and it is also possible to reduce manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A5]
The sorting means (63) includes an introduction part into which game balls are introduced, and a first guide part (631) which guides the game balls introduced through the introduction part to the front side of the game board (31). , a second guide part (632, 633) that guides the game ball introduced through the introduction part to the back side of the game board (31). The game machine described.

[Appendix A6]
The first guiding part (631) constitutes at least a part of the first flow path (631, etc.),
The gaming machine according to appendix A5, wherein the second guide portion (632, 633) constitutes at least a part of the second flow path (632, 633, etc.).

In the game machines according to Appendix A5 and Appendix A6, game balls introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means are guided to the front side or the back side of the game board. In this way, the game balls introduced through the introduction part of the distribution means are guided to the front side or the back side of the game board, so that the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. In some cases, it becomes possible to provide a significant difference in gaming value. That is, the game ball that is distributed to the second flow path is guided to the back side of the game board, so that the game value becomes 0, and the game ball that is distributed to the first flow path is guided to the front side of the game board, so that the game value becomes 0. If the ball can enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, the game value becomes more than 0.

[Appendix B1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery based on the entry of game balls;
A first flow path (such as 631), which is provided below the first ball entry area, and a second flow path (such as an expected ball output value) having a lower gaming value (for example, expected ball output value) than the first flow path (such as 631). 632, 633, etc.);
a second ball entry area (69) provided below the sorting means (63) and provided with a first ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a second ball entry port (316Ba) into which a game ball can enter, and a switching means ( 319B), and a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided at a position adjacent to or separated from the second ball entry area (69) in the left-right direction at least below the distribution means (63). and,
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second channels (632, 633, etc.) than to the first channel (631, etc.),
The switching means (319B) is configured to switch the game ball to the second lottery when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. comprising a rolling means that switches the ball entrance to a state in which the ball can enter and rolls the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Fluctuation display means (363) for performing a fluctuation display for a predetermined period when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. and,
As the variable display time in the variable display means (363), a first period (for example, 1 second) and a second period (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period are set under predetermined conditions. display time setting means (41) that is set according to the game condition (for example, variable probability gaming state or normal gaming state);
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41), the switching means (319B) disables the game ball from entering the second ball entrance. and means (41) for allowing game balls sorted by the sorting means (63) to the first channel (631, etc.) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
means (41) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls when a game ball enters the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance (316Ba);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game ball into the second ball entry port (316Ba) is smaller than the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port.

In the game machine according to Appendix B1, the distribution means distributes the game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower gaming value than the first flow path, and the second flow path has a lower gaming value than the first flow path. The game balls are sorted according to a high ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first period and the second period, which is longer than the first period, are set as the variable display time in the variable display means, and the second period is set as the variable display time. When set, the switching means disables the entry of game balls into the second ball entry port, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are placed in the second ball entry area. The ball can enter the first ball entrance. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls that are distributed by the distribution means to the first channel where the gaming value is high and the distribution ratio is low are displayed in the first channel in the second ball entry area. By being able to enter the ball into the ball entrance, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls when the second period is set as the variable display time. In other words, a new game feature in which the player can obtain high gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period. It becomes possible to provide

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix B1, the number of prize balls due to the game balls entering the second ball entrance is smaller than the number of prize balls due to the game balls entering the first ball entrance. In this way, since the number of prize balls due to the game balls entering the second ball entrance is smaller than the number of prize balls due to the game balls entering the first ball entrance, It is possible to provide a significant difference in gaming value between the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry port and the entry of the game ball into the first entry port. As a result, the player can obtain higher gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period.

[Appendix B2]
When the distribution ratio between the first flow path (631, etc.) and the second flow path (632, 633, etc.) is 1:N, a prize is awarded by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port. The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the number of balls exceeds N+1 balls, and the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the second ball entrance is equal to or less than N+1 balls.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, when the distribution ratio with the second channel is 1:N, the number of prize balls due to the game balls entering the first ball entry port exceeds N+1 balls, and the number of prize balls that enter the first ball entry port exceeds N+1 balls, The number of prize balls due to the game balls entering the ball mouth is N+1 balls or less. In this way, when the distribution ratio with the second flow path is 1:N, the number of prize balls due to the game balls entering the first ball entry port exceeds N+1 balls, and the number of prize balls that enter the second ball entry port exceeds N+1 balls. Since the number of prize balls due to entering the game ball is N+1 or less, it is possible to increase the number of game balls (balls held by the player) by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance, while It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of game balls (held by the player) due to the entry of game balls into the second ball entrance.

[Appendix C1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery based on the entry of game balls;
A first flow path (such as 631), which is provided below the first ball entry area, and a second flow path (such as an expected ball output value) having a lower gaming value (for example, expected ball output value) than the first flow path (such as 631). 632, 633, etc.);
a second ball entry area (69) provided below the sorting means (63) and provided with a first ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a second ball entry port (316Ba) into which a game ball can enter, and a switching means ( 319B), and a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided at a position adjacent to or separated from the second ball entry area (69) in the left-right direction at least below the distribution means (63). and,
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second channels (632, 633, etc.) than to the first channel (631, etc.),
The switching means (319B) is configured to switch the game ball to the second lottery when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. comprising a rolling means that switches the ball entrance to a state in which the ball can enter and rolls the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Fluctuation display means (363) for performing a fluctuation display for a predetermined period when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. and,
As the variable display time in the variable display means (363), a first period (for example, 1 second) and a second period (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period are set under predetermined conditions. display time setting means (41) that is set according to the game condition (for example, variable probability gaming state or normal gaming state);
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41), the switching means (319B) disables the game ball from entering the second ball entrance. and means (41) for allowing game balls sorted by the sorting means (63) to the first channel (631, etc.) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the sorting means (63) is a non-movable object fixedly provided to the gaming board (31).

In the game machine according to appendix C1, the distribution means distributes the game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower gaming value than the first flow path, and the second flow path has a lower gaming value than the first flow path. The game balls are sorted according to a high ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first period and the second period, which is longer than the first period, are set as the variable display time in the variable display means, and the second period is set as the variable display time. When set, the switching means disables the entry of game balls into the second ball entry port, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are placed in the second ball entry area. The ball can enter the first ball entrance. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls that are distributed by the distribution means to the first channel where the gaming value is high and the distribution ratio is low are displayed in the first channel in the second ball entry area. By being able to enter the ball into the ball entrance, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls when the second period is set as the variable display time. In other words, a new game feature in which the player can obtain high gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period. It becomes possible to provide

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the sorting means is a non-movable object fixedly provided on the gaming board. In this way, by providing the distribution means as a non-movable object, it becomes possible to ensure the consistency of the distribution ratio between the front side and the back side of the game board, and also to control the distribution timing by the distribution means. It becomes possible to take countermeasures against a strategy hit in a timing hit in which the game ball is launched at a well-predicted time.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the sorting means (63) is made of resin.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the distributing means is made of resin. In this way, by making the distribution means made of resin, it is possible to improve durability and workability (moldability), and it is also possible to reduce manufacturing costs.

[Appendix C3]
The sorting means (63) includes an introduction part into which game balls are introduced, and a first guide part (631) which guides the game balls entered through the introduction part to the front side of the game board (31). , a second guide part (632, 633) that guides the game ball introduced through the introduction part to the back side of the game board (31), the game machine according to Appendix C1 or C2. .

[Appendix C4]
The first guiding part (631) constitutes at least a part of the first flow path (631, etc.),
The gaming machine according to appendix C3, wherein the second guide portion (632, 633) constitutes at least a part of the second flow path (632, 633, etc.).

In the game machines according to appendices C3 and C4, game balls introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means are guided to the front side or the back side of the game board. In this way, the game balls introduced through the introduction part of the distribution means are guided to the front side or the back side of the game board, so that the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. In some cases, it becomes possible to provide a significant difference in gaming value. That is, the game ball that is distributed to the second flow path is guided to the back side of the game board, so that the game value becomes 0, and the game ball that is distributed to the first flow path is guided to the front side of the game board, so that the game value becomes 0. If the ball can enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, the game value becomes more than 0.

[Appendix D1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery based on the entry of game balls;
A first flow path (such as 631), which is provided below the first ball entry area, and a second flow path (such as an expected ball output value) having a lower gaming value (for example, expected ball output value) than the first flow path (such as 631). 632, 633, etc.);
a second ball entry area (69) provided below the sorting means (63) and provided with a first ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a second ball entry port (316Ba) into which a game ball can enter, and a switching means ( 319B), and a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided at a position adjacent to or separated from the second ball entry area (69) in the left-right direction at least below the distribution means (63). and,
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second channels (632, 633, etc.) than to the first channel (631, etc.),
The switching means (319B) is configured to switch the game ball to the second lottery when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. comprising a rolling means that switches the ball entrance to a state in which the ball can enter and rolls the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Fluctuation display means (363) for performing a fluctuation display for a predetermined period when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. and,
As the variable display time in the variable display means (363), a first period (for example, 1 second) and a second period (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period are set under predetermined conditions. (a display time setting means (41) that is set according to the variable probability gaming state or the normal gaming state);
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41), the switching means (319B) disables the game ball from entering the second ball entrance. and means (41) for allowing game balls sorted by the sorting means (63) to the first channel (631, etc.) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the sorting means (63) is made of resin.

In the game machine according to appendix D1, the distribution means distributes the game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower gaming value than the first flow path, and the second flow path has a lower gaming value than the first flow path. The game balls are sorted according to a high ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first period and the second period, which is longer than the first period, are set as the variable display time in the variable display means, and the second period is set as the variable display time. When set, the switching means disables the entry of game balls into the second ball entry port, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are placed in the second ball entry area. The ball can enter the first ball entrance. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls that are distributed by the distribution means to the first channel where the gaming value is high and the distribution ratio is low are displayed in the first channel in the second ball entry area. By being able to enter the ball into the ball entrance, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls when the second period is set as the variable display time. In other words, a new game feature in which the player can obtain high gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period. It becomes possible to provide

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the distributing means is made of resin. In this way, by making the distribution means made of resin, it is possible to improve durability and workability (moldability), and reduce manufacturing costs. It also becomes possible.

[Appendix D2]
The sorting means (63) includes an introduction part into which game balls are introduced, and a first guide part (631) which guides the game balls entered through the introduction part to the front side of the game board (31). , a second guide part (632, 633) that guides the game ball introduced through the introduction part to the back side of the game board (31).

[Appendix D3]
The first guiding part (631) constitutes at least a part of the first flow path (631, etc.),
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the second guide portion (632, 633) constitutes at least a part of the second flow path (632, 633, etc.).

In the game machine according to Appendix D2 or D3, game balls introduced through the introduction section of the distribution means are guided to the front side or the back side of the game board. In this way, the game balls introduced through the introduction part of the distribution means are guided to the front side or the back side of the game board, so that the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. In some cases, it becomes possible to provide a significant difference in gaming value. That is, the game ball that is distributed to the second flow path is guided to the back side of the game board, so that the game value becomes 0, and the game ball that is distributed to the first flow path is guided to the front side of the game board, so that the game value becomes 0. If the ball can enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, the game value becomes more than 0.

[Appendix E1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery based on the entry of game balls;
A first flow path (such as 631), which is provided below the first ball entry area, and a second flow path (such as an expected ball output value) having a lower gaming value (for example, expected ball output value) than the first flow path (such as 631). 632, 633, etc.);
a second ball entry area (69) provided below the sorting means (63) and provided with a first ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a second ball entry port (316Ba) into which a game ball can enter, and a switching means ( 319B), and a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided at a position adjacent to or separated from the second ball entry area (69) in the left-right direction at least below the distribution means (63). and,
a fourth ball entry area (314) for conducting a specific lottery with a different advantage from the predetermined lottery due to the entry of game balls;
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second channels (632, 633, etc.) than to the first channel (631, etc.),
The switching means (319B) is configured to switch the game ball to the second lottery when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. comprising a rolling means that switches the ball entrance to a state in which the ball can enter and rolls the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
Fluctuation display means (363) for performing a fluctuation display for a predetermined period when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. and,
As the variable display time in the variable display means (363), a first period (for example, 1 second) and a second period (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period are set under predetermined conditions. display time setting means (41) that is set according to the game condition (for example, variable probability gaming state or normal gaming state);
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41), the switching means (319B) disables the game ball from entering the second ball entrance. and means (41) for allowing game balls sorted by the sorting means (63) to the first channel (631, etc.) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the distribution means distributes the game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower gaming value than the first flow path, and the second flow path has a lower gaming value than the first flow path. The game balls are sorted according to a high ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first period and the second period, which is longer than the first period, are set as the variable display time in the variable display means, and the second period is set as the variable display time. When set, the switching means disables the entry of game balls into the second ball entry port, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are placed in the second ball entry area. The ball can enter the first ball entrance. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls that are distributed by the distribution means to the first channel where the gaming value is high and the distribution ratio is low are displayed in the first channel in the second ball entry area. By being able to enter the ball into the ball entrance, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls when the second period is set as the variable display time. In other words, a new game feature in which the player can obtain high gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period. It becomes possible to provide

Further, the gaming machine according to appendix E1 includes a fourth ball entry area for performing a specific lottery with different advantages from the predetermined lottery by entering the game ball. In this way, by providing the fourth ball entry area for performing a specific lottery with different advantages from the predetermined lottery due to the entry of game balls, the game balls can be placed in the first ball entry area where the predetermined lottery is held. It becomes possible to provide different gaming values to the player depending on whether the game ball is entered into the fourth ball entry area where a specific lottery is held or the game ball is entered into the fourth ball entry area where a specific lottery is held. As a result, depending on predetermined conditions, the game ball is launched into an area where the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entry area on the game board, or the game ball enters the fourth ball entry area on the game board. It becomes possible for the player to select whether to launch the game ball into an area where it is easy to hit. As a result, under the predetermined condition in which the first period with a short variable display time is set, by launching the game ball into the area where the game ball is likely to enter the fourth ball entry area on the game board, the second entry area can be set. When gaming value cannot be obtained by entering a game ball into the first ball entry port of the ball area, it becomes possible to obtain gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry area on the game board. . In other words, the player can obtain the maximum gaming value by appropriately selecting the launch area of the game ball on the game board according to predetermined conditions. In addition, by providing a first ball entry area and allowing the player to appropriately select the launch area of the game ball on the game board according to predetermined conditions, when the first period is set as the variable display time, This prevents the player from acquiring unexpected gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry area, that is, from executing a so-called strategy hit.

[Appendix E2]
Supplementary note E1 characterized in that the fourth ball entry area (314) is capable of receiving a game ball that is launched into a different area from the first ball entry area (315) of the game board (31). The gaming machine described in .

In the game machine according to appendix E2, the fourth ball entry area can receive a game ball that is launched into an area of the game board that is different from the first ball entry area. Since the fourth ball entry area can enter a game ball that is launched into an area different from the first ball entry area on the game board, the game ball enters the first ball entry area on the game board. It becomes possible to easily and appropriately launch the game ball into an area where the game ball can easily enter the fourth ball entry area on the game board. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and appropriately obtain the maximum possible gaming value by appropriately selecting the launch area of the game ball on the game board according to predetermined conditions. This prevents the player from searching for a winning strategy.

[Appendix E3]
The fourth ball entry area (314) is capable of receiving a game ball that is launched into one of the left area and the right area (for example, the left area) of the game board (31), and includes the left area and the right area. A game ball launched into the other region (for example, the right region) of the right region that is different from the one region cannot enter the ball;
The first ball entry area (315) is where a game ball that is launched into the other area (for example, the right area) can enter, and a game ball that is launched into the one area (for example, the left area) cannot enter. The gaming machine according to appendix E2, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, the fourth ball entry area is capable of receiving a game ball that is launched into one of the left area and the right area of the game board, and the fourth ball entry area is the fourth ball entry area. A game ball launched into the first ball area cannot enter the first ball entry area, a game ball launched into the other area can enter the first ball entry area, and a game ball launched into one area cannot enter the first ball entry area. . In this way, the fourth ball entry area is such that a game ball that is launched into one of the left and right areas of the game board can enter, and the game ball that is launched into the other of the left and right areas of the game board. The first ball entry area is set such that a game ball launched into the other area can enter the first ball entry area, and a game ball launched into one area cannot enter the first ball entry area. By selecting whether to launch the game ball between the left and right areas of the board, you can acquire gaming value by entering the game ball into the first entering ball area, and play by entering the game ball into the fourth entering ball area. It becomes possible to acquire value and use it easily and appropriately. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and appropriately obtain the maximum possible gaming value by appropriately selecting the launch area of the game ball on the game board according to predetermined conditions. To properly prevent a player from searching for a winning strategy.

[Appendix E4]
The specific lottery drawn by a game ball entering the fourth ball entry area (314) is more attractive than the predetermined lottery drawn by a game ball entering the first ball entry area (314). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, which is advantageous.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the specific lottery that is conducted by the game ball entering the fourth ball entry area is more advantageous than the predetermined lottery that is performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area. be. In this way, the specific lottery drawn by the game ball entering the fourth ball entry area is more advantageous than the predetermined lottery drawn by the game ball entering the first ball entry area, When the first period is set as the variable display time under a predetermined condition, it is possible to promote the game ball to be launched into an area where the game ball can enter the fourth ball entry area on the game board, and the game The game ball is further appropriately suppressed from being hit into an area where the game ball can enter the first ball entry area on the board.

[Appendix F1]
a first ball entry area (315) for conducting a predetermined lottery based on the entry of game balls;
A first flow path (such as 631), which is provided below the first ball entry area, and a second flow path (such as an expected ball output value) having a lower gaming value (for example, expected ball output value) than the first flow path (such as 631). 632, 633, etc.);
a second ball entry area (69) provided below the sorting means (63) and provided with a first ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a second ball entry port (316Ba) into which a game ball can enter, and a switching means ( 319B), and a third ball entry area (316B, 319B) provided at a position adjacent to or separated from the second ball entry area (69) in the left-right direction at least below the distribution means (63). and,
Equipped with
The distribution means (63) is capable of distributing game balls at a higher ratio to the second channels (632, 633, etc.) than to the first channel (631, etc.),
The switching means (319B) is configured to switch the game ball to the second lottery when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the game ball entering the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. comprising a rolling means that switches the ball entrance to a state in which the ball can enter and rolls the game ball to enter the second ball entry area (69);
In the first ball entry area (314), there is no restriction on the entry of game balls by the normal electric accessory member, and the game ball can enter the ball without support from the ordinary electric accessory member,
Fluctuation display means (363) for performing a fluctuation display for a predetermined period when a lottery result in the predetermined lottery performed by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area (315) is a predetermined lottery result. and,
As the variable display time in the variable display means (363), a first period (for example, 1 second) and a second period (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) longer than the first period are set under predetermined conditions. display time setting means (41) that is set according to the game condition (for example, variable probability gaming state or normal gaming state);
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the display time setting means (41), the switching means (319B) disables the game ball from entering the second ball entrance. and means (41) for allowing game balls sorted by the sorting means (63) to the first channel (631, etc.) to enter the second ball entry area (69);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix F1, the distribution means distributes the game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path, which has a lower gaming value than the first flow path, and the second flow path has a lower gaming value than the first flow path. The game balls are sorted according to a high ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first period and the second period, which is longer than the first period, are set as the variable display time in the variable display means, and the second period is set as the variable display time. When set, the switching means disables the entry of game balls into the second ball entry port, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are placed in the second ball entry area. The ball can enter the first ball entrance. In this way, when the second period is set as the variable display time, the game balls that are distributed by the distribution means to the first channel where the gaming value is high and the distribution ratio is low are displayed in the first channel in the second ball entry area. By being able to enter the ball into the ball entrance, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls when the second period is set as the variable display time. In other words, a new game feature in which the player can obtain high gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry port of the second ball entry area during the variable display set in the second period. It becomes possible to provide

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, there is no restriction on the entry of game balls by the normal electric accessory member into the first ball entry area, and the game ball can enter the ball without support from the ordinary electric accessory member. In this way, there is no restriction on the entry of the game ball by the normal electric accessory member, and the game ball can enter the ball without support from the ordinary electric accessory member, so that the game ball can enter the first ball entry area. The ball restriction state disappears. As a result, it becomes possible to constantly enter the game ball into the first ball entry area, so it is possible to shorten the blank period in which the fluctuation display is not performed in a situation where game balls are continuously launched. It becomes possible. Therefore, by setting the second period as the variable display time, when the predetermined conditions are such that the game ball can enter the second ball entry area, the second It becomes possible to increase the rate at which the period is set. As a result, by setting the second period, it becomes possible for the player to appropriately acquire gaming value due to the game ball entering the second ball entry area.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, characterized in that it includes a fourth ball entry area (314) for conducting a specific lottery with different advantages from the predetermined lottery by entering a game ball.

The gaming machine according to appendix F2 includes a fourth ball entry area for performing a specific lottery with different advantages from a predetermined lottery by entering the game ball. In this way, by providing the fourth ball entry area for performing a specific lottery with different advantages from the predetermined lottery due to the entry of game balls, the game balls can be placed in the first ball entry area where the predetermined lottery is held. It becomes possible to provide different gaming values to the player depending on whether the game ball is entered into the fourth ball entry area where a specific lottery is held or the game ball is entered into the fourth ball entry area where a specific lottery is held. As a result, depending on predetermined conditions, the game ball is launched into an area where the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entry area on the game board, or the game ball enters the fourth ball entry area on the game board. It becomes possible for the player to select whether to launch the game ball into an area where it is easy to hit. As a result, under the predetermined condition in which the first period with a short variable display time is set, by launching the game ball into the area where the game ball is likely to enter the fourth ball entry area on the game board, the second entry area can be set. When gaming value cannot be obtained by entering a game ball into the first ball entry port of the ball area, it becomes possible to obtain gaming value by entering the game ball into the first ball entry area on the game board. . In other words, the player can obtain the maximum gaming value by appropriately selecting the launch area of the game ball on the game board according to predetermined conditions. In addition, by providing a first ball entry area and allowing the player to appropriately select the launch area of the game ball on the game board according to predetermined conditions, when the first period is set as the variable display time, By entering the game ball into the first ball entry area, the player is prevented from acquiring unexpected gaming value, that is, from searching for a so-called winning shot.

[Appendix F3]
The fourth ball entry area (314) is characterized in that there is no restriction on the entry of game balls by the normal electric accessory member, and a game ball can enter the fourth ball entry area (314) without support from the ordinary electric accessory member. The gaming machine described in appendix F2.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, there is no restriction on the entry of game balls by the normal electric accessory member into the fourth ball entry area, and the game ball can enter the fourth ball entry area without support from the ordinary electric accessory member. In this way, there is no restriction on the entry of game balls into the fourth ball entry area by the normal electric accessory member, and the game ball can enter the fourth ball entry area without the support of the ordinary electric accessory member. Since it becomes possible to constantly enter the game ball into the ball area, it becomes possible to shorten the blank period in which no variable display is performed in a situation where game balls are continuously launched. Therefore, the player can more appropriately acquire gaming value by entering the game ball into the fourth ball entry area. As a result, it is possible to promote the game ball to be launched into an area where the game ball can enter the fourth ball entry area on the game board, and it is possible for the game ball to enter the first ball entry area on the game board. The game ball is further appropriately suppressed from being launched into a certain area.

[Appendix G1]
a first channel (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first profit;
a second channel (78) through which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second profit;
a third channel (76) through which a game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
A game ball is allowed to flow down the third channel (76) in a non-operating state, and a game ball is allowed to flow down the first channel (77) or the second channel (78) based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. an actuating member (84) that is in an actuated state to cause the
Equipped with
The first flow path (77) is set to be the highest, the second flow path (78) is set to be lower than the first flow path (77), and the third flow path (76) is set to have the highest profit for the player. ) is set lower than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the actuating member causes the game ball to flow down the third channel in the non-operating state, and is brought into the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, thereby causing the operating member to flow down the first channel or the second channel. It is in an operating state in which game balls flow down the channel. Furthermore, the benefit to the player is set higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to flow down a channel that provides different benefits to the player depending on whether the operating member is in the inoperative state or the operating state. That is, the game ball is caused to flow down a flow path that provides different benefits to the player, not by an immovable object (fixed object) like the clown device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above, but by an actuating member that is a movable object. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, compared to the case where a non-movable object such as the Croon device 63 is provided, it is possible to set a smaller space on the game board for arranging the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, so that the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high or medium While the game ball is flowing down the flow path, if a predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the profit given to the player is reduced to the lower third flow path. is flowed down. In this way, when the operating member is in the non-operating state, the game ball flows down the third channel, while when the operating member is in the operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first channel or the second channel. By flowing down, it becomes possible to easily recognize the channel through which the game ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inactive state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the game ball is flown down into the third flow path where the profit given to the player is lower. Therefore, when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied, it is completely eliminated that the game ball accidentally flows down the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high. This prevents unfair profits from being given to the player and from being exploited.

[Appendix G2]
The first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78) are at least partially formed on one side of the front side and the back side of the game board (31),
Supplementary note G1, wherein at least a portion of the third flow path (76) is formed on the other side of the front side and the back side of the game board (31), which is different from the one side. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G2, at least a portion of the first flow path and the second flow path are formed on one side of the front side and the back side of the game board, and at least a portion of the third flow path is formed on one side of the front side and the back side of the game board. It is formed on the other side different from one side of the front side and the back side. That is, at least a portion of one of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path is formed on the back side of the game board. In this way, by forming at least a portion of one of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path on the back side of the game board, the space on the back side of the game board can be effectively used. This can be used to form three channels. As a result, the space on the back side of the game board can be used effectively when forming the three flow paths, reducing the space required on the front side of the game board, giving greater freedom in designing the front side of the game board. This improves the image quality and makes it possible to secure a larger space for the symbol display section.

[Appendix G3]
The first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78) are at least partially formed on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix G2, wherein at least a portion of the third flow path (76) is formed on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, at least a portion of the first flow path and the second flow path are formed on the front side of the game board, and at least a portion of the third flow path is formed on the back side of the game board. . That is, at least part of the first flow path and the second flow path where the profit given to the player is higher than the third flow path is provided on the front side of the game board, and the profit given to the player is the lowest. A third channel is formed on the back side of the game board. As a result, it is easy to visually grasp the first flow path and the second flow path, which are highly profitable and of high interest to the player, so it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game. become.

[Appendix H1]
a first channel (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first profit;
a second channel (78) through which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second profit;
a third channel (76) through which a game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
A game ball is allowed to flow down the third channel (76) in a non-operating state, and a game ball is allowed to flow down the first channel (77) or the second channel (78) based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. an actuating member (84) that is in an actuated state to cause the
Equipped with
The first flow path (77) is set to be the highest, the second flow path (78) is set to be lower than the first flow path (77), and the third flow path (76) is set to have the highest profit for the player. ) is set lower than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78),
The third ball entry area (943, 944) is a gaming machine characterized in that the payout of a game ball per entry of one game ball is set to one ball or less.

In the game machine according to appendix H1, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down the third channel in the non-operating state, and is brought into the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, thereby causing the operating member to flow down the first channel or the second channel. It is in an operating state in which game balls flow down the channel. Furthermore, the benefit to the player is set higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to flow down a channel that provides different benefits to the player depending on whether the operating member is in the inoperative state or the operating state. That is, the game ball is caused to flow down a flow path that provides different benefits to the player, not by an immovable object (fixed object) like the clown device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above, but by an actuating member that is a movable object. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, compared to the case where a non-movable object such as the Croon device 63 is provided, it is possible to set a smaller space on the game board for arranging the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, so that the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high or medium. While the game ball is flowing down the flow path, if a predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the profit given to the player is reduced to the lower third flow path. is flowed down. In this way, when the operating member is in the non-operating state, the game ball flows down the third channel, while when the operating member is in the operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first channel or the second channel. By flowing down, it becomes possible to easily recognize the channel through which the game ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inactive state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix H1, when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the game ball is flown down into the third flow path where the profit given to the player is lower. Therefore, when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied, it is completely eliminated that the game ball accidentally flows down the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high. This prevents unfair profits from being given to the player and from being exploited.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the payout of one game ball for each ball entering the third ball entry area into which the game ball flowing down the third channel can enter is one ball or less. Set. In this way, by setting the payout of a game ball to one ball or less for one game ball entering the third ball entry area into which the game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter, the operation is performed. When the member is in a non-operating state, the expected ball output value for the game balls that reach the operating member is 1 ball or less (the difference ball expected value is 0 balls or less). Therefore, even if a game ball is launched toward the operating member when the operating member is in a non-operating state, in other words, if a game ball is launched toward the operating member when the predetermined operating condition of the operating member is not satisfied. Even so, an increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected and there is no benefit to the players, but rather a disadvantage to the players. As a result, when the operating member is in the non-operating state, there is a benefit from the flow of the game ball into the first flow path and the second flow path (the effect of the game ball entering the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area). Therefore, measures have been taken to prevent so-called strategy attacks.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the third ball entry area (943, 944) includes a ball entry opening (944) from which no game ball is paid out when the game ball enters.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, the third ball entry area includes a ball entry opening from which no game ball is paid out in response to the entry of the game ball. In this way, since the third ball entry area includes the ball entry opening where game balls are not put out when the game ball enters, when the operating member is in the non-actuated state, the game ball that reaches the operating member is not released. It is possible to easily and appropriately set the expected ball value to 1 ball or less (the expected ball difference value is 0 balls or less), and the expected ball output value (expected ball difference value) is made more disadvantageous for the player. becomes possible. This makes it possible to further reduce the player's desire to launch a game ball toward the actuating member when the actuating member is in a non-operating state, thereby further reducing the player's desire to search for a winning strategy. becomes possible.

[Appendix I1]
a first channel (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first profit;
a second channel (78) through which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second profit;
a third channel (76) through which a game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
A game ball is allowed to flow down the third channel (76) in a non-operating state, and a game ball is allowed to flow down the first channel (77) or the second channel (78) based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. an actuating member (84) that is in an actuated state to cause the
Equipped with
The first flow path (77) is set to be the highest, the second flow path (78) is set to be lower than the first flow path (77), and the third flow path (76) is set to have the highest profit for the player. ) is set lower than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78),
When the operating member (84) is in a predetermined operating state, the proportion of game balls flowing down the second channel (78) is set higher than that in the first channel (77). A gaming machine featuring:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down the third channel in the non-operating state, and is brought into the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, thereby causing the operating member to flow down the game ball into the first channel or the second channel. It is in an operating state in which game balls flow down the channel. Furthermore, the benefit to the player is set higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to flow down a channel that provides different benefits to the player depending on whether the operating member is in the inoperative state or the operating state. That is, the game ball is caused to flow down a flow path that provides different benefits to the player, not by an immovable object (fixed object) like the clown device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above, but by an actuating member that is a movable object. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, compared to the case where a non-movable object such as the Croon device 63 is provided, it is possible to set a smaller space on the game board for arranging the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, so that the profit given to the player is higher or intermediate. While the game ball is flowing down the flow path, if a predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the profit given to the player is reduced to the lower third flow path. is flowed down. In this way, when the operating member is in the non-operating state, the game ball flows down the third channel, while when the operating member is in the operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first channel or the second channel. By flowing down, it becomes possible to easily recognize the channel through which the game ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inactive state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the game ball is flown down into the third flow path where the profit given to the player is lower. Therefore, when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied, it is completely eliminated that the game ball accidentally flows down the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high. This prevents unfair profits from being given to the player and from being exploited.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the proportion of game balls flowing down the second flow path is set higher than that of the first flow path. Further, the benefit to the player is set to be higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. Therefore, when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the proportion of game balls flowing down the second flow path is set higher than that of the first flow path, so that the game balls flow down the first flow path. The player is not given an excessive amount of profit due to the ball falling, and an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player can be suppressed. In this way, by suppressing an excessive increase in the number of balls held by the player, the player's gambling spirit is not excessively stimulated, and by increasing the number of balls held by the player when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the game can be improved. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

[Appendix I2]
When the operating member (84) is in the predetermined operating state, the operating member (84) directs the game ball that has reached the operating member (84) to one of the first channel (77) and the second channel (78). The gaming machine according to appendix I1, characterized in that the water flows down into one of the channels.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the game ball that has reached the operating member is allowed to flow down into one of the first channel and the second channel. let In this way, when the actuating member is in a predetermined operating state, the game ball that is launched into a predetermined area of the game board and reaches the actuating member is directed to one of the first channel and the second channel. When the operating member is in a predetermined operating state, the game ball can flow down the first flow path and the second flow path without causing any disadvantage to the player due to the game ball flowing down the third flow path. It is possible to give the player a profit when the game ball flows down any of the channels, and it becomes possible to increase the number of balls held by the player.

[Appendix J1]
a first channel (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first profit;
a second channel (78) through which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second profit;
a third channel (76) through which a game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
A game ball is allowed to flow down the third channel (76) in a non-operating state, and a game ball is allowed to flow down the first channel (77) or the second channel (78) based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. an actuating member (84) that is in an actuated state to cause the
Equipped with
The first flow path (77) is set to be the highest, the second flow path (78) is set to be lower than the first flow path (77), and the third flow path (76) is set to have the highest profit for the player. ) is set lower than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78),
A game machine characterized in that, in a predetermined game state, a game ball that reaches the operating member (84) can enter only the third ball entry area (943, 944).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1, the operating member causes the game balls to flow down the third channel in the non-operating state, and is brought into the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, thereby causing the operating member to flow down the first channel or the second channel. It is in an operating state in which game balls flow down the channel. Furthermore, the benefit to the player is set higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to flow down a channel that provides different benefits to the player depending on whether the operating member is in the inoperative state or the operating state. That is, the game ball is caused to flow down a flow path that provides different benefits to the player, not by an immovable object (fixed object) like the clown device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above, but by an actuating member that is a movable object. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, compared to the case where a non-movable object such as the Croon device 63 is provided, it is possible to set a smaller space on the game board for arranging the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, so that the first flow path or the second While the game ball is flowing down the flow path, if a predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the profit given to the player is reduced to the lower third flow path. is flowed down. In this way, when the operating member is in the non-operating state, the game ball flows down the third channel, while when the operating member is in the operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first channel or the second channel. By flowing down, it becomes possible to easily recognize the channel through which the game ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inactive state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the game ball is flown down into the third flow path where the profit given to the player is lower. Therefore, when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied, it is completely eliminated that the game ball accidentally flows down the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high. This prevents unfair profits from being given to the player and from being exploited.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix J1, in a predetermined gaming state, the game ball that has reached the actuating member can enter only the third ball entry area. In this way, in a predetermined game state, the game ball that reaches the actuating member can enter only the third ball entry area, so that the game ball can be launched toward the actuating member in the predetermined game state. In this case, if the game ball reaches the operating member, the player will not receive the benefit of the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball will always flow down the third flow path. The lowest profit in that case is awarded to the player. Therefore, in a predetermined gaming state, the player is appropriately prevented from launching the game ball toward the actuating member, that is, from attempting a strategy hit.

[Appendix J2]
The gaming machine according to appendix J1, wherein the operating member (84) is in the inactive state in the predetermined gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2, the operating member is in a non-operating state in a predetermined gaming state. In this way, by setting the actuating member to the non-actuating state in a predetermined gaming state, the game ball that is launched toward the actuating member and reaching the actuating member in the predetermined gaming state can be reliably passed through the first flow path. It can be flowed down. Thereby, the game ball that has reached the operating member in a predetermined game state is easily and appropriately prevented from flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path.

[Appendix J3]
comprising a transition determination means (41) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) that provides a predetermined profit is executed;
The predetermined probability includes a first probability (low probability mode) and a second probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first probability,
According to appendix J1 or J2, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a state in which it is determined whether or not to transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) in the first probability (low probability mode). The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, the predetermined gaming state is a state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the special gaming state at a first probability that is lower than the second probability. In this way, since the predetermined gaming state is a state in which it is determined whether or not to transition to the special gaming state with the first probability lower than the second probability, the probability of transitioning to the special gaming state is low. The player is appropriately prevented from launching a game ball toward the actuating member, that is, attempting to make a winning shot, in order to gain an unfair advantage in a disadvantageous situation to the player.

[Appendix K1]
a first channel (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first profit;
a second channel (78) through which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second profit;
a third channel (76) through which a game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
A game ball is allowed to flow down the third channel (76) in a non-operating state, and a game ball is allowed to flow down the first channel (77) or the second channel (78) based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. an actuating member (84) that is in an actuated state to cause the
a dispersion area (74) that is provided above the operating member (84) and allows game balls to be dispersed in multiple directions and flow down;
a rectification area (75) that causes the game balls that have flowed down the dispersion area (74) to flow down one ball at a time toward the actuating member (84);
Equipped with
The first flow path (77) is set to be the highest, the second flow path (78) is set to be lower than the first flow path (77), and the third flow path (76) is set to have the highest profit for the player. ) is set lower than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78).

In the game machine according to appendix K1, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down into the third channel in the non-operating state, and is brought into the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, thereby causing the operating member to flow down the game ball into the first channel or the second channel. It is in an operating state in which game balls flow down the channel. Furthermore, the benefit to the player is set higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to flow down a channel that provides different benefits to the player depending on whether the operating member is in the inoperative state or the operating state. That is, the game ball is caused to flow down a flow path that provides different benefits to the player, not by an immovable object (fixed object) like the clown device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above, but by an actuating member that is a movable object. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, compared to the case where a non-movable object such as the Croon device 63 is provided, it is possible to set a smaller space on the game board for arranging the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix K1, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, so that the profit given to the player is high or medium. While the game ball is flowing down the flow path, if a predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the profit given to the player is reduced to the lower third flow path. is flowed down. In this way, when the operating member is in the non-operating state, the game ball flows down the third channel, while when the operating member is in the operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first channel or the second channel. By flowing down, it becomes possible to easily recognize the channel through which the game ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inactive state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix K1, when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the gaming ball is flown down into the third flow path where the profit given to the player is lower. Therefore, when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied, it is completely eliminated that the game ball accidentally flows down the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high. This prevents unfair profits from being given to the player and from being exploited.

In addition, the gaming machine according to appendix K1 has a dispersion area that is provided above the operating member and allows the game balls to disperse and flow down in multiple directions, and a dispersion area in which the game balls that have flowed down through the dispersion area are directed toward the operating member to collect one ball. and a rectifying region that allows the flow to flow downward. In this way, there is a dispersion area that is provided above the operating member and allows the game balls to be dispersed in multiple directions and flows down, and a rectification area that allows the game balls that have flown down the dispersion area to flow down one ball at a time towards the operating member. By providing this, the game balls launched into the dispersion area are dispersed in multiple directions in the dispersion area and flow down, and after being rectified in the rectification area, the balls flow down one by one toward the actuating member at irregular timing. Therefore, game balls launched into the dispersion area are supplied one by one to the actuating member at irregular timing, and the first to third balls are given different benefits to the player depending on the non-actuating state and the actuating state of the actuating member. Flow down either of the channels. For this reason, it is difficult to launch a game ball at a timing when the game ball is guided to the first flow path where the profit given to the player is high, so-called a strategy hit, and a strategy for gaining unfair profits by the player. Strikes are prevented from occurring.

[Appendix K2]
The game machine according to appendix K1, wherein the distributed area (74) is formed by a nail driven into the game board (31).

In the game machine according to appendix K2, the distributed area is formed by nails driven into the game board. In this way, by forming the distributed area with the nails driven into the game board, the distributed area can be easily formed when driving other nails into the game board.

[Appendix K3]
The game machine according to appendix K1 or K2, wherein the rectification area (75) is formed by a nail driven into the game board (31).

In the game machine according to appendix K3, the rectification area is formed by a nail driven into the game board. In this way, by forming the rectification area with the nails driven into the game board, the rectification area can be easily formed when driving other nails into the game board.

[Appendix L1]
a first channel (77) through which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (69) that provides a first profit;
a second channel (78) through which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (313A) that provides a second profit;
a third channel (76) through which a game ball can enter a third ball entry area (943, 944);
A game ball is allowed to flow down the third channel (76) in a non-operating state, and a game ball is allowed to flow down the first channel (77) or the second channel (78) based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. an actuating member (84) that is in an actuated state to cause the
A transition determination means (41) that determines whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) that provides a predetermined profit is executed;
Equipped with
The first flow path (77) is set to be the highest, the second flow path (78) is set to be lower than the first flow path (77), and the third flow path (76) is set to have the highest profit for the player. ) is set lower than the first flow path (77) and the second flow path (78),
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operating condition includes at least transitioning to the special gaming state.

In the game machine according to appendix L1, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down the third channel in the non-operating state, and is brought into the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, thereby causing the operating member to flow down the first channel or the second channel. It is in an operating state in which game balls flow down the channel. Furthermore, the benefit to the player is set higher in the order of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. In this way, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to flow down a channel that provides different benefits to the player depending on whether the operating member is in the inoperative state or the operating state. That is, the game ball is caused to flow down a flow path that provides different benefits to the player, not by an immovable object (fixed object) like the clown device 63 of the tenth embodiment described above, but by an actuating member that is a movable object. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, compared to the case where a non-movable object such as the Croon device 63 is provided, it is possible to set a smaller space on the game board for arranging the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the front view area of the pattern display section 341 while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix L1, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the operating member is activated, so that the profit given to the player is high or medium. While the game ball is flowing down the flow path, if a predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the profit given to the player is reduced to the lower third flow path. is flowed down. In this way, when the operating member is in the non-operating state, the game ball flows down the third channel, while when the operating member is in the operating state, the gaming ball flows down the first channel or the second channel. By flowing down, it becomes possible to easily recognize the channel through which the game ball moves based on the visually recognizable state of whether the operating member is in an inactive state or an operating state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix L1, when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied, the operating member is brought into a non-operating state, so that the game ball is flown down into the third flow path where the profit given to the player is lower. Therefore, when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied, it is completely eliminated that the game ball accidentally flows down the first flow path or the second flow path where the profit given to the player is high. This prevents unfair profits from being given to the player and from being exploited.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix L1, the predetermined operating condition includes at least transitioning to a special gaming state. In this way, by including the predetermined operating condition at least transitioning to the special game state, the player is given a benefit due to the operating member being in the operating state as a benefit of executing the special game. This improves the interest of the game.

[Appendix L2]
The special game is set in a first transition determination state (low win state) in which, after the special game ends, the transition determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state (jackpot game state) with a first probability. A first special game (usually a jackpot game) that is transferred to a probability mode), and after the special game ends, the judgment transition means (41) selects the special game with a second probability that is higher than the first probability. A second special game (probability variable jackpot game) that is transferred to a second transition determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether to execute (jackpot game),
The gaming machine according to appendix L1, wherein the predetermined operating condition includes transitioning to the second transition determination state after the second special game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L2, the predetermined operating condition is that after the second special game ends, the transition determination state is shifted to a second transition determination state in which a transition determination is made with a second probability that is higher than the first probability. including. In this way, the predetermined operating condition includes transitioning to the second transition determination state in which transition determination is made with a second probability that is higher than the first probability after the second special game ends. In the second transition determination state from the end of the second special game to the execution of the next special game, the actuating member is activated and the game ball is flown down into the first flow path or the second flow path. The state will be as follows. As a result, the profit due to the game ball flowing down the first channel or the second channel is given in the second transition judgment state from the end of the second special game until the next special game is executed. A new gaming experience is provided, and the interest of the game is improved by this new gaming experience.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 310: Decorative part 312: Outer rail 313A: General winning opening 314: First winning opening 315: Second winning opening 316, 316C: Variable winning opening 319, 319C: Opening/closing door 316A: First Variable winning opening 319A: First opening/closing door 316B: Second variable winning opening 316Ba: Outlet 319B: Second opening/closing door 341: Symbol display section 35: Lamp display section 351: First individual lamp section 352: Second individual lamp section 353: Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp section 355: Fifth individual lamp section 356: Sixth individual lamp section 39: 7 segment display sections A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411:ROM
412:RAM
47:ROM
48: Branch part 5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511:ROM
512:RAM
6: Display control device 60: One-hole croon device 63: Croon device 631: First through hole 632: Second through hole 633: Third through hole 69: Special prize opening 70: Rotating body 701: Accommodation section 74: Game ball Dispersion area 75: Game ball rectification area 76: Low profit channel 77: High profit channel 78: Medium profit channel 80: Distribution member 84: Channel defining member R1: First movement route R2; Second movement route Rs1 : 1st route detection sensor Rs2: 2nd route detection sensor G1: 1st role continuous operation gate (1st role continuous operation gate)
Gs1: 1st role continuous operation gate sensor (1st role continuous gate sensor)
G2: 2nd role continuous operation gate (2nd role continuous operation gate)
Gs2: 2nd role continuous operation gate sensor (2nd role continuous gate sensor)

Claims (1)

an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in one of a plurality of transition determination states each having a different transition rate to the special gaming state,
storage means for storing numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
a setting means for setting in which of the transition determination states the transition determination is to be made using each of the numerical information;
a display control means for displaying a display corresponding to one of the transition determination states set by the setting means in the display means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display control means includes:
Numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
At least when a game ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is met, during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least the predetermined numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information means for displaying a plurality of types of specific information in a predetermined area of the display means, which are displayed using numbers or characters corresponding to the specific numerical information;
This gaming machine is
During the specified period, the specified information indicating the specified numerical information is not displayed in the specified area of the display means,
The display order of the plurality of types of the specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means during the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. is ,
An opening/closing action game execution means is provided for causing a special ball entry means that grants a specific profit when a game ball enters the ball when the game ball is opened to execute a predetermined opening/closing action game,
A plurality of stages are set for each predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area,
The display control means includes:
It is possible to display a different number of displays for each stage in the plurality of stages,
If a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the opening/closing action game, the game corresponds to a predetermined stage corresponding to the number of game balls entering the specific area among the plurality of stages. configured to perform display;
comprising effect display execution means for executing a specific effect display on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied based on execution of a predetermined game by a player;
configured to display the plurality of types of specific information in the predetermined area of the display means according to a display order set when executing the specific effect display,
comprising state switching means for switching between a predetermined valid state in which entry of a game ball into the specific area is enabled and a predetermined ineffective state in which entry of a game ball into the specific area is disabled;
In the predetermined valid state, a plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area are configured to be valid;
During the predetermined valid state, it is configured to be able to display a display corresponding to the number of valid game balls that have entered the specific area,
The specified period is a period after the establishment of a ready-to-win state as a variable game based on the result of the transition determination,
A gaming machine characterized in that an aspect of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means and an aspect of the specific information displayed on the display means are different .